Add 2010 to copyright years.
[bpt/emacs.git] / doc / lispintro / emacs-lisp-intro.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @comment %**start of header
3 @setfilename ../../info/eintr
4 @c setfilename emacs-lisp-intro.info
5 @c sethtmlfilename emacs-lisp-intro.html
6 @settitle Programming in Emacs Lisp
7 @syncodeindex vr cp
8 @syncodeindex fn cp
9 @finalout
10
11 @c ---------
12 @c <<<< For hard copy printing, this file is now
13 @c set for smallbook, which works for all sizes
14 @c of paper, and with Postscript figures >>>>
15 @set smallbook
16 @ifset smallbook
17 @smallbook
18 @clear largebook
19 @end ifset
20 @set print-postscript-figures
21 @c set largebook
22 @c clear print-postscript-figures
23 @c ---------
24
25 @comment %**end of header
26
27 @c per rms and peterb, use 10pt fonts for the main text, mostly to
28 @c save on paper cost.
29 @c Do this inside @tex for now, so current makeinfo does not complain.
30 @tex
31 @ifset smallbook
32 @fonttextsize 10
33
34 @end ifset
35 \global\hbadness=6666 % don't worry about not-too-underfull boxes
36 @end tex
37
38 @set edition-number 3.10
39 @set update-date 28 October 2009
40
41 @ignore
42 ## Summary of shell commands to create various output formats:
43
44 pushd /usr/local/src/emacs/lispintro/
45 ## pushd /u/intro/
46
47 ## Info output
48 makeinfo --paragraph-indent=0 --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
49
50 ## ;; (progn (when (bufferp (get-buffer "*info*")) (kill-buffer "*info*")) (info "/usr/local/src/emacs/info/eintr"))
51
52 ## DVI output
53 texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
54
55 ## xdvi -margins 24pt -topmargin 4pt -offsets 24pt -geometry 760x1140 -s 5 -useTeXpages -mousemode 1 emacs-lisp-intro.dvi &
56
57 ## HTML output
58 makeinfo --html --no-split --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
59
60 ## galeon emacs-lisp-intro.html
61
62 ## Plain text output
63 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
64 --verbose --no-headers --output=emacs-lisp-intro.txt emacs-lisp-intro.texi
65
66 popd
67
68 # as user `root'
69 # insert thumbdrive
70 mtusb # mount -v -t ext3 /dev/sda /mnt
71 cp -v /u/intro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi /mnt/backup/intro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi
72 umtusb # umount -v /mnt
73 # remove thumbdrive
74
75 ## Other shell commands
76
77 pushd /usr/local/src/emacs/lispintro/
78 ## pushd /u/intro/
79
80 ## PDF
81 texi2dvi --pdf emacs-lisp-intro.texi
82 # xpdf emacs-lisp-intro.pdf &
83
84 ## DocBook -- note file extension
85 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
86 --verbose --output=emacs-lisp-intro.docbook emacs-lisp-intro.texi
87
88 ## XML with a Texinfo DTD -- note file extension
89 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
90 --verbose --output=emacs-lisp-intro.texinfoxml emacs-lisp-intro.texi
91
92 ## PostScript (needs DVI)
93 # gv emacs-lisp-intro.ps &
94 # Create DVI if we lack it
95 # texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
96 dvips emacs-lisp-intro.dvi -o emacs-lisp-intro.ps
97
98 ## RTF (needs HTML)
99 # Use OpenOffice to view RTF
100 # Create HTML if we lack it
101 # makeinfo --no-split --html emacs-lisp-intro.texi
102 /usr/local/src/html2rtf.pl emacs-lisp-intro.html
103
104 ## LaTeX (needs RTF)
105 /usr/bin/rtf2latex emacs-lisp-intro.rtf
106
107 popd
108
109 @end ignore
110
111 @c ================ Included Figures ================
112
113 @c Set print-postscript-figures if you print PostScript figures.
114 @c If you clear this, the ten figures will be printed as ASCII diagrams.
115 @c (This is not relevant to Info, since Info only handles ASCII.)
116 @c Your site may require editing changes to print PostScript; in this
117 @c case, search for `print-postscript-figures' and make appropriate changes.
118
119 @c ================ How to Create an Info file ================
120
121 @c If you have `makeinfo' installed, run the following command
122
123 @c makeinfo emacs-lisp-intro.texi
124
125 @c or, if you want a single, large Info file, and no paragraph indents:
126 @c makeinfo --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
127
128 @c After creating the Info file, edit your Info `dir' file, if the
129 @c `dircategory' section below does not enable your system to
130 @c install the manual automatically.
131 @c (The `dir' file is often in the `/usr/local/share/info/' directory.)
132
133 @c ================ How to Create an HTML file ================
134
135 @c To convert to HTML format
136 @c makeinfo --html --no-split --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
137
138 @c ================ How to Print a Book in Various Sizes ================
139
140 @c This book can be printed in any of three different sizes.
141 @c In the above header, set @-commands appropriately.
142
143 @c 7 by 9.25 inches:
144 @c @smallbook
145 @c @clear largebook
146
147 @c 8.5 by 11 inches:
148 @c @c smallbook
149 @c @set largebook
150
151 @c European A4 size paper:
152 @c @c smallbook
153 @c @afourpaper
154 @c @set largebook
155
156 @c ================ How to Typeset and Print ================
157
158 @c If you do not include PostScript figures, run either of the
159 @c following command sequences, or similar commands suited to your
160 @c system:
161
162 @c texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
163 @c lpr -d emacs-lisp-intro.dvi
164
165 @c or else:
166
167 @c tex emacs-lisp-intro.texi
168 @c texindex emacs-lisp-intro.??
169 @c tex emacs-lisp-intro.texi
170 @c lpr -d emacs-lisp-intro.dvi
171
172 @c If you include the PostScript figures, and you have old software,
173 @c you may need to convert the .dvi file to a .ps file before
174 @c printing. Run either of the following command sequences, or one
175 @c similar:
176 @c
177 @c dvips -f < emacs-lisp-intro.dvi > emacs-lisp-intro.ps
178 @c
179 @c or else:
180 @c
181 @c postscript -p < emacs-lisp-intro.dvi > emacs-lisp-intro.ps
182 @c
183
184 @c (Note: if you edit the book so as to change the length of the
185 @c table of contents, you may have to change the value of `pageno' below.)
186
187 @c ================ End of Formatting Sections ================
188
189 @c For next or subsequent edition:
190 @c create function using with-output-to-temp-buffer
191 @c create a major mode, with keymaps
192 @c run an asynchronous process, like grep or diff
193
194 @c For 8.5 by 11 inch format: do not use such a small amount of
195 @c whitespace between paragraphs as smallbook format
196 @ifset largebook
197 @tex
198 \global\parskip 6pt plus 1pt
199 @end tex
200 @end ifset
201
202 @c For all sized formats: print within-book cross
203 @c reference with ``...'' rather than [...]
204
205 @c This works with the texinfo.tex file, version 2003-05-04.08,
206 @c in the Texinfo version 4.6 of the 2003 Jun 13 distribution.
207
208 @tex
209 \if \xrefprintnodename
210 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{\unskip, ``#1''}
211 \else
212 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{ ``#1''}
213 \fi
214 % \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{, ``#1''}
215 @end tex
216
217 @c ----------------------------------------------------
218
219 @dircategory Emacs
220 @direntry
221 * Emacs Lisp Intro: (eintr).
222 A simple introduction to Emacs Lisp programming.
223 @end direntry
224
225 @copying
226 This is an @cite{Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp}, for
227 people who are not programmers.
228 @sp 1
229 Edition @value{edition-number}, @value{update-date}
230 @sp 1
231 Copyright @copyright{} 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1997, 2001,
232 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
233 @sp 1
234
235 @iftex
236 Published by the:@*
237
238 GNU Press, @hfill @uref{http://www.gnupress.org}@*
239 a division of the @hfill General: @email{press@@gnu.org}@*
240 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @hfill Orders:@w{ } @email{sales@@gnu.org}@*
241 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor @hfill Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942@*
242 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA @hfill Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652@*
243 @end iftex
244
245 @ifnottex
246 Published by the:
247
248 @example
249 GNU Press, Website: http://www.gnupress.org
250 a division of the General: press@@gnu.org
251 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Orders: sales@@gnu.org
252 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942
253 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652
254 @end example
255 @end ifnottex
256
257 @sp 1
258 @c Printed copies are available for $30 each.@*
259 ISBN 1-882114-43-4
260
261 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
262 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
263 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; there
264 being no Invariant Section, with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU
265 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of
266 the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free
267 Documentation License''.
268
269 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to
270 copy and modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF
271 supports it in developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
272 @end copying
273
274 @c half title; two lines here, so do not use `shorttitlepage'
275 @tex
276 {\begingroup%
277 \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{An Introduction to}%
278 \endgroup}%
279 {\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 0.25in \chaprm%
280 \centerline{Programming in Emacs Lisp}%
281 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
282 @end tex
283
284 @titlepage
285 @sp 6
286 @center @titlefont{An Introduction to}
287 @sp 2
288 @center @titlefont{Programming in Emacs Lisp}
289 @sp 2
290 @center Revised Third Edition
291 @sp 4
292 @center by Robert J. Chassell
293
294 @page
295 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
296 @insertcopying
297 @end titlepage
298
299 @iftex
300 @headings off
301 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
302 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
303 @end iftex
304
305 @ifnothtml
306 @c Keep T.O.C. short by tightening up for largebook
307 @ifset largebook
308 @tex
309 \global\parskip 2pt plus 1pt
310 \global\advance\baselineskip by -1pt
311 @end tex
312 @end ifset
313 @end ifnothtml
314
315 @shortcontents
316 @contents
317
318 @ifnottex
319 @node Top, Preface, (dir), (dir)
320 @top An Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp
321
322 @insertcopying
323
324 This master menu first lists each chapter and index; then it lists
325 every node in every chapter.
326 @end ifnottex
327
328 @c >>>> Set pageno appropriately <<<<
329
330 @c The first page of the Preface is a roman numeral; it is the first
331 @c right handed page after the Table of Contents; hence the following
332 @c setting must be for an odd negative number.
333
334 @c iftex
335 @c global@pageno = -11
336 @c end iftex
337
338 @menu
339 * Preface:: What to look for.
340 * List Processing:: What is Lisp?
341 * Practicing Evaluation:: Running several programs.
342 * Writing Defuns:: How to write function definitions.
343 * Buffer Walk Through:: Exploring a few buffer-related functions.
344 * More Complex:: A few, even more complex functions.
345 * Narrowing & Widening:: Restricting your and Emacs attention to
346 a region.
347 * car cdr & cons:: Fundamental functions in Lisp.
348 * Cutting & Storing Text:: Removing text and saving it.
349 * List Implementation:: How lists are implemented in the computer.
350 * Yanking:: Pasting stored text.
351 * Loops & Recursion:: How to repeat a process.
352 * Regexp Search:: Regular expression searches.
353 * Counting Words:: A review of repetition and regexps.
354 * Words in a defun:: Counting words in a @code{defun}.
355 * Readying a Graph:: A prototype graph printing function.
356 * Emacs Initialization:: How to write a @file{.emacs} file.
357 * Debugging:: How to run the Emacs Lisp debuggers.
358 * Conclusion:: Now you have the basics.
359 * the-the:: An appendix: how to find reduplicated words.
360 * Kill Ring:: An appendix: how the kill ring works.
361 * Full Graph:: How to create a graph with labelled axes.
362 * Free Software and Free Manuals::
363 * GNU Free Documentation License::
364 * Index::
365 * About the Author::
366
367 @detailmenu
368 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
369
370 Preface
371
372 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
373 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
374 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
375 * Lisp History::
376 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
377 * Thank You::
378
379 List Processing
380
381 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
382 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
383 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
384 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
385 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
386 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
387 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
388 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
389 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
390 * Summary:: The major points.
391 * Error Message Exercises::
392
393 Lisp Lists
394
395 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
396 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
397 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
398 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
399
400 The Lisp Interpreter
401
402 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
403 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
404
405 Evaluation
406
407 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
408 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
409
410 Variables
411
412 * fill-column Example::
413 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
414 without a function.
415 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
416
417 Arguments
418
419 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
420 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
421 of a variable or list.
422 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
423 variable number of arguments.
424 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
425 to a function.
426 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
427
428 Setting the Value of a Variable
429
430 * Using set:: Setting values.
431 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
432 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
433
434 Practicing Evaluation
435
436 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
437 causes evaluation.
438 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
439 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
440 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
441 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
442 the buffer.
443 * Evaluation Exercise::
444
445 How To Write Function Definitions
446
447 * Primitive Functions::
448 * defun:: The @code{defun} special form.
449 * Install:: Install a function definition.
450 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
451 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
452 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
453 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
454 * if:: What if?
455 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
456 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
457 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
458 * Review::
459 * defun Exercises::
460
461 Install a Function Definition
462
463 * Effect of installation::
464 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
465
466 Make a Function Interactive
467
468 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
469 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
470
471 @code{let}
472
473 * Prevent confusion::
474 * Parts of let Expression::
475 * Sample let Expression::
476 * Uninitialized let Variables::
477
478 The @code{if} Special Form
479
480 * if in more detail::
481 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
482
483 Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
484
485 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
486
487 @code{save-excursion}
488
489 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
490 * Template for save-excursion::
491
492 A Few Buffer--Related Functions
493
494 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
495 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
496 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
497 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
498 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
499 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
500 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
501 * Buffer Exercises::
502
503 The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
504
505 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
506 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
507
508 The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
509
510 * append-to-buffer overview::
511 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
512 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
513 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
514
515 A Few More Complex Functions
516
517 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
518 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
519 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
520 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
521 * Second Buffer Related Review::
522 * optional Exercise::
523
524 The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
525
526 * insert-buffer code::
527 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
528 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
529 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
530 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
531 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
532 * New insert-buffer::
533
534 The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
535
536 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
537 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
538
539 Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
540
541 * Optional Arguments::
542 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
543 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
544
545 @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
546
547 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
548 * Large buffer case::
549 * Small buffer case::
550
551 Narrowing and Widening
552
553 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
554 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
555 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
556 * narrow Exercise::
557
558 @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
559
560 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
561 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
562 * cons:: Constructing a list.
563 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
564 * nth::
565 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
566 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
567 * cons Exercise::
568
569 @code{cons}
570
571 * Build a list::
572 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
573
574 Cutting and Storing Text
575
576 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
577 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
578 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
579 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
580 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
581 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
582 * cons & search-fwd Review::
583 * search Exercises::
584
585 @code{zap-to-char}
586
587 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
588 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
589 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
590 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
591 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
592 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
593
594 @code{kill-region}
595
596 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
597 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
598 * Lisp macro::
599
600 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
601
602 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
603 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
604
605 The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
606
607 * last-command & this-command::
608 * kill-append function::
609 * kill-new function::
610
611 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
612
613 * See variable current value::
614 * defvar and asterisk::
615
616 How Lists are Implemented
617
618 * Lists diagrammed::
619 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
620 * List Exercise::
621
622 Yanking Text Back
623
624 * Kill Ring Overview::
625 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
626 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
627
628 Loops and Recursion
629
630 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
631 * dolist dotimes::
632 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
633 * Looping exercise::
634
635 @code{while}
636
637 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
638 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
639 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
640 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
641 * Incrementing Loop Details::
642 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
643
644 Details of an Incrementing Loop
645
646 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
647 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
648 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
649
650 Loop with a Decrementing Counter
651
652 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
653 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
654 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
655
656 Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
657
658 * dolist::
659 * dotimes::
660
661 Recursion
662
663 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
664 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
665 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
666 * Recursive triangle function::
667 * Recursion with cond::
668 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
669 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
670 * No deferment solution::
671
672 Recursion in Place of a Counter
673
674 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
675 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
676
677 Recursive Patterns
678
679 * Every::
680 * Accumulate::
681 * Keep::
682
683 Regular Expression Searches
684
685 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
686 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
687 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
688 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
689 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
690 * Regexp Review::
691 * re-search Exercises::
692
693 @code{forward-sentence}
694
695 * Complete forward-sentence::
696 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
697 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
698
699 @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
700
701 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
702 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
703 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
704
705 Counting: Repetition and Regexps
706
707 * Why Count Words::
708 * count-words-region:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
709 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
710 * Counting Exercise::
711
712 The @code{count-words-region} Function
713
714 * Design count-words-region:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
715 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{count-words-region}.
716
717 Counting Words in a @code{defun}
718
719 * Divide and Conquer::
720 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
721 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
722 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{count-words}.
723 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
724 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
725 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
726 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
727 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
728 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
729
730 Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
731
732 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
733 * append:: Attach one list to another.
734
735 Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
736
737 * Data for Display in Detail::
738 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
739 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
740 * Counting function definitions::
741
742 Readying a Graph
743
744 * Columns of a graph::
745 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
746 * recursive-graph-body-print::
747 * Printed Axes::
748 * Line Graph Exercise::
749
750 Your @file{.emacs} File
751
752 * Default Configuration::
753 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
754 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
755 * Beginning a .emacs File:: How to write a @code{.emacs file}.
756 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
757 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
758 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
759 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
760 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
761 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
762 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
763 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
764 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
765 * Miscellaneous::
766 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
767
768 Debugging
769
770 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
771 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
772 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
773 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
774 * Debugging Exercises::
775
776 Handling the Kill Ring
777
778 * What the Kill Ring Does::
779 * current-kill::
780 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
781 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
782 * ring file::
783
784 The @code{current-kill} Function
785
786 * Code for current-kill::
787 * Understanding current-kill::
788
789 @code{current-kill} in Outline
790
791 * Body of current-kill::
792 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
793 * Determining the Element::
794
795 A Graph with Labelled Axes
796
797 * Labelled Example::
798 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
799 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
800 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
801 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
802
803 The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
804
805 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
806 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
807 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
808 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
809 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
810 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
811
812 The @code{print-X-axis} Function
813
814 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
815 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
816
817 Printing the Whole Graph
818
819 * The final version:: A few changes.
820 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
821 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
822 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
823 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
824 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
825 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
826
827 @end detailmenu
828 @end menu
829
830 @node Preface, List Processing, Top, Top
831 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
832 @unnumbered Preface
833
834 Most of the GNU Emacs integrated environment is written in the programming
835 language called Emacs Lisp. The code written in this programming
836 language is the software---the sets of instructions---that tell the
837 computer what to do when you give it commands. Emacs is designed so
838 that you can write new code in Emacs Lisp and easily install it as an
839 extension to the editor.
840
841 (GNU Emacs is sometimes called an ``extensible editor'', but it does
842 much more than provide editing capabilities. It is better to refer to
843 Emacs as an ``extensible computing environment''. However, that
844 phrase is quite a mouthful. It is easier to refer to Emacs simply as
845 an editor. Moreover, everything you do in Emacs---find the Mayan date
846 and phases of the moon, simplify polynomials, debug code, manage
847 files, read letters, write books---all these activities are kinds of
848 editing in the most general sense of the word.)
849
850 @menu
851 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
852 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
853 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
854 * Lisp History::
855 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
856 * Thank You::
857 @end menu
858
859 @node Why, On Reading this Text, Preface, Preface
860 @ifnottex
861 @unnumberedsec Why Study Emacs Lisp?
862 @end ifnottex
863
864 Although Emacs Lisp is usually thought of in association only with Emacs,
865 it is a full computer programming language. You can use Emacs Lisp as
866 you would any other programming language.
867
868 Perhaps you want to understand programming; perhaps you want to extend
869 Emacs; or perhaps you want to become a programmer. This introduction to
870 Emacs Lisp is designed to get you started: to guide you in learning the
871 fundamentals of programming, and more importantly, to show you how you
872 can teach yourself to go further.
873
874 @node On Reading this Text, Who You Are, Why, Preface
875 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
876 @unnumberedsec On Reading this Text
877
878 All through this document, you will see little sample programs you can
879 run inside of Emacs. If you read this document in Info inside of GNU
880 Emacs, you can run the programs as they appear. (This is easy to do and
881 is explained when the examples are presented.) Alternatively, you can
882 read this introduction as a printed book while sitting beside a computer
883 running Emacs. (This is what I like to do; I like printed books.) If
884 you don't have a running Emacs beside you, you can still read this book,
885 but in this case, it is best to treat it as a novel or as a travel guide
886 to a country not yet visited: interesting, but not the same as being
887 there.
888
889 Much of this introduction is dedicated to walk-throughs or guided tours
890 of code used in GNU Emacs. These tours are designed for two purposes:
891 first, to give you familiarity with real, working code (code you use
892 every day); and, second, to give you familiarity with the way Emacs
893 works. It is interesting to see how a working environment is
894 implemented.
895 Also, I
896 hope that you will pick up the habit of browsing through source code.
897 You can learn from it and mine it for ideas. Having GNU Emacs is like
898 having a dragon's cave of treasures.
899
900 In addition to learning about Emacs as an editor and Emacs Lisp as a
901 programming language, the examples and guided tours will give you an
902 opportunity to get acquainted with Emacs as a Lisp programming
903 environment. GNU Emacs supports programming and provides tools that
904 you will want to become comfortable using, such as @kbd{M-.} (the key
905 which invokes the @code{find-tag} command). You will also learn about
906 buffers and other objects that are part of the environment.
907 Learning about these features of Emacs is like learning new routes
908 around your home town.
909
910 @ignore
911 In addition, I have written several programs as extended examples.
912 Although these are examples, the programs are real. I use them.
913 Other people use them. You may use them. Beyond the fragments of
914 programs used for illustrations, there is very little in here that is
915 `just for teaching purposes'; what you see is used. This is a great
916 advantage of Emacs Lisp: it is easy to learn to use it for work.
917 @end ignore
918
919 Finally, I hope to convey some of the skills for using Emacs to
920 learn aspects of programming that you don't know. You can often use
921 Emacs to help you understand what puzzles you or to find out how to do
922 something new. This self-reliance is not only a pleasure, but an
923 advantage.
924
925 @node Who You Are, Lisp History, On Reading this Text, Preface
926 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
927 @unnumberedsec For Whom This is Written
928
929 This text is written as an elementary introduction for people who are
930 not programmers. If you are a programmer, you may not be satisfied with
931 this primer. The reason is that you may have become expert at reading
932 reference manuals and be put off by the way this text is organized.
933
934 An expert programmer who reviewed this text said to me:
935
936 @quotation
937 @i{I prefer to learn from reference manuals. I ``dive into'' each
938 paragraph, and ``come up for air'' between paragraphs.}
939
940 @i{When I get to the end of a paragraph, I assume that that subject is
941 done, finished, that I know everything I need (with the
942 possible exception of the case when the next paragraph starts talking
943 about it in more detail). I expect that a well written reference manual
944 will not have a lot of redundancy, and that it will have excellent
945 pointers to the (one) place where the information I want is.}
946 @end quotation
947
948 This introduction is not written for this person!
949
950 Firstly, I try to say everything at least three times: first, to
951 introduce it; second, to show it in context; and third, to show it in a
952 different context, or to review it.
953
954 Secondly, I hardly ever put all the information about a subject in one
955 place, much less in one paragraph. To my way of thinking, that imposes
956 too heavy a burden on the reader. Instead I try to explain only what
957 you need to know at the time. (Sometimes I include a little extra
958 information so you won't be surprised later when the additional
959 information is formally introduced.)
960
961 When you read this text, you are not expected to learn everything the
962 first time. Frequently, you need only make, as it were, a `nodding
963 acquaintance' with some of the items mentioned. My hope is that I have
964 structured the text and given you enough hints that you will be alert to
965 what is important, and concentrate on it.
966
967 You will need to ``dive into'' some paragraphs; there is no other way
968 to read them. But I have tried to keep down the number of such
969 paragraphs. This book is intended as an approachable hill, rather than
970 as a daunting mountain.
971
972 This introduction to @cite{Programming in Emacs Lisp} has a companion
973 document,
974 @iftex
975 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
976 @end iftex
977 @ifnottex
978 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
979 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
980 @end ifnottex
981 The reference manual has more detail than this introduction. In the
982 reference manual, all the information about one topic is concentrated
983 in one place. You should turn to it if you are like the programmer
984 quoted above. And, of course, after you have read this
985 @cite{Introduction}, you will find the @cite{Reference Manual} useful
986 when you are writing your own programs.
987
988 @node Lisp History, Note for Novices, Who You Are, Preface
989 @unnumberedsec Lisp History
990 @cindex Lisp history
991
992 Lisp was first developed in the late 1950s at the Massachusetts
993 Institute of Technology for research in artificial intelligence. The
994 great power of the Lisp language makes it superior for other purposes as
995 well, such as writing editor commands and integrated environments.
996
997 @cindex Maclisp
998 @cindex Common Lisp
999 GNU Emacs Lisp is largely inspired by Maclisp, which was written at MIT
1000 in the 1960s. It is somewhat inspired by Common Lisp, which became a
1001 standard in the 1980s. However, Emacs Lisp is much simpler than Common
1002 Lisp. (The standard Emacs distribution contains an optional extensions
1003 file, @file{cl.el}, that adds many Common Lisp features to Emacs Lisp.)
1004
1005 @node Note for Novices, Thank You, Lisp History, Preface
1006 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1007 @unnumberedsec A Note for Novices
1008
1009 If you don't know GNU Emacs, you can still read this document
1010 profitably. However, I recommend you learn Emacs, if only to learn to
1011 move around your computer screen. You can teach yourself how to use
1012 Emacs with the on-line tutorial. To use it, type @kbd{C-h t}. (This
1013 means you press and release the @key{CTRL} key and the @kbd{h} at the
1014 same time, and then press and release @kbd{t}.)
1015
1016 Also, I often refer to one of Emacs' standard commands by listing the
1017 keys which you press to invoke the command and then giving the name of
1018 the command in parentheses, like this: @kbd{M-C-\}
1019 (@code{indent-region}). What this means is that the
1020 @code{indent-region} command is customarily invoked by typing
1021 @kbd{M-C-\}. (You can, if you wish, change the keys that are typed to
1022 invoke the command; this is called @dfn{rebinding}. @xref{Keymaps, ,
1023 Keymaps}.) The abbreviation @kbd{M-C-\} means that you type your
1024 @key{META} key, @key{CTRL} key and @key{\} key all at the same time.
1025 (On many modern keyboards the @key{META} key is labelled
1026 @key{ALT}.)
1027 Sometimes a combination like this is called a keychord, since it is
1028 similar to the way you play a chord on a piano. If your keyboard does
1029 not have a @key{META} key, the @key{ESC} key prefix is used in place
1030 of it. In this case, @kbd{M-C-\} means that you press and release your
1031 @key{ESC} key and then type the @key{CTRL} key and the @key{\} key at
1032 the same time. But usually @kbd{M-C-\} means press the @key{CTRL} key
1033 along with the key that is labelled @key{ALT} and, at the same time,
1034 press the @key{\} key.
1035
1036 In addition to typing a lone keychord, you can prefix what you type
1037 with @kbd{C-u}, which is called the `universal argument'. The
1038 @kbd{C-u} keychord passes an argument to the subsequent command.
1039 Thus, to indent a region of plain text by 6 spaces, mark the region,
1040 and then type @w{@kbd{C-u 6 M-C-\}}. (If you do not specify a number,
1041 Emacs either passes the number 4 to the command or otherwise runs the
1042 command differently than it would otherwise.) @xref{Arguments, ,
1043 Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
1044
1045 If you are reading this in Info using GNU Emacs, you can read through
1046 this whole document just by pressing the space bar, @key{SPC}.
1047 (To learn about Info, type @kbd{C-h i} and then select Info.)
1048
1049 A note on terminology: when I use the word Lisp alone, I often am
1050 referring to the various dialects of Lisp in general, but when I speak
1051 of Emacs Lisp, I am referring to GNU Emacs Lisp in particular.
1052
1053 @node Thank You, , Note for Novices, Preface
1054 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1055 @unnumberedsec Thank You
1056
1057 My thanks to all who helped me with this book. My especial thanks to
1058 @r{Jim Blandy}, @r{Noah Friedman}, @w{Jim Kingdon}, @r{Roland
1059 McGrath}, @w{Frank Ritter}, @w{Randy Smith}, @w{Richard M.@:
1060 Stallman}, and @w{Melissa Weisshaus}. My thanks also go to both
1061 @w{Philip Johnson} and @w{David Stampe} for their patient
1062 encouragement. My mistakes are my own.
1063
1064 @flushright
1065 Robert J. Chassell
1066 @email{bob@@gnu.org}
1067 @end flushright
1068
1069 @c ================ Beginning of main text ================
1070
1071 @c Start main text on right-hand (verso) page
1072
1073 @tex
1074 \par\vfill\supereject
1075 \headings off
1076 \ifodd\pageno
1077 \par\vfill\supereject
1078 \else
1079 \par\vfill\supereject
1080 \page\hbox{}\page
1081 \par\vfill\supereject
1082 \fi
1083 @end tex
1084
1085 @iftex
1086 @headings off
1087 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
1088 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
1089 @global@pageno = 1
1090 @end iftex
1091
1092 @node List Processing, Practicing Evaluation, Preface, Top
1093 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1094 @chapter List Processing
1095
1096 To the untutored eye, Lisp is a strange programming language. In Lisp
1097 code there are parentheses everywhere. Some people even claim that
1098 the name stands for `Lots of Isolated Silly Parentheses'. But the
1099 claim is unwarranted. Lisp stands for LISt Processing, and the
1100 programming language handles @emph{lists} (and lists of lists) by
1101 putting them between parentheses. The parentheses mark the boundaries
1102 of the list. Sometimes a list is preceded by a single apostrophe or
1103 quotation mark, @samp{'}@footnote{The single apostrophe or quotation
1104 mark is an abbreviation for the function @code{quote}; you need not
1105 think about functions now; functions are defined in @ref{Making
1106 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}.} Lists are the basis of Lisp.
1107
1108 @menu
1109 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
1110 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
1111 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
1112 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
1113 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
1114 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
1115 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
1116 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
1117 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
1118 * Summary:: The major points.
1119 * Error Message Exercises::
1120 @end menu
1121
1122 @node Lisp Lists, Run a Program, List Processing, List Processing
1123 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1124 @section Lisp Lists
1125 @cindex Lisp Lists
1126
1127 In Lisp, a list looks like this: @code{'(rose violet daisy buttercup)}.
1128 This list is preceded by a single apostrophe. It could just as well be
1129 written as follows, which looks more like the kind of list you are likely
1130 to be familiar with:
1131
1132 @smallexample
1133 @group
1134 '(rose
1135 violet
1136 daisy
1137 buttercup)
1138 @end group
1139 @end smallexample
1140
1141 @noindent
1142 The elements of this list are the names of the four different flowers,
1143 separated from each other by whitespace and surrounded by parentheses,
1144 like flowers in a field with a stone wall around them.
1145 @cindex Flowers in a field
1146
1147 @menu
1148 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
1149 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
1150 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
1151 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
1152 @end menu
1153
1154 @node Numbers Lists, Lisp Atoms, Lisp Lists, Lisp Lists
1155 @ifnottex
1156 @unnumberedsubsec Numbers, Lists inside of Lists
1157 @end ifnottex
1158
1159 Lists can also have numbers in them, as in this list: @code{(+ 2 2)}.
1160 This list has a plus-sign, @samp{+}, followed by two @samp{2}s, each
1161 separated by whitespace.
1162
1163 In Lisp, both data and programs are represented the same way; that is,
1164 they are both lists of words, numbers, or other lists, separated by
1165 whitespace and surrounded by parentheses. (Since a program looks like
1166 data, one program may easily serve as data for another; this is a very
1167 powerful feature of Lisp.) (Incidentally, these two parenthetical
1168 remarks are @emph{not} Lisp lists, because they contain @samp{;} and
1169 @samp{.} as punctuation marks.)
1170
1171 @need 1200
1172 Here is another list, this time with a list inside of it:
1173
1174 @smallexample
1175 '(this list has (a list inside of it))
1176 @end smallexample
1177
1178 The components of this list are the words @samp{this}, @samp{list},
1179 @samp{has}, and the list @samp{(a list inside of it)}. The interior
1180 list is made up of the words @samp{a}, @samp{list}, @samp{inside},
1181 @samp{of}, @samp{it}.
1182
1183 @node Lisp Atoms, Whitespace in Lists, Numbers Lists, Lisp Lists
1184 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1185 @subsection Lisp Atoms
1186 @cindex Lisp Atoms
1187
1188 In Lisp, what we have been calling words are called @dfn{atoms}. This
1189 term comes from the historical meaning of the word atom, which means
1190 `indivisible'. As far as Lisp is concerned, the words we have been
1191 using in the lists cannot be divided into any smaller parts and still
1192 mean the same thing as part of a program; likewise with numbers and
1193 single character symbols like @samp{+}. On the other hand, unlike an
1194 ancient atom, a list can be split into parts. (@xref{car cdr & cons,
1195 , @code{car} @code{cdr} & @code{cons} Fundamental Functions}.)
1196
1197 In a list, atoms are separated from each other by whitespace. They can be
1198 right next to a parenthesis.
1199
1200 @cindex @samp{empty list} defined
1201 Technically speaking, a list in Lisp consists of parentheses surrounding
1202 atoms separated by whitespace or surrounding other lists or surrounding
1203 both atoms and other lists. A list can have just one atom in it or
1204 have nothing in it at all. A list with nothing in it looks like this:
1205 @code{()}, and is called the @dfn{empty list}. Unlike anything else, an
1206 empty list is considered both an atom and a list at the same time.
1207
1208 @cindex Symbolic expressions, introduced
1209 @cindex @samp{expression} defined
1210 @cindex @samp{form} defined
1211 The printed representation of both atoms and lists are called
1212 @dfn{symbolic expressions} or, more concisely, @dfn{s-expressions}.
1213 The word @dfn{expression} by itself can refer to either the printed
1214 representation, or to the atom or list as it is held internally in the
1215 computer. Often, people use the term @dfn{expression}
1216 indiscriminately. (Also, in many texts, the word @dfn{form} is used
1217 as a synonym for expression.)
1218
1219 Incidentally, the atoms that make up our universe were named such when
1220 they were thought to be indivisible; but it has been found that physical
1221 atoms are not indivisible. Parts can split off an atom or it can
1222 fission into two parts of roughly equal size. Physical atoms were named
1223 prematurely, before their truer nature was found. In Lisp, certain
1224 kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated into parts; but the
1225 mechanism for doing this is different from the mechanism for splitting a
1226 list. As far as list operations are concerned, the atoms of a list are
1227 unsplittable.
1228
1229 As in English, the meanings of the component letters of a Lisp atom
1230 are different from the meaning the letters make as a word. For
1231 example, the word for the South American sloth, the @samp{ai}, is
1232 completely different from the two words, @samp{a}, and @samp{i}.
1233
1234 There are many kinds of atom in nature but only a few in Lisp: for
1235 example, @dfn{numbers}, such as 37, 511, or 1729, and @dfn{symbols}, such
1236 as @samp{+}, @samp{foo}, or @samp{forward-line}. The words we have
1237 listed in the examples above are all symbols. In everyday Lisp
1238 conversation, the word ``atom'' is not often used, because programmers
1239 usually try to be more specific about what kind of atom they are dealing
1240 with. Lisp programming is mostly about symbols (and sometimes numbers)
1241 within lists. (Incidentally, the preceding three word parenthetical
1242 remark is a proper list in Lisp, since it consists of atoms, which in
1243 this case are symbols, separated by whitespace and enclosed by
1244 parentheses, without any non-Lisp punctuation.)
1245
1246 @need 1250
1247 Text between double quotation marks---even sentences or
1248 paragraphs---is also an atom. Here is an example:
1249 @cindex Text between double quotation marks
1250
1251 @smallexample
1252 '(this list includes "text between quotation marks.")
1253 @end smallexample
1254
1255 @cindex @samp{string} defined
1256 @noindent
1257 In Lisp, all of the quoted text including the punctuation mark and the
1258 blank spaces is a single atom. This kind of atom is called a
1259 @dfn{string} (for `string of characters') and is the sort of thing that
1260 is used for messages that a computer can print for a human to read.
1261 Strings are a different kind of atom than numbers or symbols and are
1262 used differently.
1263
1264 @node Whitespace in Lists, Typing Lists, Lisp Atoms, Lisp Lists
1265 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1266 @subsection Whitespace in Lists
1267 @cindex Whitespace in lists
1268
1269 @need 1200
1270 The amount of whitespace in a list does not matter. From the point of view
1271 of the Lisp language,
1272
1273 @smallexample
1274 @group
1275 '(this list
1276 looks like this)
1277 @end group
1278 @end smallexample
1279
1280 @need 800
1281 @noindent
1282 is exactly the same as this:
1283
1284 @smallexample
1285 '(this list looks like this)
1286 @end smallexample
1287
1288 Both examples show what to Lisp is the same list, the list made up of
1289 the symbols @samp{this}, @samp{list}, @samp{looks}, @samp{like}, and
1290 @samp{this} in that order.
1291
1292 Extra whitespace and newlines are designed to make a list more readable
1293 by humans. When Lisp reads the expression, it gets rid of all the extra
1294 whitespace (but it needs to have at least one space between atoms in
1295 order to tell them apart.)
1296
1297 Odd as it seems, the examples we have seen cover almost all of what Lisp
1298 lists look like! Every other list in Lisp looks more or less like one
1299 of these examples, except that the list may be longer and more complex.
1300 In brief, a list is between parentheses, a string is between quotation
1301 marks, a symbol looks like a word, and a number looks like a number.
1302 (For certain situations, square brackets, dots and a few other special
1303 characters may be used; however, we will go quite far without them.)
1304
1305 @node Typing Lists, , Whitespace in Lists, Lisp Lists
1306 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1307 @subsection GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists
1308 @cindex Help typing lists
1309 @cindex Formatting help
1310
1311 When you type a Lisp expression in GNU Emacs using either Lisp
1312 Interaction mode or Emacs Lisp mode, you have available to you several
1313 commands to format the Lisp expression so it is easy to read. For
1314 example, pressing the @key{TAB} key automatically indents the line the
1315 cursor is on by the right amount. A command to properly indent the
1316 code in a region is customarily bound to @kbd{M-C-\}. Indentation is
1317 designed so that you can see which elements of a list belong to which
1318 list---elements of a sub-list are indented more than the elements of
1319 the enclosing list.
1320
1321 In addition, when you type a closing parenthesis, Emacs momentarily
1322 jumps the cursor back to the matching opening parenthesis, so you can
1323 see which one it is. This is very useful, since every list you type
1324 in Lisp must have its closing parenthesis match its opening
1325 parenthesis. (@xref{Major Modes, , Major Modes, emacs, The GNU Emacs
1326 Manual}, for more information about Emacs' modes.)
1327
1328 @node Run a Program, Making Errors, Lisp Lists, List Processing
1329 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1330 @section Run a Program
1331 @cindex Run a program
1332 @cindex Program, running one
1333
1334 @cindex @samp{evaluate} defined
1335 A list in Lisp---any list---is a program ready to run. If you run it
1336 (for which the Lisp jargon is @dfn{evaluate}), the computer will do one
1337 of three things: do nothing except return to you the list itself; send
1338 you an error message; or, treat the first symbol in the list as a
1339 command to do something. (Usually, of course, it is the last of these
1340 three things that you really want!)
1341
1342 @c use code for the single apostrophe, not samp.
1343 The single apostrophe, @code{'}, that I put in front of some of the
1344 example lists in preceding sections is called a @dfn{quote}; when it
1345 precedes a list, it tells Lisp to do nothing with the list, other than
1346 take it as it is written. But if there is no quote preceding a list,
1347 the first item of the list is special: it is a command for the computer
1348 to obey. (In Lisp, these commands are called @emph{functions}.) The list
1349 @code{(+ 2 2)} shown above did not have a quote in front of it, so Lisp
1350 understands that the @code{+} is an instruction to do something with the
1351 rest of the list: add the numbers that follow.
1352
1353 @need 1250
1354 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs in Info, here is how you can
1355 evaluate such a list: place your cursor immediately after the right
1356 hand parenthesis of the following list and then type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1357
1358 @smallexample
1359 (+ 2 2)
1360 @end smallexample
1361
1362 @c use code for the number four, not samp.
1363 @noindent
1364 You will see the number @code{4} appear in the echo area. (In the
1365 jargon, what you have just done is ``evaluate the list.'' The echo area
1366 is the line at the bottom of the screen that displays or ``echoes''
1367 text.) Now try the same thing with a quoted list: place the cursor
1368 right after the following list and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1369
1370 @smallexample
1371 '(this is a quoted list)
1372 @end smallexample
1373
1374 @noindent
1375 You will see @code{(this is a quoted list)} appear in the echo area.
1376
1377 @cindex Lisp interpreter, explained
1378 @cindex Interpreter, Lisp, explained
1379 In both cases, what you are doing is giving a command to the program
1380 inside of GNU Emacs called the @dfn{Lisp interpreter}---giving the
1381 interpreter a command to evaluate the expression. The name of the Lisp
1382 interpreter comes from the word for the task done by a human who comes
1383 up with the meaning of an expression---who ``interprets'' it.
1384
1385 You can also evaluate an atom that is not part of a list---one that is
1386 not surrounded by parentheses; again, the Lisp interpreter translates
1387 from the humanly readable expression to the language of the computer.
1388 But before discussing this (@pxref{Variables}), we will discuss what the
1389 Lisp interpreter does when you make an error.
1390
1391 @node Making Errors, Names & Definitions, Run a Program, List Processing
1392 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1393 @section Generate an Error Message
1394 @cindex Generate an error message
1395 @cindex Error message generation
1396
1397 Partly so you won't worry if you do it accidentally, we will now give
1398 a command to the Lisp interpreter that generates an error message.
1399 This is a harmless activity; and indeed, we will often try to generate
1400 error messages intentionally. Once you understand the jargon, error
1401 messages can be informative. Instead of being called ``error''
1402 messages, they should be called ``help'' messages. They are like
1403 signposts to a traveller in a strange country; deciphering them can be
1404 hard, but once understood, they can point the way.
1405
1406 The error message is generated by a built-in GNU Emacs debugger. We
1407 will `enter the debugger'. You get out of the debugger by typing @code{q}.
1408
1409 What we will do is evaluate a list that is not quoted and does not
1410 have a meaningful command as its first element. Here is a list almost
1411 exactly the same as the one we just used, but without the single-quote
1412 in front of it. Position the cursor right after it and type @kbd{C-x
1413 C-e}:
1414
1415 @smallexample
1416 (this is an unquoted list)
1417 @end smallexample
1418
1419 @noindent
1420 What you see depends on which version of Emacs you are running. GNU
1421 Emacs version 22 provides more information than version 20 and before.
1422 First, the more recent result of generating an error; then the
1423 earlier, version 20 result.
1424
1425 @need 1250
1426 @noindent
1427 In GNU Emacs version 22, a @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and
1428 you will see the following in it:
1429
1430 @smallexample
1431 @group
1432 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1433 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1434 (this is an unquoted list)
1435 eval((this is an unquoted list))
1436 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1437 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1438 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1439 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1440 @end group
1441 @end smallexample
1442
1443 @need 1200
1444 @noindent
1445 Your cursor will be in this window (you may have to wait a few seconds
1446 before it becomes visible). To quit the debugger and make the
1447 debugger window go away, type:
1448
1449 @smallexample
1450 q
1451 @end smallexample
1452
1453 @noindent
1454 Please type @kbd{q} right now, so you become confident that you can
1455 get out of the debugger. Then, type @kbd{C-x C-e} again to re-enter
1456 it.
1457
1458 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1459 Based on what we already know, we can almost read this error message.
1460
1461 You read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells
1462 you what Emacs did. When you typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, you made an
1463 interactive call to the command @code{eval-last-sexp}. @code{eval} is
1464 an abbreviation for `evaluate' and @code{sexp} is an abbreviation for
1465 `symbolic expression'. The command means `evaluate last symbolic
1466 expression', which is the expression just before your cursor.
1467
1468 Each line above tells you what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
1469 The most recent action is at the top. The buffer is called the
1470 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer because it enables you to track Emacs
1471 backwards.
1472
1473 @need 800
1474 At the top of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, you see the line:
1475
1476 @smallexample
1477 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1478 @end smallexample
1479
1480 @noindent
1481 The Lisp interpreter tried to evaluate the first atom of the list, the
1482 word @samp{this}. It is this action that generated the error message
1483 @samp{void-function this}.
1484
1485 The message contains the words @samp{void-function} and @samp{this}.
1486
1487 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1488 The word @samp{function} was mentioned once before. It is a very
1489 important word. For our purposes, we can define it by saying that a
1490 @dfn{function} is a set of instructions to the computer that tell the
1491 computer to do something.
1492
1493 Now we can begin to understand the error message: @samp{void-function
1494 this}. The function (that is, the word @samp{this}) does not have a
1495 definition of any set of instructions for the computer to carry out.
1496
1497 The slightly odd word, @samp{void-function}, is designed to cover the
1498 way Emacs Lisp is implemented, which is that when a symbol does not
1499 have a function definition attached to it, the place that should
1500 contain the instructions is `void'.
1501
1502 On the other hand, since we were able to add 2 plus 2 successfully, by
1503 evaluating @code{(+ 2 2)}, we can infer that the symbol @code{+} must
1504 have a set of instructions for the computer to obey and those
1505 instructions must be to add the numbers that follow the @code{+}.
1506
1507 @need 1250
1508 In GNU Emacs version 20, and in earlier versions, you will see only
1509 one line of error message; it will appear in the echo area and look
1510 like this:
1511
1512 @smallexample
1513 Symbol's function definition is void:@: this
1514 @end smallexample
1515
1516 @noindent
1517 (Also, your terminal may beep at you---some do, some don't; and others
1518 blink. This is just a device to get your attention.) The message goes
1519 away as soon as you type another key, even just to move the cursor.
1520
1521 We know the meaning of the word @samp{Symbol}. It refers to the first
1522 atom of the list, the word @samp{this}. The word @samp{function}
1523 refers to the instructions that tell the computer what to do.
1524 (Technically, the symbol tells the computer where to find the
1525 instructions, but this is a complication we can ignore for the
1526 moment.)
1527
1528 The error message can be understood: @samp{Symbol's function
1529 definition is void:@: this}. The symbol (that is, the word
1530 @samp{this}) lacks instructions for the computer to carry out.
1531
1532 @node Names & Definitions, Lisp Interpreter, Making Errors, List Processing
1533 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1534 @section Symbol Names and Function Definitions
1535 @cindex Symbol names
1536
1537 We can articulate another characteristic of Lisp based on what we have
1538 discussed so far---an important characteristic: a symbol, like
1539 @code{+}, is not itself the set of instructions for the computer to
1540 carry out. Instead, the symbol is used, perhaps temporarily, as a way
1541 of locating the definition or set of instructions. What we see is the
1542 name through which the instructions can be found. Names of people
1543 work the same way. I can be referred to as @samp{Bob}; however, I am
1544 not the letters @samp{B}, @samp{o}, @samp{b} but am, or was, the
1545 consciousness consistently associated with a particular life-form.
1546 The name is not me, but it can be used to refer to me.
1547
1548 In Lisp, one set of instructions can be attached to several names.
1549 For example, the computer instructions for adding numbers can be
1550 linked to the symbol @code{plus} as well as to the symbol @code{+}
1551 (and are in some dialects of Lisp). Among humans, I can be referred
1552 to as @samp{Robert} as well as @samp{Bob} and by other words as well.
1553
1554 On the other hand, a symbol can have only one function definition
1555 attached to it at a time. Otherwise, the computer would be confused as
1556 to which definition to use. If this were the case among people, only
1557 one person in the world could be named @samp{Bob}. However, the function
1558 definition to which the name refers can be changed readily.
1559 (@xref{Install, , Install a Function Definition}.)
1560
1561 Since Emacs Lisp is large, it is customary to name symbols in a way
1562 that identifies the part of Emacs to which the function belongs.
1563 Thus, all the names for functions that deal with Texinfo start with
1564 @samp{texinfo-} and those for functions that deal with reading mail
1565 start with @samp{rmail-}.
1566
1567 @node Lisp Interpreter, Evaluation, Names & Definitions, List Processing
1568 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1569 @section The Lisp Interpreter
1570 @cindex Lisp interpreter, what it does
1571 @cindex Interpreter, what it does
1572
1573 Based on what we have seen, we can now start to figure out what the
1574 Lisp interpreter does when we command it to evaluate a list.
1575 First, it looks to see whether there is a quote before the list; if
1576 there is, the interpreter just gives us the list. On the other
1577 hand, if there is no quote, the interpreter looks at the first element
1578 in the list and sees whether it has a function definition. If it does,
1579 the interpreter carries out the instructions in the function definition.
1580 Otherwise, the interpreter prints an error message.
1581
1582 This is how Lisp works. Simple. There are added complications which we
1583 will get to in a minute, but these are the fundamentals. Of course, to
1584 write Lisp programs, you need to know how to write function definitions
1585 and attach them to names, and how to do this without confusing either
1586 yourself or the computer.
1587
1588 @menu
1589 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
1590 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
1591 @end menu
1592
1593 @node Complications, Byte Compiling, Lisp Interpreter, Lisp Interpreter
1594 @ifnottex
1595 @unnumberedsubsec Complications
1596 @end ifnottex
1597
1598 Now, for the first complication. In addition to lists, the Lisp
1599 interpreter can evaluate a symbol that is not quoted and does not have
1600 parentheses around it. The Lisp interpreter will attempt to determine
1601 the symbol's value as a @dfn{variable}. This situation is described
1602 in the section on variables. (@xref{Variables}.)
1603
1604 @cindex Special form
1605 The second complication occurs because some functions are unusual and do
1606 not work in the usual manner. Those that don't are called @dfn{special
1607 forms}. They are used for special jobs, like defining a function, and
1608 there are not many of them. In the next few chapters, you will be
1609 introduced to several of the more important special forms.
1610
1611 The third and final complication is this: if the function that the
1612 Lisp interpreter is looking at is not a special form, and if it is part
1613 of a list, the Lisp interpreter looks to see whether the list has a list
1614 inside of it. If there is an inner list, the Lisp interpreter first
1615 figures out what it should do with the inside list, and then it works on
1616 the outside list. If there is yet another list embedded inside the
1617 inner list, it works on that one first, and so on. It always works on
1618 the innermost list first. The interpreter works on the innermost list
1619 first, to evaluate the result of that list. The result may be
1620 used by the enclosing expression.
1621
1622 Otherwise, the interpreter works left to right, from one expression to
1623 the next.
1624
1625 @node Byte Compiling, , Complications, Lisp Interpreter
1626 @subsection Byte Compiling
1627 @cindex Byte compiling
1628
1629 One other aspect of interpreting: the Lisp interpreter is able to
1630 interpret two kinds of entity: humanly readable code, on which we will
1631 focus exclusively, and specially processed code, called @dfn{byte
1632 compiled} code, which is not humanly readable. Byte compiled code
1633 runs faster than humanly readable code.
1634
1635 You can transform humanly readable code into byte compiled code by
1636 running one of the compile commands such as @code{byte-compile-file}.
1637 Byte compiled code is usually stored in a file that ends with a
1638 @file{.elc} extension rather than a @file{.el} extension. You will
1639 see both kinds of file in the @file{emacs/lisp} directory; the files
1640 to read are those with @file{.el} extensions.
1641
1642 As a practical matter, for most things you might do to customize or
1643 extend Emacs, you do not need to byte compile; and I will not discuss
1644 the topic here. @xref{Byte Compilation, , Byte Compilation, elisp,
1645 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a full description of byte
1646 compilation.
1647
1648 @node Evaluation, Variables, Lisp Interpreter, List Processing
1649 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1650 @section Evaluation
1651 @cindex Evaluation
1652
1653 When the Lisp interpreter works on an expression, the term for the
1654 activity is called @dfn{evaluation}. We say that the interpreter
1655 `evaluates the expression'. I've used this term several times before.
1656 The word comes from its use in everyday language, `to ascertain the
1657 value or amount of; to appraise', according to @cite{Webster's New
1658 Collegiate Dictionary}.
1659
1660 @menu
1661 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
1662 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
1663 @end menu
1664
1665 @node How the Interpreter Acts, Evaluating Inner Lists, Evaluation, Evaluation
1666 @ifnottex
1667 @unnumberedsubsec How the Lisp Interpreter Acts
1668 @end ifnottex
1669
1670 @cindex @samp{returned value} explained
1671 After evaluating an expression, the Lisp interpreter will most likely
1672 @dfn{return} the value that the computer produces by carrying out the
1673 instructions it found in the function definition, or perhaps it will
1674 give up on that function and produce an error message. (The interpreter
1675 may also find itself tossed, so to speak, to a different function or it
1676 may attempt to repeat continually what it is doing for ever and ever in
1677 what is called an `infinite loop'. These actions are less common; and
1678 we can ignore them.) Most frequently, the interpreter returns a value.
1679
1680 @cindex @samp{side effect} defined
1681 At the same time the interpreter returns a value, it may do something
1682 else as well, such as move a cursor or copy a file; this other kind of
1683 action is called a @dfn{side effect}. Actions that we humans think are
1684 important, such as printing results, are often ``side effects'' to the
1685 Lisp interpreter. The jargon can sound peculiar, but it turns out that
1686 it is fairly easy to learn to use side effects.
1687
1688 In summary, evaluating a symbolic expression most commonly causes the
1689 Lisp interpreter to return a value and perhaps carry out a side effect;
1690 or else produce an error.
1691
1692 @node Evaluating Inner Lists, , How the Interpreter Acts, Evaluation
1693 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1694 @subsection Evaluating Inner Lists
1695 @cindex Inner list evaluation
1696 @cindex Evaluating inner lists
1697
1698 If evaluation applies to a list that is inside another list, the outer
1699 list may use the value returned by the first evaluation as information
1700 when the outer list is evaluated. This explains why inner expressions
1701 are evaluated first: the values they return are used by the outer
1702 expressions.
1703
1704 @need 1250
1705 We can investigate this process by evaluating another addition example.
1706 Place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1707
1708 @smallexample
1709 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1710 @end smallexample
1711
1712 @noindent
1713 The number 8 will appear in the echo area.
1714
1715 What happens is that the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the inner
1716 expression, @code{(+ 3 3)}, for which the value 6 is returned; then it
1717 evaluates the outer expression as if it were written @code{(+ 2 6)}, which
1718 returns the value 8. Since there are no more enclosing expressions to
1719 evaluate, the interpreter prints that value in the echo area.
1720
1721 Now it is easy to understand the name of the command invoked by the
1722 keystrokes @kbd{C-x C-e}: the name is @code{eval-last-sexp}. The
1723 letters @code{sexp} are an abbreviation for `symbolic expression', and
1724 @code{eval} is an abbreviation for `evaluate'. The command means
1725 `evaluate last symbolic expression'.
1726
1727 As an experiment, you can try evaluating the expression by putting the
1728 cursor at the beginning of the next line immediately following the
1729 expression, or inside the expression.
1730
1731 @need 800
1732 Here is another copy of the expression:
1733
1734 @smallexample
1735 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1736 @end smallexample
1737
1738 @noindent
1739 If you place the cursor at the beginning of the blank line that
1740 immediately follows the expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}, you will
1741 still get the value 8 printed in the echo area. Now try putting the
1742 cursor inside the expression. If you put it right after the next to
1743 last parenthesis (so it appears to sit on top of the last parenthesis),
1744 you will get a 6 printed in the echo area! This is because the command
1745 evaluates the expression @code{(+ 3 3)}.
1746
1747 Now put the cursor immediately after a number. Type @kbd{C-x C-e} and
1748 you will get the number itself. In Lisp, if you evaluate a number, you
1749 get the number itself---this is how numbers differ from symbols. If you
1750 evaluate a list starting with a symbol like @code{+}, you will get a
1751 value returned that is the result of the computer carrying out the
1752 instructions in the function definition attached to that name. If a
1753 symbol by itself is evaluated, something different happens, as we will
1754 see in the next section.
1755
1756 @node Variables, Arguments, Evaluation, List Processing
1757 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1758 @section Variables
1759 @cindex Variables
1760
1761 In Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have a value attached to it just as it can
1762 have a function definition attached to it. The two are different.
1763 The function definition is a set of instructions that a computer will
1764 obey. A value, on the other hand, is something, such as number or a
1765 name, that can vary (which is why such a symbol is called a variable).
1766 The value of a symbol can be any expression in Lisp, such as a symbol,
1767 number, list, or string. A symbol that has a value is often called a
1768 @dfn{variable}.
1769
1770 A symbol can have both a function definition and a value attached to
1771 it at the same time. Or it can have just one or the other.
1772 The two are separate. This is somewhat similar
1773 to the way the name Cambridge can refer to the city in Massachusetts
1774 and have some information attached to the name as well, such as
1775 ``great programming center''.
1776
1777 @ignore
1778 (Incidentally, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have two
1779 other things attached to it, too: a property list and a documentation
1780 string; these are discussed later.)
1781 @end ignore
1782
1783 Another way to think about this is to imagine a symbol as being a chest
1784 of drawers. The function definition is put in one drawer, the value in
1785 another, and so on. What is put in the drawer holding the value can be
1786 changed without affecting the contents of the drawer holding the
1787 function definition, and vice-verse.
1788
1789 @menu
1790 * fill-column Example::
1791 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
1792 without a function.
1793 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
1794 @end menu
1795
1796 @node fill-column Example, Void Function, Variables, Variables
1797 @ifnottex
1798 @unnumberedsubsec @code{fill-column}, an Example Variable
1799 @end ifnottex
1800
1801 @findex fill-column, @r{an example variable}
1802 @cindex Example variable, @code{fill-column}
1803 @cindex Variable, example of, @code{fill-column}
1804 The variable @code{fill-column} illustrates a symbol with a value
1805 attached to it: in every GNU Emacs buffer, this symbol is set to some
1806 value, usually 72 or 70, but sometimes to some other value. To find the
1807 value of this symbol, evaluate it by itself. If you are reading this in
1808 Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can do this by putting the cursor after
1809 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1810
1811 @smallexample
1812 fill-column
1813 @end smallexample
1814
1815 @noindent
1816 After I typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, Emacs printed the number 72 in my echo
1817 area. This is the value for which @code{fill-column} is set for me as I
1818 write this. It may be different for you in your Info buffer. Notice
1819 that the value returned as a variable is printed in exactly the same way
1820 as the value returned by a function carrying out its instructions. From
1821 the point of view of the Lisp interpreter, a value returned is a value
1822 returned. What kind of expression it came from ceases to matter once
1823 the value is known.
1824
1825 A symbol can have any value attached to it or, to use the jargon, we can
1826 @dfn{bind} the variable to a value: to a number, such as 72; to a
1827 string, @code{"such as this"}; to a list, such as @code{(spruce pine
1828 oak)}; we can even bind a variable to a function definition.
1829
1830 A symbol can be bound to a value in several ways. @xref{set & setq, ,
1831 Setting the Value of a Variable}, for information about one way to do
1832 this.
1833
1834 @node Void Function, Void Variable, fill-column Example, Variables
1835 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1836 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Function
1837 @cindex Symbol without function error
1838 @cindex Error for symbol without function
1839
1840 When we evaluated @code{fill-column} to find its value as a variable,
1841 we did not place parentheses around the word. This is because we did
1842 not intend to use it as a function name.
1843
1844 If @code{fill-column} were the first or only element of a list, the
1845 Lisp interpreter would attempt to find the function definition
1846 attached to it. But @code{fill-column} has no function definition.
1847 Try evaluating this:
1848
1849 @smallexample
1850 (fill-column)
1851 @end smallexample
1852
1853 @need 1250
1854 @noindent
1855 In GNU Emacs version 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer
1856 that says:
1857
1858 @smallexample
1859 @group
1860 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1861 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function fill-column)
1862 (fill-column)
1863 eval((fill-column))
1864 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1865 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1866 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1867 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1868 @end group
1869 @end smallexample
1870
1871 @noindent
1872 (Remember, to quit the debugger and make the debugger window go away,
1873 type @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1874
1875 @ignore
1876 @need 800
1877 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will produce an error message that says:
1878
1879 @smallexample
1880 Symbol's function definition is void:@: fill-column
1881 @end smallexample
1882
1883 @noindent
1884 (The message will go away as soon as you move the cursor or type
1885 another key.)
1886 @end ignore
1887
1888 @node Void Variable, , Void Function, Variables
1889 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1890 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Value
1891 @cindex Symbol without value error
1892 @cindex Error for symbol without value
1893
1894 If you attempt to evaluate a symbol that does not have a value bound to
1895 it, you will receive an error message. You can see this by
1896 experimenting with our 2 plus 2 addition. In the following expression,
1897 put your cursor right after the @code{+}, before the first number 2,
1898 type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1899
1900 @smallexample
1901 (+ 2 2)
1902 @end smallexample
1903
1904 @need 1500
1905 @noindent
1906 In GNU Emacs 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that
1907 says:
1908
1909 @smallexample
1910 @group
1911 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1912 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-variable +)
1913 eval(+)
1914 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1915 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1916 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1917 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1918 @end group
1919 @end smallexample
1920
1921 @noindent
1922 (As with the other times we entered the debugger, you can quit by
1923 typing @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1924
1925 This backtrace is different from the very first error message we saw,
1926 which said, @samp{Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)}.
1927 In this case, the function does not have a value as a variable; while
1928 in the other error message, the function (the word `this') did not
1929 have a definition.
1930
1931 In this experiment with the @code{+}, what we did was cause the Lisp
1932 interpreter to evaluate the @code{+} and look for the value of the
1933 variable instead of the function definition. We did this by placing the
1934 cursor right after the symbol rather than after the parenthesis of the
1935 enclosing list as we did before. As a consequence, the Lisp interpreter
1936 evaluated the preceding s-expression, which in this case was the
1937 @code{+} by itself.
1938
1939 Since @code{+} does not have a value bound to it, just the function
1940 definition, the error message reported that the symbol's value as a
1941 variable was void.
1942
1943 @ignore
1944 @need 800
1945 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, your error message will say:
1946
1947 @example
1948 Symbol's value as variable is void:@: +
1949 @end example
1950
1951 @noindent
1952 The meaning is the same as in GNU Emacs 22.
1953 @end ignore
1954
1955 @node Arguments, set & setq, Variables, List Processing
1956 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1957 @section Arguments
1958 @cindex Arguments
1959 @cindex Passing information to functions
1960
1961 To see how information is passed to functions, let's look again at
1962 our old standby, the addition of two plus two. In Lisp, this is written
1963 as follows:
1964
1965 @smallexample
1966 (+ 2 2)
1967 @end smallexample
1968
1969 If you evaluate this expression, the number 4 will appear in your echo
1970 area. What the Lisp interpreter does is add the numbers that follow
1971 the @code{+}.
1972
1973 @cindex @samp{argument} defined
1974 The numbers added by @code{+} are called the @dfn{arguments} of the
1975 function @code{+}. These numbers are the information that is given to
1976 or @dfn{passed} to the function.
1977
1978 The word `argument' comes from the way it is used in mathematics and
1979 does not refer to a disputation between two people; instead it refers to
1980 the information presented to the function, in this case, to the
1981 @code{+}. In Lisp, the arguments to a function are the atoms or lists
1982 that follow the function. The values returned by the evaluation of
1983 these atoms or lists are passed to the function. Different functions
1984 require different numbers of arguments; some functions require none at
1985 all.@footnote{It is curious to track the path by which the word `argument'
1986 came to have two different meanings, one in mathematics and the other in
1987 everyday English. According to the @cite{Oxford English Dictionary},
1988 the word derives from the Latin for @samp{to make clear, prove}; thus it
1989 came to mean, by one thread of derivation, `the evidence offered as
1990 proof', which is to say, `the information offered', which led to its
1991 meaning in Lisp. But in the other thread of derivation, it came to mean
1992 `to assert in a manner against which others may make counter
1993 assertions', which led to the meaning of the word as a disputation.
1994 (Note here that the English word has two different definitions attached
1995 to it at the same time. By contrast, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol cannot
1996 have two different function definitions at the same time.)}
1997
1998 @menu
1999 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
2000 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
2001 of a variable or list.
2002 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
2003 variable number of arguments.
2004 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
2005 to a function.
2006 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
2007 @end menu
2008
2009 @node Data types, Args as Variable or List, Arguments, Arguments
2010 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2011 @subsection Arguments' Data Types
2012 @cindex Data types
2013 @cindex Types of data
2014 @cindex Arguments' data types
2015
2016 The type of data that should be passed to a function depends on what
2017 kind of information it uses. The arguments to a function such as
2018 @code{+} must have values that are numbers, since @code{+} adds numbers.
2019 Other functions use different kinds of data for their arguments.
2020
2021 @need 1250
2022 @findex concat
2023 For example, the @code{concat} function links together or unites two or
2024 more strings of text to produce a string. The arguments are strings.
2025 Concatenating the two character strings @code{abc}, @code{def} produces
2026 the single string @code{abcdef}. This can be seen by evaluating the
2027 following:
2028
2029 @smallexample
2030 (concat "abc" "def")
2031 @end smallexample
2032
2033 @noindent
2034 The value produced by evaluating this expression is @code{"abcdef"}.
2035
2036 A function such as @code{substring} uses both a string and numbers as
2037 arguments. The function returns a part of the string, a substring of
2038 the first argument. This function takes three arguments. Its first
2039 argument is the string of characters, the second and third arguments are
2040 numbers that indicate the beginning and end of the substring. The
2041 numbers are a count of the number of characters (including spaces and
2042 punctuations) from the beginning of the string.
2043
2044 @need 800
2045 For example, if you evaluate the following:
2046
2047 @smallexample
2048 (substring "The quick brown fox jumped." 16 19)
2049 @end smallexample
2050
2051 @noindent
2052 you will see @code{"fox"} appear in the echo area. The arguments are the
2053 string and the two numbers.
2054
2055 Note that the string passed to @code{substring} is a single atom even
2056 though it is made up of several words separated by spaces. Lisp counts
2057 everything between the two quotation marks as part of the string,
2058 including the spaces. You can think of the @code{substring} function as
2059 a kind of `atom smasher' since it takes an otherwise indivisible atom
2060 and extracts a part. However, @code{substring} is only able to extract
2061 a substring from an argument that is a string, not from another type of
2062 atom such as a number or symbol.
2063
2064 @node Args as Variable or List, Variable Number of Arguments, Data types, Arguments
2065 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2066 @subsection An Argument as the Value of a Variable or List
2067
2068 An argument can be a symbol that returns a value when it is evaluated.
2069 For example, when the symbol @code{fill-column} by itself is evaluated,
2070 it returns a number. This number can be used in an addition.
2071
2072 @need 1250
2073 Position the cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
2074 C-e}:
2075
2076 @smallexample
2077 (+ 2 fill-column)
2078 @end smallexample
2079
2080 @noindent
2081 The value will be a number two more than what you get by evaluating
2082 @code{fill-column} alone. For me, this is 74, because my value of
2083 @code{fill-column} is 72.
2084
2085 As we have just seen, an argument can be a symbol that returns a value
2086 when evaluated. In addition, an argument can be a list that returns a
2087 value when it is evaluated. For example, in the following expression,
2088 the arguments to the function @code{concat} are the strings
2089 @w{@code{"The "}} and @w{@code{" red foxes."}} and the list
2090 @code{(number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column))}.
2091
2092 @c For GNU Emacs 22, need number-to-string
2093 @smallexample
2094 (concat "The " (number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column)) " red foxes.")
2095 @end smallexample
2096
2097 @noindent
2098 If you evaluate this expression---and if, as with my Emacs,
2099 @code{fill-column} evaluates to 72---@code{"The 74 red foxes."} will
2100 appear in the echo area. (Note that you must put spaces after the
2101 word @samp{The} and before the word @samp{red} so they will appear in
2102 the final string. The function @code{number-to-string} converts the
2103 integer that the addition function returns to a string.
2104 @code{number-to-string} is also known as @code{int-to-string}.)
2105
2106 @node Variable Number of Arguments, Wrong Type of Argument, Args as Variable or List, Arguments
2107 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2108 @subsection Variable Number of Arguments
2109 @cindex Variable number of arguments
2110 @cindex Arguments, variable number of
2111
2112 Some functions, such as @code{concat}, @code{+} or @code{*}, take any
2113 number of arguments. (The @code{*} is the symbol for multiplication.)
2114 This can be seen by evaluating each of the following expressions in
2115 the usual way. What you will see in the echo area is printed in this
2116 text after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
2117
2118 @need 1250
2119 In the first set, the functions have no arguments:
2120
2121 @smallexample
2122 @group
2123 (+) @result{} 0
2124
2125 (*) @result{} 1
2126 @end group
2127 @end smallexample
2128
2129 @need 1250
2130 In this set, the functions have one argument each:
2131
2132 @smallexample
2133 @group
2134 (+ 3) @result{} 3
2135
2136 (* 3) @result{} 3
2137 @end group
2138 @end smallexample
2139
2140 @need 1250
2141 In this set, the functions have three arguments each:
2142
2143 @smallexample
2144 @group
2145 (+ 3 4 5) @result{} 12
2146
2147 (* 3 4 5) @result{} 60
2148 @end group
2149 @end smallexample
2150
2151 @node Wrong Type of Argument, message, Variable Number of Arguments, Arguments
2152 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2153 @subsection Using the Wrong Type Object as an Argument
2154 @cindex Wrong type of argument
2155 @cindex Argument, wrong type of
2156
2157 When a function is passed an argument of the wrong type, the Lisp
2158 interpreter produces an error message. For example, the @code{+}
2159 function expects the values of its arguments to be numbers. As an
2160 experiment we can pass it the quoted symbol @code{hello} instead of a
2161 number. Position the cursor after the following expression and type
2162 @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2163
2164 @smallexample
2165 (+ 2 'hello)
2166 @end smallexample
2167
2168 @noindent
2169 When you do this you will generate an error message. What has happened
2170 is that @code{+} has tried to add the 2 to the value returned by
2171 @code{'hello}, but the value returned by @code{'hello} is the symbol
2172 @code{hello}, not a number. Only numbers can be added. So @code{+}
2173 could not carry out its addition.
2174
2175 @need 1250
2176 In GNU Emacs version 22, you will create and enter a
2177 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
2178
2179 @noindent
2180 @smallexample
2181 @group
2182 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2183 Debugger entered--Lisp error:
2184 (wrong-type-argument number-or-marker-p hello)
2185 +(2 hello)
2186 eval((+ 2 (quote hello)))
2187 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
2188 eval-last-sexp(nil)
2189 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
2190 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2191 @end group
2192 @end smallexample
2193
2194 @need 1250
2195 As usual, the error message tries to be helpful and makes sense after you
2196 learn how to read it.@footnote{@code{(quote hello)} is an expansion of
2197 the abbreviation @code{'hello}.}
2198
2199 The first part of the error message is straightforward; it says
2200 @samp{wrong type argument}. Next comes the mysterious jargon word
2201 @w{@samp{number-or-marker-p}}. This word is trying to tell you what
2202 kind of argument the @code{+} expected.
2203
2204 The symbol @code{number-or-marker-p} says that the Lisp interpreter is
2205 trying to determine whether the information presented it (the value of
2206 the argument) is a number or a marker (a special object representing a
2207 buffer position). What it does is test to see whether the @code{+} is
2208 being given numbers to add. It also tests to see whether the
2209 argument is something called a marker, which is a specific feature of
2210 Emacs Lisp. (In Emacs, locations in a buffer are recorded as markers.
2211 When the mark is set with the @kbd{C-@@} or @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} command,
2212 its position is kept as a marker. The mark can be considered a
2213 number---the number of characters the location is from the beginning
2214 of the buffer.) In Emacs Lisp, @code{+} can be used to add the
2215 numeric value of marker positions as numbers.
2216
2217 The @samp{p} of @code{number-or-marker-p} is the embodiment of a
2218 practice started in the early days of Lisp programming. The @samp{p}
2219 stands for `predicate'. In the jargon used by the early Lisp
2220 researchers, a predicate refers to a function to determine whether some
2221 property is true or false. So the @samp{p} tells us that
2222 @code{number-or-marker-p} is the name of a function that determines
2223 whether it is true or false that the argument supplied is a number or
2224 a marker. Other Lisp symbols that end in @samp{p} include @code{zerop},
2225 a function that tests whether its argument has the value of zero, and
2226 @code{listp}, a function that tests whether its argument is a list.
2227
2228 Finally, the last part of the error message is the symbol @code{hello}.
2229 This is the value of the argument that was passed to @code{+}. If the
2230 addition had been passed the correct type of object, the value passed
2231 would have been a number, such as 37, rather than a symbol like
2232 @code{hello}. But then you would not have got the error message.
2233
2234 @ignore
2235 @need 1250
2236 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, the echo area displays an error
2237 message that says:
2238
2239 @smallexample
2240 Wrong type argument:@: number-or-marker-p, hello
2241 @end smallexample
2242
2243 This says, in different words, the same as the top line of the
2244 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.
2245 @end ignore
2246
2247 @node message, , Wrong Type of Argument, Arguments
2248 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2249 @subsection The @code{message} Function
2250 @findex message
2251
2252 Like @code{+}, the @code{message} function takes a variable number of
2253 arguments. It is used to send messages to the user and is so useful
2254 that we will describe it here.
2255
2256 @need 1250
2257 A message is printed in the echo area. For example, you can print a
2258 message in your echo area by evaluating the following list:
2259
2260 @smallexample
2261 (message "This message appears in the echo area!")
2262 @end smallexample
2263
2264 The whole string between double quotation marks is a single argument
2265 and is printed @i{in toto}. (Note that in this example, the message
2266 itself will appear in the echo area within double quotes; that is
2267 because you see the value returned by the @code{message} function. In
2268 most uses of @code{message} in programs that you write, the text will
2269 be printed in the echo area as a side-effect, without the quotes.
2270 @xref{multiply-by-seven in detail, , @code{multiply-by-seven} in
2271 detail}, for an example of this.)
2272
2273 However, if there is a @samp{%s} in the quoted string of characters, the
2274 @code{message} function does not print the @samp{%s} as such, but looks
2275 to the argument that follows the string. It evaluates the second
2276 argument and prints the value at the location in the string where the
2277 @samp{%s} is.
2278
2279 @need 1250
2280 You can see this by positioning the cursor after the following
2281 expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2282
2283 @smallexample
2284 (message "The name of this buffer is: %s." (buffer-name))
2285 @end smallexample
2286
2287 @noindent
2288 In Info, @code{"The name of this buffer is: *info*."} will appear in the
2289 echo area. The function @code{buffer-name} returns the name of the
2290 buffer as a string, which the @code{message} function inserts in place
2291 of @code{%s}.
2292
2293 To print a value as an integer, use @samp{%d} in the same way as
2294 @samp{%s}. For example, to print a message in the echo area that
2295 states the value of the @code{fill-column}, evaluate the following:
2296
2297 @smallexample
2298 (message "The value of fill-column is %d." fill-column)
2299 @end smallexample
2300
2301 @noindent
2302 On my system, when I evaluate this list, @code{"The value of
2303 fill-column is 72."} appears in my echo area@footnote{Actually, you
2304 can use @code{%s} to print a number. It is non-specific. @code{%d}
2305 prints only the part of a number left of a decimal point, and not
2306 anything that is not a number.}.
2307
2308 If there is more than one @samp{%s} in the quoted string, the value of
2309 the first argument following the quoted string is printed at the
2310 location of the first @samp{%s} and the value of the second argument is
2311 printed at the location of the second @samp{%s}, and so on.
2312
2313 @need 1250
2314 For example, if you evaluate the following,
2315
2316 @smallexample
2317 @group
2318 (message "There are %d %s in the office!"
2319 (- fill-column 14) "pink elephants")
2320 @end group
2321 @end smallexample
2322
2323 @noindent
2324 a rather whimsical message will appear in your echo area. On my system
2325 it says, @code{"There are 58 pink elephants in the office!"}.
2326
2327 The expression @code{(- fill-column 14)} is evaluated and the resulting
2328 number is inserted in place of the @samp{%d}; and the string in double
2329 quotes, @code{"pink elephants"}, is treated as a single argument and
2330 inserted in place of the @samp{%s}. (That is to say, a string between
2331 double quotes evaluates to itself, like a number.)
2332
2333 Finally, here is a somewhat complex example that not only illustrates
2334 the computation of a number, but also shows how you can use an
2335 expression within an expression to generate the text that is substituted
2336 for @samp{%s}:
2337
2338 @smallexample
2339 @group
2340 (message "He saw %d %s"
2341 (- fill-column 32)
2342 (concat "red "
2343 (substring
2344 "The quick brown foxes jumped." 16 21)
2345 " leaping."))
2346 @end group
2347 @end smallexample
2348
2349 In this example, @code{message} has three arguments: the string,
2350 @code{"He saw %d %s"}, the expression, @code{(- fill-column 32)}, and
2351 the expression beginning with the function @code{concat}. The value
2352 resulting from the evaluation of @code{(- fill-column 32)} is inserted
2353 in place of the @samp{%d}; and the value returned by the expression
2354 beginning with @code{concat} is inserted in place of the @samp{%s}.
2355
2356 When your fill column is 70 and you evaluate the expression, the
2357 message @code{"He saw 38 red foxes leaping."} appears in your echo
2358 area.
2359
2360 @node set & setq, Summary, Arguments, List Processing
2361 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2362 @section Setting the Value of a Variable
2363 @cindex Variable, setting value
2364 @cindex Setting value of variable
2365
2366 @cindex @samp{bind} defined
2367 There are several ways by which a variable can be given a value. One of
2368 the ways is to use either the function @code{set} or the function
2369 @code{setq}. Another way is to use @code{let} (@pxref{let}). (The
2370 jargon for this process is to @dfn{bind} a variable to a value.)
2371
2372 The following sections not only describe how @code{set} and @code{setq}
2373 work but also illustrate how arguments are passed.
2374
2375 @menu
2376 * Using set:: Setting values.
2377 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
2378 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
2379 @end menu
2380
2381 @node Using set, Using setq, set & setq, set & setq
2382 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2383 @subsection Using @code{set}
2384 @findex set
2385
2386 To set the value of the symbol @code{flowers} to the list @code{'(rose
2387 violet daisy buttercup)}, evaluate the following expression by
2388 positioning the cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2389
2390 @smallexample
2391 (set 'flowers '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
2392 @end smallexample
2393
2394 @noindent
2395 The list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in the echo
2396 area. This is what is @emph{returned} by the @code{set} function. As a
2397 side effect, the symbol @code{flowers} is bound to the list; that is,
2398 the symbol @code{flowers}, which can be viewed as a variable, is given
2399 the list as its value. (This process, by the way, illustrates how a
2400 side effect to the Lisp interpreter, setting the value, can be the
2401 primary effect that we humans are interested in. This is because every
2402 Lisp function must return a value if it does not get an error, but it
2403 will only have a side effect if it is designed to have one.)
2404
2405 After evaluating the @code{set} expression, you can evaluate the symbol
2406 @code{flowers} and it will return the value you just set. Here is the
2407 symbol. Place your cursor after it and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2408
2409 @smallexample
2410 flowers
2411 @end smallexample
2412
2413 @noindent
2414 When you evaluate @code{flowers}, the list
2415 @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} appears in the echo area.
2416
2417 Incidentally, if you evaluate @code{'flowers}, the variable with a quote
2418 in front of it, what you will see in the echo area is the symbol itself,
2419 @code{flowers}. Here is the quoted symbol, so you can try this:
2420
2421 @smallexample
2422 'flowers
2423 @end smallexample
2424
2425 Note also, that when you use @code{set}, you need to quote both
2426 arguments to @code{set}, unless you want them evaluated. Since we do
2427 not want either argument evaluated, neither the variable
2428 @code{flowers} nor the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)}, both
2429 are quoted. (When you use @code{set} without quoting its first
2430 argument, the first argument is evaluated before anything else is
2431 done. If you did this and @code{flowers} did not have a value
2432 already, you would get an error message that the @samp{Symbol's value
2433 as variable is void}; on the other hand, if @code{flowers} did return
2434 a value after it was evaluated, the @code{set} would attempt to set
2435 the value that was returned. There are situations where this is the
2436 right thing for the function to do; but such situations are rare.)
2437
2438 @node Using setq, Counting, Using set, set & setq
2439 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2440 @subsection Using @code{setq}
2441 @findex setq
2442
2443 As a practical matter, you almost always quote the first argument to
2444 @code{set}. The combination of @code{set} and a quoted first argument
2445 is so common that it has its own name: the special form @code{setq}.
2446 This special form is just like @code{set} except that the first argument
2447 is quoted automatically, so you don't need to type the quote mark
2448 yourself. Also, as an added convenience, @code{setq} permits you to set
2449 several different variables to different values, all in one expression.
2450
2451 To set the value of the variable @code{carnivores} to the list
2452 @code{'(lion tiger leopard)} using @code{setq}, the following expression
2453 is used:
2454
2455 @smallexample
2456 (setq carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2457 @end smallexample
2458
2459 @noindent
2460 This is exactly the same as using @code{set} except the first argument
2461 is automatically quoted by @code{setq}. (The @samp{q} in @code{setq}
2462 means @code{quote}.)
2463
2464 @need 1250
2465 With @code{set}, the expression would look like this:
2466
2467 @smallexample
2468 (set 'carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2469 @end smallexample
2470
2471 Also, @code{setq} can be used to assign different values to
2472 different variables. The first argument is bound to the value
2473 of the second argument, the third argument is bound to the value of the
2474 fourth argument, and so on. For example, you could use the following to
2475 assign a list of trees to the symbol @code{trees} and a list of herbivores
2476 to the symbol @code{herbivores}:
2477
2478 @smallexample
2479 @group
2480 (setq trees '(pine fir oak maple)
2481 herbivores '(gazelle antelope zebra))
2482 @end group
2483 @end smallexample
2484
2485 @noindent
2486 (The expression could just as well have been on one line, but it might
2487 not have fit on a page; and humans find it easier to read nicely
2488 formatted lists.)
2489
2490 Although I have been using the term `assign', there is another way of
2491 thinking about the workings of @code{set} and @code{setq}; and that is to
2492 say that @code{set} and @code{setq} make the symbol @emph{point} to the
2493 list. This latter way of thinking is very common and in forthcoming
2494 chapters we shall come upon at least one symbol that has `pointer' as
2495 part of its name. The name is chosen because the symbol has a value,
2496 specifically a list, attached to it; or, expressed another way,
2497 the symbol is set to ``point'' to the list.
2498
2499 @node Counting, , Using setq, set & setq
2500 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2501 @subsection Counting
2502 @cindex Counting
2503
2504 Here is an example that shows how to use @code{setq} in a counter. You
2505 might use this to count how many times a part of your program repeats
2506 itself. First set a variable to zero; then add one to the number each
2507 time the program repeats itself. To do this, you need a variable that
2508 serves as a counter, and two expressions: an initial @code{setq}
2509 expression that sets the counter variable to zero; and a second
2510 @code{setq} expression that increments the counter each time it is
2511 evaluated.
2512
2513 @smallexample
2514 @group
2515 (setq counter 0) ; @r{Let's call this the initializer.}
2516
2517 (setq counter (+ counter 1)) ; @r{This is the incrementer.}
2518
2519 counter ; @r{This is the counter.}
2520 @end group
2521 @end smallexample
2522
2523 @noindent
2524 (The text following the @samp{;} are comments. @xref{Change a
2525 defun, , Change a Function Definition}.)
2526
2527 If you evaluate the first of these expressions, the initializer,
2528 @code{(setq counter 0)}, and then evaluate the third expression,
2529 @code{counter}, the number @code{0} will appear in the echo area. If
2530 you then evaluate the second expression, the incrementer, @code{(setq
2531 counter (+ counter 1))}, the counter will get the value 1. So if you
2532 again evaluate @code{counter}, the number @code{1} will appear in the
2533 echo area. Each time you evaluate the second expression, the value of
2534 the counter will be incremented.
2535
2536 When you evaluate the incrementer, @code{(setq counter (+ counter 1))},
2537 the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the innermost list; this is the
2538 addition. In order to evaluate this list, it must evaluate the variable
2539 @code{counter} and the number @code{1}. When it evaluates the variable
2540 @code{counter}, it receives its current value. It passes this value and
2541 the number @code{1} to the @code{+} which adds them together. The sum
2542 is then returned as the value of the inner list and passed to the
2543 @code{setq} which sets the variable @code{counter} to this new value.
2544 Thus, the value of the variable, @code{counter}, is changed.
2545
2546 @node Summary, Error Message Exercises, set & setq, List Processing
2547 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2548 @section Summary
2549
2550 Learning Lisp is like climbing a hill in which the first part is the
2551 steepest. You have now climbed the most difficult part; what remains
2552 becomes easier as you progress onwards.
2553
2554 @need 1000
2555 In summary,
2556
2557 @itemize @bullet
2558
2559 @item
2560 Lisp programs are made up of expressions, which are lists or single atoms.
2561
2562 @item
2563 Lists are made up of zero or more atoms or inner lists, separated by whitespace and
2564 surrounded by parentheses. A list can be empty.
2565
2566 @item
2567 Atoms are multi-character symbols, like @code{forward-paragraph}, single
2568 character symbols like @code{+}, strings of characters between double
2569 quotation marks, or numbers.
2570
2571 @item
2572 A number evaluates to itself.
2573
2574 @item
2575 A string between double quotes also evaluates to itself.
2576
2577 @item
2578 When you evaluate a symbol by itself, its value is returned.
2579
2580 @item
2581 When you evaluate a list, the Lisp interpreter looks at the first symbol
2582 in the list and then at the function definition bound to that symbol.
2583 Then the instructions in the function definition are carried out.
2584
2585 @item
2586 A single quotation mark,
2587 @ifinfo
2588 '
2589 @end ifinfo
2590 @ifnotinfo
2591 @code{'}
2592 @end ifnotinfo
2593 , tells the Lisp interpreter that it should
2594 return the following expression as written, and not evaluate it as it
2595 would if the quote were not there.
2596
2597 @item
2598 Arguments are the information passed to a function. The arguments to a
2599 function are computed by evaluating the rest of the elements of the list
2600 of which the function is the first element.
2601
2602 @item
2603 A function always returns a value when it is evaluated (unless it gets
2604 an error); in addition, it may also carry out some action called a
2605 ``side effect''. In many cases, a function's primary purpose is to
2606 create a side effect.
2607 @end itemize
2608
2609 @node Error Message Exercises, , Summary, List Processing
2610 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2611 @section Exercises
2612
2613 A few simple exercises:
2614
2615 @itemize @bullet
2616 @item
2617 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2618 not within parentheses.
2619
2620 @item
2621 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2622 between parentheses.
2623
2624 @item
2625 Create a counter that increments by two rather than one.
2626
2627 @item
2628 Write an expression that prints a message in the echo area when
2629 evaluated.
2630 @end itemize
2631
2632 @node Practicing Evaluation, Writing Defuns, List Processing, Top
2633 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2634 @chapter Practicing Evaluation
2635 @cindex Practicing evaluation
2636 @cindex Evaluation practice
2637
2638 Before learning how to write a function definition in Emacs Lisp, it is
2639 useful to spend a little time evaluating various expressions that have
2640 already been written. These expressions will be lists with the
2641 functions as their first (and often only) element. Since some of the
2642 functions associated with buffers are both simple and interesting, we
2643 will start with those. In this section, we will evaluate a few of
2644 these. In another section, we will study the code of several other
2645 buffer-related functions, to see how they were written.
2646
2647 @menu
2648 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
2649 causes evaluation.
2650 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
2651 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
2652 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
2653 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
2654 the buffer.
2655 * Evaluation Exercise::
2656 @end menu
2657
2658 @node How to Evaluate, Buffer Names, Practicing Evaluation, Practicing Evaluation
2659 @ifnottex
2660 @unnumberedsec How to Evaluate
2661 @end ifnottex
2662
2663 @i{Whenever you give an editing command} to Emacs Lisp, such as the
2664 command to move the cursor or to scroll the screen, @i{you are evaluating
2665 an expression,} the first element of which is a function. @i{This is
2666 how Emacs works.}
2667
2668 @cindex @samp{interactive function} defined
2669 @cindex @samp{command} defined
2670 When you type keys, you cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate an
2671 expression and that is how you get your results. Even typing plain text
2672 involves evaluating an Emacs Lisp function, in this case, one that uses
2673 @code{self-insert-command}, which simply inserts the character you
2674 typed. The functions you evaluate by typing keystrokes are called
2675 @dfn{interactive} functions, or @dfn{commands}; how you make a function
2676 interactive will be illustrated in the chapter on how to write function
2677 definitions. @xref{Interactive, , Making a Function Interactive}.
2678
2679 In addition to typing keyboard commands, we have seen a second way to
2680 evaluate an expression: by positioning the cursor after a list and
2681 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. This is what we will do in the rest of this
2682 section. There are other ways to evaluate an expression as well; these
2683 will be described as we come to them.
2684
2685 Besides being used for practicing evaluation, the functions shown in the
2686 next few sections are important in their own right. A study of these
2687 functions makes clear the distinction between buffers and files, how to
2688 switch to a buffer, and how to determine a location within it.
2689
2690 @node Buffer Names, Getting Buffers, How to Evaluate, Practicing Evaluation
2691 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2692 @section Buffer Names
2693 @findex buffer-name
2694 @findex buffer-file-name
2695
2696 The two functions, @code{buffer-name} and @code{buffer-file-name}, show
2697 the difference between a file and a buffer. When you evaluate the
2698 following expression, @code{(buffer-name)}, the name of the buffer
2699 appears in the echo area. When you evaluate @code{(buffer-file-name)},
2700 the name of the file to which the buffer refers appears in the echo
2701 area. Usually, the name returned by @code{(buffer-name)} is the same as
2702 the name of the file to which it refers, and the name returned by
2703 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is the full path-name of the file.
2704
2705 A file and a buffer are two different entities. A file is information
2706 recorded permanently in the computer (unless you delete it). A buffer,
2707 on the other hand, is information inside of Emacs that will vanish at
2708 the end of the editing session (or when you kill the buffer). Usually,
2709 a buffer contains information that you have copied from a file; we say
2710 the buffer is @dfn{visiting} that file. This copy is what you work on
2711 and modify. Changes to the buffer do not change the file, until you
2712 save the buffer. When you save the buffer, the buffer is copied to the file
2713 and is thus saved permanently.
2714
2715 @need 1250
2716 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
2717 each of the following expressions by positioning the cursor after it and
2718 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2719
2720 @example
2721 @group
2722 (buffer-name)
2723
2724 (buffer-file-name)
2725 @end group
2726 @end example
2727
2728 @noindent
2729 When I do this in Info, the value returned by evaluating
2730 @code{(buffer-name)} is @file{"*info*"}, and the value returned by
2731 evaluating @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}.
2732
2733 On the other hand, while I am writing this document, the value
2734 returned by evaluating @code{(buffer-name)} is
2735 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}, and the value returned by evaluating
2736 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is
2737 @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2738
2739 @cindex @code{nil}, history of word
2740 The former is the name of the buffer and the latter is the name of the
2741 file. In Info, the buffer name is @file{"*info*"}. Info does not
2742 point to any file, so the result of evaluating
2743 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}. The symbol @code{nil} is
2744 from the Latin word for `nothing'; in this case, it means that the
2745 buffer is not associated with any file. (In Lisp, @code{nil} is also
2746 used to mean `false' and is a synonym for the empty list, @code{()}.)
2747
2748 When I am writing, the name of my buffer is
2749 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}. The name of the file to which it
2750 points is @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2751
2752 (In the expressions, the parentheses tell the Lisp interpreter to
2753 treat @w{@code{buffer-name}} and @w{@code{buffer-file-name}} as
2754 functions; without the parentheses, the interpreter would attempt to
2755 evaluate the symbols as variables. @xref{Variables}.)
2756
2757 In spite of the distinction between files and buffers, you will often
2758 find that people refer to a file when they mean a buffer and vice-verse.
2759 Indeed, most people say, ``I am editing a file,'' rather than saying,
2760 ``I am editing a buffer which I will soon save to a file.'' It is
2761 almost always clear from context what people mean. When dealing with
2762 computer programs, however, it is important to keep the distinction in mind,
2763 since the computer is not as smart as a person.
2764
2765 @cindex Buffer, history of word
2766 The word `buffer', by the way, comes from the meaning of the word as a
2767 cushion that deadens the force of a collision. In early computers, a
2768 buffer cushioned the interaction between files and the computer's
2769 central processing unit. The drums or tapes that held a file and the
2770 central processing unit were pieces of equipment that were very
2771 different from each other, working at their own speeds, in spurts. The
2772 buffer made it possible for them to work together effectively.
2773 Eventually, the buffer grew from being an intermediary, a temporary
2774 holding place, to being the place where work is done. This
2775 transformation is rather like that of a small seaport that grew into a
2776 great city: once it was merely the place where cargo was warehoused
2777 temporarily before being loaded onto ships; then it became a business
2778 and cultural center in its own right.
2779
2780 Not all buffers are associated with files. For example, a
2781 @file{*scratch*} buffer does not visit any file. Similarly, a
2782 @file{*Help*} buffer is not associated with any file.
2783
2784 In the old days, when you lacked a @file{~/.emacs} file and started an
2785 Emacs session by typing the command @code{emacs} alone, without naming
2786 any files, Emacs started with the @file{*scratch*} buffer visible.
2787 Nowadays, you will see a splash screen. You can follow one of the
2788 commands suggested on the splash screen, visit a file, or press the
2789 spacebar to reach the @file{*scratch*} buffer.
2790
2791 If you switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer, type
2792 @code{(buffer-name)}, position the cursor after it, and then type
2793 @kbd{C-x C-e} to evaluate the expression. The name @code{"*scratch*"}
2794 will be returned and will appear in the echo area. @code{"*scratch*"}
2795 is the name of the buffer. When you type @code{(buffer-file-name)} in
2796 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate that, @code{nil} will appear
2797 in the echo area, just as it does when you evaluate
2798 @code{(buffer-file-name)} in Info.
2799
2800 Incidentally, if you are in the @file{*scratch*} buffer and want the
2801 value returned by an expression to appear in the @file{*scratch*}
2802 buffer itself rather than in the echo area, type @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
2803 instead of @kbd{C-x C-e}. This causes the value returned to appear
2804 after the expression. The buffer will look like this:
2805
2806 @smallexample
2807 (buffer-name)"*scratch*"
2808 @end smallexample
2809
2810 @noindent
2811 You cannot do this in Info since Info is read-only and it will not allow
2812 you to change the contents of the buffer. But you can do this in any
2813 buffer you can edit; and when you write code or documentation (such as
2814 this book), this feature is very useful.
2815
2816 @node Getting Buffers, Switching Buffers, Buffer Names, Practicing Evaluation
2817 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2818 @section Getting Buffers
2819 @findex current-buffer
2820 @findex other-buffer
2821 @cindex Getting a buffer
2822
2823 The @code{buffer-name} function returns the @emph{name} of the buffer;
2824 to get the buffer @emph{itself}, a different function is needed: the
2825 @code{current-buffer} function. If you use this function in code, what
2826 you get is the buffer itself.
2827
2828 A name and the object or entity to which the name refers are different
2829 from each other. You are not your name. You are a person to whom
2830 others refer by name. If you ask to speak to George and someone hands you
2831 a card with the letters @samp{G}, @samp{e}, @samp{o}, @samp{r},
2832 @samp{g}, and @samp{e} written on it, you might be amused, but you would
2833 not be satisfied. You do not want to speak to the name, but to the
2834 person to whom the name refers. A buffer is similar: the name of the
2835 scratch buffer is @file{*scratch*}, but the name is not the buffer. To
2836 get a buffer itself, you need to use a function such as
2837 @code{current-buffer}.
2838
2839 However, there is a slight complication: if you evaluate
2840 @code{current-buffer} in an expression on its own, as we will do here,
2841 what you see is a printed representation of the name of the buffer
2842 without the contents of the buffer. Emacs works this way for two
2843 reasons: the buffer may be thousands of lines long---too long to be
2844 conveniently displayed; and, another buffer may have the same contents
2845 but a different name, and it is important to distinguish between them.
2846
2847 @need 800
2848 Here is an expression containing the function:
2849
2850 @smallexample
2851 (current-buffer)
2852 @end smallexample
2853
2854 @noindent
2855 If you evaluate this expression in Info in Emacs in the usual way,
2856 @file{#<buffer *info*>} will appear in the echo area. The special
2857 format indicates that the buffer itself is being returned, rather than
2858 just its name.
2859
2860 Incidentally, while you can type a number or symbol into a program, you
2861 cannot do that with the printed representation of a buffer: the only way
2862 to get a buffer itself is with a function such as @code{current-buffer}.
2863
2864 A related function is @code{other-buffer}. This returns the most
2865 recently selected buffer other than the one you are in currently, not
2866 a printed representation of its name. If you have recently switched
2867 back and forth from the @file{*scratch*} buffer, @code{other-buffer}
2868 will return that buffer.
2869
2870 @need 800
2871 You can see this by evaluating the expression:
2872
2873 @smallexample
2874 (other-buffer)
2875 @end smallexample
2876
2877 @noindent
2878 You should see @file{#<buffer *scratch*>} appear in the echo area, or
2879 the name of whatever other buffer you switched back from most
2880 recently@footnote{Actually, by default, if the buffer from which you
2881 just switched is visible to you in another window, @code{other-buffer}
2882 will choose the most recent buffer that you cannot see; this is a
2883 subtlety that I often forget.}.
2884
2885 @node Switching Buffers, Buffer Size & Locations, Getting Buffers, Practicing Evaluation
2886 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2887 @section Switching Buffers
2888 @findex switch-to-buffer
2889 @findex set-buffer
2890 @cindex Switching to a buffer
2891
2892 The @code{other-buffer} function actually provides a buffer when it is
2893 used as an argument to a function that requires one. We can see this
2894 by using @code{other-buffer} and @code{switch-to-buffer} to switch to a
2895 different buffer.
2896
2897 But first, a brief introduction to the @code{switch-to-buffer}
2898 function. When you switched back and forth from Info to the
2899 @file{*scratch*} buffer to evaluate @code{(buffer-name)}, you most
2900 likely typed @kbd{C-x b} and then typed @file{*scratch*}@footnote{Or
2901 rather, to save typing, you probably only typed @kbd{RET} if the
2902 default buffer was @file{*scratch*}, or if it was different, then you
2903 typed just part of the name, such as @code{*sc}, pressed your
2904 @kbd{TAB} key to cause it to expand to the full name, and then typed
2905 your @kbd{RET} key.} when prompted in the minibuffer for the name of
2906 the buffer to which you wanted to switch. The keystrokes, @kbd{C-x
2907 b}, cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate the interactive function
2908 @code{switch-to-buffer}. As we said before, this is how Emacs works:
2909 different keystrokes call or run different functions. For example,
2910 @kbd{C-f} calls @code{forward-char}, @kbd{M-e} calls
2911 @code{forward-sentence}, and so on.
2912
2913 By writing @code{switch-to-buffer} in an expression, and giving it a
2914 buffer to switch to, we can switch buffers just the way @kbd{C-x b}
2915 does.
2916
2917 @need 1000
2918 Here is the Lisp expression:
2919
2920 @smallexample
2921 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer))
2922 @end smallexample
2923
2924 @noindent
2925 The symbol @code{switch-to-buffer} is the first element of the list,
2926 so the Lisp interpreter will treat it as a function and carry out the
2927 instructions that are attached to it. But before doing that, the
2928 interpreter will note that @code{other-buffer} is inside parentheses
2929 and work on that symbol first. @code{other-buffer} is the first (and
2930 in this case, the only) element of this list, so the Lisp interpreter
2931 calls or runs the function. It returns another buffer. Next, the
2932 interpreter runs @code{switch-to-buffer}, passing to it, as an
2933 argument, the other buffer, which is what Emacs will switch to. If
2934 you are reading this in Info, try this now. Evaluate the expression.
2935 (To get back, type @kbd{C-x b @key{RET}}.)@footnote{Remember, this
2936 expression will move you to your most recent other buffer that you
2937 cannot see. If you really want to go to your most recently selected
2938 buffer, even if you can still see it, you need to evaluate the
2939 following more complex expression:
2940
2941 @smallexample
2942 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
2943 @end smallexample
2944
2945 @c noindent
2946 In this case, the first argument to @code{other-buffer} tells it which
2947 buffer to skip---the current one---and the second argument tells
2948 @code{other-buffer} it is OK to switch to a visible buffer.
2949 In regular use, @code{switch-to-buffer} takes you to an invisible
2950 window since you would most likely use @kbd{C-x o} (@code{other-window})
2951 to go to another visible buffer.}
2952
2953 In the programming examples in later sections of this document, you will
2954 see the function @code{set-buffer} more often than
2955 @code{switch-to-buffer}. This is because of a difference between
2956 computer programs and humans: humans have eyes and expect to see the
2957 buffer on which they are working on their computer terminals. This is
2958 so obvious, it almost goes without saying. However, programs do not
2959 have eyes. When a computer program works on a buffer, that buffer does
2960 not need to be visible on the screen.
2961
2962 @code{switch-to-buffer} is designed for humans and does two different
2963 things: it switches the buffer to which Emacs' attention is directed; and
2964 it switches the buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer.
2965 @code{set-buffer}, on the other hand, does only one thing: it switches
2966 the attention of the computer program to a different buffer. The buffer
2967 on the screen remains unchanged (of course, normally nothing happens
2968 there until the command finishes running).
2969
2970 @cindex @samp{call} defined
2971 Also, we have just introduced another jargon term, the word @dfn{call}.
2972 When you evaluate a list in which the first symbol is a function, you
2973 are calling that function. The use of the term comes from the notion of
2974 the function as an entity that can do something for you if you `call'
2975 it---just as a plumber is an entity who can fix a leak if you call him
2976 or her.
2977
2978 @node Buffer Size & Locations, Evaluation Exercise, Switching Buffers, Practicing Evaluation
2979 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2980 @section Buffer Size and the Location of Point
2981 @cindex Size of buffer
2982 @cindex Buffer size
2983 @cindex Point location
2984 @cindex Location of point
2985
2986 Finally, let's look at several rather simple functions,
2987 @code{buffer-size}, @code{point}, @code{point-min}, and
2988 @code{point-max}. These give information about the size of a buffer and
2989 the location of point within it.
2990
2991 The function @code{buffer-size} tells you the size of the current
2992 buffer; that is, the function returns a count of the number of
2993 characters in the buffer.
2994
2995 @smallexample
2996 (buffer-size)
2997 @end smallexample
2998
2999 @noindent
3000 You can evaluate this in the usual way, by positioning the
3001 cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3002
3003 @cindex @samp{point} defined
3004 In Emacs, the current position of the cursor is called @dfn{point}.
3005 The expression @code{(point)} returns a number that tells you where the
3006 cursor is located as a count of the number of characters from the
3007 beginning of the buffer up to point.
3008
3009 @need 1250
3010 You can see the character count for point in this buffer by evaluating
3011 the following expression in the usual way:
3012
3013 @smallexample
3014 (point)
3015 @end smallexample
3016
3017 @noindent
3018 As I write this, the value of @code{point} is 65724. The @code{point}
3019 function is frequently used in some of the examples later in this
3020 book.
3021
3022 @need 1250
3023 The value of point depends, of course, on its location within the
3024 buffer. If you evaluate point in this spot, the number will be larger:
3025
3026 @smallexample
3027 (point)
3028 @end smallexample
3029
3030 @noindent
3031 For me, the value of point in this location is 66043, which means that
3032 there are 319 characters (including spaces) between the two
3033 expressions. (Doubtless, you will see different numbers, since I will
3034 have edited this since I first evaluated point.)
3035
3036 @cindex @samp{narrowing} defined
3037 The function @code{point-min} is somewhat similar to @code{point}, but
3038 it returns the value of the minimum permissible value of point in the
3039 current buffer. This is the number 1 unless @dfn{narrowing} is in
3040 effect. (Narrowing is a mechanism whereby you can restrict yourself,
3041 or a program, to operations on just a part of a buffer.
3042 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}.) Likewise, the
3043 function @code{point-max} returns the value of the maximum permissible
3044 value of point in the current buffer.
3045
3046 @node Evaluation Exercise, , Buffer Size & Locations, Practicing Evaluation
3047 @section Exercise
3048
3049 Find a file with which you are working and move towards its middle.
3050 Find its buffer name, file name, length, and your position in the file.
3051
3052 @node Writing Defuns, Buffer Walk Through, Practicing Evaluation, Top
3053 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3054 @chapter How To Write Function Definitions
3055 @cindex Definition writing
3056 @cindex Function definition writing
3057 @cindex Writing a function definition
3058
3059 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates a list, it looks to see whether the
3060 first symbol on the list has a function definition attached to it; or,
3061 put another way, whether the symbol points to a function definition. If
3062 it does, the computer carries out the instructions in the definition. A
3063 symbol that has a function definition is called, simply, a function
3064 (although, properly speaking, the definition is the function and the
3065 symbol refers to it.)
3066
3067 @menu
3068 * Primitive Functions::
3069 * defun:: The @code{defun} special form.
3070 * Install:: Install a function definition.
3071 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
3072 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
3073 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
3074 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
3075 * if:: What if?
3076 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
3077 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
3078 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
3079 * Review::
3080 * defun Exercises::
3081 @end menu
3082
3083 @node Primitive Functions, defun, Writing Defuns, Writing Defuns
3084 @ifnottex
3085 @unnumberedsec An Aside about Primitive Functions
3086 @end ifnottex
3087 @cindex Primitive functions
3088 @cindex Functions, primitive
3089
3090 @cindex C language primitives
3091 @cindex Primitives written in C
3092 All functions are defined in terms of other functions, except for a few
3093 @dfn{primitive} functions that are written in the C programming
3094 language. When you write functions' definitions, you will write them in
3095 Emacs Lisp and use other functions as your building blocks. Some of the
3096 functions you will use will themselves be written in Emacs Lisp (perhaps
3097 by you) and some will be primitives written in C. The primitive
3098 functions are used exactly like those written in Emacs Lisp and behave
3099 like them. They are written in C so we can easily run GNU Emacs on any
3100 computer that has sufficient power and can run C.
3101
3102 Let me re-emphasize this: when you write code in Emacs Lisp, you do not
3103 distinguish between the use of functions written in C and the use of
3104 functions written in Emacs Lisp. The difference is irrelevant. I
3105 mention the distinction only because it is interesting to know. Indeed,
3106 unless you investigate, you won't know whether an already-written
3107 function is written in Emacs Lisp or C.
3108
3109 @node defun, Install, Primitive Functions, Writing Defuns
3110 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3111 @section The @code{defun} Special Form
3112 @findex defun
3113 @cindex Special form of @code{defun}
3114
3115 @cindex @samp{function definition} defined
3116 In Lisp, a symbol such as @code{mark-whole-buffer} has code attached to
3117 it that tells the computer what to do when the function is called.
3118 This code is called the @dfn{function definition} and is created by
3119 evaluating a Lisp expression that starts with the symbol @code{defun}
3120 (which is an abbreviation for @emph{define function}). Because
3121 @code{defun} does not evaluate its arguments in the usual way, it is
3122 called a @dfn{special form}.
3123
3124 In subsequent sections, we will look at function definitions from the
3125 Emacs source code, such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}. In this section,
3126 we will describe a simple function definition so you can see how it
3127 looks. This function definition uses arithmetic because it makes for a
3128 simple example. Some people dislike examples using arithmetic; however,
3129 if you are such a person, do not despair. Hardly any of the code we
3130 will study in the remainder of this introduction involves arithmetic or
3131 mathematics. The examples mostly involve text in one way or another.
3132
3133 A function definition has up to five parts following the word
3134 @code{defun}:
3135
3136 @enumerate
3137 @item
3138 The name of the symbol to which the function definition should be
3139 attached.
3140
3141 @item
3142 A list of the arguments that will be passed to the function. If no
3143 arguments will be passed to the function, this is an empty list,
3144 @code{()}.
3145
3146 @item
3147 Documentation describing the function. (Technically optional, but
3148 strongly recommended.)
3149
3150 @item
3151 Optionally, an expression to make the function interactive so you can
3152 use it by typing @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by
3153 typing an appropriate key or keychord.
3154
3155 @cindex @samp{body} defined
3156 @item
3157 The code that instructs the computer what to do: the @dfn{body} of the
3158 function definition.
3159 @end enumerate
3160
3161 It is helpful to think of the five parts of a function definition as
3162 being organized in a template, with slots for each part:
3163
3164 @smallexample
3165 @group
3166 (defun @var{function-name} (@var{arguments}@dots{})
3167 "@var{optional-documentation}@dots{}"
3168 (interactive @var{argument-passing-info}) ; @r{optional}
3169 @var{body}@dots{})
3170 @end group
3171 @end smallexample
3172
3173 As an example, here is the code for a function that multiplies its
3174 argument by 7. (This example is not interactive. @xref{Interactive,
3175 , Making a Function Interactive}, for that information.)
3176
3177 @smallexample
3178 @group
3179 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3180 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3181 (* 7 number))
3182 @end group
3183 @end smallexample
3184
3185 This definition begins with a parenthesis and the symbol @code{defun},
3186 followed by the name of the function.
3187
3188 @cindex @samp{argument list} defined
3189 The name of the function is followed by a list that contains the
3190 arguments that will be passed to the function. This list is called
3191 the @dfn{argument list}. In this example, the list has only one
3192 element, the symbol, @code{number}. When the function is used, the
3193 symbol will be bound to the value that is used as the argument to the
3194 function.
3195
3196 Instead of choosing the word @code{number} for the name of the argument,
3197 I could have picked any other name. For example, I could have chosen
3198 the word @code{multiplicand}. I picked the word `number' because it
3199 tells what kind of value is intended for this slot; but I could just as
3200 well have chosen the word `multiplicand' to indicate the role that the
3201 value placed in this slot will play in the workings of the function. I
3202 could have called it @code{foogle}, but that would have been a bad
3203 choice because it would not tell humans what it means. The choice of
3204 name is up to the programmer and should be chosen to make the meaning of
3205 the function clear.
3206
3207 Indeed, you can choose any name you wish for a symbol in an argument
3208 list, even the name of a symbol used in some other function: the name
3209 you use in an argument list is private to that particular definition.
3210 In that definition, the name refers to a different entity than any use
3211 of the same name outside the function definition. Suppose you have a
3212 nick-name `Shorty' in your family; when your family members refer to
3213 `Shorty', they mean you. But outside your family, in a movie, for
3214 example, the name `Shorty' refers to someone else. Because a name in an
3215 argument list is private to the function definition, you can change the
3216 value of such a symbol inside the body of a function without changing
3217 its value outside the function. The effect is similar to that produced
3218 by a @code{let} expression. (@xref{let, , @code{let}}.)
3219
3220 @ignore
3221 Note also that we discuss the word `number' in two different ways: as a
3222 symbol that appears in the code, and as the name of something that will
3223 be replaced by a something else during the evaluation of the function.
3224 In the first case, @code{number} is a symbol, not a number; it happens
3225 that within the function, it is a variable who value is the number in
3226 question, but our primary interest in it is as a symbol. On the other
3227 hand, when we are talking about the function, our interest is that we
3228 will substitute a number for the word @var{number}. To keep this
3229 distinction clear, we use different typography for the two
3230 circumstances. When we talk about this function, or about how it works,
3231 we refer to this number by writing @var{number}. In the function
3232 itself, we refer to it by writing @code{number}.
3233 @end ignore
3234
3235 The argument list is followed by the documentation string that
3236 describes the function. This is what you see when you type
3237 @w{@kbd{C-h f}} and the name of a function. Incidentally, when you
3238 write a documentation string like this, you should make the first line
3239 a complete sentence since some commands, such as @code{apropos}, print
3240 only the first line of a multi-line documentation string. Also, you
3241 should not indent the second line of a documentation string, if you
3242 have one, because that looks odd when you use @kbd{C-h f}
3243 (@code{describe-function}). The documentation string is optional, but
3244 it is so useful, it should be included in almost every function you
3245 write.
3246
3247 @findex * @r{(multiplication)}
3248 The third line of the example consists of the body of the function
3249 definition. (Most functions' definitions, of course, are longer than
3250 this.) In this function, the body is the list, @code{(* 7 number)}, which
3251 says to multiply the value of @var{number} by 7. (In Emacs Lisp,
3252 @code{*} is the function for multiplication, just as @code{+} is the
3253 function for addition.)
3254
3255 When you use the @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the argument
3256 @code{number} evaluates to the actual number you want used. Here is an
3257 example that shows how @code{multiply-by-seven} is used; but don't try
3258 to evaluate this yet!
3259
3260 @smallexample
3261 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3262 @end smallexample
3263
3264 @noindent
3265 The symbol @code{number}, specified in the function definition in the
3266 next section, is given or ``bound to'' the value 3 in the actual use of
3267 the function. Note that although @code{number} was inside parentheses
3268 in the function definition, the argument passed to the
3269 @code{multiply-by-seven} function is not in parentheses. The
3270 parentheses are written in the function definition so the computer can
3271 figure out where the argument list ends and the rest of the function
3272 definition begins.
3273
3274 If you evaluate this example, you are likely to get an error message.
3275 (Go ahead, try it!) This is because we have written the function
3276 definition, but not yet told the computer about the definition---we have
3277 not yet installed (or `loaded') the function definition in Emacs.
3278 Installing a function is the process that tells the Lisp interpreter the
3279 definition of the function. Installation is described in the next
3280 section.
3281
3282 @node Install, Interactive, defun, Writing Defuns
3283 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3284 @section Install a Function Definition
3285 @cindex Install a Function Definition
3286 @cindex Definition installation
3287 @cindex Function definition installation
3288
3289 If you are reading this inside of Info in Emacs, you can try out the
3290 @code{multiply-by-seven} function by first evaluating the function
3291 definition and then evaluating @code{(multiply-by-seven 3)}. A copy of
3292 the function definition follows. Place the cursor after the last
3293 parenthesis of the function definition and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you
3294 do this, @code{multiply-by-seven} will appear in the echo area. (What
3295 this means is that when a function definition is evaluated, the value it
3296 returns is the name of the defined function.) At the same time, this
3297 action installs the function definition.
3298
3299 @smallexample
3300 @group
3301 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3302 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3303 (* 7 number))
3304 @end group
3305 @end smallexample
3306
3307 @noindent
3308 By evaluating this @code{defun}, you have just installed
3309 @code{multiply-by-seven} in Emacs. The function is now just as much a
3310 part of Emacs as @code{forward-word} or any other editing function you
3311 use. (@code{multiply-by-seven} will stay installed until you quit
3312 Emacs. To reload code automatically whenever you start Emacs, see
3313 @ref{Permanent Installation, , Installing Code Permanently}.)
3314
3315 @menu
3316 * Effect of installation::
3317 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
3318 @end menu
3319
3320 @node Effect of installation, Change a defun, Install, Install
3321 @ifnottex
3322 @unnumberedsubsec The effect of installation
3323 @end ifnottex
3324
3325 You can see the effect of installing @code{multiply-by-seven} by
3326 evaluating the following sample. Place the cursor after the following
3327 expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. The number 21 will appear in the
3328 echo area.
3329
3330 @smallexample
3331 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3332 @end smallexample
3333
3334 If you wish, you can read the documentation for the function by typing
3335 @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and then the name of the
3336 function, @code{multiply-by-seven}. When you do this, a
3337 @file{*Help*} window will appear on your screen that says:
3338
3339 @smallexample
3340 @group
3341 multiply-by-seven is a Lisp function.
3342 (multiply-by-seven NUMBER)
3343
3344 Multiply NUMBER by seven.
3345 @end group
3346 @end smallexample
3347
3348 @noindent
3349 (To return to a single window on your screen, type @kbd{C-x 1}.)
3350
3351 @node Change a defun, , Effect of installation, Install
3352 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3353 @subsection Change a Function Definition
3354 @cindex Changing a function definition
3355 @cindex Function definition, how to change
3356 @cindex Definition, how to change
3357
3358 If you want to change the code in @code{multiply-by-seven}, just rewrite
3359 it. To install the new version in place of the old one, evaluate the
3360 function definition again. This is how you modify code in Emacs. It is
3361 very simple.
3362
3363 As an example, you can change the @code{multiply-by-seven} function to
3364 add the number to itself seven times instead of multiplying the number
3365 by seven. It produces the same answer, but by a different path. At
3366 the same time, we will add a comment to the code; a comment is text
3367 that the Lisp interpreter ignores, but that a human reader may find
3368 useful or enlightening. The comment is that this is the ``second
3369 version''.
3370
3371 @smallexample
3372 @group
3373 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Second version.}
3374 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3375 (+ number number number number number number number))
3376 @end group
3377 @end smallexample
3378
3379 @cindex Comments in Lisp code
3380 The comment follows a semicolon, @samp{;}. In Lisp, everything on a
3381 line that follows a semicolon is a comment. The end of the line is the
3382 end of the comment. To stretch a comment over two or more lines, begin
3383 each line with a semicolon.
3384
3385 @xref{Beginning a .emacs File, , Beginning a @file{.emacs}
3386 File}, and @ref{Comments, , Comments, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
3387 Reference Manual}, for more about comments.
3388
3389 You can install this version of the @code{multiply-by-seven} function by
3390 evaluating it in the same way you evaluated the first function: place
3391 the cursor after the last parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3392
3393 In summary, this is how you write code in Emacs Lisp: you write a
3394 function; install it; test it; and then make fixes or enhancements and
3395 install it again.
3396
3397 @node Interactive, Interactive Options, Install, Writing Defuns
3398 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3399 @section Make a Function Interactive
3400 @cindex Interactive functions
3401 @findex interactive
3402
3403 You make a function interactive by placing a list that begins with
3404 the special form @code{interactive} immediately after the
3405 documentation. A user can invoke an interactive function by typing
3406 @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by typing the keys to
3407 which it is bound, for example, by typing @kbd{C-n} for
3408 @code{next-line} or @kbd{C-x h} for @code{mark-whole-buffer}.
3409
3410 Interestingly, when you call an interactive function interactively,
3411 the value returned is not automatically displayed in the echo area.
3412 This is because you often call an interactive function for its side
3413 effects, such as moving forward by a word or line, and not for the
3414 value returned. If the returned value were displayed in the echo area
3415 each time you typed a key, it would be very distracting.
3416
3417 @menu
3418 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
3419 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
3420 @end menu
3421
3422 @node Interactive multiply-by-seven, multiply-by-seven in detail, Interactive, Interactive
3423 @ifnottex
3424 @unnumberedsubsec An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}, An Overview
3425 @end ifnottex
3426
3427 Both the use of the special form @code{interactive} and one way to
3428 display a value in the echo area can be illustrated by creating an
3429 interactive version of @code{multiply-by-seven}.
3430
3431 @need 1250
3432 Here is the code:
3433
3434 @smallexample
3435 @group
3436 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3437 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3438 (interactive "p")
3439 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3440 @end group
3441 @end smallexample
3442
3443 @noindent
3444 You can install this code by placing your cursor after it and typing
3445 @kbd{C-x C-e}. The name of the function will appear in your echo area.
3446 Then, you can use this code by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number and then
3447 typing @kbd{M-x multiply-by-seven} and pressing @key{RET}. The phrase
3448 @samp{The result is @dots{}} followed by the product will appear in the
3449 echo area.
3450
3451 Speaking more generally, you invoke a function like this in either of two
3452 ways:
3453
3454 @enumerate
3455 @item
3456 By typing a prefix argument that contains the number to be passed, and
3457 then typing @kbd{M-x} and the name of the function, as with
3458 @kbd{C-u 3 M-x forward-sentence}; or,
3459
3460 @item
3461 By typing whatever key or keychord the function is bound to, as with
3462 @kbd{C-u 3 M-e}.
3463 @end enumerate
3464
3465 @noindent
3466 Both the examples just mentioned work identically to move point forward
3467 three sentences. (Since @code{multiply-by-seven} is not bound to a key,
3468 it could not be used as an example of key binding.)
3469
3470 (@xref{Keybindings, , Some Keybindings}, to learn how to bind a command
3471 to a key.)
3472
3473 A prefix argument is passed to an interactive function by typing the
3474 @key{META} key followed by a number, for example, @kbd{M-3 M-e}, or by
3475 typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number, for example, @kbd{C-u 3 M-e} (if you
3476 type @kbd{C-u} without a number, it defaults to 4).
3477
3478 @node multiply-by-seven in detail, , Interactive multiply-by-seven, Interactive
3479 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3480 @subsection An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}
3481
3482 Let's look at the use of the special form @code{interactive} and then at
3483 the function @code{message} in the interactive version of
3484 @code{multiply-by-seven}. You will recall that the function definition
3485 looks like this:
3486
3487 @smallexample
3488 @group
3489 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3490 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3491 (interactive "p")
3492 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3493 @end group
3494 @end smallexample
3495
3496 In this function, the expression, @code{(interactive "p")}, is a list of
3497 two elements. The @code{"p"} tells Emacs to pass the prefix argument to
3498 the function and use its value for the argument of the function.
3499
3500 @need 1000
3501 The argument will be a number. This means that the symbol
3502 @code{number} will be bound to a number in the line:
3503
3504 @smallexample
3505 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number))
3506 @end smallexample
3507
3508 @need 1250
3509 @noindent
3510 For example, if your prefix argument is 5, the Lisp interpreter will
3511 evaluate the line as if it were:
3512
3513 @smallexample
3514 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 5))
3515 @end smallexample
3516
3517 @noindent
3518 (If you are reading this in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate this expression
3519 yourself.) First, the interpreter will evaluate the inner list, which
3520 is @code{(* 7 5)}. This returns a value of 35. Next, it
3521 will evaluate the outer list, passing the values of the second and
3522 subsequent elements of the list to the function @code{message}.
3523
3524 As we have seen, @code{message} is an Emacs Lisp function especially
3525 designed for sending a one line message to a user. (@xref{message, ,
3526 The @code{message} function}.) In summary, the @code{message}
3527 function prints its first argument in the echo area as is, except for
3528 occurrences of @samp{%d} or @samp{%s} (and various other %-sequences
3529 which we have not mentioned). When it sees a control sequence, the
3530 function looks to the second or subsequent arguments and prints the
3531 value of the argument in the location in the string where the control
3532 sequence is located.
3533
3534 In the interactive @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the control string
3535 is @samp{%d}, which requires a number, and the value returned by
3536 evaluating @code{(* 7 5)} is the number 35. Consequently, the number 35
3537 is printed in place of the @samp{%d} and the message is @samp{The result
3538 is 35}.
3539
3540 (Note that when you call the function @code{multiply-by-seven}, the
3541 message is printed without quotes, but when you call @code{message}, the
3542 text is printed in double quotes. This is because the value returned by
3543 @code{message} is what appears in the echo area when you evaluate an
3544 expression whose first element is @code{message}; but when embedded in a
3545 function, @code{message} prints the text as a side effect without
3546 quotes.)
3547
3548 @node Interactive Options, Permanent Installation, Interactive, Writing Defuns
3549 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3550 @section Different Options for @code{interactive}
3551 @cindex Options for @code{interactive}
3552 @cindex Interactive options
3553
3554 In the example, @code{multiply-by-seven} used @code{"p"} as the
3555 argument to @code{interactive}. This argument told Emacs to interpret
3556 your typing either @kbd{C-u} followed by a number or @key{META}
3557 followed by a number as a command to pass that number to the function
3558 as its argument. Emacs has more than twenty characters predefined for
3559 use with @code{interactive}. In almost every case, one of these
3560 options will enable you to pass the right information interactively to
3561 a function. (@xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for
3562 @code{interactive}, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
3563
3564 @need 1250
3565 Consider the function @code{zap-to-char}. Its interactive expression
3566 is
3567
3568 @smallexample
3569 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3570 @end smallexample
3571
3572 The first part of the argument to @code{interactive} is @samp{p}, with
3573 which you are already familiar. This argument tells Emacs to
3574 interpret a `prefix', as a number to be passed to the function. You
3575 can specify a prefix either by typing @kbd{C-u} followed by a number
3576 or by typing @key{META} followed by a number. The prefix is the
3577 number of specified characters. Thus, if your prefix is three and the
3578 specified character is @samp{x}, then you will delete all the text up
3579 to and including the third next @samp{x}. If you do not set a prefix,
3580 then you delete all the text up to and including the specified
3581 character, but no more.
3582
3583 The @samp{c} tells the function the name of the character to which to delete.
3584
3585 More formally, a function with two or more arguments can have
3586 information passed to each argument by adding parts to the string that
3587 follows @code{interactive}. When you do this, the information is
3588 passed to each argument in the same order it is specified in the
3589 @code{interactive} list. In the string, each part is separated from
3590 the next part by a @samp{\n}, which is a newline. For example, you
3591 can follow @samp{p} with a @samp{\n} and an @samp{cZap to char:@: }.
3592 This causes Emacs to pass the value of the prefix argument (if there
3593 is one) and the character.
3594
3595 In this case, the function definition looks like the following, where
3596 @code{arg} and @code{char} are the symbols to which @code{interactive}
3597 binds the prefix argument and the specified character:
3598
3599 @smallexample
3600 @group
3601 (defun @var{name-of-function} (arg char)
3602 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3603 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3604 @var{body-of-function}@dots{})
3605 @end group
3606 @end smallexample
3607
3608 @noindent
3609 (The space after the colon in the prompt makes it look better when you
3610 are prompted. @xref{copy-to-buffer, , The Definition of
3611 @code{copy-to-buffer}}, for an example.)
3612
3613 When a function does not take arguments, @code{interactive} does not
3614 require any. Such a function contains the simple expression
3615 @code{(interactive)}. The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is like
3616 this.
3617
3618 Alternatively, if the special letter-codes are not right for your
3619 application, you can pass your own arguments to @code{interactive} as
3620 a list.
3621
3622 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}},
3623 for an example. @xref{Using Interactive, , Using @code{Interactive},
3624 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a more complete
3625 explanation about this technique.
3626
3627 @node Permanent Installation, let, Interactive Options, Writing Defuns
3628 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3629 @section Install Code Permanently
3630 @cindex Install code permanently
3631 @cindex Permanent code installation
3632 @cindex Code installation
3633
3634 When you install a function definition by evaluating it, it will stay
3635 installed until you quit Emacs. The next time you start a new session
3636 of Emacs, the function will not be installed unless you evaluate the
3637 function definition again.
3638
3639 At some point, you may want to have code installed automatically
3640 whenever you start a new session of Emacs. There are several ways of
3641 doing this:
3642
3643 @itemize @bullet
3644 @item
3645 If you have code that is just for yourself, you can put the code for the
3646 function definition in your @file{.emacs} initialization file. When you
3647 start Emacs, your @file{.emacs} file is automatically evaluated and all
3648 the function definitions within it are installed.
3649 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
3650
3651 @item
3652 Alternatively, you can put the function definitions that you want
3653 installed in one or more files of their own and use the @code{load}
3654 function to cause Emacs to evaluate and thereby install each of the
3655 functions in the files.
3656 @xref{Loading Files, , Loading Files}.
3657
3658 @item
3659 Thirdly, if you have code that your whole site will use, it is usual
3660 to put it in a file called @file{site-init.el} that is loaded when
3661 Emacs is built. This makes the code available to everyone who uses
3662 your machine. (See the @file{INSTALL} file that is part of the Emacs
3663 distribution.)
3664 @end itemize
3665
3666 Finally, if you have code that everyone who uses Emacs may want, you
3667 can post it on a computer network or send a copy to the Free Software
3668 Foundation. (When you do this, please license the code and its
3669 documentation under a license that permits other people to run, copy,
3670 study, modify, and redistribute the code and which protects you from
3671 having your work taken from you.) If you send a copy of your code to
3672 the Free Software Foundation, and properly protect yourself and
3673 others, it may be included in the next release of Emacs. In large
3674 part, this is how Emacs has grown over the past years, by donations.
3675
3676 @node let, if, Permanent Installation, Writing Defuns
3677 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3678 @section @code{let}
3679 @findex let
3680
3681 The @code{let} expression is a special form in Lisp that you will need
3682 to use in most function definitions.
3683
3684 @code{let} is used to attach or bind a symbol to a value in such a way
3685 that the Lisp interpreter will not confuse the variable with a
3686 variable of the same name that is not part of the function.
3687
3688 To understand why the @code{let} special form is necessary, consider
3689 the situation in which you own a home that you generally refer to as
3690 `the house', as in the sentence, ``The house needs painting.'' If you
3691 are visiting a friend and your host refers to `the house', he is
3692 likely to be referring to @emph{his} house, not yours, that is, to a
3693 different house.
3694
3695 If your friend is referring to his house and you think he is referring
3696 to your house, you may be in for some confusion. The same thing could
3697 happen in Lisp if a variable that is used inside of one function has
3698 the same name as a variable that is used inside of another function,
3699 and the two are not intended to refer to the same value. The
3700 @code{let} special form prevents this kind of confusion.
3701
3702 @menu
3703 * Prevent confusion::
3704 * Parts of let Expression::
3705 * Sample let Expression::
3706 * Uninitialized let Variables::
3707 @end menu
3708
3709 @node Prevent confusion, Parts of let Expression, let, let
3710 @ifnottex
3711 @unnumberedsubsec @code{let} Prevents Confusion
3712 @end ifnottex
3713
3714 @cindex @samp{local variable} defined
3715 @cindex @samp{variable, local}, defined
3716 The @code{let} special form prevents confusion. @code{let} creates a
3717 name for a @dfn{local variable} that overshadows any use of the same
3718 name outside the @code{let} expression. This is like understanding
3719 that whenever your host refers to `the house', he means his house, not
3720 yours. (Symbols used in argument lists work the same way.
3721 @xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
3722
3723 Local variables created by a @code{let} expression retain their value
3724 @emph{only} within the @code{let} expression itself (and within
3725 expressions called within the @code{let} expression); the local
3726 variables have no effect outside the @code{let} expression.
3727
3728 Another way to think about @code{let} is that it is like a @code{setq}
3729 that is temporary and local. The values set by @code{let} are
3730 automatically undone when the @code{let} is finished. The setting
3731 only affects expressions that are inside the bounds of the @code{let}
3732 expression. In computer science jargon, we would say ``the binding of
3733 a symbol is visible only in functions called in the @code{let} form;
3734 in Emacs Lisp, scoping is dynamic, not lexical.''
3735
3736 @code{let} can create more than one variable at once. Also,
3737 @code{let} gives each variable it creates an initial value, either a
3738 value specified by you, or @code{nil}. (In the jargon, this is called
3739 `binding the variable to the value'.) After @code{let} has created
3740 and bound the variables, it executes the code in the body of the
3741 @code{let}, and returns the value of the last expression in the body,
3742 as the value of the whole @code{let} expression. (`Execute' is a jargon
3743 term that means to evaluate a list; it comes from the use of the word
3744 meaning `to give practical effect to' (@cite{Oxford English
3745 Dictionary}). Since you evaluate an expression to perform an action,
3746 `execute' has evolved as a synonym to `evaluate'.)
3747
3748 @node Parts of let Expression, Sample let Expression, Prevent confusion, let
3749 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3750 @subsection The Parts of a @code{let} Expression
3751 @cindex @code{let} expression, parts of
3752 @cindex Parts of @code{let} expression
3753
3754 @cindex @samp{varlist} defined
3755 A @code{let} expression is a list of three parts. The first part is
3756 the symbol @code{let}. The second part is a list, called a
3757 @dfn{varlist}, each element of which is either a symbol by itself or a
3758 two-element list, the first element of which is a symbol. The third
3759 part of the @code{let} expression is the body of the @code{let}. The
3760 body usually consists of one or more lists.
3761
3762 @need 800
3763 A template for a @code{let} expression looks like this:
3764
3765 @smallexample
3766 (let @var{varlist} @var{body}@dots{})
3767 @end smallexample
3768
3769 @noindent
3770 The symbols in the varlist are the variables that are given initial
3771 values by the @code{let} special form. Symbols by themselves are given
3772 the initial value of @code{nil}; and each symbol that is the first
3773 element of a two-element list is bound to the value that is returned
3774 when the Lisp interpreter evaluates the second element.
3775
3776 Thus, a varlist might look like this: @code{(thread (needles 3))}. In
3777 this case, in a @code{let} expression, Emacs binds the symbol
3778 @code{thread} to an initial value of @code{nil}, and binds the symbol
3779 @code{needles} to an initial value of 3.
3780
3781 When you write a @code{let} expression, what you do is put the
3782 appropriate expressions in the slots of the @code{let} expression
3783 template.
3784
3785 If the varlist is composed of two-element lists, as is often the case,
3786 the template for the @code{let} expression looks like this:
3787
3788 @smallexample
3789 @group
3790 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value})
3791 (@var{variable} @var{value})
3792 @dots{})
3793 @var{body}@dots{})
3794 @end group
3795 @end smallexample
3796
3797 @node Sample let Expression, Uninitialized let Variables, Parts of let Expression, let
3798 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3799 @subsection Sample @code{let} Expression
3800 @cindex Sample @code{let} expression
3801 @cindex @code{let} expression sample
3802
3803 The following expression creates and gives initial values
3804 to the two variables @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. The body of the
3805 @code{let} expression is a list which calls the @code{message} function.
3806
3807 @smallexample
3808 @group
3809 (let ((zebra 'stripes)
3810 (tiger 'fierce))
3811 (message "One kind of animal has %s and another is %s."
3812 zebra tiger))
3813 @end group
3814 @end smallexample
3815
3816 Here, the varlist is @code{((zebra 'stripes) (tiger 'fierce))}.
3817
3818 The two variables are @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. Each variable is
3819 the first element of a two-element list and each value is the second
3820 element of its two-element list. In the varlist, Emacs binds the
3821 variable @code{zebra} to the value @code{stripes}@footnote{According
3822 to Jared Diamond in @cite{Guns, Germs, and Steel}, ``@dots{} zebras
3823 become impossibly dangerous as they grow older'' but the claim here is
3824 that they do not become fierce like a tiger. (1997, W. W. Norton and
3825 Co., ISBN 0-393-03894-2, page 171)}, and binds the
3826 variable @code{tiger} to the value @code{fierce}. In this example,
3827 both values are symbols preceded by a quote. The values could just as
3828 well have been another list or a string. The body of the @code{let}
3829 follows after the list holding the variables. In this example, the
3830 body is a list that uses the @code{message} function to print a string
3831 in the echo area.
3832
3833 @need 1500
3834 You may evaluate the example in the usual fashion, by placing the
3835 cursor after the last parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you do
3836 this, the following will appear in the echo area:
3837
3838 @smallexample
3839 "One kind of animal has stripes and another is fierce."
3840 @end smallexample
3841
3842 As we have seen before, the @code{message} function prints its first
3843 argument, except for @samp{%s}. In this example, the value of the variable
3844 @code{zebra} is printed at the location of the first @samp{%s} and the
3845 value of the variable @code{tiger} is printed at the location of the
3846 second @samp{%s}.
3847
3848 @node Uninitialized let Variables, , Sample let Expression, let
3849 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3850 @subsection Uninitialized Variables in a @code{let} Statement
3851 @cindex Uninitialized @code{let} variables
3852 @cindex @code{let} variables uninitialized
3853
3854 If you do not bind the variables in a @code{let} statement to specific
3855 initial values, they will automatically be bound to an initial value of
3856 @code{nil}, as in the following expression:
3857
3858 @smallexample
3859 @group
3860 (let ((birch 3)
3861 pine
3862 fir
3863 (oak 'some))
3864 (message
3865 "Here are %d variables with %s, %s, and %s value."
3866 birch pine fir oak))
3867 @end group
3868 @end smallexample
3869
3870 @noindent
3871 Here, the varlist is @code{((birch 3) pine fir (oak 'some))}.
3872
3873 @need 1250
3874 If you evaluate this expression in the usual way, the following will
3875 appear in your echo area:
3876
3877 @smallexample
3878 "Here are 3 variables with nil, nil, and some value."
3879 @end smallexample
3880
3881 @noindent
3882 In this example, Emacs binds the symbol @code{birch} to the number 3,
3883 binds the symbols @code{pine} and @code{fir} to @code{nil}, and binds
3884 the symbol @code{oak} to the value @code{some}.
3885
3886 Note that in the first part of the @code{let}, the variables @code{pine}
3887 and @code{fir} stand alone as atoms that are not surrounded by
3888 parentheses; this is because they are being bound to @code{nil}, the
3889 empty list. But @code{oak} is bound to @code{some} and so is a part of
3890 the list @code{(oak 'some)}. Similarly, @code{birch} is bound to the
3891 number 3 and so is in a list with that number. (Since a number
3892 evaluates to itself, the number does not need to be quoted. Also, the
3893 number is printed in the message using a @samp{%d} rather than a
3894 @samp{%s}.) The four variables as a group are put into a list to
3895 delimit them from the body of the @code{let}.
3896
3897 @node if, else, let, Writing Defuns
3898 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3899 @section The @code{if} Special Form
3900 @findex if
3901 @cindex Conditional with @code{if}
3902
3903 A third special form, in addition to @code{defun} and @code{let}, is the
3904 conditional @code{if}. This form is used to instruct the computer to
3905 make decisions. You can write function definitions without using
3906 @code{if}, but it is used often enough, and is important enough, to be
3907 included here. It is used, for example, in the code for the
3908 function @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
3909
3910 The basic idea behind an @code{if}, is that ``@emph{if} a test is true,
3911 @emph{then} an expression is evaluated.'' If the test is not true, the
3912 expression is not evaluated. For example, you might make a decision
3913 such as, ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to the beach!''
3914
3915 @menu
3916 * if in more detail::
3917 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
3918 @end menu
3919
3920 @node if in more detail, type-of-animal in detail, if, if
3921 @ifnottex
3922 @unnumberedsubsec @code{if} in more detail
3923 @end ifnottex
3924
3925 @cindex @samp{if-part} defined
3926 @cindex @samp{then-part} defined
3927 An @code{if} expression written in Lisp does not use the word `then';
3928 the test and the action are the second and third elements of the list
3929 whose first element is @code{if}. Nonetheless, the test part of an
3930 @code{if} expression is often called the @dfn{if-part} and the second
3931 argument is often called the @dfn{then-part}.
3932
3933 Also, when an @code{if} expression is written, the true-or-false-test
3934 is usually written on the same line as the symbol @code{if}, but the
3935 action to carry out if the test is true, the ``then-part'', is written
3936 on the second and subsequent lines. This makes the @code{if}
3937 expression easier to read.
3938
3939 @smallexample
3940 @group
3941 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3942 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-test-is-true})
3943 @end group
3944 @end smallexample
3945
3946 @noindent
3947 The true-or-false-test will be an expression that
3948 is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter.
3949
3950 Here is an example that you can evaluate in the usual manner. The test
3951 is whether the number 5 is greater than the number 4. Since it is, the
3952 message @samp{5 is greater than 4!} will be printed.
3953
3954 @smallexample
3955 @group
3956 (if (> 5 4) ; @r{if-part}
3957 (message "5 is greater than 4!")) ; @r{then-part}
3958 @end group
3959 @end smallexample
3960
3961 @noindent
3962 (The function @code{>} tests whether its first argument is greater than
3963 its second argument and returns true if it is.)
3964 @findex > (greater than)
3965
3966 Of course, in actual use, the test in an @code{if} expression will not
3967 be fixed for all time as it is by the expression @code{(> 5 4)}.
3968 Instead, at least one of the variables used in the test will be bound to
3969 a value that is not known ahead of time. (If the value were known ahead
3970 of time, we would not need to run the test!)
3971
3972 For example, the value may be bound to an argument of a function
3973 definition. In the following function definition, the character of the
3974 animal is a value that is passed to the function. If the value bound to
3975 @code{characteristic} is @code{fierce}, then the message, @samp{It's a
3976 tiger!} will be printed; otherwise, @code{nil} will be returned.
3977
3978 @smallexample
3979 @group
3980 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3981 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3982 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
3983 then warn of a tiger."
3984 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3985 (message "It's a tiger!")))
3986 @end group
3987 @end smallexample
3988
3989 @need 1500
3990 @noindent
3991 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate the
3992 function definition in the usual way to install it in Emacs, and then you
3993 can evaluate the following two expressions to see the results:
3994
3995 @smallexample
3996 @group
3997 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
3998
3999 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
4000
4001 @end group
4002 @end smallexample
4003
4004 @c Following sentences rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4005 @noindent
4006 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4007 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; and
4008 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)} you will see @code{nil}
4009 printed in the echo area.
4010
4011 @node type-of-animal in detail, , if in more detail, if
4012 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4013 @subsection The @code{type-of-animal} Function in Detail
4014
4015 Let's look at the @code{type-of-animal} function in detail.
4016
4017 The function definition for @code{type-of-animal} was written by filling
4018 the slots of two templates, one for a function definition as a whole, and
4019 a second for an @code{if} expression.
4020
4021 @need 1250
4022 The template for every function that is not interactive is:
4023
4024 @smallexample
4025 @group
4026 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4027 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4028 @var{body}@dots{})
4029 @end group
4030 @end smallexample
4031
4032 @need 800
4033 The parts of the function that match this template look like this:
4034
4035 @smallexample
4036 @group
4037 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
4038 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4039 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
4040 then warn of a tiger."
4041 @var{body: the} @code{if} @var{expression})
4042 @end group
4043 @end smallexample
4044
4045 The name of function is @code{type-of-animal}; it is passed the value
4046 of one argument. The argument list is followed by a multi-line
4047 documentation string. The documentation string is included in the
4048 example because it is a good habit to write documentation string for
4049 every function definition. The body of the function definition
4050 consists of the @code{if} expression.
4051
4052 @need 800
4053 The template for an @code{if} expression looks like this:
4054
4055 @smallexample
4056 @group
4057 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
4058 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true})
4059 @end group
4060 @end smallexample
4061
4062 @need 1250
4063 In the @code{type-of-animal} function, the code for the @code{if}
4064 looks like this:
4065
4066 @smallexample
4067 @group
4068 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4069 (message "It's a tiger!")))
4070 @end group
4071 @end smallexample
4072
4073 @need 800
4074 Here, the true-or-false-test is the expression:
4075
4076 @smallexample
4077 (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4078 @end smallexample
4079
4080 @noindent
4081 In Lisp, @code{equal} is a function that determines whether its first
4082 argument is equal to its second argument. The second argument is the
4083 quoted symbol @code{'fierce} and the first argument is the value of the
4084 symbol @code{characteristic}---in other words, the argument passed to
4085 this function.
4086
4087 In the first exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the argument
4088 @code{fierce} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. Since @code{fierce}
4089 is equal to @code{fierce}, the expression, @code{(equal characteristic
4090 'fierce)}, returns a value of true. When this happens, the @code{if}
4091 evaluates the second argument or then-part of the @code{if}:
4092 @code{(message "It's tiger!")}.
4093
4094 On the other hand, in the second exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the
4095 argument @code{zebra} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. @code{zebra}
4096 is not equal to @code{fierce}, so the then-part is not evaluated and
4097 @code{nil} is returned by the @code{if} expression.
4098
4099 @node else, Truth & Falsehood, if, Writing Defuns
4100 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4101 @section If--then--else Expressions
4102 @cindex Else
4103
4104 An @code{if} expression may have an optional third argument, called
4105 the @dfn{else-part}, for the case when the true-or-false-test returns
4106 false. When this happens, the second argument or then-part of the
4107 overall @code{if} expression is @emph{not} evaluated, but the third or
4108 else-part @emph{is} evaluated. You might think of this as the cloudy
4109 day alternative for the decision ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to
4110 the beach, else read a book!''.
4111
4112 The word ``else'' is not written in the Lisp code; the else-part of an
4113 @code{if} expression comes after the then-part. In the written Lisp, the
4114 else-part is usually written to start on a line of its own and is
4115 indented less than the then-part:
4116
4117 @smallexample
4118 @group
4119 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
4120 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true}
4121 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-false})
4122 @end group
4123 @end smallexample
4124
4125 For example, the following @code{if} expression prints the message @samp{4
4126 is not greater than 5!} when you evaluate it in the usual way:
4127
4128 @smallexample
4129 @group
4130 (if (> 4 5) ; @r{if-part}
4131 (message "4 falsely greater than 5!") ; @r{then-part}
4132 (message "4 is not greater than 5!")) ; @r{else-part}
4133 @end group
4134 @end smallexample
4135
4136 @noindent
4137 Note that the different levels of indentation make it easy to
4138 distinguish the then-part from the else-part. (GNU Emacs has several
4139 commands that automatically indent @code{if} expressions correctly.
4140 @xref{Typing Lists, , GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists}.)
4141
4142 We can extend the @code{type-of-animal} function to include an
4143 else-part by simply incorporating an additional part to the @code{if}
4144 expression.
4145
4146 @need 1500
4147 You can see the consequences of doing this if you evaluate the following
4148 version of the @code{type-of-animal} function definition to install it
4149 and then evaluate the two subsequent expressions to pass different
4150 arguments to the function.
4151
4152 @smallexample
4153 @group
4154 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic) ; @r{Second version.}
4155 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4156 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
4157 then warn of a tiger;
4158 else say it's not fierce."
4159 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4160 (message "It's a tiger!")
4161 (message "It's not fierce!")))
4162 @end group
4163 @end smallexample
4164 @sp 1
4165
4166 @smallexample
4167 @group
4168 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
4169
4170 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
4171
4172 @end group
4173 @end smallexample
4174
4175 @c Following sentence rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4176 @noindent
4177 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4178 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; but
4179 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)}, you will see
4180 @code{"It's not fierce!"}.
4181
4182 (Of course, if the @var{characteristic} were @code{ferocious}, the
4183 message @code{"It's not fierce!"} would be printed; and it would be
4184 misleading! When you write code, you need to take into account the
4185 possibility that some such argument will be tested by the @code{if}
4186 and write your program accordingly.)
4187
4188 @node Truth & Falsehood, save-excursion, else, Writing Defuns
4189 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4190 @section Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4191 @cindex Truth and falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4192 @cindex Falsehood and truth in Emacs Lisp
4193 @findex nil
4194
4195 There is an important aspect to the truth test in an @code{if}
4196 expression. So far, we have spoken of `true' and `false' as values of
4197 predicates as if they were new kinds of Emacs Lisp objects. In fact,
4198 `false' is just our old friend @code{nil}. Anything else---anything
4199 at all---is `true'.
4200
4201 The expression that tests for truth is interpreted as @dfn{true}
4202 if the result of evaluating it is a value that is not @code{nil}. In
4203 other words, the result of the test is considered true if the value
4204 returned is a number such as 47, a string such as @code{"hello"}, or a
4205 symbol (other than @code{nil}) such as @code{flowers}, or a list (so
4206 long as it is not empty), or even a buffer!
4207
4208 @menu
4209 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
4210 @end menu
4211
4212 @node nil explained, , Truth & Falsehood, Truth & Falsehood
4213 @ifnottex
4214 @unnumberedsubsec An explanation of @code{nil}
4215 @end ifnottex
4216
4217 Before illustrating a test for truth, we need an explanation of @code{nil}.
4218
4219 In Emacs Lisp, the symbol @code{nil} has two meanings. First, it means the
4220 empty list. Second, it means false and is the value returned when a
4221 true-or-false-test tests false. @code{nil} can be written as an empty
4222 list, @code{()}, or as @code{nil}. As far as the Lisp interpreter is
4223 concerned, @code{()} and @code{nil} are the same. Humans, however, tend
4224 to use @code{nil} for false and @code{()} for the empty list.
4225
4226 In Emacs Lisp, any value that is not @code{nil}---is not the empty
4227 list---is considered true. This means that if an evaluation returns
4228 something that is not an empty list, an @code{if} expression will test
4229 true. For example, if a number is put in the slot for the test, it
4230 will be evaluated and will return itself, since that is what numbers
4231 do when evaluated. In this conditional, the @code{if} expression will
4232 test true. The expression tests false only when @code{nil}, an empty
4233 list, is returned by evaluating the expression.
4234
4235 You can see this by evaluating the two expressions in the following examples.
4236
4237 In the first example, the number 4 is evaluated as the test in the
4238 @code{if} expression and returns itself; consequently, the then-part
4239 of the expression is evaluated and returned: @samp{true} appears in
4240 the echo area. In the second example, the @code{nil} indicates false;
4241 consequently, the else-part of the expression is evaluated and
4242 returned: @samp{false} appears in the echo area.
4243
4244 @smallexample
4245 @group
4246 (if 4
4247 'true
4248 'false)
4249 @end group
4250
4251 @group
4252 (if nil
4253 'true
4254 'false)
4255 @end group
4256 @end smallexample
4257
4258 @need 1250
4259 Incidentally, if some other useful value is not available for a test that
4260 returns true, then the Lisp interpreter will return the symbol @code{t}
4261 for true. For example, the expression @code{(> 5 4)} returns @code{t}
4262 when evaluated, as you can see by evaluating it in the usual way:
4263
4264 @smallexample
4265 (> 5 4)
4266 @end smallexample
4267
4268 @need 1250
4269 @noindent
4270 On the other hand, this function returns @code{nil} if the test is false.
4271
4272 @smallexample
4273 (> 4 5)
4274 @end smallexample
4275
4276 @node save-excursion, Review, Truth & Falsehood, Writing Defuns
4277 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4278 @section @code{save-excursion}
4279 @findex save-excursion
4280 @cindex Region, what it is
4281 @cindex Preserving point, mark, and buffer
4282 @cindex Point, mark, buffer preservation
4283 @findex point
4284 @findex mark
4285
4286 The @code{save-excursion} function is the fourth and final special form
4287 that we will discuss in this chapter.
4288
4289 In Emacs Lisp programs used for editing, the @code{save-excursion}
4290 function is very common. It saves the location of point and mark,
4291 executes the body of the function, and then restores point and mark to
4292 their previous positions if their locations were changed. Its primary
4293 purpose is to keep the user from being surprised and disturbed by
4294 unexpected movement of point or mark.
4295
4296 @menu
4297 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
4298 * Template for save-excursion::
4299 @end menu
4300
4301 @node Point and mark, Template for save-excursion, save-excursion, save-excursion
4302 @ifnottex
4303 @unnumberedsubsec Point and Mark
4304 @end ifnottex
4305
4306 Before discussing @code{save-excursion}, however, it may be useful
4307 first to review what point and mark are in GNU Emacs. @dfn{Point} is
4308 the current location of the cursor. Wherever the cursor
4309 is, that is point. More precisely, on terminals where the cursor
4310 appears to be on top of a character, point is immediately before the
4311 character. In Emacs Lisp, point is an integer. The first character in
4312 a buffer is number one, the second is number two, and so on. The
4313 function @code{point} returns the current position of the cursor as a
4314 number. Each buffer has its own value for point.
4315
4316 The @dfn{mark} is another position in the buffer; its value can be set
4317 with a command such as @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}). If
4318 a mark has been set, you can use the command @kbd{C-x C-x}
4319 (@code{exchange-point-and-mark}) to cause the cursor to jump to the mark
4320 and set the mark to be the previous position of point. In addition, if
4321 you set another mark, the position of the previous mark is saved in the
4322 mark ring. Many mark positions can be saved this way. You can jump the
4323 cursor to a saved mark by typing @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}} one or more
4324 times.
4325
4326 The part of the buffer between point and mark is called @dfn{the
4327 region}. Numerous commands work on the region, including
4328 @code{center-region}, @code{count-lines-region}, @code{kill-region}, and
4329 @code{print-region}.
4330
4331 The @code{save-excursion} special form saves the locations of point and
4332 mark and restores those positions after the code within the body of the
4333 special form is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter. Thus, if point were
4334 in the beginning of a piece of text and some code moved point to the end
4335 of the buffer, the @code{save-excursion} would put point back to where
4336 it was before, after the expressions in the body of the function were
4337 evaluated.
4338
4339 In Emacs, a function frequently moves point as part of its internal
4340 workings even though a user would not expect this. For example,
4341 @code{count-lines-region} moves point. To prevent the user from being
4342 bothered by jumps that are both unexpected and (from the user's point of
4343 view) unnecessary, @code{save-excursion} is often used to keep point and
4344 mark in the location expected by the user. The use of
4345 @code{save-excursion} is good housekeeping.
4346
4347 To make sure the house stays clean, @code{save-excursion} restores the
4348 values of point and mark even if something goes wrong in the code inside
4349 of it (or, to be more precise and to use the proper jargon, ``in case of
4350 abnormal exit''). This feature is very helpful.
4351
4352 In addition to recording the values of point and mark,
4353 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the current buffer, and restores
4354 it, too. This means you can write code that will change the buffer and
4355 have @code{save-excursion} switch you back to the original buffer.
4356 This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in @code{append-to-buffer}.
4357 (@xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
4358
4359 @node Template for save-excursion, , Point and mark, save-excursion
4360 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4361 @subsection Template for a @code{save-excursion} Expression
4362
4363 @need 800
4364 The template for code using @code{save-excursion} is simple:
4365
4366 @smallexample
4367 @group
4368 (save-excursion
4369 @var{body}@dots{})
4370 @end group
4371 @end smallexample
4372
4373 @noindent
4374 The body of the function is one or more expressions that will be
4375 evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter. If there is more than
4376 one expression in the body, the value of the last one will be returned
4377 as the value of the @code{save-excursion} function. The other
4378 expressions in the body are evaluated only for their side effects; and
4379 @code{save-excursion} itself is used only for its side effect (which
4380 is restoring the positions of point and mark).
4381
4382 @need 1250
4383 In more detail, the template for a @code{save-excursion} expression
4384 looks like this:
4385
4386 @smallexample
4387 @group
4388 (save-excursion
4389 @var{first-expression-in-body}
4390 @var{second-expression-in-body}
4391 @var{third-expression-in-body}
4392 @dots{}
4393 @var{last-expression-in-body})
4394 @end group
4395 @end smallexample
4396
4397 @noindent
4398 An expression, of course, may be a symbol on its own or a list.
4399
4400 In Emacs Lisp code, a @code{save-excursion} expression often occurs
4401 within the body of a @code{let} expression. It looks like this:
4402
4403 @smallexample
4404 @group
4405 (let @var{varlist}
4406 (save-excursion
4407 @var{body}@dots{}))
4408 @end group
4409 @end smallexample
4410
4411 @node Review, defun Exercises, save-excursion, Writing Defuns
4412 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4413 @section Review
4414
4415 In the last few chapters we have introduced a fair number of functions
4416 and special forms. Here they are described in brief, along with a few
4417 similar functions that have not been mentioned yet.
4418
4419 @table @code
4420 @item eval-last-sexp
4421 Evaluate the last symbolic expression before the current location of
4422 point. The value is printed in the echo area unless the function is
4423 invoked with an argument; in that case, the output is printed in the
4424 current buffer. This command is normally bound to @kbd{C-x C-e}.
4425
4426 @item defun
4427 Define function. This special form has up to five parts: the name,
4428 a template for the arguments that will be passed to the function,
4429 documentation, an optional interactive declaration, and the body of the
4430 definition.
4431
4432 @need 1250
4433 For example, in an early version of Emacs, the function definition was
4434 as follows. (It is slightly more complex now that it seeks the first
4435 non-whitespace character rather than the first visible character.)
4436
4437 @smallexample
4438 @group
4439 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4440 "Move point to first visible character on line."
4441 (interactive)
4442 (beginning-of-line 1)
4443 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4444 @end group
4445 @end smallexample
4446
4447 @ignore
4448 In GNU Emacs 22,
4449
4450 (defun backward-to-indentation (&optional arg)
4451 "Move backward ARG lines and position at first nonblank character."
4452 (interactive "p")
4453 (forward-line (- (or arg 1)))
4454 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4455
4456 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4457 "Move point to the first non-whitespace character on this line."
4458 (interactive)
4459 (beginning-of-line 1)
4460 (skip-syntax-forward " " (line-end-position))
4461 ;; Move back over chars that have whitespace syntax but have the p flag.
4462 (backward-prefix-chars))
4463 @end ignore
4464
4465 @item interactive
4466 Declare to the interpreter that the function can be used
4467 interactively. This special form may be followed by a string with one
4468 or more parts that pass the information to the arguments of the
4469 function, in sequence. These parts may also tell the interpreter to
4470 prompt for information. Parts of the string are separated by
4471 newlines, @samp{\n}.
4472
4473 @need 1000
4474 Common code characters are:
4475
4476 @table @code
4477 @item b
4478 The name of an existing buffer.
4479
4480 @item f
4481 The name of an existing file.
4482
4483 @item p
4484 The numeric prefix argument. (Note that this `p' is lower case.)
4485
4486 @item r
4487 Point and the mark, as two numeric arguments, smallest first. This
4488 is the only code letter that specifies two successive arguments
4489 rather than one.
4490 @end table
4491
4492 @xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for @samp{interactive},
4493 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a complete list of
4494 code characters.
4495
4496 @item let
4497 Declare that a list of variables is for use within the body of the
4498 @code{let} and give them an initial value, either @code{nil} or a
4499 specified value; then evaluate the rest of the expressions in the body
4500 of the @code{let} and return the value of the last one. Inside the
4501 body of the @code{let}, the Lisp interpreter does not see the values of
4502 the variables of the same names that are bound outside of the
4503 @code{let}.
4504
4505 @need 1250
4506 For example,
4507
4508 @smallexample
4509 @group
4510 (let ((foo (buffer-name))
4511 (bar (buffer-size)))
4512 (message
4513 "This buffer is %s and has %d characters."
4514 foo bar))
4515 @end group
4516 @end smallexample
4517
4518 @item save-excursion
4519 Record the values of point and mark and the current buffer before
4520 evaluating the body of this special form. Restore the values of point
4521 and mark and buffer afterward.
4522
4523 @need 1250
4524 For example,
4525
4526 @smallexample
4527 @group
4528 (message "We are %d characters into this buffer."
4529 (- (point)
4530 (save-excursion
4531 (goto-char (point-min)) (point))))
4532 @end group
4533 @end smallexample
4534
4535 @item if
4536 Evaluate the first argument to the function; if it is true, evaluate
4537 the second argument; else evaluate the third argument, if there is one.
4538
4539 The @code{if} special form is called a @dfn{conditional}. There are
4540 other conditionals in Emacs Lisp, but @code{if} is perhaps the most
4541 commonly used.
4542
4543 @need 1250
4544 For example,
4545
4546 @smallexample
4547 @group
4548 (if (= 22 emacs-major-version)
4549 (message "This is version 22 Emacs")
4550 (message "This is not version 22 Emacs"))
4551 @end group
4552 @end smallexample
4553
4554 @need 1250
4555 @item <
4556 @itemx >
4557 @itemx <=
4558 @itemx >=
4559 The @code{<} function tests whether its first argument is smaller than
4560 its second argument. A corresponding function, @code{>}, tests whether
4561 the first argument is greater than the second. Likewise, @code{<=}
4562 tests whether the first argument is less than or equal to the second and
4563 @code{>=} tests whether the first argument is greater than or equal to
4564 the second. In all cases, both arguments must be numbers or markers
4565 (markers indicate positions in buffers).
4566
4567 @need 800
4568 @item =
4569 The @code{=} function tests whether two arguments, both numbers or
4570 markers, are equal.
4571
4572 @need 1250
4573 @item equal
4574 @itemx eq
4575 Test whether two objects are the same. @code{equal} uses one meaning
4576 of the word `same' and @code{eq} uses another: @code{equal} returns
4577 true if the two objects have a similar structure and contents, such as
4578 two copies of the same book. On the other hand, @code{eq}, returns
4579 true if both arguments are actually the same object.
4580 @findex equal
4581 @findex eq
4582
4583 @need 1250
4584 @item string<
4585 @itemx string-lessp
4586 @itemx string=
4587 @itemx string-equal
4588 The @code{string-lessp} function tests whether its first argument is
4589 smaller than the second argument. A shorter, alternative name for the
4590 same function (a @code{defalias}) is @code{string<}.
4591
4592 The arguments to @code{string-lessp} must be strings or symbols; the
4593 ordering is lexicographic, so case is significant. The print names of
4594 symbols are used instead of the symbols themselves.
4595
4596 @cindex @samp{empty string} defined
4597 An empty string, @samp{""}, a string with no characters in it, is
4598 smaller than any string of characters.
4599
4600 @code{string-equal} provides the corresponding test for equality. Its
4601 shorter, alternative name is @code{string=}. There are no string test
4602 functions that correspond to @var{>}, @code{>=}, or @code{<=}.
4603
4604 @item message
4605 Print a message in the echo area. The first argument is a string that
4606 can contain @samp{%s}, @samp{%d}, or @samp{%c} to print the value of
4607 arguments that follow the string. The argument used by @samp{%s} must
4608 be a string or a symbol; the argument used by @samp{%d} must be a
4609 number. The argument used by @samp{%c} must be an @sc{ascii} code
4610 number; it will be printed as the character with that @sc{ascii} code.
4611 (Various other %-sequences have not been mentioned.)
4612
4613 @item setq
4614 @itemx set
4615 The @code{setq} function sets the value of its first argument to the
4616 value of the second argument. The first argument is automatically
4617 quoted by @code{setq}. It does the same for succeeding pairs of
4618 arguments. Another function, @code{set}, takes only two arguments and
4619 evaluates both of them before setting the value returned by its first
4620 argument to the value returned by its second argument.
4621
4622 @item buffer-name
4623 Without an argument, return the name of the buffer, as a string.
4624
4625 @itemx buffer-file-name
4626 Without an argument, return the name of the file the buffer is
4627 visiting.
4628
4629 @item current-buffer
4630 Return the buffer in which Emacs is active; it may not be
4631 the buffer that is visible on the screen.
4632
4633 @item other-buffer
4634 Return the most recently selected buffer (other than the buffer passed
4635 to @code{other-buffer} as an argument and other than the current
4636 buffer).
4637
4638 @item switch-to-buffer
4639 Select a buffer for Emacs to be active in and display it in the current
4640 window so users can look at it. Usually bound to @kbd{C-x b}.
4641
4642 @item set-buffer
4643 Switch Emacs' attention to a buffer on which programs will run. Don't
4644 alter what the window is showing.
4645
4646 @item buffer-size
4647 Return the number of characters in the current buffer.
4648
4649 @item point
4650 Return the value of the current position of the cursor, as an
4651 integer counting the number of characters from the beginning of the
4652 buffer.
4653
4654 @item point-min
4655 Return the minimum permissible value of point in
4656 the current buffer. This is 1, unless narrowing is in effect.
4657
4658 @item point-max
4659 Return the value of the maximum permissible value of point in the
4660 current buffer. This is the end of the buffer, unless narrowing is in
4661 effect.
4662 @end table
4663
4664 @need 1500
4665 @node defun Exercises, , Review, Writing Defuns
4666 @section Exercises
4667
4668 @itemize @bullet
4669 @item
4670 Write a non-interactive function that doubles the value of its
4671 argument, a number. Make that function interactive.
4672
4673 @item
4674 Write a function that tests whether the current value of
4675 @code{fill-column} is greater than the argument passed to the function,
4676 and if so, prints an appropriate message.
4677 @end itemize
4678
4679 @node Buffer Walk Through, More Complex, Writing Defuns, Top
4680 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4681 @chapter A Few Buffer--Related Functions
4682
4683 In this chapter we study in detail several of the functions used in GNU
4684 Emacs. This is called a ``walk-through''. These functions are used as
4685 examples of Lisp code, but are not imaginary examples; with the
4686 exception of the first, simplified function definition, these functions
4687 show the actual code used in GNU Emacs. You can learn a great deal from
4688 these definitions. The functions described here are all related to
4689 buffers. Later, we will study other functions.
4690
4691 @menu
4692 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
4693 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
4694 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
4695 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
4696 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
4697 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
4698 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
4699 * Buffer Exercises::
4700 @end menu
4701
4702 @node Finding More, simplified-beginning-of-buffer, Buffer Walk Through, Buffer Walk Through
4703 @section Finding More Information
4704
4705 @findex describe-function, @r{introduced}
4706 @cindex Find function documentation
4707 In this walk-through, I will describe each new function as we come to
4708 it, sometimes in detail and sometimes briefly. If you are interested,
4709 you can get the full documentation of any Emacs Lisp function at any
4710 time by typing @kbd{C-h f} and then the name of the function (and then
4711 @key{RET}). Similarly, you can get the full documentation for a
4712 variable by typing @kbd{C-h v} and then the name of the variable (and
4713 then @key{RET}).
4714
4715 @cindex Find source of function
4716 @c In version 22, tells location both of C and of Emacs Lisp
4717 Also, @code{describe-function} will tell you the location of the
4718 function definition.
4719
4720 Put point into the name of the file that contains the function and
4721 press the @key{RET} key. In this case, @key{RET} means
4722 @code{push-button} rather than `return' or `enter'. Emacs will take
4723 you directly to the function definition.
4724
4725 @ignore
4726 Not In version 22
4727
4728 If you move point over the file name and press
4729 the @key{RET} key, which in this case means @code{help-follow} rather
4730 than `return' or `enter', Emacs will take you directly to the function
4731 definition.
4732 @end ignore
4733
4734 More generally, if you want to see a function in its original source
4735 file, you can use the @code{find-tags} function to jump to it.
4736 @code{find-tags} works with a wide variety of languages, not just
4737 Lisp, and C, and it works with non-programming text as well. For
4738 example, @code{find-tags} will jump to the various nodes in the
4739 Texinfo source file of this document.
4740 The @code{find-tags} function depends on `tags tables' that record
4741 the locations of the functions, variables, and other items to which
4742 @code{find-tags} jumps.
4743
4744 To use the @code{find-tags} command, type @kbd{M-.} (i.e., press the
4745 period key while holding down the @key{META} key, or else type the
4746 @key{ESC} key and then type the period key), and then, at the prompt,
4747 type in the name of the function whose source code you want to see,
4748 such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}, and then type @key{RET}. Emacs will
4749 switch buffers and display the source code for the function on your
4750 screen. To switch back to your current buffer, type @kbd{C-x b
4751 @key{RET}}. (On some keyboards, the @key{META} key is labelled
4752 @key{ALT}.)
4753
4754 @c !!! 22.1.1 tags table location in this paragraph
4755 @cindex TAGS table, specifying
4756 @findex find-tags
4757 Depending on how the initial default values of your copy of Emacs are
4758 set, you may also need to specify the location of your `tags table',
4759 which is a file called @file{TAGS}. For example, if you are
4760 interested in Emacs sources, the tags table you will most likely want,
4761 if it has already been created for you, will be in a subdirectory of
4762 the @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/} directory; thus you would use the
4763 @code{M-x visit-tags-table} command and specify a pathname such as
4764 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/TAGS}. If the tags table
4765 has not already been created, you will have to create it yourself. It
4766 will in a file such as @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}.
4767
4768 @need 1250
4769 To create a @file{TAGS} file in a specific directory, switch to that
4770 directory in Emacs using @kbd{M-x cd} command, or list the directory
4771 with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the compile command, with
4772 @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute:
4773
4774 @smallexample
4775 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
4776 @end smallexample
4777
4778 For more information, see @ref{etags, , Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File}.
4779
4780 After you become more familiar with Emacs Lisp, you will find that you will
4781 frequently use @code{find-tags} to navigate your way around source code;
4782 and you will create your own @file{TAGS} tables.
4783
4784 @cindex Library, as term for `file'
4785 Incidentally, the files that contain Lisp code are conventionally
4786 called @dfn{libraries}. The metaphor is derived from that of a
4787 specialized library, such as a law library or an engineering library,
4788 rather than a general library. Each library, or file, contains
4789 functions that relate to a particular topic or activity, such as
4790 @file{abbrev.el} for handling abbreviations and other typing
4791 shortcuts, and @file{help.el} for on-line help. (Sometimes several
4792 libraries provide code for a single activity, as the various
4793 @file{rmail@dots{}} files provide code for reading electronic mail.)
4794 In @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}, you will see sentences such as ``The
4795 @kbd{C-h p} command lets you search the standard Emacs Lisp libraries
4796 by topic keywords.''
4797
4798 @node simplified-beginning-of-buffer, mark-whole-buffer, Finding More, Buffer Walk Through
4799 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4800 @section A Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition
4801 @findex simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4802
4803 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} command is a good function to start with
4804 since you are likely to be familiar with it and it is easy to
4805 understand. Used as an interactive command, @code{beginning-of-buffer}
4806 moves the cursor to the beginning of the buffer, leaving the mark at the
4807 previous position. It is generally bound to @kbd{M-<}.
4808
4809 In this section, we will discuss a shortened version of the function
4810 that shows how it is most frequently used. This shortened function
4811 works as written, but it does not contain the code for a complex option.
4812 In another section, we will describe the entire function.
4813 (@xref{beginning-of-buffer, , Complete Definition of
4814 @code{beginning-of-buffer}}.)
4815
4816 Before looking at the code, let's consider what the function
4817 definition has to contain: it must include an expression that makes
4818 the function interactive so it can be called by typing @kbd{M-x
4819 beginning-of-buffer} or by typing a keychord such as @kbd{M-<}; it
4820 must include code to leave a mark at the original position in the
4821 buffer; and it must include code to move the cursor to the beginning
4822 of the buffer.
4823
4824 @need 1250
4825 Here is the complete text of the shortened version of the function:
4826
4827 @smallexample
4828 @group
4829 (defun simplified-beginning-of-buffer ()
4830 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
4831 leave mark at previous position."
4832 (interactive)
4833 (push-mark)
4834 (goto-char (point-min)))
4835 @end group
4836 @end smallexample
4837
4838 Like all function definitions, this definition has five parts following
4839 the special form @code{defun}:
4840
4841 @enumerate
4842 @item
4843 The name: in this example, @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}.
4844
4845 @item
4846 A list of the arguments: in this example, an empty list, @code{()},
4847
4848 @item
4849 The documentation string.
4850
4851 @item
4852 The interactive expression.
4853
4854 @item
4855 The body.
4856 @end enumerate
4857
4858 @noindent
4859 In this function definition, the argument list is empty; this means that
4860 this function does not require any arguments. (When we look at the
4861 definition for the complete function, we will see that it may be passed
4862 an optional argument.)
4863
4864 The interactive expression tells Emacs that the function is intended to
4865 be used interactively. In this example, @code{interactive} does not have
4866 an argument because @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} does not
4867 require one.
4868
4869 @need 800
4870 The body of the function consists of the two lines:
4871
4872 @smallexample
4873 @group
4874 (push-mark)
4875 (goto-char (point-min))
4876 @end group
4877 @end smallexample
4878
4879 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark)}. When
4880 this expression is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter, it sets a mark at
4881 the current position of the cursor, wherever that may be. The position
4882 of this mark is saved in the mark ring.
4883
4884 The next line is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}. This expression
4885 jumps the cursor to the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the
4886 beginning of the buffer (or to the beginning of the accessible portion
4887 of the buffer if it is narrowed. @xref{Narrowing & Widening, ,
4888 Narrowing and Widening}.)
4889
4890 The @code{push-mark} command sets a mark at the place where the cursor
4891 was located before it was moved to the beginning of the buffer by the
4892 @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression. Consequently, you can, if
4893 you wish, go back to where you were originally by typing @kbd{C-x C-x}.
4894
4895 That is all there is to the function definition!
4896
4897 @findex describe-function
4898 When you are reading code such as this and come upon an unfamiliar
4899 function, such as @code{goto-char}, you can find out what it does by
4900 using the @code{describe-function} command. To use this command, type
4901 @kbd{C-h f} and then type in the name of the function and press
4902 @key{RET}. The @code{describe-function} command will print the
4903 function's documentation string in a @file{*Help*} window. For
4904 example, the documentation for @code{goto-char} is:
4905
4906 @smallexample
4907 @group
4908 Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.
4909 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max).
4910 @end group
4911 @end smallexample
4912
4913 @noindent
4914 The function's one argument is the desired position.
4915
4916 @noindent
4917 (The prompt for @code{describe-function} will offer you the symbol
4918 under or preceding the cursor, so you can save typing by positioning
4919 the cursor right over or after the function and then typing @kbd{C-h f
4920 @key{RET}}.)
4921
4922 The @code{end-of-buffer} function definition is written in the same way as
4923 the @code{beginning-of-buffer} definition except that the body of the
4924 function contains the expression @code{(goto-char (point-max))} in place
4925 of @code{(goto-char (point-min))}.
4926
4927 @node mark-whole-buffer, append-to-buffer, simplified-beginning-of-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
4928 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4929 @section The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4930 @findex mark-whole-buffer
4931
4932 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is no harder to understand than the
4933 @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function. In this case, however,
4934 we will look at the complete function, not a shortened version.
4935
4936 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is not as commonly used as the
4937 @code{beginning-of-buffer} function, but is useful nonetheless: it
4938 marks a whole buffer as a region by putting point at the beginning and
4939 a mark at the end of the buffer. It is generally bound to @kbd{C-x
4940 h}.
4941
4942 @menu
4943 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
4944 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
4945 @end menu
4946
4947 @node mark-whole-buffer overview, Body of mark-whole-buffer, mark-whole-buffer, mark-whole-buffer
4948 @ifnottex
4949 @unnumberedsubsec An overview of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4950 @end ifnottex
4951
4952 @need 1250
4953 In GNU Emacs 22, the code for the complete function looks like this:
4954
4955 @smallexample
4956 @group
4957 (defun mark-whole-buffer ()
4958 "Put point at beginning and mark at end of buffer.
4959 You probably should not use this function in Lisp programs;
4960 it is usually a mistake for a Lisp function to use any subroutine
4961 that uses or sets the mark."
4962 (interactive)
4963 (push-mark (point))
4964 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4965 (goto-char (point-min)))
4966 @end group
4967 @end smallexample
4968
4969 @need 1250
4970 Like all other functions, the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function fits
4971 into the template for a function definition. The template looks like
4972 this:
4973
4974 @smallexample
4975 @group
4976 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4977 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4978 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
4979 @var{body}@dots{})
4980 @end group
4981 @end smallexample
4982
4983 Here is how the function works: the name of the function is
4984 @code{mark-whole-buffer}; it is followed by an empty argument list,
4985 @samp{()}, which means that the function does not require arguments.
4986 The documentation comes next.
4987
4988 The next line is an @code{(interactive)} expression that tells Emacs
4989 that the function will be used interactively. These details are similar
4990 to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function described in the
4991 previous section.
4992
4993 @need 1250
4994 @node Body of mark-whole-buffer, , mark-whole-buffer overview, mark-whole-buffer
4995 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4996 @subsection Body of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4997
4998 The body of the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function consists of three
4999 lines of code:
5000
5001 @c GNU Emacs 22
5002 @smallexample
5003 @group
5004 (push-mark (point))
5005 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
5006 (goto-char (point-min))
5007 @end group
5008 @end smallexample
5009
5010 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark (point))}.
5011
5012 This line does exactly the same job as the first line of the body of
5013 the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function, which is written
5014 @code{(push-mark)}. In both cases, the Lisp interpreter sets a mark
5015 at the current position of the cursor.
5016
5017 I don't know why the expression in @code{mark-whole-buffer} is written
5018 @code{(push-mark (point))} and the expression in
5019 @code{beginning-of-buffer} is written @code{(push-mark)}. Perhaps
5020 whoever wrote the code did not know that the arguments for
5021 @code{push-mark} are optional and that if @code{push-mark} is not
5022 passed an argument, the function automatically sets mark at the
5023 location of point by default. Or perhaps the expression was written
5024 so as to parallel the structure of the next line. In any case, the
5025 line causes Emacs to determine the position of point and set a mark
5026 there.
5027
5028 In earlier versions of GNU Emacs, the next line of
5029 @code{mark-whole-buffer} was @code{(push-mark (point-max))}. This
5030 expression sets a mark at the point in the buffer that has the highest
5031 number. This will be the end of the buffer (or, if the buffer is
5032 narrowed, the end of the accessible portion of the buffer.
5033 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more about
5034 narrowing.) After this mark has been set, the previous mark, the one
5035 set at point, is no longer set, but Emacs remembers its position, just
5036 as all other recent marks are always remembered. This means that you
5037 can, if you wish, go back to that position by typing @kbd{C-u
5038 C-@key{SPC}} twice.
5039
5040 @need 1250
5041 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{(point-max)} is slightly more complicated.
5042 The line reads
5043
5044 @smallexample
5045 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
5046 @end smallexample
5047
5048 @noindent
5049 The expression works nearly the same as before. It sets a mark at the
5050 highest numbered place in the buffer that it can. However, in this
5051 version, @code{push-mark} has two additional arguments. The second
5052 argument to @code{push-mark} is @code{nil}. This tells the function
5053 it @emph{should} display a message that says `Mark set' when it pushes
5054 the mark. The third argument is @code{t}. This tells
5055 @code{push-mark} to activate the mark when Transient Mark mode is
5056 turned on. Transient Mark mode highlights the currently active
5057 region. It is often turned off.
5058
5059 Finally, the last line of the function is @code{(goto-char
5060 (point-min)))}. This is written exactly the same way as it is written
5061 in @code{beginning-of-buffer}. The expression moves the cursor to
5062 the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the beginning of the buffer
5063 (or to the beginning of the accessible portion of the buffer). As a
5064 result of this, point is placed at the beginning of the buffer and mark
5065 is set at the end of the buffer. The whole buffer is, therefore, the
5066 region.
5067
5068 @node append-to-buffer, Buffer Related Review, mark-whole-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
5069 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5070 @section The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
5071 @findex append-to-buffer
5072
5073 The @code{append-to-buffer} command is more complex than the
5074 @code{mark-whole-buffer} command. What it does is copy the region
5075 (that is, the part of the buffer between point and mark) from the
5076 current buffer to a specified buffer.
5077
5078 @menu
5079 * append-to-buffer overview::
5080 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
5081 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
5082 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
5083 @end menu
5084
5085 @node append-to-buffer overview, append interactive, append-to-buffer, append-to-buffer
5086 @ifnottex
5087 @unnumberedsubsec An Overview of @code{append-to-buffer}
5088 @end ifnottex
5089
5090 @findex insert-buffer-substring
5091 The @code{append-to-buffer} command uses the
5092 @code{insert-buffer-substring} function to copy the region.
5093 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is described by its name: it takes a
5094 string of characters from part of a buffer, a ``substring'', and
5095 inserts them into another buffer.
5096
5097 Most of @code{append-to-buffer} is
5098 concerned with setting up the conditions for
5099 @code{insert-buffer-substring} to work: the code must specify both the
5100 buffer to which the text will go, the window it comes from and goes
5101 to, and the region that will be copied.
5102
5103 @need 1250
5104 Here is the complete text of the function:
5105
5106 @smallexample
5107 @group
5108 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5109 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5110 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5111 @end group
5112
5113 @group
5114 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5115 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5116 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5117 (interactive
5118 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer
5119 (current-buffer) t))
5120 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5121 @end group
5122 @group
5123 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5124 (save-excursion
5125 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5126 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5127 point)
5128 (set-buffer append-to)
5129 (setq point (point))
5130 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5131 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5132 (dolist (window windows)
5133 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5134 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5135 @end group
5136 @end smallexample
5137
5138 The function can be understood by looking at it as a series of
5139 filled-in templates.
5140
5141 The outermost template is for the function definition. In this
5142 function, it looks like this (with several slots filled in):
5143
5144 @smallexample
5145 @group
5146 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5147 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5148 (interactive @dots{})
5149 @var{body}@dots{})
5150 @end group
5151 @end smallexample
5152
5153 The first line of the function includes its name and three arguments.
5154 The arguments are the @code{buffer} to which the text will be copied, and
5155 the @code{start} and @code{end} of the region in the current buffer that
5156 will be copied.
5157
5158 The next part of the function is the documentation, which is clear and
5159 complete. As is conventional, the three arguments are written in
5160 upper case so you will notice them easily. Even better, they are
5161 described in the same order as in the argument list.
5162
5163 Note that the documentation distinguishes between a buffer and its
5164 name. (The function can handle either.)
5165
5166 @node append interactive, append-to-buffer body, append-to-buffer overview, append-to-buffer
5167 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5168 @subsection The @code{append-to-buffer} Interactive Expression
5169
5170 Since the @code{append-to-buffer} function will be used interactively,
5171 the function must have an @code{interactive} expression. (For a
5172 review of @code{interactive}, see @ref{Interactive, , Making a
5173 Function Interactive}.) The expression reads as follows:
5174
5175 @smallexample
5176 @group
5177 (interactive
5178 (list (read-buffer
5179 "Append to buffer: "
5180 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5181 (region-beginning)
5182 (region-end)))
5183 @end group
5184 @end smallexample
5185
5186 @noindent
5187 This expression is not one with letters standing for parts, as
5188 described earlier. Instead, it starts a list with these parts:
5189
5190 The first part of the list is an expression to read the name of a
5191 buffer and return it as a string. That is @code{read-buffer}. The
5192 function requires a prompt as its first argument, @samp{"Append to
5193 buffer: "}. Its second argument tells the command what value to
5194 provide if you don't specify anything.
5195
5196 In this case that second argument is an expression containing the
5197 function @code{other-buffer}, an exception, and a @samp{t}, standing
5198 for true.
5199
5200 The first argument to @code{other-buffer}, the exception, is yet
5201 another function, @code{current-buffer}. That is not going to be
5202 returned. The second argument is the symbol for true, @code{t}. that
5203 tells @code{other-buffer} that it may show visible buffers (except in
5204 this case, it will not show the current buffer, which makes sense).
5205
5206 @need 1250
5207 The expression looks like this:
5208
5209 @smallexample
5210 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t)
5211 @end smallexample
5212
5213 The second and third arguments to the @code{list} expression are
5214 @code{(region-beginning)} and @code{(region-end)}. These two
5215 functions specify the beginning and end of the text to be appended.
5216
5217 @need 1250
5218 Originally, the command used the letters @samp{B} and @samp{r}.
5219 The whole @code{interactive} expression looked like this:
5220
5221 @smallexample
5222 (interactive "BAppend to buffer:@: \nr")
5223 @end smallexample
5224
5225 @noindent
5226 But when that was done, the default value of the buffer switched to
5227 was invisible. That was not wanted.
5228
5229 (The prompt was separated from the second argument with a newline,
5230 @samp{\n}. It was followed by an @samp{r} that told Emacs to bind the
5231 two arguments that follow the symbol @code{buffer} in the function's
5232 argument list (that is, @code{start} and @code{end}) to the values of
5233 point and mark. That argument worked fine.)
5234
5235 @node append-to-buffer body, append save-excursion, append interactive, append-to-buffer
5236 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5237 @subsection The Body of @code{append-to-buffer}
5238
5239 @ignore
5240 in GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
5241
5242 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5243 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5244 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5245
5246 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5247 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5248 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5249 (interactive
5250 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5251 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5252 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5253 (save-excursion
5254 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5255 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5256 point)
5257 (set-buffer append-to)
5258 (setq point (point))
5259 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5260 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5261 (dolist (window windows)
5262 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5263 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5264 @end ignore
5265
5266 The body of the @code{append-to-buffer} function begins with @code{let}.
5267
5268 As we have seen before (@pxref{let, , @code{let}}), the purpose of a
5269 @code{let} expression is to create and give initial values to one or
5270 more variables that will only be used within the body of the
5271 @code{let}. This means that such a variable will not be confused with
5272 any variable of the same name outside the @code{let} expression.
5273
5274 We can see how the @code{let} expression fits into the function as a
5275 whole by showing a template for @code{append-to-buffer} with the
5276 @code{let} expression in outline:
5277
5278 @smallexample
5279 @group
5280 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5281 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5282 (interactive @dots{})
5283 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value}))
5284 @var{body}@dots{})
5285 @end group
5286 @end smallexample
5287
5288 The @code{let} expression has three elements:
5289
5290 @enumerate
5291 @item
5292 The symbol @code{let};
5293
5294 @item
5295 A varlist containing, in this case, a single two-element list,
5296 @code{(@var{variable} @var{value})};
5297
5298 @item
5299 The body of the @code{let} expression.
5300 @end enumerate
5301
5302 @need 800
5303 In the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the varlist looks like this:
5304
5305 @smallexample
5306 (oldbuf (current-buffer))
5307 @end smallexample
5308
5309 @noindent
5310 In this part of the @code{let} expression, the one variable,
5311 @code{oldbuf}, is bound to the value returned by the
5312 @code{(current-buffer)} expression. The variable, @code{oldbuf}, is
5313 used to keep track of the buffer in which you are working and from
5314 which you will copy.
5315
5316 The element or elements of a varlist are surrounded by a set of
5317 parentheses so the Lisp interpreter can distinguish the varlist from
5318 the body of the @code{let}. As a consequence, the two-element list
5319 within the varlist is surrounded by a circumscribing set of parentheses.
5320 The line looks like this:
5321
5322 @smallexample
5323 @group
5324 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5325 @dots{} )
5326 @end group
5327 @end smallexample
5328
5329 @noindent
5330 The two parentheses before @code{oldbuf} might surprise you if you did
5331 not realize that the first parenthesis before @code{oldbuf} marks the
5332 boundary of the varlist and the second parenthesis marks the beginning
5333 of the two-element list, @code{(oldbuf (current-buffer))}.
5334
5335 @node append save-excursion, , append-to-buffer body, append-to-buffer
5336 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5337 @subsection @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}
5338
5339 The body of the @code{let} expression in @code{append-to-buffer}
5340 consists of a @code{save-excursion} expression.
5341
5342 The @code{save-excursion} function saves the locations of point and
5343 mark, and restores them to those positions after the expressions in the
5344 body of the @code{save-excursion} complete execution. In addition,
5345 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the original buffer, and
5346 restores it. This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in
5347 @code{append-to-buffer}.
5348
5349 @need 1500
5350 @cindex Indentation for formatting
5351 @cindex Formatting convention
5352 Incidentally, it is worth noting here that a Lisp function is normally
5353 formatted so that everything that is enclosed in a multi-line spread is
5354 indented more to the right than the first symbol. In this function
5355 definition, the @code{let} is indented more than the @code{defun}, and
5356 the @code{save-excursion} is indented more than the @code{let}, like
5357 this:
5358
5359 @smallexample
5360 @group
5361 (defun @dots{}
5362 @dots{}
5363 @dots{}
5364 (let@dots{}
5365 (save-excursion
5366 @dots{}
5367 @end group
5368 @end smallexample
5369
5370 @need 1500
5371 @noindent
5372 This formatting convention makes it easy to see that the lines in
5373 the body of the @code{save-excursion} are enclosed by the parentheses
5374 associated with @code{save-excursion}, just as the
5375 @code{save-excursion} itself is enclosed by the parentheses associated
5376 with the @code{let}:
5377
5378 @smallexample
5379 @group
5380 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5381 (save-excursion
5382 @dots{}
5383 (set-buffer @dots{})
5384 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5385 @dots{}))
5386 @end group
5387 @end smallexample
5388
5389 @need 1200
5390 The use of the @code{save-excursion} function can be viewed as a process
5391 of filling in the slots of a template:
5392
5393 @smallexample
5394 @group
5395 (save-excursion
5396 @var{first-expression-in-body}
5397 @var{second-expression-in-body}
5398 @dots{}
5399 @var{last-expression-in-body})
5400 @end group
5401 @end smallexample
5402
5403 @need 1200
5404 @noindent
5405 In this function, the body of the @code{save-excursion} contains only
5406 one expression, the @code{let*} expression. You know about a
5407 @code{let} function. The @code{let*} function is different. It has a
5408 @samp{*} in its name. It enables Emacs to set each variable in its
5409 varlist in sequence, one after another.
5410
5411 Its critical feature is that variables later in the varlist can make
5412 use of the values to which Emacs set variables earlier in the varlist.
5413 @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}.
5414
5415 We will skip functions like @code{let*} and focus on two: the
5416 @code{set-buffer} function and the @code{insert-buffer-substring}
5417 function.
5418
5419 @need 1250
5420 In the old days, the @code{set-buffer} expression was simply
5421
5422 @smallexample
5423 (set-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer))
5424 @end smallexample
5425
5426 @need 1250
5427 @noindent
5428 but now it is
5429
5430 @smallexample
5431 (set-buffer append-to)
5432 @end smallexample
5433
5434 @noindent
5435 @code{append-to} is bound to @code{(get-buffer-create buffer)} earlier
5436 on in the @code{let*} expression. That extra binding would not be
5437 necessary except for that @code{append-to} is used later in the
5438 varlist as an argument to @code{get-buffer-window-list}.
5439
5440 @ignore
5441 in GNU Emacs 22
5442
5443 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5444 (save-excursion
5445 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5446 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5447 point)
5448 (set-buffer append-to)
5449 (setq point (point))
5450 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5451 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5452 (dolist (window windows)
5453 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5454 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5455 @end ignore
5456
5457 The @code{append-to-buffer} function definition inserts text from the
5458 buffer in which you are currently to a named buffer. It happens that
5459 @code{insert-buffer-substring} copies text from another buffer to the
5460 current buffer, just the reverse---that is why the
5461 @code{append-to-buffer} definition starts out with a @code{let} that
5462 binds the local symbol @code{oldbuf} to the value returned by
5463 @code{current-buffer}.
5464
5465 @need 1250
5466 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression looks like this:
5467
5468 @smallexample
5469 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5470 @end smallexample
5471
5472 @noindent
5473 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies a string
5474 @emph{from} the buffer specified as its first argument and inserts the
5475 string into the present buffer. In this case, the argument to
5476 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is the value of the variable created
5477 and bound by the @code{let}, namely the value of @code{oldbuf}, which
5478 was the current buffer when you gave the @code{append-to-buffer}
5479 command.
5480
5481 After @code{insert-buffer-substring} has done its work,
5482 @code{save-excursion} will restore the action to the original buffer
5483 and @code{append-to-buffer} will have done its job.
5484
5485 @need 800
5486 Written in skeletal form, the workings of the body look like this:
5487
5488 @smallexample
5489 @group
5490 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5491 (save-excursion ; @r{Keep track of buffer.}
5492 @var{change-buffer}
5493 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})
5494
5495 @var{change-back-to-original-buffer-when-finished}
5496 @var{let-the-local-meaning-of-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-disappear-when-finished}
5497 @end group
5498 @end smallexample
5499
5500 In summary, @code{append-to-buffer} works as follows: it saves the
5501 value of the current buffer in the variable called @code{oldbuf}. It
5502 gets the new buffer (creating one if need be) and switches Emacs'
5503 attention to it. Using the value of @code{oldbuf}, it inserts the
5504 region of text from the old buffer into the new buffer; and then using
5505 @code{save-excursion}, it brings you back to your original buffer.
5506
5507 In looking at @code{append-to-buffer}, you have explored a fairly
5508 complex function. It shows how to use @code{let} and
5509 @code{save-excursion}, and how to change to and come back from another
5510 buffer. Many function definitions use @code{let},
5511 @code{save-excursion}, and @code{set-buffer} this way.
5512
5513 @node Buffer Related Review, Buffer Exercises, append-to-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
5514 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5515 @section Review
5516
5517 Here is a brief summary of the various functions discussed in this chapter.
5518
5519 @table @code
5520 @item describe-function
5521 @itemx describe-variable
5522 Print the documentation for a function or variable.
5523 Conventionally bound to @kbd{C-h f} and @kbd{C-h v}.
5524
5525 @item find-tag
5526 Find the file containing the source for a function or variable and
5527 switch buffers to it, positioning point at the beginning of the item.
5528 Conventionally bound to @kbd{M-.} (that's a period following the
5529 @key{META} key).
5530
5531 @item save-excursion
5532 Save the location of point and mark and restore their values after the
5533 arguments to @code{save-excursion} have been evaluated. Also, remember
5534 the current buffer and return to it.
5535
5536 @item push-mark
5537 Set mark at a location and record the value of the previous mark on the
5538 mark ring. The mark is a location in the buffer that will keep its
5539 relative position even if text is added to or removed from the buffer.
5540
5541 @item goto-char
5542 Set point to the location specified by the value of the argument, which
5543 can be a number, a marker, or an expression that returns the number of
5544 a position, such as @code{(point-min)}.
5545
5546 @item insert-buffer-substring
5547 Copy a region of text from a buffer that is passed to the function as
5548 an argument and insert the region into the current buffer.
5549
5550 @item mark-whole-buffer
5551 Mark the whole buffer as a region. Normally bound to @kbd{C-x h}.
5552
5553 @item set-buffer
5554 Switch the attention of Emacs to another buffer, but do not change the
5555 window being displayed. Used when the program rather than a human is
5556 to work on a different buffer.
5557
5558 @item get-buffer-create
5559 @itemx get-buffer
5560 Find a named buffer or create one if a buffer of that name does not
5561 exist. The @code{get-buffer} function returns @code{nil} if the named
5562 buffer does not exist.
5563 @end table
5564
5565 @need 1500
5566 @node Buffer Exercises, , Buffer Related Review, Buffer Walk Through
5567 @section Exercises
5568
5569 @itemize @bullet
5570 @item
5571 Write your own @code{simplified-end-of-buffer} function definition;
5572 then test it to see whether it works.
5573
5574 @item
5575 Use @code{if} and @code{get-buffer} to write a function that prints a
5576 message telling you whether a buffer exists.
5577
5578 @item
5579 Using @code{find-tag}, find the source for the @code{copy-to-buffer}
5580 function.
5581 @end itemize
5582
5583 @node More Complex, Narrowing & Widening, Buffer Walk Through, Top
5584 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5585 @chapter A Few More Complex Functions
5586
5587 In this chapter, we build on what we have learned in previous chapters
5588 by looking at more complex functions. The @code{copy-to-buffer}
5589 function illustrates use of two @code{save-excursion} expressions in
5590 one definition, while the @code{insert-buffer} function illustrates
5591 use of an asterisk in an @code{interactive} expression, use of
5592 @code{or}, and the important distinction between a name and the object
5593 to which the name refers.
5594
5595 @menu
5596 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
5597 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
5598 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
5599 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
5600 * Second Buffer Related Review::
5601 * optional Exercise::
5602 @end menu
5603
5604 @node copy-to-buffer, insert-buffer, More Complex, More Complex
5605 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5606 @section The Definition of @code{copy-to-buffer}
5607 @findex copy-to-buffer
5608
5609 After understanding how @code{append-to-buffer} works, it is easy to
5610 understand @code{copy-to-buffer}. This function copies text into a
5611 buffer, but instead of adding to the second buffer, it replaces all the
5612 previous text in the second buffer.
5613
5614 @need 800
5615 The body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this,
5616
5617 @smallexample
5618 @group
5619 @dots{}
5620 (interactive "BCopy to buffer: \nr")
5621 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5622 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer)
5623 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5624 (erase-buffer)
5625 (save-excursion
5626 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)))))
5627 @end group
5628 @end smallexample
5629
5630 The @code{copy-to-buffer} function has a simpler @code{interactive}
5631 expression than @code{append-to-buffer}.
5632
5633 @need 800
5634 The definition then says
5635
5636 @smallexample
5637 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer) @dots{}
5638 @end smallexample
5639
5640 First, look at the earliest inner expression; that is evaluated first.
5641 That expression starts with @code{get-buffer-create buffer}. The
5642 function tells the computer to use the buffer with the name specified
5643 as the one to which you are copying, or if such a buffer does not
5644 exist, to create it. Then, the @code{with-current-buffer} function
5645 evaluates its body with that buffer temporarily current.
5646
5647 (This demonstrates another way to shift the computer's attention but
5648 not the user's. The @code{append-to-buffer} function showed how to do
5649 the same with @code{save-excursion} and @code{set-buffer}.
5650 @code{with-current-buffer} is a newer, and arguably easier,
5651 mechanism.)
5652
5653 The @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} function sends you an error
5654 message saying the buffer is read-only if you cannot modify it.
5655
5656 The next line has the @code{erase-buffer} function as its sole
5657 contents. That function erases the buffer.
5658
5659 Finally, the last two lines contain the @code{save-excursion}
5660 expression with @code{insert-buffer-substring} as its body.
5661 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression copies the text from
5662 the buffer you are in (and you have not seen the computer shift its
5663 attention, so you don't know that that buffer is now called
5664 @code{oldbuf}).
5665
5666 Incidentally, this is what is meant by `replacement'. To replace text,
5667 Emacs erases the previous text and then inserts new text.
5668
5669 @need 1250
5670 In outline, the body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this:
5671
5672 @smallexample
5673 @group
5674 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5675 (@var{with-the-buffer-you-are-copying-to}
5676 (@var{but-do-not-erase-or-copy-to-a-read-only-buffer})
5677 (erase-buffer)
5678 (save-excursion
5679 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})))
5680 @end group
5681 @end smallexample
5682
5683 @node insert-buffer, beginning-of-buffer, copy-to-buffer, More Complex
5684 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5685 @section The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
5686 @findex insert-buffer
5687
5688 @code{insert-buffer} is yet another buffer-related function. This
5689 command copies another buffer @emph{into} the current buffer. It is the
5690 reverse of @code{append-to-buffer} or @code{copy-to-buffer}, since they
5691 copy a region of text @emph{from} the current buffer to another buffer.
5692
5693 Here is a discussion based on the original code. The code was
5694 simplified in 2003 and is harder to understand.
5695
5696 (@xref{New insert-buffer, , New Body for @code{insert-buffer}}, to see
5697 a discussion of the new body.)
5698
5699 In addition, this code illustrates the use of @code{interactive} with a
5700 buffer that might be @dfn{read-only} and the important distinction
5701 between the name of an object and the object actually referred to.
5702
5703 @menu
5704 * insert-buffer code::
5705 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
5706 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
5707 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
5708 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
5709 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
5710 * New insert-buffer::
5711 @end menu
5712
5713 @node insert-buffer code, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer, insert-buffer
5714 @ifnottex
5715 @unnumberedsubsec The Code for @code{insert-buffer}
5716 @end ifnottex
5717
5718 @need 800
5719 Here is the earlier code:
5720
5721 @smallexample
5722 @group
5723 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5724 "Insert after point the contents of BUFFER.
5725 Puts mark after the inserted text.
5726 BUFFER may be a buffer or a buffer name."
5727 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5728 @end group
5729 @group
5730 (or (bufferp buffer)
5731 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5732 (let (start end newmark)
5733 (save-excursion
5734 (save-excursion
5735 (set-buffer buffer)
5736 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5737 @end group
5738 @group
5739 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5740 (setq newmark (point)))
5741 (push-mark newmark)))
5742 @end group
5743 @end smallexample
5744
5745 @need 1200
5746 As with other function definitions, you can use a template to see an
5747 outline of the function:
5748
5749 @smallexample
5750 @group
5751 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5752 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5753 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5754 @var{body}@dots{})
5755 @end group
5756 @end smallexample
5757
5758 @node insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer body, insert-buffer code, insert-buffer
5759 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5760 @subsection The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5761 @findex interactive, @r{example use of}
5762
5763 In @code{insert-buffer}, the argument to the @code{interactive}
5764 declaration has two parts, an asterisk, @samp{*}, and @samp{bInsert
5765 buffer:@: }.
5766
5767 @menu
5768 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
5769 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
5770 @end menu
5771
5772 @node Read-only buffer, b for interactive, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer interactive
5773 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5774 @unnumberedsubsubsec A Read-only Buffer
5775 @cindex Read-only buffer
5776 @cindex Asterisk for read-only buffer
5777 @findex * @r{for read-only buffer}
5778
5779 The asterisk is for the situation when the current buffer is a
5780 read-only buffer---a buffer that cannot be modified. If
5781 @code{insert-buffer} is called when the current buffer is read-only, a
5782 message to this effect is printed in the echo area and the terminal
5783 may beep or blink at you; you will not be permitted to insert anything
5784 into current buffer. The asterisk does not need to be followed by a
5785 newline to separate it from the next argument.
5786
5787 @node b for interactive, , Read-only buffer, insert-buffer interactive
5788 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5789 @unnumberedsubsubsec @samp{b} in an Interactive Expression
5790
5791 The next argument in the interactive expression starts with a lower
5792 case @samp{b}. (This is different from the code for
5793 @code{append-to-buffer}, which uses an upper-case @samp{B}.
5794 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
5795 The lower-case @samp{b} tells the Lisp interpreter that the argument
5796 for @code{insert-buffer} should be an existing buffer or else its
5797 name. (The upper-case @samp{B} option provides for the possibility
5798 that the buffer does not exist.) Emacs will prompt you for the name
5799 of the buffer, offering you a default buffer, with name completion
5800 enabled. If the buffer does not exist, you receive a message that
5801 says ``No match''; your terminal may beep at you as well.
5802
5803 The new and simplified code generates a list for @code{interactive}.
5804 It uses the @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} and @code{read-buffer}
5805 functions with which we are already familiar and the @code{progn}
5806 special form with which we are not. (It will be described later.)
5807
5808 @node insert-buffer body, if & or, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer
5809 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5810 @subsection The Body of the @code{insert-buffer} Function
5811
5812 The body of the @code{insert-buffer} function has two major parts: an
5813 @code{or} expression and a @code{let} expression. The purpose of the
5814 @code{or} expression is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is
5815 bound to a buffer and not just the name of a buffer. The body of the
5816 @code{let} expression contains the code which copies the other buffer
5817 into the current buffer.
5818
5819 @need 1250
5820 In outline, the two expressions fit into the @code{insert-buffer}
5821 function like this:
5822
5823 @smallexample
5824 @group
5825 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5826 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5827 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5828 (or @dots{}
5829 @dots{}
5830 @end group
5831 @group
5832 (let (@var{varlist})
5833 @var{body-of-}@code{let}@dots{} )
5834 @end group
5835 @end smallexample
5836
5837 To understand how the @code{or} expression ensures that the argument
5838 @code{buffer} is bound to a buffer and not to the name of a buffer, it
5839 is first necessary to understand the @code{or} function.
5840
5841 Before doing this, let me rewrite this part of the function using
5842 @code{if} so that you can see what is done in a manner that will be familiar.
5843
5844 @node if & or, Insert or, insert-buffer body, insert-buffer
5845 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5846 @subsection @code{insert-buffer} With an @code{if} Instead of an @code{or}
5847
5848 The job to be done is to make sure the value of @code{buffer} is a
5849 buffer itself and not the name of a buffer. If the value is the name,
5850 then the buffer itself must be got.
5851
5852 You can imagine yourself at a conference where an usher is wandering
5853 around holding a list with your name on it and looking for you: the
5854 usher is ``bound'' to your name, not to you; but when the usher finds
5855 you and takes your arm, the usher becomes ``bound'' to you.
5856
5857 @need 800
5858 In Lisp, you might describe this situation like this:
5859
5860 @smallexample
5861 @group
5862 (if (not (holding-on-to-guest))
5863 (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5864 @end group
5865 @end smallexample
5866
5867 We want to do the same thing with a buffer---if we do not have the
5868 buffer itself, we want to get it.
5869
5870 @need 1200
5871 Using a predicate called @code{bufferp} that tells us whether we have a
5872 buffer (rather than its name), we can write the code like this:
5873
5874 @smallexample
5875 @group
5876 (if (not (bufferp buffer)) ; @r{if-part}
5877 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))) ; @r{then-part}
5878 @end group
5879 @end smallexample
5880
5881 @noindent
5882 Here, the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression is
5883 @w{@code{(not (bufferp buffer))}}; and the then-part is the expression
5884 @w{@code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}}.
5885
5886 In the test, the function @code{bufferp} returns true if its argument is
5887 a buffer---but false if its argument is the name of the buffer. (The
5888 last character of the function name @code{bufferp} is the character
5889 @samp{p}; as we saw earlier, such use of @samp{p} is a convention that
5890 indicates that the function is a predicate, which is a term that means
5891 that the function will determine whether some property is true or false.
5892 @xref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong Type Object as an
5893 Argument}.)
5894
5895 @need 1200
5896 The function @code{not} precedes the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)},
5897 so the true-or-false-test looks like this:
5898
5899 @smallexample
5900 (not (bufferp buffer))
5901 @end smallexample
5902
5903 @noindent
5904 @code{not} is a function that returns true if its argument is false
5905 and false if its argument is true. So if @code{(bufferp buffer)}
5906 returns true, the @code{not} expression returns false and vice-verse:
5907 what is ``not true'' is false and what is ``not false'' is true.
5908
5909 Using this test, the @code{if} expression works as follows: when the
5910 value of the variable @code{buffer} is actually a buffer rather than
5911 its name, the true-or-false-test returns false and the @code{if}
5912 expression does not evaluate the then-part. This is fine, since we do
5913 not need to do anything to the variable @code{buffer} if it really is
5914 a buffer.
5915
5916 On the other hand, when the value of @code{buffer} is not a buffer
5917 itself, but the name of a buffer, the true-or-false-test returns true
5918 and the then-part of the expression is evaluated. In this case, the
5919 then-part is @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}. This
5920 expression uses the @code{get-buffer} function to return an actual
5921 buffer itself, given its name. The @code{setq} then sets the variable
5922 @code{buffer} to the value of the buffer itself, replacing its previous
5923 value (which was the name of the buffer).
5924
5925 @node Insert or, Insert let, if & or, insert-buffer
5926 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5927 @subsection The @code{or} in the Body
5928
5929 The purpose of the @code{or} expression in the @code{insert-buffer}
5930 function is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is bound to a
5931 buffer and not just to the name of a buffer. The previous section shows
5932 how the job could have been done using an @code{if} expression.
5933 However, the @code{insert-buffer} function actually uses @code{or}.
5934 To understand this, it is necessary to understand how @code{or} works.
5935
5936 @findex or
5937 An @code{or} function can have any number of arguments. It evaluates
5938 each argument in turn and returns the value of the first of its
5939 arguments that is not @code{nil}. Also, and this is a crucial feature
5940 of @code{or}, it does not evaluate any subsequent arguments after
5941 returning the first non-@code{nil} value.
5942
5943 @need 800
5944 The @code{or} expression looks like this:
5945
5946 @smallexample
5947 @group
5948 (or (bufferp buffer)
5949 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5950 @end group
5951 @end smallexample
5952
5953 @noindent
5954 The first argument to @code{or} is the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)}.
5955 This expression returns true (a non-@code{nil} value) if the buffer is
5956 actually a buffer, and not just the name of a buffer. In the @code{or}
5957 expression, if this is the case, the @code{or} expression returns this
5958 true value and does not evaluate the next expression---and this is fine
5959 with us, since we do not want to do anything to the value of
5960 @code{buffer} if it really is a buffer.
5961
5962 On the other hand, if the value of @code{(bufferp buffer)} is @code{nil},
5963 which it will be if the value of @code{buffer} is the name of a buffer,
5964 the Lisp interpreter evaluates the next element of the @code{or}
5965 expression. This is the expression @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer
5966 buffer))}. This expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, which
5967 is the value to which it sets the variable @code{buffer}---and this
5968 value is a buffer itself, not the name of a buffer.
5969
5970 The result of all this is that the symbol @code{buffer} is always
5971 bound to a buffer itself rather than to the name of a buffer. All
5972 this is necessary because the @code{set-buffer} function in a
5973 following line only works with a buffer itself, not with the name to a
5974 buffer.
5975
5976 @need 1250
5977 Incidentally, using @code{or}, the situation with the usher would be
5978 written like this:
5979
5980 @smallexample
5981 (or (holding-on-to-guest) (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5982 @end smallexample
5983
5984 @node Insert let, New insert-buffer, Insert or, insert-buffer
5985 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5986 @subsection The @code{let} Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5987
5988 After ensuring that the variable @code{buffer} refers to a buffer itself
5989 and not just to the name of a buffer, the @code{insert-buffer function}
5990 continues with a @code{let} expression. This specifies three local
5991 variables, @code{start}, @code{end}, and @code{newmark} and binds them
5992 to the initial value @code{nil}. These variables are used inside the
5993 remainder of the @code{let} and temporarily hide any other occurrence of
5994 variables of the same name in Emacs until the end of the @code{let}.
5995
5996 @need 1200
5997 The body of the @code{let} contains two @code{save-excursion}
5998 expressions. First, we will look at the inner @code{save-excursion}
5999 expression in detail. The expression looks like this:
6000
6001 @smallexample
6002 @group
6003 (save-excursion
6004 (set-buffer buffer)
6005 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
6006 @end group
6007 @end smallexample
6008
6009 @noindent
6010 The expression @code{(set-buffer buffer)} changes Emacs' attention
6011 from the current buffer to the one from which the text will copied.
6012 In that buffer, the variables @code{start} and @code{end} are set to
6013 the beginning and end of the buffer, using the commands
6014 @code{point-min} and @code{point-max}. Note that we have here an
6015 illustration of how @code{setq} is able to set two variables in the
6016 same expression. The first argument of @code{setq} is set to the
6017 value of its second, and its third argument is set to the value of its
6018 fourth.
6019
6020 After the body of the inner @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, the
6021 @code{save-excursion} restores the original buffer, but @code{start} and
6022 @code{end} remain set to the values of the beginning and end of the
6023 buffer from which the text will be copied.
6024
6025 @need 1250
6026 The outer @code{save-excursion} expression looks like this:
6027
6028 @smallexample
6029 @group
6030 (save-excursion
6031 (@var{inner-}@code{save-excursion}@var{-expression}
6032 (@var{go-to-new-buffer-and-set-}@code{start}@var{-and-}@code{end})
6033 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
6034 (setq newmark (point)))
6035 @end group
6036 @end smallexample
6037
6038 @noindent
6039 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies the text
6040 @emph{into} the current buffer @emph{from} the region indicated by
6041 @code{start} and @code{end} in @code{buffer}. Since the whole of the
6042 second buffer lies between @code{start} and @code{end}, the whole of
6043 the second buffer is copied into the buffer you are editing. Next,
6044 the value of point, which will be at the end of the inserted text, is
6045 recorded in the variable @code{newmark}.
6046
6047 After the body of the outer @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, point
6048 and mark are relocated to their original places.
6049
6050 However, it is convenient to locate a mark at the end of the newly
6051 inserted text and locate point at its beginning. The @code{newmark}
6052 variable records the end of the inserted text. In the last line of
6053 the @code{let} expression, the @code{(push-mark newmark)} expression
6054 function sets a mark to this location. (The previous location of the
6055 mark is still accessible; it is recorded on the mark ring and you can
6056 go back to it with @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}}.) Meanwhile, point is
6057 located at the beginning of the inserted text, which is where it was
6058 before you called the insert function, the position of which was saved
6059 by the first @code{save-excursion}.
6060
6061 @need 1250
6062 The whole @code{let} expression looks like this:
6063
6064 @smallexample
6065 @group
6066 (let (start end newmark)
6067 (save-excursion
6068 (save-excursion
6069 (set-buffer buffer)
6070 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
6071 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
6072 (setq newmark (point)))
6073 (push-mark newmark))
6074 @end group
6075 @end smallexample
6076
6077 Like the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the @code{insert-buffer}
6078 function uses @code{let}, @code{save-excursion}, and
6079 @code{set-buffer}. In addition, the function illustrates one way to
6080 use @code{or}. All these functions are building blocks that we will
6081 find and use again and again.
6082
6083 @node New insert-buffer, , Insert let, insert-buffer
6084 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6085 @subsection New Body for @code{insert-buffer}
6086 @findex insert-buffer, new version body
6087 @findex new version body for insert-buffer
6088
6089 The body in the GNU Emacs 22 version is more confusing than the original.
6090
6091 @need 1250
6092 It consists of two expressions,
6093
6094 @smallexample
6095 @group
6096 (push-mark
6097 (save-excursion
6098 (insert-buffer-substring (get-buffer buffer))
6099 (point)))
6100
6101 nil
6102 @end group
6103 @end smallexample
6104
6105 @noindent
6106 except, and this is what confuses novices, very important work is done
6107 inside the @code{push-mark} expression.
6108
6109 The @code{get-buffer} function returns a buffer with the name
6110 provided. You will note that the function is @emph{not} called
6111 @code{get-buffer-create}; it does not create a buffer if one does not
6112 already exist. The buffer returned by @code{get-buffer}, an existing
6113 buffer, is passed to @code{insert-buffer-substring}, which inserts the
6114 whole of the buffer (since you did not specify anything else).
6115
6116 The location into which the buffer is inserted is recorded by
6117 @code{push-mark}. Then the function returns @code{nil}, the value of
6118 its last command. Put another way, the @code{insert-buffer} function
6119 exists only to produce a side effect, inserting another buffer, not to
6120 return any value.
6121
6122 @node beginning-of-buffer, Second Buffer Related Review, insert-buffer, More Complex
6123 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6124 @section Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6125 @findex beginning-of-buffer
6126
6127 The basic structure of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function has
6128 already been discussed. (@xref{simplified-beginning-of-buffer, , A
6129 Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition}.)
6130 This section describes the complex part of the definition.
6131
6132 As previously described, when invoked without an argument,
6133 @code{beginning-of-buffer} moves the cursor to the beginning of the
6134 buffer (in truth, the beginning of the accessible portion of the
6135 buffer), leaving the mark at the previous position. However, when the
6136 command is invoked with a number between one and ten, the function
6137 considers that number to be a fraction of the length of the buffer,
6138 measured in tenths, and Emacs moves the cursor that fraction of the
6139 way from the beginning of the buffer. Thus, you can either call this
6140 function with the key command @kbd{M-<}, which will move the cursor to
6141 the beginning of the buffer, or with a key command such as @kbd{C-u 7
6142 M-<} which will move the cursor to a point 70% of the way through the
6143 buffer. If a number bigger than ten is used for the argument, it
6144 moves to the end of the buffer.
6145
6146 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} function can be called with or without an
6147 argument. The use of the argument is optional.
6148
6149 @menu
6150 * Optional Arguments::
6151 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
6152 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
6153 @end menu
6154
6155 @node Optional Arguments, beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer, beginning-of-buffer
6156 @subsection Optional Arguments
6157
6158 Unless told otherwise, Lisp expects that a function with an argument in
6159 its function definition will be called with a value for that argument.
6160 If that does not happen, you get an error and a message that says
6161 @samp{Wrong number of arguments}.
6162
6163 @cindex Optional arguments
6164 @cindex Keyword
6165 @findex optional
6166 However, optional arguments are a feature of Lisp: a particular
6167 @dfn{keyword} is used to tell the Lisp interpreter that an argument is
6168 optional. The keyword is @code{&optional}. (The @samp{&} in front of
6169 @samp{optional} is part of the keyword.) In a function definition, if
6170 an argument follows the keyword @code{&optional}, no value need be
6171 passed to that argument when the function is called.
6172
6173 @need 1200
6174 The first line of the function definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6175 therefore looks like this:
6176
6177 @smallexample
6178 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6179 @end smallexample
6180
6181 @need 1250
6182 In outline, the whole function looks like this:
6183
6184 @smallexample
6185 @group
6186 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6187 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
6188 (interactive "P")
6189 (or (@var{is-the-argument-a-cons-cell} arg)
6190 (and @var{are-both-transient-mark-mode-and-mark-active-true})
6191 (push-mark))
6192 (let (@var{determine-size-and-set-it})
6193 (goto-char
6194 (@var{if-there-is-an-argument}
6195 @var{figure-out-where-to-go}
6196 @var{else-go-to}
6197 (point-min))))
6198 @var{do-nicety}
6199 @end group
6200 @end smallexample
6201
6202 The function is similar to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}
6203 function except that the @code{interactive} expression has @code{"P"}
6204 as an argument and the @code{goto-char} function is followed by an
6205 if-then-else expression that figures out where to put the cursor if
6206 there is an argument that is not a cons cell.
6207
6208 (Since I do not explain a cons cell for many more chapters, please
6209 consider ignoring the function @code{consp}. @xref{List
6210 Implementation, , How Lists are Implemented}, and @ref{Cons Cell Type,
6211 , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6212 Manual}.)
6213
6214 The @code{"P"} in the @code{interactive} expression tells Emacs to
6215 pass a prefix argument, if there is one, to the function in raw form.
6216 A prefix argument is made by typing the @key{META} key followed by a
6217 number, or by typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number. (If you don't type
6218 a number, @kbd{C-u} defaults to a cons cell with a 4. A lowercase
6219 @code{"p"} in the @code{interactive} expression causes the function to
6220 convert a prefix arg to a number.)
6221
6222 The true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression looks complex, but
6223 it is not: it checks whether @code{arg} has a value that is not
6224 @code{nil} and whether it is a cons cell. (That is what @code{consp}
6225 does; it checks whether its argument is a cons cell.) If @code{arg}
6226 has a value that is not @code{nil} (and is not a cons cell), which
6227 will be the case if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with a
6228 numeric argument, then this true-or-false-test will return true and
6229 the then-part of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. On the
6230 other hand, if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is not called with an
6231 argument, the value of @code{arg} will be @code{nil} and the else-part
6232 of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. The else-part is
6233 simply @code{point-min}, and when this is the outcome, the whole
6234 @code{goto-char} expression is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, which
6235 is how we saw the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function in its
6236 simplified form.
6237
6238 @node beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer complete, Optional Arguments, beginning-of-buffer
6239 @subsection @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
6240
6241 When @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with an argument, an
6242 expression is evaluated which calculates what value to pass to
6243 @code{goto-char}. This expression is rather complicated at first sight.
6244 It includes an inner @code{if} expression and much arithmetic. It looks
6245 like this:
6246
6247 @smallexample
6248 @group
6249 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6250 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6251 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6252 (/ size 10))
6253 (/
6254 (+ 10
6255 (*
6256 size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10)))
6257 @end group
6258 @end smallexample
6259
6260 @menu
6261 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
6262 * Large buffer case::
6263 * Small buffer case::
6264 @end menu
6265
6266 @node Disentangle beginning-of-buffer, Large buffer case, beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6267 @ifnottex
6268 @unnumberedsubsubsec Disentangle @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6269 @end ifnottex
6270
6271 Like other complex-looking expressions, the conditional expression
6272 within @code{beginning-of-buffer} can be disentangled by looking at it
6273 as parts of a template, in this case, the template for an if-then-else
6274 expression. In skeletal form, the expression looks like this:
6275
6276 @smallexample
6277 @group
6278 (if (@var{buffer-is-large}
6279 @var{divide-buffer-size-by-10-and-multiply-by-arg}
6280 @var{else-use-alternate-calculation}
6281 @end group
6282 @end smallexample
6283
6284 The true-or-false-test of this inner @code{if} expression checks the
6285 size of the buffer. The reason for this is that the old version 18
6286 Emacs used numbers that are no bigger than eight million or so and in
6287 the computation that followed, the programmer feared that Emacs might
6288 try to use over-large numbers if the buffer were large. The term
6289 `overflow', mentioned in the comment, means numbers that are over
6290 large. More recent versions of Emacs use larger numbers, but this
6291 code has not been touched, if only because people now look at buffers
6292 that are far, far larger than ever before.
6293
6294 There are two cases: if the buffer is large and if it is not.
6295
6296 @node Large buffer case, Small buffer case, Disentangle beginning-of-buffer, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6297 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6298 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a large buffer
6299
6300 In @code{beginning-of-buffer}, the inner @code{if} expression tests
6301 whether the size of the buffer is greater than 10,000 characters. To do
6302 this, it uses the @code{>} function and the computation of @code{size}
6303 that comes from the let expression.
6304
6305 In the old days, the function @code{buffer-size} was used. Not only
6306 was that function called several times, it gave the size of the whole
6307 buffer, not the accessible part. The computation makes much more
6308 sense when it handles just the accessible part. (@xref{Narrowing &
6309 Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more information on focusing
6310 attention to an `accessible' part.)
6311
6312 @need 800
6313 The line looks like this:
6314
6315 @smallexample
6316 (if (> size 10000)
6317 @end smallexample
6318
6319 @need 1200
6320 @noindent
6321 When the buffer is large, the then-part of the @code{if} expression is
6322 evaluated. It reads like this (after formatting for easy reading):
6323
6324 @smallexample
6325 @group
6326 (*
6327 (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6328 (/ size 10))
6329 @end group
6330 @end smallexample
6331
6332 @noindent
6333 This expression is a multiplication, with two arguments to the function
6334 @code{*}.
6335
6336 The first argument is @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}. When
6337 @code{"P"} is used as the argument for @code{interactive}, the value
6338 passed to the function as its argument is passed a ``raw prefix
6339 argument'', and not a number. (It is a number in a list.) To perform
6340 the arithmetic, a conversion is necessary, and
6341 @code{prefix-numeric-value} does the job.
6342
6343 @findex / @r{(division)}
6344 @cindex Division
6345 The second argument is @code{(/ size 10)}. This expression divides
6346 the numeric value by ten --- the numeric value of the size of the
6347 accessible portion of the buffer. This produces a number that tells
6348 how many characters make up one tenth of the buffer size. (In Lisp,
6349 @code{/} is used for division, just as @code{*} is used for
6350 multiplication.)
6351
6352 @need 1200
6353 In the multiplication expression as a whole, this amount is multiplied
6354 by the value of the prefix argument---the multiplication looks like this:
6355
6356 @smallexample
6357 @group
6358 (* @var{numeric-value-of-prefix-arg}
6359 @var{number-of-characters-in-one-tenth-of-the-accessible-buffer})
6360 @end group
6361 @end smallexample
6362
6363 @noindent
6364 If, for example, the prefix argument is @samp{7}, the one-tenth value
6365 will be multiplied by 7 to give a position 70% of the way through.
6366
6367 @need 1200
6368 The result of all this is that if the accessible portion of the buffer
6369 is large, the @code{goto-char} expression reads like this:
6370
6371 @smallexample
6372 @group
6373 (goto-char (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6374 (/ size 10)))
6375 @end group
6376 @end smallexample
6377
6378 This puts the cursor where we want it.
6379
6380 @node Small buffer case, , Large buffer case, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6381 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6382 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a small buffer
6383
6384 If the buffer contains fewer than 10,000 characters, a slightly
6385 different computation is performed. You might think this is not
6386 necessary, since the first computation could do the job. However, in
6387 a small buffer, the first method may not put the cursor on exactly the
6388 desired line; the second method does a better job.
6389
6390 @need 800
6391 The code looks like this:
6392
6393 @c Keep this on one line.
6394 @smallexample
6395 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10))
6396 @end smallexample
6397
6398 @need 1200
6399 @noindent
6400 This is code in which you figure out what happens by discovering how the
6401 functions are embedded in parentheses. It is easier to read if you
6402 reformat it with each expression indented more deeply than its
6403 enclosing expression:
6404
6405 @smallexample
6406 @group
6407 (/
6408 (+ 10
6409 (*
6410 size
6411 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6412 10))
6413 @end group
6414 @end smallexample
6415
6416 @need 1200
6417 @noindent
6418 Looking at parentheses, we see that the innermost operation is
6419 @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}, which converts the raw argument to
6420 a number. In the following expression, this number is multiplied by
6421 the size of the accessible portion of the buffer:
6422
6423 @smallexample
6424 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))
6425 @end smallexample
6426
6427 @noindent
6428 This multiplication creates a number that may be larger than the size of
6429 the buffer---seven times larger if the argument is 7, for example. Ten
6430 is then added to this number and finally the large number is divided by
6431 ten to provide a value that is one character larger than the percentage
6432 position in the buffer.
6433
6434 The number that results from all this is passed to @code{goto-char} and
6435 the cursor is moved to that point.
6436
6437 @need 1500
6438 @node beginning-of-buffer complete, , beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer
6439 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6440 @subsection The Complete @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6441
6442 @need 1000
6443 Here is the complete text of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function:
6444 @sp 1
6445
6446 @c In GNU Emacs 22
6447 @smallexample
6448 @group
6449 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6450 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6451 leave mark at previous position.
6452 With \\[universal-argument] prefix,
6453 do not set mark at previous position.
6454 With numeric arg N,
6455 put point N/10 of the way from the beginning.
6456
6457 If the buffer is narrowed,
6458 this command uses the beginning and size
6459 of the accessible part of the buffer.
6460 @end group
6461
6462 @group
6463 Don't use this command in Lisp programs!
6464 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6465 and avoids clobbering the mark."
6466 (interactive "P")
6467 (or (consp arg)
6468 (and transient-mark-mode mark-active)
6469 (push-mark))
6470 @end group
6471 @group
6472 (let ((size (- (point-max) (point-min))))
6473 (goto-char (if (and arg (not (consp arg)))
6474 (+ (point-min)
6475 (if (> size 10000)
6476 ;; Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!
6477 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6478 (/ size 10))
6479 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6480 10)))
6481 (point-min))))
6482 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6483 @end group
6484 @end smallexample
6485
6486 @ignore
6487 From before GNU Emacs 22
6488 @smallexample
6489 @group
6490 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6491 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6492 leave mark at previous position.
6493 With arg N, put point N/10 of the way
6494 from the true beginning.
6495 @end group
6496 @group
6497 Don't use this in Lisp programs!
6498 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6499 and does not set the mark."
6500 (interactive "P")
6501 (push-mark)
6502 @end group
6503 @group
6504 (goto-char
6505 (if arg
6506 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6507 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6508 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6509 (/ (buffer-size) 10))
6510 @end group
6511 @group
6512 (/ (+ 10 (* (buffer-size)
6513 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6514 10))
6515 (point-min)))
6516 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6517 @end group
6518 @end smallexample
6519 @end ignore
6520
6521 @noindent
6522 Except for two small points, the previous discussion shows how this
6523 function works. The first point deals with a detail in the
6524 documentation string, and the second point concerns the last line of
6525 the function.
6526
6527 @need 800
6528 In the documentation string, there is reference to an expression:
6529
6530 @smallexample
6531 \\[universal-argument]
6532 @end smallexample
6533
6534 @noindent
6535 A @samp{\\} is used before the first square bracket of this
6536 expression. This @samp{\\} tells the Lisp interpreter to substitute
6537 whatever key is currently bound to the @samp{[@dots{}]}. In the case
6538 of @code{universal-argument}, that is usually @kbd{C-u}, but it might
6539 be different. (@xref{Documentation Tips, , Tips for Documentation
6540 Strings, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
6541 information.)
6542
6543 @need 1200
6544 Finally, the last line of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} command says
6545 to move point to the beginning of the next line if the command is
6546 invoked with an argument:
6547
6548 @smallexample
6549 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6550 @end smallexample
6551
6552 @noindent
6553 This puts the cursor at the beginning of the first line after the
6554 appropriate tenths position in the buffer. This is a flourish that
6555 means that the cursor is always located @emph{at least} the requested
6556 tenths of the way through the buffer, which is a nicety that is,
6557 perhaps, not necessary, but which, if it did not occur, would be sure
6558 to draw complaints.
6559
6560 On the other hand, it also means that if you specify the command with
6561 a @kbd{C-u}, but without a number, that is to say, if the `raw prefix
6562 argument' is simply a cons cell, then the command puts you at the
6563 beginning of the second line @dots{} I don't know whether this is
6564 intended or whether no one has dealt with the code to avoid this
6565 happening.
6566
6567 @node Second Buffer Related Review, optional Exercise, beginning-of-buffer, More Complex
6568 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6569 @section Review
6570
6571 Here is a brief summary of some of the topics covered in this chapter.
6572
6573 @table @code
6574 @item or
6575 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and return the value of the first
6576 argument that is not @code{nil}; if none return a value that is not
6577 @code{nil}, return @code{nil}. In brief, return the first true value
6578 of the arguments; return a true value if one @emph{or} any of the
6579 others are true.
6580
6581 @item and
6582 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and if any are @code{nil}, return
6583 @code{nil}; if none are @code{nil}, return the value of the last
6584 argument. In brief, return a true value only if all the arguments are
6585 true; return a true value if one @emph{and} each of the others is
6586 true.
6587
6588 @item &optional
6589 A keyword used to indicate that an argument to a function definition
6590 is optional; this means that the function can be evaluated without the
6591 argument, if desired.
6592
6593 @item prefix-numeric-value
6594 Convert the `raw prefix argument' produced by @code{(interactive
6595 "P")} to a numeric value.
6596
6597 @item forward-line
6598 Move point forward to the beginning of the next line, or if the argument
6599 is greater than one, forward that many lines. If it can't move as far
6600 forward as it is supposed to, @code{forward-line} goes forward as far as
6601 it can and then returns a count of the number of additional lines it was
6602 supposed to move but couldn't.
6603
6604 @item erase-buffer
6605 Delete the entire contents of the current buffer.
6606
6607 @item bufferp
6608 Return @code{t} if its argument is a buffer; otherwise return @code{nil}.
6609 @end table
6610
6611 @node optional Exercise, , Second Buffer Related Review, More Complex
6612 @section @code{optional} Argument Exercise
6613
6614 Write an interactive function with an optional argument that tests
6615 whether its argument, a number, is greater than or equal to, or else,
6616 less than the value of @code{fill-column}, and tells you which, in a
6617 message. However, if you do not pass an argument to the function, use
6618 56 as a default value.
6619
6620 @node Narrowing & Widening, car cdr & cons, More Complex, Top
6621 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6622 @chapter Narrowing and Widening
6623 @cindex Focusing attention (narrowing)
6624 @cindex Narrowing
6625 @cindex Widening
6626
6627 Narrowing is a feature of Emacs that makes it possible for you to focus
6628 on a specific part of a buffer, and work without accidentally changing
6629 other parts. Narrowing is normally disabled since it can confuse
6630 novices.
6631
6632 @menu
6633 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
6634 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
6635 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
6636 * narrow Exercise::
6637 @end menu
6638
6639 @node Narrowing advantages, save-restriction, Narrowing & Widening, Narrowing & Widening
6640 @ifnottex
6641 @unnumberedsec The Advantages of Narrowing
6642 @end ifnottex
6643
6644 With narrowing, the rest of a buffer is made invisible, as if it weren't
6645 there. This is an advantage if, for example, you want to replace a word
6646 in one part of a buffer but not in another: you narrow to the part you want
6647 and the replacement is carried out only in that section, not in the rest
6648 of the buffer. Searches will only work within a narrowed region, not
6649 outside of one, so if you are fixing a part of a document, you can keep
6650 yourself from accidentally finding parts you do not need to fix by
6651 narrowing just to the region you want.
6652 (The key binding for @code{narrow-to-region} is @kbd{C-x n n}.)
6653
6654 However, narrowing does make the rest of the buffer invisible, which
6655 can scare people who inadvertently invoke narrowing and think they
6656 have deleted a part of their file. Moreover, the @code{undo} command
6657 (which is usually bound to @kbd{C-x u}) does not turn off narrowing
6658 (nor should it), so people can become quite desperate if they do not
6659 know that they can return the rest of a buffer to visibility with the
6660 @code{widen} command.
6661 (The key binding for @code{widen} is @kbd{C-x n w}.)
6662
6663 Narrowing is just as useful to the Lisp interpreter as to a human.
6664 Often, an Emacs Lisp function is designed to work on just part of a
6665 buffer; or conversely, an Emacs Lisp function needs to work on all of a
6666 buffer that has been narrowed. The @code{what-line} function, for
6667 example, removes the narrowing from a buffer, if it has any narrowing
6668 and when it has finished its job, restores the narrowing to what it was.
6669 On the other hand, the @code{count-lines} function, which is called by
6670 @code{what-line}, uses narrowing to restrict itself to just that portion
6671 of the buffer in which it is interested and then restores the previous
6672 situation.
6673
6674 @node save-restriction, what-line, Narrowing advantages, Narrowing & Widening
6675 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6676 @section The @code{save-restriction} Special Form
6677 @findex save-restriction
6678
6679 In Emacs Lisp, you can use the @code{save-restriction} special form to
6680 keep track of whatever narrowing is in effect, if any. When the Lisp
6681 interpreter meets with @code{save-restriction}, it executes the code
6682 in the body of the @code{save-restriction} expression, and then undoes
6683 any changes to narrowing that the code caused. If, for example, the
6684 buffer is narrowed and the code that follows @code{save-restriction}
6685 gets rid of the narrowing, @code{save-restriction} returns the buffer
6686 to its narrowed region afterwards. In the @code{what-line} command,
6687 any narrowing the buffer may have is undone by the @code{widen}
6688 command that immediately follows the @code{save-restriction} command.
6689 Any original narrowing is restored just before the completion of the
6690 function.
6691
6692 @need 1250
6693 The template for a @code{save-restriction} expression is simple:
6694
6695 @smallexample
6696 @group
6697 (save-restriction
6698 @var{body}@dots{} )
6699 @end group
6700 @end smallexample
6701
6702 @noindent
6703 The body of the @code{save-restriction} is one or more expressions that
6704 will be evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter.
6705
6706 Finally, a point to note: when you use both @code{save-excursion} and
6707 @code{save-restriction}, one right after the other, you should use
6708 @code{save-excursion} outermost. If you write them in reverse order,
6709 you may fail to record narrowing in the buffer to which Emacs switches
6710 after calling @code{save-excursion}. Thus, when written together,
6711 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} should be written
6712 like this:
6713
6714 @smallexample
6715 @group
6716 (save-excursion
6717 (save-restriction
6718 @var{body}@dots{}))
6719 @end group
6720 @end smallexample
6721
6722 In other circumstances, when not written together, the
6723 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} special forms must
6724 be written in the order appropriate to the function.
6725
6726 @need 1250
6727 For example,
6728
6729 @smallexample
6730 @group
6731 (save-restriction
6732 (widen)
6733 (save-excursion
6734 @var{body}@dots{}))
6735 @end group
6736 @end smallexample
6737
6738 @ignore
6739 Emacs 22
6740 /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
6741
6742 (defun what-line ()
6743 "Print the current buffer line number and narrowed line number of point."
6744 (interactive)
6745 (let ((start (point-min))
6746 (n (line-number-at-pos)))
6747 (if (= start 1)
6748 (message "Line %d" n)
6749 (save-excursion
6750 (save-restriction
6751 (widen)
6752 (message "line %d (narrowed line %d)"
6753 (+ n (line-number-at-pos start) -1) n))))))
6754
6755 (defun line-number-at-pos (&optional pos)
6756 "Return (narrowed) buffer line number at position POS.
6757 If POS is nil, use current buffer location.
6758 Counting starts at (point-min), so the value refers
6759 to the contents of the accessible portion of the buffer."
6760 (let ((opoint (or pos (point))) start)
6761 (save-excursion
6762 (goto-char (point-min))
6763 (setq start (point))
6764 (goto-char opoint)
6765 (forward-line 0)
6766 (1+ (count-lines start (point))))))
6767
6768 (defun count-lines (start end)
6769 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6770 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6771 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6772 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6773 (save-excursion
6774 (save-restriction
6775 (narrow-to-region start end)
6776 (goto-char (point-min))
6777 (if (eq selective-display t)
6778 (save-match-data
6779 (let ((done 0))
6780 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6781 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6782 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6783 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6784 (goto-char (point-max))
6785 (if (and (/= start end)
6786 (not (bolp)))
6787 (1+ done)
6788 done)))
6789 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6790 @end ignore
6791
6792 @node what-line, narrow Exercise, save-restriction, Narrowing & Widening
6793 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6794 @section @code{what-line}
6795 @findex what-line
6796 @cindex Widening, example of
6797
6798 The @code{what-line} command tells you the number of the line in which
6799 the cursor is located. The function illustrates the use of the
6800 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} commands. Here is the
6801 original text of the function:
6802
6803 @smallexample
6804 @group
6805 (defun what-line ()
6806 "Print the current line number (in the buffer) of point."
6807 (interactive)
6808 (save-restriction
6809 (widen)
6810 (save-excursion
6811 (beginning-of-line)
6812 (message "Line %d"
6813 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6814 @end group
6815 @end smallexample
6816
6817 (In recent versions of GNU Emacs, the @code{what-line} function has
6818 been expanded to tell you your line number in a narrowed buffer as
6819 well as your line number in a widened buffer. The recent version is
6820 more complex than the version shown here. If you feel adventurous,
6821 you might want to look at it after figuring out how this version
6822 works. You will probably need to use @kbd{C-h f}
6823 (@code{describe-function}). The newer version uses a conditional to
6824 determine whether the buffer has been narrowed.
6825
6826 (Also, it uses @code{line-number-at-pos}, which among other simple
6827 expressions, such as @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, moves point to
6828 the beginning of the current line with @code{(forward-line 0)} rather
6829 than @code{beginning-of-line}.)
6830
6831 The @code{what-line} function as shown here has a documentation line
6832 and is interactive, as you would expect. The next two lines use the
6833 functions @code{save-restriction} and @code{widen}.
6834
6835 The @code{save-restriction} special form notes whatever narrowing is in
6836 effect, if any, in the current buffer and restores that narrowing after
6837 the code in the body of the @code{save-restriction} has been evaluated.
6838
6839 The @code{save-restriction} special form is followed by @code{widen}.
6840 This function undoes any narrowing the current buffer may have had
6841 when @code{what-line} was called. (The narrowing that was there is
6842 the narrowing that @code{save-restriction} remembers.) This widening
6843 makes it possible for the line counting commands to count from the
6844 beginning of the buffer. Otherwise, they would have been limited to
6845 counting within the accessible region. Any original narrowing is
6846 restored just before the completion of the function by the
6847 @code{save-restriction} special form.
6848
6849 The call to @code{widen} is followed by @code{save-excursion}, which
6850 saves the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) and of the mark, and
6851 restores them after the code in the body of the @code{save-excursion}
6852 uses the @code{beginning-of-line} function to move point.
6853
6854 (Note that the @code{(widen)} expression comes between the
6855 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} special forms. When
6856 you write the two @code{save- @dots{}} expressions in sequence, write
6857 @code{save-excursion} outermost.)
6858
6859 @need 1200
6860 The last two lines of the @code{what-line} function are functions to
6861 count the number of lines in the buffer and then print the number in the
6862 echo area.
6863
6864 @smallexample
6865 @group
6866 (message "Line %d"
6867 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6868 @end group
6869 @end smallexample
6870
6871 The @code{message} function prints a one-line message at the bottom of
6872 the Emacs screen. The first argument is inside of quotation marks and
6873 is printed as a string of characters. However, it may contain a
6874 @samp{%d} expression to print a following argument. @samp{%d} prints
6875 the argument as a decimal, so the message will say something such as
6876 @samp{Line 243}.
6877
6878 @need 1200
6879 The number that is printed in place of the @samp{%d} is computed by the
6880 last line of the function:
6881
6882 @smallexample
6883 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))
6884 @end smallexample
6885
6886 @ignore
6887 GNU Emacs 22
6888
6889 (defun count-lines (start end)
6890 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6891 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6892 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6893 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6894 (save-excursion
6895 (save-restriction
6896 (narrow-to-region start end)
6897 (goto-char (point-min))
6898 (if (eq selective-display t)
6899 (save-match-data
6900 (let ((done 0))
6901 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6902 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6903 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6904 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6905 (goto-char (point-max))
6906 (if (and (/= start end)
6907 (not (bolp)))
6908 (1+ done)
6909 done)))
6910 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6911 @end ignore
6912
6913 @noindent
6914 What this does is count the lines from the first position of the
6915 buffer, indicated by the @code{1}, up to @code{(point)}, and then add
6916 one to that number. (The @code{1+} function adds one to its
6917 argument.) We add one to it because line 2 has only one line before
6918 it, and @code{count-lines} counts only the lines @emph{before} the
6919 current line.
6920
6921 After @code{count-lines} has done its job, and the message has been
6922 printed in the echo area, the @code{save-excursion} restores point and
6923 mark to their original positions; and @code{save-restriction} restores
6924 the original narrowing, if any.
6925
6926 @node narrow Exercise, , what-line, Narrowing & Widening
6927 @section Exercise with Narrowing
6928
6929 Write a function that will display the first 60 characters of the
6930 current buffer, even if you have narrowed the buffer to its latter
6931 half so that the first line is inaccessible. Restore point, mark, and
6932 narrowing. For this exercise, you need to use a whole potpourri of
6933 functions, including @code{save-restriction}, @code{widen},
6934 @code{goto-char}, @code{point-min}, @code{message}, and
6935 @code{buffer-substring}.
6936
6937 @cindex Properties, mention of @code{buffer-substring-no-properties}
6938 (@code{buffer-substring} is a previously unmentioned function you will
6939 have to investigate yourself; or perhaps you will have to use
6940 @code{buffer-substring-no-properties} or
6941 @code{filter-buffer-substring} @dots{}, yet other functions. Text
6942 properties are a feature otherwise not discussed here. @xref{Text
6943 Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6944 Manual}.)
6945
6946 Additionally, do you really need @code{goto-char} or @code{point-min}?
6947 Or can you write the function without them?
6948
6949 @node car cdr & cons, Cutting & Storing Text, Narrowing & Widening, Top
6950 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6951 @chapter @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
6952 @findex car, @r{introduced}
6953 @findex cdr, @r{introduced}
6954
6955 In Lisp, @code{car}, @code{cdr}, and @code{cons} are fundamental
6956 functions. The @code{cons} function is used to construct lists, and
6957 the @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used to take them apart.
6958
6959 In the walk through of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function, we
6960 will see @code{cons} as well as two variants on @code{cdr},
6961 namely, @code{setcdr} and @code{nthcdr}. (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
6962
6963 @menu
6964 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
6965 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
6966 * cons:: Constructing a list.
6967 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
6968 * nth::
6969 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
6970 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
6971 * cons Exercise::
6972 @end menu
6973
6974 @node Strange Names, car & cdr, car cdr & cons, car cdr & cons
6975 @ifnottex
6976 @unnumberedsec Strange Names
6977 @end ifnottex
6978
6979 The name of the @code{cons} function is not unreasonable: it is an
6980 abbreviation of the word `construct'. The origins of the names for
6981 @code{car} and @code{cdr}, on the other hand, are esoteric: @code{car}
6982 is an acronym from the phrase `Contents of the Address part of the
6983 Register'; and @code{cdr} (pronounced `could-er') is an acronym from
6984 the phrase `Contents of the Decrement part of the Register'. These
6985 phrases refer to specific pieces of hardware on the very early
6986 computer on which the original Lisp was developed. Besides being
6987 obsolete, the phrases have been completely irrelevant for more than 25
6988 years to anyone thinking about Lisp. Nonetheless, although a few
6989 brave scholars have begun to use more reasonable names for these
6990 functions, the old terms are still in use. In particular, since the
6991 terms are used in the Emacs Lisp source code, we will use them in this
6992 introduction.
6993
6994 @node car & cdr, cons, Strange Names, car cdr & cons
6995 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6996 @section @code{car} and @code{cdr}
6997
6998 The @sc{car} of a list is, quite simply, the first item in the list.
6999 Thus the @sc{car} of the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} is
7000 @code{rose}.
7001
7002 @need 1200
7003 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can see this by
7004 evaluating the following:
7005
7006 @smallexample
7007 (car '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
7008 @end smallexample
7009
7010 @noindent
7011 After evaluating the expression, @code{rose} will appear in the echo
7012 area.
7013
7014 Clearly, a more reasonable name for the @code{car} function would be
7015 @code{first} and this is often suggested.
7016
7017 @code{car} does not remove the first item from the list; it only reports
7018 what it is. After @code{car} has been applied to a list, the list is
7019 still the same as it was. In the jargon, @code{car} is
7020 `non-destructive'. This feature turns out to be important.
7021
7022 The @sc{cdr} of a list is the rest of the list, that is, the
7023 @code{cdr} function returns the part of the list that follows the
7024 first item. Thus, while the @sc{car} of the list @code{'(rose violet
7025 daisy buttercup)} is @code{rose}, the rest of the list, the value
7026 returned by the @code{cdr} function, is @code{(violet daisy
7027 buttercup)}.
7028
7029 @need 800
7030 You can see this by evaluating the following in the usual way:
7031
7032 @smallexample
7033 (cdr '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
7034 @end smallexample
7035
7036 @noindent
7037 When you evaluate this, @code{(violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in
7038 the echo area.
7039
7040 Like @code{car}, @code{cdr} does not remove any elements from the
7041 list---it just returns a report of what the second and subsequent
7042 elements are.
7043
7044 Incidentally, in the example, the list of flowers is quoted. If it were
7045 not, the Lisp interpreter would try to evaluate the list by calling
7046 @code{rose} as a function. In this example, we do not want to do that.
7047
7048 Clearly, a more reasonable name for @code{cdr} would be @code{rest}.
7049
7050 (There is a lesson here: when you name new functions, consider very
7051 carefully what you are doing, since you may be stuck with the names
7052 for far longer than you expect. The reason this document perpetuates
7053 these names is that the Emacs Lisp source code uses them, and if I did
7054 not use them, you would have a hard time reading the code; but do,
7055 please, try to avoid using these terms yourself. The people who come
7056 after you will be grateful to you.)
7057
7058 When @code{car} and @code{cdr} are applied to a list made up of symbols,
7059 such as the list @code{(pine fir oak maple)}, the element of the list
7060 returned by the function @code{car} is the symbol @code{pine} without
7061 any parentheses around it. @code{pine} is the first element in the
7062 list. However, the @sc{cdr} of the list is a list itself, @code{(fir
7063 oak maple)}, as you can see by evaluating the following expressions in
7064 the usual way:
7065
7066 @smallexample
7067 @group
7068 (car '(pine fir oak maple))
7069
7070 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7071 @end group
7072 @end smallexample
7073
7074 On the other hand, in a list of lists, the first element is itself a
7075 list. @code{car} returns this first element as a list. For example,
7076 the following list contains three sub-lists, a list of carnivores, a
7077 list of herbivores and a list of sea mammals:
7078
7079 @smallexample
7080 @group
7081 (car '((lion tiger cheetah)
7082 (gazelle antelope zebra)
7083 (whale dolphin seal)))
7084 @end group
7085 @end smallexample
7086
7087 @noindent
7088 In this example, the first element or @sc{car} of the list is the list of
7089 carnivores, @code{(lion tiger cheetah)}, and the rest of the list is
7090 @code{((gazelle antelope zebra) (whale dolphin seal))}.
7091
7092 @smallexample
7093 @group
7094 (cdr '((lion tiger cheetah)
7095 (gazelle antelope zebra)
7096 (whale dolphin seal)))
7097 @end group
7098 @end smallexample
7099
7100 It is worth saying again that @code{car} and @code{cdr} are
7101 non-destructive---that is, they do not modify or change lists to which
7102 they are applied. This is very important for how they are used.
7103
7104 Also, in the first chapter, in the discussion about atoms, I said that
7105 in Lisp, ``certain kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated
7106 into parts; but the mechanism for doing this is different from the
7107 mechanism for splitting a list. As far as Lisp is concerned, the
7108 atoms of a list are unsplittable.'' (@xref{Lisp Atoms}.) The
7109 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used for splitting lists and
7110 are considered fundamental to Lisp. Since they cannot split or gain
7111 access to the parts of an array, an array is considered an atom.
7112 Conversely, the other fundamental function, @code{cons}, can put
7113 together or construct a list, but not an array. (Arrays are handled
7114 by array-specific functions. @xref{Arrays, , Arrays, elisp, The GNU
7115 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7116
7117 @node cons, nthcdr, car & cdr, car cdr & cons
7118 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7119 @section @code{cons}
7120 @findex cons, @r{introduced}
7121
7122 The @code{cons} function constructs lists; it is the inverse of
7123 @code{car} and @code{cdr}. For example, @code{cons} can be used to make
7124 a four element list from the three element list, @code{(fir oak maple)}:
7125
7126 @smallexample
7127 (cons 'pine '(fir oak maple))
7128 @end smallexample
7129
7130 @need 800
7131 @noindent
7132 After evaluating this list, you will see
7133
7134 @smallexample
7135 (pine fir oak maple)
7136 @end smallexample
7137
7138 @noindent
7139 appear in the echo area. @code{cons} causes the creation of a new
7140 list in which the element is followed by the elements of the original
7141 list.
7142
7143 We often say that `@code{cons} puts a new element at the beginning of
7144 a list; it attaches or pushes elements onto the list', but this
7145 phrasing can be misleading, since @code{cons} does not change an
7146 existing list, but creates a new one.
7147
7148 Like @code{car} and @code{cdr}, @code{cons} is non-destructive.
7149
7150 @menu
7151 * Build a list::
7152 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
7153 @end menu
7154
7155 @node Build a list, length, cons, cons
7156 @ifnottex
7157 @unnumberedsubsec Build a list
7158 @end ifnottex
7159
7160 @code{cons} must have a list to attach to.@footnote{Actually, you can
7161 @code{cons} an element to an atom to produce a dotted pair. Dotted
7162 pairs are not discussed here; see @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted
7163 Pair Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.} You
7164 cannot start from absolutely nothing. If you are building a list, you
7165 need to provide at least an empty list at the beginning. Here is a
7166 series of @code{cons} expressions that build up a list of flowers. If
7167 you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate each of
7168 the expressions in the usual way; the value is printed in this text
7169 after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
7170
7171 @smallexample
7172 @group
7173 (cons 'buttercup ())
7174 @result{} (buttercup)
7175 @end group
7176
7177 @group
7178 (cons 'daisy '(buttercup))
7179 @result{} (daisy buttercup)
7180 @end group
7181
7182 @group
7183 (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup))
7184 @result{} (violet daisy buttercup)
7185 @end group
7186
7187 @group
7188 (cons 'rose '(violet daisy buttercup))
7189 @result{} (rose violet daisy buttercup)
7190 @end group
7191 @end smallexample
7192
7193 @noindent
7194 In the first example, the empty list is shown as @code{()} and a list
7195 made up of @code{buttercup} followed by the empty list is constructed.
7196 As you can see, the empty list is not shown in the list that was
7197 constructed. All that you see is @code{(buttercup)}. The empty list is
7198 not counted as an element of a list because there is nothing in an empty
7199 list. Generally speaking, an empty list is invisible.
7200
7201 The second example, @code{(cons 'daisy '(buttercup))} constructs a new,
7202 two element list by putting @code{daisy} in front of @code{buttercup};
7203 and the third example constructs a three element list by putting
7204 @code{violet} in front of @code{daisy} and @code{buttercup}.
7205
7206 @node length, , Build a list, cons
7207 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7208 @subsection Find the Length of a List: @code{length}
7209 @findex length
7210
7211 You can find out how many elements there are in a list by using the Lisp
7212 function @code{length}, as in the following examples:
7213
7214 @smallexample
7215 @group
7216 (length '(buttercup))
7217 @result{} 1
7218 @end group
7219
7220 @group
7221 (length '(daisy buttercup))
7222 @result{} 2
7223 @end group
7224
7225 @group
7226 (length (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup)))
7227 @result{} 3
7228 @end group
7229 @end smallexample
7230
7231 @noindent
7232 In the third example, the @code{cons} function is used to construct a
7233 three element list which is then passed to the @code{length} function as
7234 its argument.
7235
7236 @need 1200
7237 We can also use @code{length} to count the number of elements in an
7238 empty list:
7239
7240 @smallexample
7241 @group
7242 (length ())
7243 @result{} 0
7244 @end group
7245 @end smallexample
7246
7247 @noindent
7248 As you would expect, the number of elements in an empty list is zero.
7249
7250 An interesting experiment is to find out what happens if you try to find
7251 the length of no list at all; that is, if you try to call @code{length}
7252 without giving it an argument, not even an empty list:
7253
7254 @smallexample
7255 (length )
7256 @end smallexample
7257
7258 @need 800
7259 @noindent
7260 What you see, if you evaluate this, is the error message
7261
7262 @smallexample
7263 Lisp error: (wrong-number-of-arguments length 0)
7264 @end smallexample
7265
7266 @noindent
7267 This means that the function receives the wrong number of
7268 arguments, zero, when it expects some other number of arguments. In
7269 this case, one argument is expected, the argument being a list whose
7270 length the function is measuring. (Note that @emph{one} list is
7271 @emph{one} argument, even if the list has many elements inside it.)
7272
7273 The part of the error message that says @samp{length} is the name of
7274 the function.
7275
7276 @ignore
7277 @code{length} is still a subroutine, but you need C-h f to discover that.
7278
7279 In an earlier version:
7280 This is written with a special notation, @samp{#<subr},
7281 that indicates that the function @code{length} is one of the primitive
7282 functions written in C rather than in Emacs Lisp. (@samp{subr} is an
7283 abbreviation for `subroutine'.) @xref{What Is a Function, , What Is a
7284 Function?, elisp , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
7285 about subroutines.
7286 @end ignore
7287
7288 @node nthcdr, nth, cons, car cdr & cons
7289 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7290 @section @code{nthcdr}
7291 @findex nthcdr
7292
7293 The @code{nthcdr} function is associated with the @code{cdr} function.
7294 What it does is take the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7295
7296 If you take the @sc{cdr} of the list @code{(pine fir
7297 oak maple)}, you will be returned the list @code{(fir oak maple)}. If you
7298 repeat this on what was returned, you will be returned the list
7299 @code{(oak maple)}. (Of course, repeated @sc{cdr}ing on the original
7300 list will just give you the original @sc{cdr} since the function does
7301 not change the list. You need to evaluate the @sc{cdr} of the
7302 @sc{cdr} and so on.) If you continue this, eventually you will be
7303 returned an empty list, which in this case, instead of being shown as
7304 @code{()} is shown as @code{nil}.
7305
7306 @need 1200
7307 For review, here is a series of repeated @sc{cdr}s, the text following
7308 the @samp{@result{}} shows what is returned.
7309
7310 @smallexample
7311 @group
7312 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7313 @result{}(fir oak maple)
7314 @end group
7315
7316 @group
7317 (cdr '(fir oak maple))
7318 @result{} (oak maple)
7319 @end group
7320
7321 @group
7322 (cdr '(oak maple))
7323 @result{}(maple)
7324 @end group
7325
7326 @group
7327 (cdr '(maple))
7328 @result{} nil
7329 @end group
7330
7331 @group
7332 (cdr 'nil)
7333 @result{} nil
7334 @end group
7335
7336 @group
7337 (cdr ())
7338 @result{} nil
7339 @end group
7340 @end smallexample
7341
7342 @need 1200
7343 You can also do several @sc{cdr}s without printing the values in
7344 between, like this:
7345
7346 @smallexample
7347 @group
7348 (cdr (cdr '(pine fir oak maple)))
7349 @result{} (oak maple)
7350 @end group
7351 @end smallexample
7352
7353 @noindent
7354 In this example, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the innermost list first.
7355 The innermost list is quoted, so it just passes the list as it is to the
7356 innermost @code{cdr}. This @code{cdr} passes a list made up of the
7357 second and subsequent elements of the list to the outermost @code{cdr},
7358 which produces a list composed of the third and subsequent elements of
7359 the original list. In this example, the @code{cdr} function is repeated
7360 and returns a list that consists of the original list without its
7361 first two elements.
7362
7363 The @code{nthcdr} function does the same as repeating the call to
7364 @code{cdr}. In the following example, the argument 2 is passed to the
7365 function @code{nthcdr}, along with the list, and the value returned is
7366 the list without its first two items, which is exactly the same
7367 as repeating @code{cdr} twice on the list:
7368
7369 @smallexample
7370 @group
7371 (nthcdr 2 '(pine fir oak maple))
7372 @result{} (oak maple)
7373 @end group
7374 @end smallexample
7375
7376 @need 1200
7377 Using the original four element list, we can see what happens when
7378 various numeric arguments are passed to @code{nthcdr}, including 0, 1,
7379 and 5:
7380
7381 @smallexample
7382 @group
7383 ;; @r{Leave the list as it was.}
7384 (nthcdr 0 '(pine fir oak maple))
7385 @result{} (pine fir oak maple)
7386 @end group
7387
7388 @group
7389 ;; @r{Return a copy without the first element.}
7390 (nthcdr 1 '(pine fir oak maple))
7391 @result{} (fir oak maple)
7392 @end group
7393
7394 @group
7395 ;; @r{Return a copy of the list without three elements.}
7396 (nthcdr 3 '(pine fir oak maple))
7397 @result{} (maple)
7398 @end group
7399
7400 @group
7401 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all four elements.}
7402 (nthcdr 4 '(pine fir oak maple))
7403 @result{} nil
7404 @end group
7405
7406 @group
7407 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all elements.}
7408 (nthcdr 5 '(pine fir oak maple))
7409 @result{} nil
7410 @end group
7411 @end smallexample
7412
7413 @node nth, setcar, nthcdr, car cdr & cons
7414 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7415 @section @code{nth}
7416 @findex nth
7417
7418 The @code{nthcdr} function takes the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7419 The @code{nth} function takes the @sc{car} of the result returned by
7420 @code{nthcdr}. It returns the Nth element of the list.
7421
7422 @need 1500
7423 Thus, if it were not defined in C for speed, the definition of
7424 @code{nth} would be:
7425
7426 @smallexample
7427 @group
7428 (defun nth (n list)
7429 "Returns the Nth element of LIST.
7430 N counts from zero. If LIST is not that long, nil is returned."
7431 (car (nthcdr n list)))
7432 @end group
7433 @end smallexample
7434
7435 @noindent
7436 (Originally, @code{nth} was defined in Emacs Lisp in @file{subr.el},
7437 but its definition was redone in C in the 1980s.)
7438
7439 The @code{nth} function returns a single element of a list.
7440 This can be very convenient.
7441
7442 Note that the elements are numbered from zero, not one. That is to
7443 say, the first element of a list, its @sc{car} is the zeroth element.
7444 This is called `zero-based' counting and often bothers people who
7445 are accustomed to the first element in a list being number one, which
7446 is `one-based'.
7447
7448 @need 1250
7449 For example:
7450
7451 @smallexample
7452 @group
7453 (nth 0 '("one" "two" "three"))
7454 @result{} "one"
7455
7456 (nth 1 '("one" "two" "three"))
7457 @result{} "two"
7458 @end group
7459 @end smallexample
7460
7461 It is worth mentioning that @code{nth}, like @code{nthcdr} and
7462 @code{cdr}, does not change the original list---the function is
7463 non-destructive. This is in sharp contrast to the @code{setcar} and
7464 @code{setcdr} functions.
7465
7466 @node setcar, setcdr, nth, car cdr & cons
7467 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7468 @section @code{setcar}
7469 @findex setcar
7470
7471 As you might guess from their names, the @code{setcar} and @code{setcdr}
7472 functions set the @sc{car} or the @sc{cdr} of a list to a new value.
7473 They actually change the original list, unlike @code{car} and @code{cdr}
7474 which leave the original list as it was. One way to find out how this
7475 works is to experiment. We will start with the @code{setcar} function.
7476
7477 @need 1200
7478 First, we can make a list and then set the value of a variable to the
7479 list, using the @code{setq} function. Here is a list of animals:
7480
7481 @smallexample
7482 (setq animals '(antelope giraffe lion tiger))
7483 @end smallexample
7484
7485 @noindent
7486 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
7487 this expression in the usual fashion, by positioning the cursor after
7488 the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. (I'm doing this right here
7489 as I write this. This is one of the advantages of having the
7490 interpreter built into the computing environment. Incidentally, when
7491 there is nothing on the line after the final parentheses, such as a
7492 comment, point can be on the next line. Thus, if your cursor is in
7493 the first column of the next line, you do not need to move it.
7494 Indeed, Emacs permits any amount of white space after the final
7495 parenthesis.)
7496
7497 @need 1200
7498 When we evaluate the variable @code{animals}, we see that it is bound to
7499 the list @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}:
7500
7501 @smallexample
7502 @group
7503 animals
7504 @result{} (antelope giraffe lion tiger)
7505 @end group
7506 @end smallexample
7507
7508 @noindent
7509 Put another way, the variable @code{animals} points to the list
7510 @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}.
7511
7512 Next, evaluate the function @code{setcar} while passing it two
7513 arguments, the variable @code{animals} and the quoted symbol
7514 @code{hippopotamus}; this is done by writing the three element list
7515 @code{(setcar animals 'hippopotamus)} and then evaluating it in the
7516 usual fashion:
7517
7518 @smallexample
7519 (setcar animals 'hippopotamus)
7520 @end smallexample
7521
7522 @need 1200
7523 @noindent
7524 After evaluating this expression, evaluate the variable @code{animals}
7525 again. You will see that the list of animals has changed:
7526
7527 @smallexample
7528 @group
7529 animals
7530 @result{} (hippopotamus giraffe lion tiger)
7531 @end group
7532 @end smallexample
7533
7534 @noindent
7535 The first element on the list, @code{antelope} is replaced by
7536 @code{hippopotamus}.
7537
7538 So we can see that @code{setcar} did not add a new element to the list
7539 as @code{cons} would have; it replaced @code{antelope} with
7540 @code{hippopotamus}; it @emph{changed} the list.
7541
7542 @node setcdr, cons Exercise, setcar, car cdr & cons
7543 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7544 @section @code{setcdr}
7545 @findex setcdr
7546
7547 The @code{setcdr} function is similar to the @code{setcar} function,
7548 except that the function replaces the second and subsequent elements of
7549 a list rather than the first element.
7550
7551 (To see how to change the last element of a list, look ahead to
7552 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, which uses
7553 the @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr} functions.)
7554
7555 @need 1200
7556 To see how this works, set the value of the variable to a list of
7557 domesticated animals by evaluating the following expression:
7558
7559 @smallexample
7560 (setq domesticated-animals '(horse cow sheep goat))
7561 @end smallexample
7562
7563 @need 1200
7564 @noindent
7565 If you now evaluate the list, you will be returned the list
7566 @code{(horse cow sheep goat)}:
7567
7568 @smallexample
7569 @group
7570 domesticated-animals
7571 @result{} (horse cow sheep goat)
7572 @end group
7573 @end smallexample
7574
7575 @need 1200
7576 Next, evaluate @code{setcdr} with two arguments, the name of the
7577 variable which has a list as its value, and the list to which the
7578 @sc{cdr} of the first list will be set;
7579
7580 @smallexample
7581 (setcdr domesticated-animals '(cat dog))
7582 @end smallexample
7583
7584 @noindent
7585 If you evaluate this expression, the list @code{(cat dog)} will appear
7586 in the echo area. This is the value returned by the function. The
7587 result we are interested in is the ``side effect'', which we can see by
7588 evaluating the variable @code{domesticated-animals}:
7589
7590 @smallexample
7591 @group
7592 domesticated-animals
7593 @result{} (horse cat dog)
7594 @end group
7595 @end smallexample
7596
7597 @noindent
7598 Indeed, the list is changed from @code{(horse cow sheep goat)} to
7599 @code{(horse cat dog)}. The @sc{cdr} of the list is changed from
7600 @code{(cow sheep goat)} to @code{(cat dog)}.
7601
7602 @node cons Exercise, , setcdr, car cdr & cons
7603 @section Exercise
7604
7605 Construct a list of four birds by evaluating several expressions with
7606 @code{cons}. Find out what happens when you @code{cons} a list onto
7607 itself. Replace the first element of the list of four birds with a
7608 fish. Replace the rest of that list with a list of other fish.
7609
7610 @node Cutting & Storing Text, List Implementation, car cdr & cons, Top
7611 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7612 @chapter Cutting and Storing Text
7613 @cindex Cutting and storing text
7614 @cindex Storing and cutting text
7615 @cindex Killing text
7616 @cindex Clipping text
7617 @cindex Erasing text
7618 @cindex Deleting text
7619
7620 Whenever you cut or clip text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in
7621 GNU Emacs, it is stored in a list and you can bring it back with a
7622 `yank' command.
7623
7624 (The use of the word `kill' in Emacs for processes which specifically
7625 @emph{do not} destroy the values of the entities is an unfortunate
7626 historical accident. A much more appropriate word would be `clip' since
7627 that is what the kill commands do; they clip text out of a buffer and
7628 put it into storage from which it can be brought back. I have often
7629 been tempted to replace globally all occurrences of `kill' in the Emacs
7630 sources with `clip' and all occurrences of `killed' with `clipped'.)
7631
7632 @menu
7633 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
7634 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
7635 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
7636 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
7637 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
7638 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
7639 * cons & search-fwd Review::
7640 * search Exercises::
7641 @end menu
7642
7643 @node Storing Text, zap-to-char, Cutting & Storing Text, Cutting & Storing Text
7644 @ifnottex
7645 @unnumberedsec Storing Text in a List
7646 @end ifnottex
7647
7648 When text is cut out of a buffer, it is stored on a list. Successive
7649 pieces of text are stored on the list successively, so the list might
7650 look like this:
7651
7652 @smallexample
7653 ("a piece of text" "previous piece")
7654 @end smallexample
7655
7656 @need 1200
7657 @noindent
7658 The function @code{cons} can be used to create a new list from a piece
7659 of text (an `atom', to use the jargon) and an existing list, like
7660 this:
7661
7662 @smallexample
7663 @group
7664 (cons "another piece"
7665 '("a piece of text" "previous piece"))
7666 @end group
7667 @end smallexample
7668
7669 @need 1200
7670 @noindent
7671 If you evaluate this expression, a list of three elements will appear in
7672 the echo area:
7673
7674 @smallexample
7675 ("another piece" "a piece of text" "previous piece")
7676 @end smallexample
7677
7678 With the @code{car} and @code{nthcdr} functions, you can retrieve
7679 whichever piece of text you want. For example, in the following code,
7680 @code{nthcdr 1 @dots{}} returns the list with the first item removed;
7681 and the @code{car} returns the first element of that remainder---the
7682 second element of the original list:
7683
7684 @smallexample
7685 @group
7686 (car (nthcdr 1 '("another piece"
7687 "a piece of text"
7688 "previous piece")))
7689 @result{} "a piece of text"
7690 @end group
7691 @end smallexample
7692
7693 The actual functions in Emacs are more complex than this, of course.
7694 The code for cutting and retrieving text has to be written so that
7695 Emacs can figure out which element in the list you want---the first,
7696 second, third, or whatever. In addition, when you get to the end of
7697 the list, Emacs should give you the first element of the list, rather
7698 than nothing at all.
7699
7700 The list that holds the pieces of text is called the @dfn{kill ring}.
7701 This chapter leads up to a description of the kill ring and how it is
7702 used by first tracing how the @code{zap-to-char} function works. This
7703 function uses (or `calls') a function that invokes a function that
7704 manipulates the kill ring. Thus, before reaching the mountains, we
7705 climb the foothills.
7706
7707 A subsequent chapter describes how text that is cut from the buffer is
7708 retrieved. @xref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}.
7709
7710 @node zap-to-char, kill-region, Storing Text, Cutting & Storing Text
7711 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7712 @section @code{zap-to-char}
7713 @findex zap-to-char
7714
7715 The @code{zap-to-char} function changed little between GNU Emacs
7716 version 19 and GNU Emacs version 22. However, @code{zap-to-char}
7717 calls another function, @code{kill-region}, which enjoyed a major
7718 rewrite.
7719
7720 The @code{kill-region} function in Emacs 19 is complex, but does not
7721 use code that is important at this time. We will skip it.
7722
7723 The @code{kill-region} function in Emacs 22 is easier to read than the
7724 same function in Emacs 19 and introduces a very important concept,
7725 that of error handling. We will walk through the function.
7726
7727 But first, let us look at the interactive @code{zap-to-char} function.
7728
7729 @menu
7730 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
7731 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
7732 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
7733 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
7734 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
7735 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
7736 @end menu
7737
7738 @node Complete zap-to-char, zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char, zap-to-char
7739 @ifnottex
7740 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{zap-to-char} Implementation
7741 @end ifnottex
7742
7743 The @code{zap-to-char} function removes the text in the region between
7744 the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) up to and including the
7745 next occurrence of a specified character. The text that
7746 @code{zap-to-char} removes is put in the kill ring; and it can be
7747 retrieved from the kill ring by typing @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}). If
7748 the command is given an argument, it removes text through that number
7749 of occurrences. Thus, if the cursor were at the beginning of this
7750 sentence and the character were @samp{s}, @samp{Thus} would be
7751 removed. If the argument were two, @samp{Thus, if the curs} would be
7752 removed, up to and including the @samp{s} in @samp{cursor}.
7753
7754 If the specified character is not found, @code{zap-to-char} will say
7755 ``Search failed'', tell you the character you typed, and not remove
7756 any text.
7757
7758 In order to determine how much text to remove, @code{zap-to-char} uses
7759 a search function. Searches are used extensively in code that
7760 manipulates text, and we will focus attention on them as well as on the
7761 deletion command.
7762
7763 @ignore
7764 @c GNU Emacs version 19
7765 (defun zap-to-char (arg char) ; version 19 implementation
7766 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7767 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7768 (interactive "*p\ncZap to char: ")
7769 (kill-region (point)
7770 (progn
7771 (search-forward
7772 (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7773 (point))))
7774 @end ignore
7775
7776 @need 1250
7777 Here is the complete text of the version 22 implementation of the function:
7778
7779 @c GNU Emacs 22
7780 @smallexample
7781 @group
7782 (defun zap-to-char (arg char)
7783 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7784 Case is ignored if `case-fold-search' is non-nil in the current buffer.
7785 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7786 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7787 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7788 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7789 (kill-region (point) (progn
7790 (search-forward (char-to-string char)
7791 nil nil arg)
7792 (point))))
7793 @end group
7794 @end smallexample
7795
7796 The documentation is thorough. You do need to know the jargon meaning
7797 of the word `kill'.
7798
7799 @node zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char body, Complete zap-to-char, zap-to-char
7800 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7801 @subsection The @code{interactive} Expression
7802
7803 @need 800
7804 The interactive expression in the @code{zap-to-char} command looks like
7805 this:
7806
7807 @smallexample
7808 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7809 @end smallexample
7810
7811 The part within quotation marks, @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "}, specifies
7812 two different things. First, and most simply, is the @samp{p}.
7813 This part is separated from the next part by a newline, @samp{\n}.
7814 The @samp{p} means that the first argument to the function will be
7815 passed the value of a `processed prefix'. The prefix argument is
7816 passed by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number, or @kbd{M-} and a number. If
7817 the function is called interactively without a prefix, 1 is passed to
7818 this argument.
7819
7820 The second part of @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "} is
7821 @samp{cZap to char:@: }. In this part, the lower case @samp{c}
7822 indicates that @code{interactive} expects a prompt and that the
7823 argument will be a character. The prompt follows the @samp{c} and is
7824 the string @samp{Zap to char:@: } (with a space after the colon to
7825 make it look good).
7826
7827 What all this does is prepare the arguments to @code{zap-to-char} so they
7828 are of the right type, and give the user a prompt.
7829
7830 In a read-only buffer, the @code{zap-to-char} function copies the text
7831 to the kill ring, but does not remove it. The echo area displays a
7832 message saying that the buffer is read-only. Also, the terminal may
7833 beep or blink at you.
7834
7835 @node zap-to-char body, search-forward, zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char
7836 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7837 @subsection The Body of @code{zap-to-char}
7838
7839 The body of the @code{zap-to-char} function contains the code that
7840 kills (that is, removes) the text in the region from the current
7841 position of the cursor up to and including the specified character.
7842
7843 The first part of the code looks like this:
7844
7845 @smallexample
7846 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7847 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7848 (kill-region (point) (progn
7849 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7850 (point)))
7851 @end smallexample
7852
7853 @noindent
7854 @code{char-table-p} is an hitherto unseen function. It determines
7855 whether its argument is a character table. When it is, it sets the
7856 character passed to @code{zap-to-char} to one of them, if that
7857 character exists, or to the character itself. (This becomes important
7858 for certain characters in non-European languages. The @code{aref}
7859 function extracts an element from an array. It is an array-specific
7860 function that is not described in this document. @xref{Arrays, ,
7861 Arrays, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7862
7863 @noindent
7864 @code{(point)} is the current position of the cursor.
7865
7866 The next part of the code is an expression using @code{progn}. The body
7867 of the @code{progn} consists of calls to @code{search-forward} and
7868 @code{point}.
7869
7870 It is easier to understand how @code{progn} works after learning about
7871 @code{search-forward}, so we will look at @code{search-forward} and
7872 then at @code{progn}.
7873
7874 @node search-forward, progn, zap-to-char body, zap-to-char
7875 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7876 @subsection The @code{search-forward} Function
7877 @findex search-forward
7878
7879 The @code{search-forward} function is used to locate the
7880 zapped-for-character in @code{zap-to-char}. If the search is
7881 successful, @code{search-forward} leaves point immediately after the
7882 last character in the target string. (In @code{zap-to-char}, the
7883 target string is just one character long. @code{zap-to-char} uses the
7884 function @code{char-to-string} to ensure that the computer treats that
7885 character as a string.) If the search is backwards,
7886 @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first character in
7887 the target. Also, @code{search-forward} returns @code{t} for true.
7888 (Moving point is therefore a `side effect'.)
7889
7890 @need 1250
7891 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{search-forward} function looks like this:
7892
7893 @smallexample
7894 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7895 @end smallexample
7896
7897 The @code{search-forward} function takes four arguments:
7898
7899 @enumerate
7900 @item
7901 The first argument is the target, what is searched for. This must be a
7902 string, such as @samp{"z"}.
7903
7904 As it happens, the argument passed to @code{zap-to-char} is a single
7905 character. Because of the way computers are built, the Lisp
7906 interpreter may treat a single character as being different from a
7907 string of characters. Inside the computer, a single character has a
7908 different electronic format than a string of one character. (A single
7909 character can often be recorded in the computer using exactly one
7910 byte; but a string may be longer, and the computer needs to be ready
7911 for this.) Since the @code{search-forward} function searches for a
7912 string, the character that the @code{zap-to-char} function receives as
7913 its argument must be converted inside the computer from one format to
7914 the other; otherwise the @code{search-forward} function will fail.
7915 The @code{char-to-string} function is used to make this conversion.
7916
7917 @item
7918 The second argument bounds the search; it is specified as a position in
7919 the buffer. In this case, the search can go to the end of the buffer,
7920 so no bound is set and the second argument is @code{nil}.
7921
7922 @item
7923 The third argument tells the function what it should do if the search
7924 fails---it can signal an error (and print a message) or it can return
7925 @code{nil}. A @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
7926 signal an error when the search fails.
7927
7928 @item
7929 The fourth argument to @code{search-forward} is the repeat count---how
7930 many occurrences of the string to look for. This argument is optional
7931 and if the function is called without a repeat count, this argument is
7932 passed the value 1. If this argument is negative, the search goes
7933 backwards.
7934 @end enumerate
7935
7936 @need 800
7937 In template form, a @code{search-forward} expression looks like this:
7938
7939 @smallexample
7940 @group
7941 (search-forward "@var{target-string}"
7942 @var{limit-of-search}
7943 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
7944 @var{repeat-count})
7945 @end group
7946 @end smallexample
7947
7948 We will look at @code{progn} next.
7949
7950 @node progn, Summing up zap-to-char, search-forward, zap-to-char
7951 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7952 @subsection The @code{progn} Special Form
7953 @findex progn
7954
7955 @code{progn} is a special form that causes each of its arguments to be
7956 evaluated in sequence and then returns the value of the last one. The
7957 preceding expressions are evaluated only for the side effects they
7958 perform. The values produced by them are discarded.
7959
7960 @need 800
7961 The template for a @code{progn} expression is very simple:
7962
7963 @smallexample
7964 @group
7965 (progn
7966 @var{body}@dots{})
7967 @end group
7968 @end smallexample
7969
7970 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{progn} expression has to do two things:
7971 put point in exactly the right position; and return the location of
7972 point so that @code{kill-region} will know how far to kill to.
7973
7974 The first argument to the @code{progn} is @code{search-forward}. When
7975 @code{search-forward} finds the string, the function leaves point
7976 immediately after the last character in the target string. (In this
7977 case the target string is just one character long.) If the search is
7978 backwards, @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first
7979 character in the target. The movement of point is a side effect.
7980
7981 The second and last argument to @code{progn} is the expression
7982 @code{(point)}. This expression returns the value of point, which in
7983 this case will be the location to which it has been moved by
7984 @code{search-forward}. (In the source, a line that tells the function
7985 to go to the previous character, if it is going forward, was commented
7986 out in 1999; I don't remember whether that feature or mis-feature was
7987 ever a part of the distributed source.) The value of @code{point} is
7988 returned by the @code{progn} expression and is passed to
7989 @code{kill-region} as @code{kill-region}'s second argument.
7990
7991 @node Summing up zap-to-char, , progn, zap-to-char
7992 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7993 @subsection Summing up @code{zap-to-char}
7994
7995 Now that we have seen how @code{search-forward} and @code{progn} work,
7996 we can see how the @code{zap-to-char} function works as a whole.
7997
7998 The first argument to @code{kill-region} is the position of the cursor
7999 when the @code{zap-to-char} command is given---the value of point at
8000 that time. Within the @code{progn}, the search function then moves
8001 point to just after the zapped-to-character and @code{point} returns the
8002 value of this location. The @code{kill-region} function puts together
8003 these two values of point, the first one as the beginning of the region
8004 and the second one as the end of the region, and removes the region.
8005
8006 The @code{progn} special form is necessary because the
8007 @code{kill-region} command takes two arguments; and it would fail if
8008 @code{search-forward} and @code{point} expressions were written in
8009 sequence as two additional arguments. The @code{progn} expression is
8010 a single argument to @code{kill-region} and returns the one value that
8011 @code{kill-region} needs for its second argument.
8012
8013 @node kill-region, copy-region-as-kill, zap-to-char, Cutting & Storing Text
8014 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8015 @section @code{kill-region}
8016 @findex kill-region
8017
8018 The @code{zap-to-char} function uses the @code{kill-region} function.
8019 This function clips text from a region and copies that text to
8020 the kill ring, from which it may be retrieved.
8021
8022 @ignore
8023 GNU Emacs 22:
8024
8025 (defun kill-region (beg end &optional yank-handler)
8026 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
8027 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
8028 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there.
8029 \(If you want to kill and then yank immediately, use \\[kill-ring-save].)
8030
8031 If you want to append the killed region to the last killed text,
8032 use \\[append-next-kill] before \\[kill-region].
8033
8034 If the buffer is read-only, Emacs will beep and refrain from deleting
8035 the text, but put the text in the kill ring anyway. This means that
8036 you can use the killing commands to copy text from a read-only buffer.
8037
8038 This is the primitive for programs to kill text (as opposed to deleting it).
8039 Supply two arguments, character positions indicating the stretch of text
8040 to be killed.
8041 Any command that calls this function is a \"kill command\".
8042 If the previous command was also a kill command,
8043 the text killed this time appends to the text killed last time
8044 to make one entry in the kill ring.
8045
8046 In Lisp code, optional third arg YANK-HANDLER, if non-nil,
8047 specifies the yank-handler text property to be set on the killed
8048 text. See `insert-for-yank'."
8049 ;; Pass point first, then mark, because the order matters
8050 ;; when calling kill-append.
8051 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
8052 (unless (and beg end)
8053 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
8054 (condition-case nil
8055 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
8056 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
8057 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
8058 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8059 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8060 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
8061 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
8062 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8063 nil)
8064 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only)
8065 ;; The code above failed because the buffer, or some of the characters
8066 ;; in the region, are read-only.
8067 ;; We should beep, in case the user just isn't aware of this.
8068 ;; However, there's no harm in putting
8069 ;; the region's text in the kill ring, anyway.
8070 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8071 ;; Set this-command now, so it will be set even if we get an error.
8072 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8073 ;; This should barf, if appropriate, and give us the correct error.
8074 (if kill-read-only-ok
8075 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8076 ;; Signal an error if the buffer is read-only.
8077 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8078 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8079 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8080 @end ignore
8081
8082 The Emacs 22 version of that function uses @code{condition-case} and
8083 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, both of which we will explain.
8084 @code{condition-case} is an important special form.
8085
8086 In essence, the @code{kill-region} function calls
8087 @code{condition-case}, which takes three arguments. In this function,
8088 the first argument does nothing. The second argument contains the
8089 code that does the work when all goes well. The third argument
8090 contains the code that is called in the event of an error.
8091
8092 @menu
8093 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
8094 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
8095 * Lisp macro::
8096 @end menu
8097
8098 @node Complete kill-region, condition-case, kill-region, kill-region
8099 @ifnottex
8100 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{kill-region} Definition
8101 @end ifnottex
8102
8103 @need 1200
8104 We will go through the @code{condition-case} code in a moment. First,
8105 let us look at the definition of @code{kill-region}, with comments
8106 added:
8107
8108 @c GNU Emacs 22:
8109 @smallexample
8110 @group
8111 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8112 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
8113 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
8114 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there. @dots{} "
8115 @end group
8116
8117 @group
8118 ;; @bullet{} Since order matters, pass point first.
8119 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
8120 ;; @bullet{} And tell us if we cannot cut the text.
8121 ;; `unless' is an `if' without a then-part.
8122 (unless (and beg end)
8123 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
8124 @end group
8125
8126 @group
8127 ;; @bullet{} `condition-case' takes three arguments.
8128 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8129 ;; information about the error signal is not
8130 ;; stored for use by another function.
8131 (condition-case nil
8132 @end group
8133
8134 @group
8135 ;; @bullet{} The second argument to `condition-case' tells the
8136 ;; Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8137 @end group
8138
8139 @group
8140 ;; It starts with a `let' function that extracts the string
8141 ;; and tests whether it exists. If so (that is what the
8142 ;; `when' checks), it calls an `if' function that determines
8143 ;; whether the previous command was another call to
8144 ;; `kill-region'; if it was, then the new text is appended to
8145 ;; the previous text; if not, then a different function,
8146 ;; `kill-new', is called.
8147 @end group
8148
8149 @group
8150 ;; The `kill-append' function concatenates the new string and
8151 ;; the old. The `kill-new' function inserts text into a new
8152 ;; item in the kill ring.
8153 @end group
8154
8155 @group
8156 ;; `when' is an `if' without an else-part. The second `when'
8157 ;; again checks whether the current string exists; in
8158 ;; addition, it checks whether the previous command was
8159 ;; another call to `kill-region'. If one or the other
8160 ;; condition is true, then it sets the current command to
8161 ;; be `kill-region'.
8162 @end group
8163 @group
8164 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
8165 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
8166 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
8167 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8168 @end group
8169 @group
8170 ;; @minus{} `yank-handler' is an optional argument to
8171 ;; `kill-region' that tells the `kill-append' and
8172 ;; `kill-new' functions how deal with properties
8173 ;; added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
8174 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8175 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
8176 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
8177 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8178 nil)
8179 @end group
8180
8181 @group
8182 ;; @bullet{} The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
8183 ;; what to do with an error.
8184 @end group
8185 @group
8186 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8187 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8188 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8189 ;; then the body is executed.
8190 @end group
8191 @group
8192 ;; The first part of the third argument is the following:
8193 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; the if-part
8194 ;; @dots{} the then-part
8195 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8196 @end group
8197 @group
8198 ;; Next, also as part of the then-part, set this-command, so
8199 ;; it will be set in an error
8200 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8201 ;; Finally, in the then-part, send a message if you may copy
8202 ;; the text to the kill ring without signally an error, but
8203 ;; don't if you may not.
8204 @end group
8205 @group
8206 (if kill-read-only-ok
8207 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8208 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8209 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8210 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))
8211 @end group
8212 @end smallexample
8213
8214 @ignore
8215 @c v 21
8216 @smallexample
8217 @group
8218 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8219 "Kill between point and mark.
8220 The text is deleted but saved in the kill ring."
8221 (interactive "r")
8222 @end group
8223
8224 @group
8225 ;; 1. `condition-case' takes three arguments.
8226 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8227 ;; information about the error signal is not
8228 ;; stored for use by another function.
8229 (condition-case nil
8230 @end group
8231
8232 @group
8233 ;; 2. The second argument to `condition-case'
8234 ;; tells the Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8235 @end group
8236
8237 @group
8238 ;; The `delete-and-extract-region' function usually does the
8239 ;; work. If the beginning and ending of the region are both
8240 ;; the same, then the variable `string' will be empty, or nil
8241 (let ((string (delete-and-extract-region beg end)))
8242 @end group
8243
8244 @group
8245 ;; `when' is an `if' clause that cannot take an `else-part'.
8246 ;; Emacs normally sets the value of `last-command' to the
8247 ;; previous command.
8248 @end group
8249 @group
8250 ;; `kill-append' concatenates the new string and the old.
8251 ;; `kill-new' inserts text into a new item in the kill ring.
8252 (when string
8253 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8254 ;; if true, prepend string
8255 (kill-append string (< end beg))
8256 (kill-new string)))
8257 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8258 @end group
8259
8260 @group
8261 ;; 3. The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
8262 ;; what to do with an error.
8263 @end group
8264 @group
8265 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8266 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8267 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8268 ;; then the body is executed.
8269 @end group
8270 @group
8271 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; this is the if-part
8272 ;; then...
8273 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8274 @end group
8275 @group
8276 (if kill-read-only-ok ;; usually this variable is nil
8277 (message "Read only text copied to kill ring")
8278 ;; or else, signal an error if the buffer is read-only;
8279 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8280 ;; and, in any case, signal that the text is read-only.
8281 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8282 @end group
8283 @end smallexample
8284 @end ignore
8285
8286 @node condition-case, Lisp macro, Complete kill-region, kill-region
8287 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8288 @subsection @code{condition-case}
8289 @findex condition-case
8290
8291 As we have seen earlier (@pxref{Making Errors, , Generate an Error
8292 Message}), when the Emacs Lisp interpreter has trouble evaluating an
8293 expression, it provides you with help; in the jargon, this is called
8294 ``signaling an error''. Usually, the computer stops the program and
8295 shows you a message.
8296
8297 However, some programs undertake complicated actions. They should not
8298 simply stop on an error. In the @code{kill-region} function, the most
8299 likely error is that you will try to kill text that is read-only and
8300 cannot be removed. So the @code{kill-region} function contains code
8301 to handle this circumstance. This code, which makes up the body of
8302 the @code{kill-region} function, is inside of a @code{condition-case}
8303 special form.
8304
8305 @need 800
8306 The template for @code{condition-case} looks like this:
8307
8308 @smallexample
8309 @group
8310 (condition-case
8311 @var{var}
8312 @var{bodyform}
8313 @var{error-handler}@dots{})
8314 @end group
8315 @end smallexample
8316
8317 The second argument, @var{bodyform}, is straightforward. The
8318 @code{condition-case} special form causes the Lisp interpreter to
8319 evaluate the code in @var{bodyform}. If no error occurs, the special
8320 form returns the code's value and produces the side-effects, if any.
8321
8322 In short, the @var{bodyform} part of a @code{condition-case}
8323 expression determines what should happen when everything works
8324 correctly.
8325
8326 However, if an error occurs, among its other actions, the function
8327 generating the error signal will define one or more error condition
8328 names.
8329
8330 An error handler is the third argument to @code{condition case}.
8331 An error handler has two parts, a @var{condition-name} and a
8332 @var{body}. If the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8333 matches a condition name generated by an error, then the @var{body}
8334 part of the error handler is run.
8335
8336 As you will expect, the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8337 may be either a single condition name or a list of condition names.
8338
8339 Also, a complete @code{condition-case} expression may contain more
8340 than one error handler. When an error occurs, the first applicable
8341 handler is run.
8342
8343 Lastly, the first argument to the @code{condition-case} expression,
8344 the @var{var} argument, is sometimes bound to a variable that
8345 contains information about the error. However, if that argument is
8346 nil, as is the case in @code{kill-region}, that information is
8347 discarded.
8348
8349 @need 1200
8350 In brief, in the @code{kill-region} function, the code
8351 @code{condition-case} works like this:
8352
8353 @smallexample
8354 @group
8355 @var{If no errors}, @var{run only this code}
8356 @var{but}, @var{if errors}, @var{run this other code}.
8357 @end group
8358 @end smallexample
8359
8360 @ignore
8361 2006 Oct 24
8362 In Emacs 22,
8363 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8364 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8365 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8366 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8367
8368 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
8369 this is line 8054
8370 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar} includes line 8350
8371 @end ignore
8372
8373 @node Lisp macro, , condition-case, kill-region
8374 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8375 @subsection Lisp macro
8376 @cindex Macro, lisp
8377 @cindex Lisp macro
8378
8379 The part of the @code{condition-case} expression that is evaluated in
8380 the expectation that all goes well has a @code{when}. The code uses
8381 @code{when} to determine whether the @code{string} variable points to
8382 text that exists.
8383
8384 A @code{when} expression is simply a programmers' convenience. It is
8385 an @code{if} without the possibility of an else clause. In your mind,
8386 you can replace @code{when} with @code{if} and understand what goes
8387 on. That is what the Lisp interpreter does.
8388
8389 Technically speaking, @code{when} is a Lisp macro. A Lisp @dfn{macro}
8390 enables you to define new control constructs and other language
8391 features. It tells the interpreter how to compute another Lisp
8392 expression which will in turn compute the value. In this case, the
8393 `other expression' is an @code{if} expression.
8394
8395 The @code{kill-region} function definition also has an @code{unless}
8396 macro; it is the converse of @code{when}. The @code{unless} macro is
8397 an @code{if} without a then clause
8398
8399 For more about Lisp macros, see @ref{Macros, , Macros, elisp, The GNU
8400 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. The C programming language also
8401 provides macros. These are different, but also useful.
8402
8403 @ignore
8404 We will briefly look at C macros in
8405 @ref{Digression into C}.
8406 @end ignore
8407
8408 @need 1200
8409 Regarding the @code{when} macro, in the @code{condition-case}
8410 expression, when the string has content, then another conditional
8411 expression is executed. This is an @code{if} with both a then-part
8412 and an else-part.
8413
8414 @smallexample
8415 @group
8416 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8417 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8418 (kill-new string nil yank-handler))
8419 @end group
8420 @end smallexample
8421
8422 The then-part is evaluated if the previous command was another call to
8423 @code{kill-region}; if not, the else-part is evaluated.
8424
8425 @code{yank-handler} is an optional argument to @code{kill-region} that
8426 tells the @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new} functions how deal
8427 with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
8428
8429 @code{last-command} is a variable that comes with Emacs that we have
8430 not seen before. Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs
8431 sets the value of @code{last-command} to the previous command.
8432
8433 @need 1200
8434 In this segment of the definition, the @code{if} expression checks
8435 whether the previous command was @code{kill-region}. If it was,
8436
8437 @smallexample
8438 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8439 @end smallexample
8440
8441 @noindent
8442 concatenates a copy of the newly clipped text to the just previously
8443 clipped text in the kill ring.
8444
8445 @node copy-region-as-kill, Digression into C, kill-region, Cutting & Storing Text
8446 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8447 @section @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8448 @findex copy-region-as-kill
8449 @findex nthcdr
8450
8451 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function copies a region of text from a
8452 buffer and (via either @code{kill-append} or @code{kill-new}) saves it
8453 in the @code{kill-ring}.
8454
8455 If you call @code{copy-region-as-kill} immediately after a
8456 @code{kill-region} command, Emacs appends the newly copied text to the
8457 previously copied text. This means that if you yank back the text, you
8458 get it all, from both this and the previous operation. On the other
8459 hand, if some other command precedes the @code{copy-region-as-kill},
8460 the function copies the text into a separate entry in the kill ring.
8461
8462 @menu
8463 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
8464 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
8465 @end menu
8466
8467 @node Complete copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill body, copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill
8468 @ifnottex
8469 @unnumberedsubsec The complete @code{copy-region-as-kill} function definition
8470 @end ifnottex
8471
8472 @need 1200
8473 Here is the complete text of the version 22 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8474 function:
8475
8476 @smallexample
8477 @group
8478 (defun copy-region-as-kill (beg end)
8479 "Save the region as if killed, but don't kill it.
8480 In Transient Mark mode, deactivate the mark.
8481 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, also save the text for a window
8482 system cut and paste."
8483 (interactive "r")
8484 @end group
8485 @group
8486 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8487 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8488 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8489 @end group
8490 @group
8491 (if transient-mark-mode
8492 (setq deactivate-mark t))
8493 nil)
8494 @end group
8495 @end smallexample
8496
8497 @need 800
8498 As usual, this function can be divided into its component parts:
8499
8500 @smallexample
8501 @group
8502 (defun copy-region-as-kill (@var{argument-list})
8503 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
8504 (interactive "r")
8505 @var{body}@dots{})
8506 @end group
8507 @end smallexample
8508
8509 The arguments are @code{beg} and @code{end} and the function is
8510 interactive with @code{"r"}, so the two arguments must refer to the
8511 beginning and end of the region. If you have been reading though this
8512 document from the beginning, understanding these parts of a function is
8513 almost becoming routine.
8514
8515 The documentation is somewhat confusing unless you remember that the
8516 word `kill' has a meaning different from usual. The `Transient Mark'
8517 and @code{interprogram-cut-function} comments explain certain
8518 side-effects.
8519
8520 After you once set a mark, a buffer always contains a region. If you
8521 wish, you can use Transient Mark mode to highlight the region
8522 temporarily. (No one wants to highlight the region all the time, so
8523 Transient Mark mode highlights it only at appropriate times. Many
8524 people turn off Transient Mark mode, so the region is never
8525 highlighted.)
8526
8527 Also, a windowing system allows you to copy, cut, and paste among
8528 different programs. In the X windowing system, for example, the
8529 @code{interprogram-cut-function} function is @code{x-select-text},
8530 which works with the windowing system's equivalent of the Emacs kill
8531 ring.
8532
8533 The body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function starts with an
8534 @code{if} clause. What this clause does is distinguish between two
8535 different situations: whether or not this command is executed
8536 immediately after a previous @code{kill-region} command. In the first
8537 case, the new region is appended to the previously copied text.
8538 Otherwise, it is inserted into the beginning of the kill ring as a
8539 separate piece of text from the previous piece.
8540
8541 The last two lines of the function prevent the region from lighting up
8542 if Transient Mark mode is turned on.
8543
8544 The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill} merits discussion in detail.
8545
8546 @node copy-region-as-kill body, , Complete copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill
8547 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8548 @subsection The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8549
8550 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function works in much the same way as
8551 the @code{kill-region} function. Both are written so that two or more
8552 kills in a row combine their text into a single entry. If you yank
8553 back the text from the kill ring, you get it all in one piece.
8554 Moreover, kills that kill forward from the current position of the
8555 cursor are added to the end of the previously copied text and commands
8556 that copy text backwards add it to the beginning of the previously
8557 copied text. This way, the words in the text stay in the proper
8558 order.
8559
8560 Like @code{kill-region}, the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function makes
8561 use of the @code{last-command} variable that keeps track of the
8562 previous Emacs command.
8563
8564 @menu
8565 * last-command & this-command::
8566 * kill-append function::
8567 * kill-new function::
8568 @end menu
8569
8570 @node last-command & this-command, kill-append function, copy-region-as-kill body, copy-region-as-kill body
8571 @ifnottex
8572 @unnumberedsubsubsec @code{last-command} and @code{this-command}
8573 @end ifnottex
8574
8575 Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs sets the value of
8576 @code{this-command} to the function being executed (which in this case
8577 would be @code{copy-region-as-kill}). At the same time, Emacs sets
8578 the value of @code{last-command} to the previous value of
8579 @code{this-command}.
8580
8581 In the first part of the body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8582 function, an @code{if} expression determines whether the value of
8583 @code{last-command} is @code{kill-region}. If so, the then-part of
8584 the @code{if} expression is evaluated; it uses the @code{kill-append}
8585 function to concatenate the text copied at this call to the function
8586 with the text already in the first element (the @sc{car}) of the kill
8587 ring. On the other hand, if the value of @code{last-command} is not
8588 @code{kill-region}, then the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function
8589 attaches a new element to the kill ring using the @code{kill-new}
8590 function.
8591
8592 @need 1250
8593 The @code{if} expression reads as follows; it uses @code{eq}:
8594
8595 @smallexample
8596 @group
8597 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8598 ;; @r{then-part}
8599 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8600 ;; @r{else-part}
8601 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8602 @end group
8603 @end smallexample
8604
8605 @findex filter-buffer-substring
8606 (The @code{filter-buffer-substring} function returns a filtered
8607 substring of the buffer, if any. Optionally---the arguments are not
8608 here, so neither is done---the function may delete the initial text or
8609 return the text without its properties; this function is a replacement
8610 for the older @code{buffer-substring} function, which came before text
8611 properties were implemented.)
8612
8613 @findex eq @r{(example of use)}
8614 @noindent
8615 The @code{eq} function tests whether its first argument is the same Lisp
8616 object as its second argument. The @code{eq} function is similar to the
8617 @code{equal} function in that it is used to test for equality, but
8618 differs in that it determines whether two representations are actually
8619 the same object inside the computer, but with different names.
8620 @code{equal} determines whether the structure and contents of two
8621 expressions are the same.
8622
8623 If the previous command was @code{kill-region}, then the Emacs Lisp
8624 interpreter calls the @code{kill-append} function
8625
8626 @node kill-append function, kill-new function, last-command & this-command, copy-region-as-kill body
8627 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-append} function
8628 @findex kill-append
8629
8630 @need 800
8631 The @code{kill-append} function looks like this:
8632
8633 @c in GNU Emacs 22
8634 @smallexample
8635 @group
8636 (defun kill-append (string before-p &optional yank-handler)
8637 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8638 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8639 @dots{} "
8640 (let* ((cur (car kill-ring)))
8641 (kill-new (if before-p (concat string cur) (concat cur string))
8642 (or (= (length cur) 0)
8643 (equal yank-handler
8644 (get-text-property 0 'yank-handler cur)))
8645 yank-handler)))
8646 @end group
8647 @end smallexample
8648
8649 @ignore
8650 was:
8651 (defun kill-append (string before-p)
8652 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8653 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8654 If `interprogram-cut-function' is set, pass the resulting kill to
8655 it."
8656 (kill-new (if before-p
8657 (concat string (car kill-ring))
8658 (concat (car kill-ring) string))
8659 t))
8660 @end ignore
8661
8662 @noindent
8663 The @code{kill-append} function is fairly straightforward. It uses
8664 the @code{kill-new} function, which we will discuss in more detail in
8665 a moment.
8666
8667 (Also, the function provides an optional argument called
8668 @code{yank-handler}; when invoked, this argument tells the function
8669 how to deal with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or
8670 `italics'.)
8671
8672 @c !!! bug in GNU Emacs 22 version of kill-append ?
8673 It has a @code{let*} function to set the value of the first element of
8674 the kill ring to @code{cur}. (I do not know why the function does not
8675 use @code{let} instead; only one value is set in the expression.
8676 Perhaps this is a bug that produces no problems?)
8677
8678 Consider the conditional that is one of the two arguments to
8679 @code{kill-new}. It uses @code{concat} to concatenate the new text to
8680 the @sc{car} of the kill ring. Whether it prepends or appends the
8681 text depends on the results of an @code{if} expression:
8682
8683 @smallexample
8684 @group
8685 (if before-p ; @r{if-part}
8686 (concat string cur) ; @r{then-part}
8687 (concat cur string)) ; @r{else-part}
8688 @end group
8689 @end smallexample
8690
8691 @noindent
8692 If the region being killed is before the region that was killed in the
8693 last command, then it should be prepended before the material that was
8694 saved in the previous kill; and conversely, if the killed text follows
8695 what was just killed, it should be appended after the previous text.
8696 The @code{if} expression depends on the predicate @code{before-p} to
8697 decide whether the newly saved text should be put before or after the
8698 previously saved text.
8699
8700 The symbol @code{before-p} is the name of one of the arguments to
8701 @code{kill-append}. When the @code{kill-append} function is
8702 evaluated, it is bound to the value returned by evaluating the actual
8703 argument. In this case, this is the expression @code{(< end beg)}.
8704 This expression does not directly determine whether the killed text in
8705 this command is located before or after the kill text of the last
8706 command; what it does is determine whether the value of the variable
8707 @code{end} is less than the value of the variable @code{beg}. If it
8708 is, it means that the user is most likely heading towards the
8709 beginning of the buffer. Also, the result of evaluating the predicate
8710 expression, @code{(< end beg)}, will be true and the text will be
8711 prepended before the previous text. On the other hand, if the value of
8712 the variable @code{end} is greater than the value of the variable
8713 @code{beg}, the text will be appended after the previous text.
8714
8715 @need 800
8716 When the newly saved text will be prepended, then the string with the new
8717 text will be concatenated before the old text:
8718
8719 @smallexample
8720 (concat string cur)
8721 @end smallexample
8722
8723 @need 1200
8724 @noindent
8725 But if the text will be appended, it will be concatenated
8726 after the old text:
8727
8728 @smallexample
8729 (concat cur string))
8730 @end smallexample
8731
8732 To understand how this works, we first need to review the
8733 @code{concat} function. The @code{concat} function links together or
8734 unites two strings of text. The result is a string. For example:
8735
8736 @smallexample
8737 @group
8738 (concat "abc" "def")
8739 @result{} "abcdef"
8740 @end group
8741
8742 @group
8743 (concat "new "
8744 (car '("first element" "second element")))
8745 @result{} "new first element"
8746
8747 (concat (car
8748 '("first element" "second element")) " modified")
8749 @result{} "first element modified"
8750 @end group
8751 @end smallexample
8752
8753 We can now make sense of @code{kill-append}: it modifies the contents
8754 of the kill ring. The kill ring is a list, each element of which is
8755 saved text. The @code{kill-append} function uses the @code{kill-new}
8756 function which in turn uses the @code{setcar} function.
8757
8758 @node kill-new function, , kill-append function, copy-region-as-kill body
8759 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-new} function
8760 @findex kill-new
8761
8762 @c in GNU Emacs 22, additional documentation to kill-new:
8763 @ignore
8764 Optional third arguments YANK-HANDLER controls how the STRING is later
8765 inserted into a buffer; see `insert-for-yank' for details.
8766 When a yank handler is specified, STRING must be non-empty (the yank
8767 handler, if non-nil, is stored as a `yank-handler' text property on STRING).
8768
8769 When the yank handler has a non-nil PARAM element, the original STRING
8770 argument is not used by `insert-for-yank'. However, since Lisp code
8771 may access and use elements from the kill ring directly, the STRING
8772 argument should still be a \"useful\" string for such uses."
8773 @end ignore
8774 @need 1200
8775 The @code{kill-new} function looks like this:
8776
8777 @smallexample
8778 @group
8779 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace yank-handler)
8780 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8781 Set `kill-ring-yank-pointer' to point to it.
8782
8783 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8784 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8785 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list.
8786 @dots{}"
8787 @end group
8788 @group
8789 (if (> (length string) 0)
8790 (if yank-handler
8791 (put-text-property 0 (length string)
8792 'yank-handler yank-handler string))
8793 (if yank-handler
8794 (signal 'args-out-of-range
8795 (list string "yank-handler specified for empty string"))))
8796 @end group
8797 @group
8798 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8799 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8800 @end group
8801 @group
8802 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8803 (setcar kill-ring string)
8804 (push string kill-ring)
8805 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8806 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8807 @end group
8808 @group
8809 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8810 (if interprogram-cut-function
8811 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8812 @end group
8813 @end smallexample
8814 @ignore
8815 was:
8816 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace)
8817 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8818 Set the kill-ring-yank pointer to point to it.
8819 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8820 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8821 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list."
8822 (and (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8823 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8824 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8825 (setcar kill-ring string)
8826 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8827 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8828 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8829 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8830 (if interprogram-cut-function
8831 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8832 @end ignore
8833
8834 (Notice that the function is not interactive.)
8835
8836 As usual, we can look at this function in parts.
8837
8838 The function definition has an optional @code{yank-handler} argument,
8839 which when invoked tells the function how to deal with properties
8840 added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'. We will skip that.
8841
8842 @need 1200
8843 The first line of the documentation makes sense:
8844
8845 @smallexample
8846 Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8847 @end smallexample
8848
8849 @noindent
8850 Let's skip over the rest of the documentation for the moment.
8851
8852 @noindent
8853 Also, let's skip over the initial @code{if} expression and those lines
8854 of code involving @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu}. We will explain
8855 them below.
8856
8857 @need 1200
8858 The critical lines are these:
8859
8860 @smallexample
8861 @group
8862 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8863 ;; @r{then}
8864 (setcar kill-ring string)
8865 @end group
8866 @group
8867 ;; @r{else}
8868 (push string kill-ring)
8869 @end group
8870 @group
8871 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8872 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8873 ;; @r{avoid overly long kill ring}
8874 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8875 @end group
8876 @group
8877 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8878 (if interprogram-cut-function
8879 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8880 @end group
8881 @end smallexample
8882
8883 The conditional test is @w{@code{(and replace kill-ring)}}.
8884 This will be true when two conditions are met: the kill ring has
8885 something in it, and the @code{replace} variable is true.
8886
8887 @need 1250
8888 When the @code{kill-append} function sets @code{replace} to be true
8889 and when the kill ring has at least one item in it, the @code{setcar}
8890 expression is executed:
8891
8892 @smallexample
8893 (setcar kill-ring string)
8894 @end smallexample
8895
8896 The @code{setcar} function actually changes the first element of the
8897 @code{kill-ring} list to the value of @code{string}. It replaces the
8898 first element.
8899
8900 @need 1250
8901 On the other hand, if the kill ring is empty, or replace is false, the
8902 else-part of the condition is executed:
8903
8904 @smallexample
8905 (push string kill-ring)
8906 @end smallexample
8907
8908 @noindent
8909 @need 1250
8910 @code{push} puts its first argument onto the second. It is similar to
8911 the older
8912
8913 @smallexample
8914 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8915 @end smallexample
8916
8917 @noindent
8918 @need 1250
8919 or the newer
8920
8921 @smallexample
8922 (add-to-list kill-ring string)
8923 @end smallexample
8924
8925 @noindent
8926 When it is false, the expression first constructs a new version of the
8927 kill ring by prepending @code{string} to the existing kill ring as a
8928 new element (that is what the @code{push} does). Then it executes a
8929 second @code{if} clause. This second @code{if} clause keeps the kill
8930 ring from growing too long.
8931
8932 Let's look at these two expressions in order.
8933
8934 The @code{push} line of the else-part sets the new value of the kill
8935 ring to what results from adding the string being killed to the old
8936 kill ring.
8937
8938 We can see how this works with an example.
8939
8940 @need 800
8941 First,
8942
8943 @smallexample
8944 (setq example-list '("here is a clause" "another clause"))
8945 @end smallexample
8946
8947 @need 1200
8948 @noindent
8949 After evaluating this expression with @kbd{C-x C-e}, you can evaluate
8950 @code{example-list} and see what it returns:
8951
8952 @smallexample
8953 @group
8954 example-list
8955 @result{} ("here is a clause" "another clause")
8956 @end group
8957 @end smallexample
8958
8959 @need 1200
8960 @noindent
8961 Now, we can add a new element on to this list by evaluating the
8962 following expression:
8963 @findex push, @r{example}
8964
8965 @smallexample
8966 (push "a third clause" example-list)
8967 @end smallexample
8968
8969 @need 800
8970 @noindent
8971 When we evaluate @code{example-list}, we find its value is:
8972
8973 @smallexample
8974 @group
8975 example-list
8976 @result{} ("a third clause" "here is a clause" "another clause")
8977 @end group
8978 @end smallexample
8979
8980 @noindent
8981 Thus, the third clause is added to the list by @code{push}.
8982
8983 @need 1200
8984 Now for the second part of the @code{if} clause. This expression
8985 keeps the kill ring from growing too long. It looks like this:
8986
8987 @smallexample
8988 @group
8989 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8990 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil))
8991 @end group
8992 @end smallexample
8993
8994 The code checks whether the length of the kill ring is greater than
8995 the maximum permitted length. This is the value of
8996 @code{kill-ring-max} (which is 60, by default). If the length of the
8997 kill ring is too long, then this code sets the last element of the
8998 kill ring to @code{nil}. It does this by using two functions,
8999 @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr}.
9000
9001 We looked at @code{setcdr} earlier (@pxref{setcdr, , @code{setcdr}}).
9002 It sets the @sc{cdr} of a list, just as @code{setcar} sets the
9003 @sc{car} of a list. In this case, however, @code{setcdr} will not be
9004 setting the @sc{cdr} of the whole kill ring; the @code{nthcdr}
9005 function is used to cause it to set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last
9006 element of the kill ring---this means that since the @sc{cdr} of the
9007 next to last element is the last element of the kill ring, it will set
9008 the last element of the kill ring.
9009
9010 @findex nthcdr, @r{example}
9011 The @code{nthcdr} function works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a
9012 list---it takes the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr}
9013 @dots{} It does this @var{N} times and returns the results.
9014 (@xref{nthcdr, , @code{nthcdr}}.)
9015
9016 @findex setcdr, @r{example}
9017 Thus, if we had a four element list that was supposed to be three
9018 elements long, we could set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last element
9019 to @code{nil}, and thereby shorten the list. (If you set the last
9020 element to some other value than @code{nil}, which you could do, then
9021 you would not have shortened the list. @xref{setcdr, ,
9022 @code{setcdr}}.)
9023
9024 You can see shortening by evaluating the following three expressions
9025 in turn. First set the value of @code{trees} to @code{(maple oak pine
9026 birch)}, then set the @sc{cdr} of its second @sc{cdr} to @code{nil}
9027 and then find the value of @code{trees}:
9028
9029 @smallexample
9030 @group
9031 (setq trees '(maple oak pine birch))
9032 @result{} (maple oak pine birch)
9033 @end group
9034
9035 @group
9036 (setcdr (nthcdr 2 trees) nil)
9037 @result{} nil
9038
9039 trees
9040 @result{} (maple oak pine)
9041 @end group
9042 @end smallexample
9043
9044 @noindent
9045 (The value returned by the @code{setcdr} expression is @code{nil} since
9046 that is what the @sc{cdr} is set to.)
9047
9048 To repeat, in @code{kill-new}, the @code{nthcdr} function takes the
9049 @sc{cdr} a number of times that is one less than the maximum permitted
9050 size of the kill ring and @code{setcdr} sets the @sc{cdr} of that
9051 element (which will be the rest of the elements in the kill ring) to
9052 @code{nil}. This prevents the kill ring from growing too long.
9053
9054 @need 800
9055 The next to last expression in the @code{kill-new} function is
9056
9057 @smallexample
9058 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
9059 @end smallexample
9060
9061 The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a global variable that is set to be
9062 the @code{kill-ring}.
9063
9064 Even though the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is called a
9065 @samp{pointer}, it is a variable just like the kill ring. However, the
9066 name has been chosen to help humans understand how the variable is used.
9067
9068 @need 1200
9069 Now, to return to an early expression in the body of the function:
9070
9071 @smallexample
9072 @group
9073 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
9074 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
9075 @end group
9076 @end smallexample
9077
9078 @noindent
9079 It starts with an @code{if} expression
9080
9081 In this case, the expression tests first to see whether
9082 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} exists as a function, and if so,
9083 calls it. The @code{fboundp} function returns true if the symbol it
9084 is testing has a function definition that `is not void'. If the
9085 symbol's function definition were void, we would receive an error
9086 message, as we did when we created errors intentionally (@pxref{Making
9087 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}).
9088
9089 @noindent
9090 The then-part contains an expression whose first element is the
9091 function @code{and}.
9092
9093 @findex and
9094 The @code{and} special form evaluates each of its arguments until one
9095 of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in which case the
9096 @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if none of the
9097 arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value resulting from
9098 evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such a value is not
9099 @code{nil}, it is considered true in Emacs Lisp.) In other words, an
9100 @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its arguments
9101 are true. (@xref{Second Buffer Related Review}.)
9102
9103 The expression determines whether the second argument to
9104 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is true or not.
9105 @ignore
9106 ;; If we're supposed to be extending an existing string, and that
9107 ;; string really is at the front of the menu, then update it in place.
9108 @end ignore
9109
9110 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is one of the functions that make it
9111 possible to use the `Select and Paste' menu in the Edit item of a menu
9112 bar; using a mouse, you can look at the various pieces of text you
9113 have saved and select one piece to paste.
9114
9115 The last expression in the @code{kill-new} function adds the newly
9116 copied string to whatever facility exists for copying and pasting
9117 among different programs running in a windowing system. In the X
9118 Windowing system, for example, the @code{x-select-text} function takes
9119 the string and stores it in memory operated by X. You can paste the
9120 string in another program, such as an Xterm.
9121
9122 @need 1200
9123 The expression looks like this:
9124
9125 @smallexample
9126 @group
9127 (if interprogram-cut-function
9128 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
9129 @end group
9130 @end smallexample
9131
9132 If an @code{interprogram-cut-function} exists, then Emacs executes
9133 @code{funcall}, which in turn calls its first argument as a function
9134 and passes the remaining arguments to it. (Incidentally, as far as I
9135 can see, this @code{if} expression could be replaced by an @code{and}
9136 expression similar to the one in the first part of the function.)
9137
9138 We are not going to discuss windowing systems and other programs
9139 further, but merely note that this is a mechanism that enables GNU
9140 Emacs to work easily and well with other programs.
9141
9142 This code for placing text in the kill ring, either concatenated with
9143 an existing element or as a new element, leads us to the code for
9144 bringing back text that has been cut out of the buffer---the yank
9145 commands. However, before discussing the yank commands, it is better
9146 to learn how lists are implemented in a computer. This will make
9147 clear such mysteries as the use of the term `pointer'. But before
9148 that, we will digress into C.
9149
9150 @ignore
9151 @c is this true in Emacs 22? Does not seems to be
9152
9153 (If the @w{@code{(< end beg))}}
9154 expression is true, @code{kill-append} prepends the string to the just
9155 previously clipped text. For a detailed discussion, see
9156 @ref{kill-append function, , The @code{kill-append} function}.)
9157
9158 If you then yank back the text, i.e., `paste' it, you get both
9159 pieces of text at once. That way, if you delete two words in a row,
9160 and then yank them back, you get both words, in their proper order,
9161 with one yank. (The @w{@code{(< end beg))}} expression makes sure the
9162 order is correct.)
9163
9164 On the other hand, if the previous command is not @code{kill-region},
9165 then the @code{kill-new} function is called, which adds the text to
9166 the kill ring as the latest item, and sets the
9167 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable to point to it.
9168 @end ignore
9169 @ignore
9170
9171 @c Evidently, changed for Emacs 22. The zap-to-char command does not
9172 @c use the delete-and-extract-region function
9173
9174 2006 Oct 26, the Digression into C is now OK but should come after
9175 copy-region-as-kill and filter-buffer-substring
9176
9177 2006 Oct 24
9178 In Emacs 22,
9179 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9180 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9181 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9182 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9183
9184 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9185 @end ignore
9186
9187 @node Digression into C, defvar, copy-region-as-kill, Cutting & Storing Text
9188 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9189 @section Digression into C
9190 @findex delete-and-extract-region
9191 @cindex C, a digression into
9192 @cindex Digression into C
9193
9194 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function (@pxref{copy-region-as-kill, ,
9195 @code{copy-region-as-kill}}) uses the @code{filter-buffer-substring}
9196 function, which in turn uses the @code{delete-and-extract-region}
9197 function. It removes the contents of a region and you cannot get them
9198 back.
9199
9200 Unlike the other code discussed here, the
9201 @code{delete-and-extract-region} function is not written in Emacs
9202 Lisp; it is written in C and is one of the primitives of the GNU Emacs
9203 system. Since it is very simple, I will digress briefly from Lisp and
9204 describe it here.
9205
9206 @c GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/src/editfns.c
9207 @c the DEFUN for buffer-substring-no-properties
9208
9209 @need 1500
9210 Like many of the other Emacs primitives,
9211 @code{delete-and-extract-region} is written as an instance of a C
9212 macro, a macro being a template for code. The complete macro looks
9213 like this:
9214
9215 @smallexample
9216 @group
9217 DEFUN ("buffer-substring-no-properties", Fbuffer_substring_no_properties,
9218 Sbuffer_substring_no_properties, 2, 2, 0,
9219 doc: /* Return the characters of part of the buffer,
9220 without the text properties.
9221 The two arguments START and END are character positions;
9222 they can be in either order. */)
9223 (start, end)
9224 Lisp_Object start, end;
9225 @{
9226 register int b, e;
9227
9228 validate_region (&start, &end);
9229 b = XINT (start);
9230 e = XINT (end);
9231
9232 return make_buffer_string (b, e, 0);
9233 @}
9234 @end group
9235 @end smallexample
9236
9237 Without going into the details of the macro writing process, let me
9238 point out that this macro starts with the word @code{DEFUN}. The word
9239 @code{DEFUN} was chosen since the code serves the same purpose as
9240 @code{defun} does in Lisp. (The @code{DEFUN} C macro is defined in
9241 @file{emacs/src/lisp.h}.)
9242
9243 The word @code{DEFUN} is followed by seven parts inside of
9244 parentheses:
9245
9246 @itemize @bullet
9247 @item
9248 The first part is the name given to the function in Lisp,
9249 @code{delete-and-extract-region}.
9250
9251 @item
9252 The second part is the name of the function in C,
9253 @code{Fdelete_and_extract_region}. By convention, it starts with
9254 @samp{F}. Since C does not use hyphens in names, underscores are used
9255 instead.
9256
9257 @item
9258 The third part is the name for the C constant structure that records
9259 information on this function for internal use. It is the name of the
9260 function in C but begins with an @samp{S} instead of an @samp{F}.
9261
9262 @item
9263 The fourth and fifth parts specify the minimum and maximum number of
9264 arguments the function can have. This function demands exactly 2
9265 arguments.
9266
9267 @item
9268 The sixth part is nearly like the argument that follows the
9269 @code{interactive} declaration in a function written in Lisp: a letter
9270 followed, perhaps, by a prompt. The only difference from the Lisp is
9271 when the macro is called with no arguments. Then you write a @code{0}
9272 (which is a `null string'), as in this macro.
9273
9274 If you were to specify arguments, you would place them between
9275 quotation marks. The C macro for @code{goto-char} includes
9276 @code{"NGoto char: "} in this position to indicate that the function
9277 expects a raw prefix, in this case, a numerical location in a buffer,
9278 and provides a prompt.
9279
9280 @item
9281 The seventh part is a documentation string, just like the one for a
9282 function written in Emacs Lisp, except that every newline must be
9283 written explicitly as @samp{\n} followed by a backslash and carriage
9284 return.
9285
9286 @need 1000
9287 Thus, the first two lines of documentation for @code{goto-char} are
9288 written like this:
9289
9290 @smallexample
9291 @group
9292 "Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.\n\
9293 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max)."
9294 @end group
9295 @end smallexample
9296 @end itemize
9297
9298 @need 1200
9299 In a C macro, the formal parameters come next, with a statement of
9300 what kind of object they are, followed by what might be called the `body'
9301 of the macro. For @code{delete-and-extract-region} the `body'
9302 consists of the following four lines:
9303
9304 @smallexample
9305 @group
9306 validate_region (&start, &end);
9307 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9308 return build_string ("");
9309 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9310 @end group
9311 @end smallexample
9312
9313 The @code{validate_region} function checks whether the values
9314 passed as the beginning and end of the region are the proper type and
9315 are within range. If the beginning and end positions are the same,
9316 then return and empty string.
9317
9318 The @code{del_range_1} function actually deletes the text. It is a
9319 complex function we will not look into. It updates the buffer and
9320 does other things. However, it is worth looking at the two arguments
9321 passed to @code{del_range}. These are @w{@code{XINT (start)}} and
9322 @w{@code{XINT (end)}}.
9323
9324 As far as the C language is concerned, @code{start} and @code{end} are
9325 two integers that mark the beginning and end of the region to be
9326 deleted@footnote{More precisely, and requiring more expert knowledge
9327 to understand, the two integers are of type `Lisp_Object', which can
9328 also be a C union instead of an integer type.}.
9329
9330 In early versions of Emacs, these two numbers were thirty-two bits
9331 long, but the code is slowly being generalized to handle other
9332 lengths. Three of the available bits are used to specify the type of
9333 information; the remaining bits are used as `content'.
9334
9335 @samp{XINT} is a C macro that extracts the relevant number from the
9336 longer collection of bits; the three other bits are discarded.
9337
9338 @need 800
9339 The command in @code{delete-and-extract-region} looks like this:
9340
9341 @smallexample
9342 del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9343 @end smallexample
9344
9345 @noindent
9346 It deletes the region between the beginning position, @code{start},
9347 and the ending position, @code{end}.
9348
9349 From the point of view of the person writing Lisp, Emacs is all very
9350 simple; but hidden underneath is a great deal of complexity to make it
9351 all work.
9352
9353 @node defvar, cons & search-fwd Review, Digression into C, Cutting & Storing Text
9354 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9355 @section Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9356 @findex defvar
9357 @cindex Initializing a variable
9358 @cindex Variable initialization
9359
9360 @ignore
9361 2006 Oct 24
9362 In Emacs 22,
9363 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9364 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9365 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9366 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9367
9368 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9369
9370 @end ignore
9371
9372 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function is written in Emacs Lisp. Two
9373 functions within it, @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new}, copy a
9374 region in a buffer and save it in a variable called the
9375 @code{kill-ring}. This section describes how the @code{kill-ring}
9376 variable is created and initialized using the @code{defvar} special
9377 form.
9378
9379 (Again we note that the term @code{kill-ring} is a misnomer. The text
9380 that is clipped out of the buffer can be brought back; it is not a ring
9381 of corpses, but a ring of resurrectable text.)
9382
9383 In Emacs Lisp, a variable such as the @code{kill-ring} is created and
9384 given an initial value by using the @code{defvar} special form. The
9385 name comes from ``define variable''.
9386
9387 The @code{defvar} special form is similar to @code{setq} in that it sets
9388 the value of a variable. It is unlike @code{setq} in two ways: first,
9389 it only sets the value of the variable if the variable does not already
9390 have a value. If the variable already has a value, @code{defvar} does
9391 not override the existing value. Second, @code{defvar} has a
9392 documentation string.
9393
9394 (Another special form, @code{defcustom}, is designed for variables
9395 that people customize. It has more features than @code{defvar}.
9396 (@xref{defcustom, , Setting Variables with @code{defcustom}}.)
9397
9398 @menu
9399 * See variable current value::
9400 * defvar and asterisk::
9401 @end menu
9402
9403 @node See variable current value, defvar and asterisk, defvar, defvar
9404 @ifnottex
9405 @unnumberedsubsec Seeing the Current Value of a Variable
9406 @end ifnottex
9407
9408 You can see the current value of a variable, any variable, by using
9409 the @code{describe-variable} function, which is usually invoked by
9410 typing @kbd{C-h v}. If you type @kbd{C-h v} and then @code{kill-ring}
9411 (followed by @key{RET}) when prompted, you will see what is in your
9412 current kill ring---this may be quite a lot! Conversely, if you have
9413 been doing nothing this Emacs session except read this document, you
9414 may have nothing in it. Also, you will see the documentation for
9415 @code{kill-ring}:
9416
9417 @smallexample
9418 @group
9419 Documentation:
9420 List of killed text sequences.
9421 Since the kill ring is supposed to interact nicely with cut-and-paste
9422 facilities offered by window systems, use of this variable should
9423 @end group
9424 @group
9425 interact nicely with `interprogram-cut-function' and
9426 `interprogram-paste-function'. The functions `kill-new',
9427 `kill-append', and `current-kill' are supposed to implement this
9428 interaction; you may want to use them instead of manipulating the kill
9429 ring directly.
9430 @end group
9431 @end smallexample
9432
9433 @need 800
9434 The kill ring is defined by a @code{defvar} in the following way:
9435
9436 @smallexample
9437 @group
9438 (defvar kill-ring nil
9439 "List of killed text sequences.
9440 @dots{}")
9441 @end group
9442 @end smallexample
9443
9444 @noindent
9445 In this variable definition, the variable is given an initial value of
9446 @code{nil}, which makes sense, since if you have saved nothing, you want
9447 nothing back if you give a @code{yank} command. The documentation
9448 string is written just like the documentation string of a @code{defun}.
9449 As with the documentation string of the @code{defun}, the first line of
9450 the documentation should be a complete sentence, since some commands,
9451 like @code{apropos}, print only the first line of documentation.
9452 Succeeding lines should not be indented; otherwise they look odd when
9453 you use @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}).
9454
9455 @node defvar and asterisk, , See variable current value, defvar
9456 @subsection @code{defvar} and an asterisk
9457 @findex defvar @r{for a user customizable variable}
9458 @findex defvar @r{with an asterisk}
9459
9460 In the past, Emacs used the @code{defvar} special form both for
9461 internal variables that you would not expect a user to change and for
9462 variables that you do expect a user to change. Although you can still
9463 use @code{defvar} for user customizable variables, please use
9464 @code{defcustom} instead, since that special form provides a path into
9465 the Customization commands. (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables
9466 using @code{defcustom}}.)
9467
9468 When you specified a variable using the @code{defvar} special form,
9469 you could distinguish a variable that a user might want to change from
9470 others by typing an asterisk, @samp{*}, in the first column of its
9471 documentation string. For example:
9472
9473 @smallexample
9474 @group
9475 (defvar shell-command-default-error-buffer nil
9476 "*Buffer name for `shell-command' @dots{} error output.
9477 @dots{} ")
9478 @end group
9479 @end smallexample
9480
9481 @findex set-variable
9482 @noindent
9483 You could (and still can) use the @code{set-variable} command to
9484 change the value of @code{shell-command-default-error-buffer}
9485 temporarily. However, options set using @code{set-variable} are set
9486 only for the duration of your editing session. The new values are not
9487 saved between sessions. Each time Emacs starts, it reads the original
9488 value, unless you change the value within your @file{.emacs} file,
9489 either by setting it manually or by using @code{customize}.
9490 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
9491
9492 For me, the major use of the @code{set-variable} command is to suggest
9493 variables that I might want to set in my @file{.emacs} file. There
9494 are now more than 700 such variables --- far too many to remember
9495 readily. Fortunately, you can press @key{TAB} after calling the
9496 @code{M-x set-variable} command to see the list of variables.
9497 (@xref{Examining, , Examining and Setting Variables, emacs,
9498 The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
9499
9500 @need 1250
9501 @node cons & search-fwd Review, search Exercises, defvar, Cutting & Storing Text
9502 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9503 @section Review
9504
9505 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
9506
9507 @table @code
9508 @item car
9509 @itemx cdr
9510 @code{car} returns the first element of a list; @code{cdr} returns the
9511 second and subsequent elements of a list.
9512
9513 @need 1250
9514 For example:
9515
9516 @smallexample
9517 @group
9518 (car '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9519 @result{} 1
9520 (cdr '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9521 @result{} (2 3 4 5 6 7)
9522 @end group
9523 @end smallexample
9524
9525 @item cons
9526 @code{cons} constructs a list by prepending its first argument to its
9527 second argument.
9528
9529 @need 1250
9530 For example:
9531
9532 @smallexample
9533 @group
9534 (cons 1 '(2 3 4))
9535 @result{} (1 2 3 4)
9536 @end group
9537 @end smallexample
9538
9539 @item funcall
9540 @code{funcall} evaluates its first argument as a function. It passes
9541 its remaining arguments to its first argument.
9542
9543 @item nthcdr
9544 Return the result of taking @sc{cdr} `n' times on a list.
9545 @iftex
9546 The
9547 @tex
9548 $n^{th}$
9549 @end tex
9550 @code{cdr}.
9551 @end iftex
9552 The `rest of the rest', as it were.
9553
9554 @need 1250
9555 For example:
9556
9557 @smallexample
9558 @group
9559 (nthcdr 3 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9560 @result{} (4 5 6 7)
9561 @end group
9562 @end smallexample
9563
9564 @item setcar
9565 @itemx setcdr
9566 @code{setcar} changes the first element of a list; @code{setcdr}
9567 changes the second and subsequent elements of a list.
9568
9569 @need 1250
9570 For example:
9571
9572 @smallexample
9573 @group
9574 (setq triple '(1 2 3))
9575
9576 (setcar triple '37)
9577
9578 triple
9579 @result{} (37 2 3)
9580
9581 (setcdr triple '("foo" "bar"))
9582
9583 triple
9584 @result{} (37 "foo" "bar")
9585 @end group
9586 @end smallexample
9587
9588 @item progn
9589 Evaluate each argument in sequence and then return the value of the
9590 last.
9591
9592 @need 1250
9593 For example:
9594
9595 @smallexample
9596 @group
9597 (progn 1 2 3 4)
9598 @result{} 4
9599 @end group
9600 @end smallexample
9601
9602 @item save-restriction
9603 Record whatever narrowing is in effect in the current buffer, if any,
9604 and restore that narrowing after evaluating the arguments.
9605
9606 @item search-forward
9607 Search for a string, and if the string is found, move point. With a
9608 regular expression, use the similar @code{re-search-forward}.
9609 (@xref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, for an
9610 explanation of regular expression patterns and searches.)
9611
9612 @need 1250
9613 @noindent
9614 @code{search-forward} and @code{re-search-forward} take four
9615 arguments:
9616
9617 @enumerate
9618 @item
9619 The string or regular expression to search for.
9620
9621 @item
9622 Optionally, the limit of the search.
9623
9624 @item
9625 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
9626 error message.
9627
9628 @item
9629 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
9630 search goes backwards.
9631 @end enumerate
9632
9633 @item kill-region
9634 @itemx delete-and-extract-region
9635 @itemx copy-region-as-kill
9636
9637 @code{kill-region} cuts the text between point and mark from the
9638 buffer and stores that text in the kill ring, so you can get it back
9639 by yanking.
9640
9641 @code{copy-region-as-kill} copies the text between point and mark into
9642 the kill ring, from which you can get it by yanking. The function
9643 does not cut or remove the text from the buffer.
9644 @end table
9645
9646 @code{delete-and-extract-region} removes the text between point and
9647 mark from the buffer and throws it away. You cannot get it back.
9648 (This is not an interactive command.)
9649
9650 @need 1500
9651 @node search Exercises, , cons & search-fwd Review, Cutting & Storing Text
9652 @section Searching Exercises
9653
9654 @itemize @bullet
9655 @item
9656 Write an interactive function that searches for a string. If the
9657 search finds the string, leave point after it and display a message
9658 that says ``Found!''. (Do not use @code{search-forward} for the name
9659 of this function; if you do, you will overwrite the existing version of
9660 @code{search-forward} that comes with Emacs. Use a name such as
9661 @code{test-search} instead.)
9662
9663 @item
9664 Write a function that prints the third element of the kill ring in the
9665 echo area, if any; if the kill ring does not contain a third element,
9666 print an appropriate message.
9667 @end itemize
9668
9669 @node List Implementation, Yanking, Cutting & Storing Text, Top
9670 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9671 @chapter How Lists are Implemented
9672 @cindex Lists in a computer
9673
9674 In Lisp, atoms are recorded in a straightforward fashion; if the
9675 implementation is not straightforward in practice, it is, nonetheless,
9676 straightforward in theory. The atom @samp{rose}, for example, is
9677 recorded as the four contiguous letters @samp{r}, @samp{o}, @samp{s},
9678 @samp{e}. A list, on the other hand, is kept differently. The mechanism
9679 is equally simple, but it takes a moment to get used to the idea. A
9680 list is kept using a series of pairs of pointers. In the series, the
9681 first pointer in each pair points to an atom or to another list, and the
9682 second pointer in each pair points to the next pair, or to the symbol
9683 @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9684
9685 A pointer itself is quite simply the electronic address of what is
9686 pointed to. Hence, a list is kept as a series of electronic addresses.
9687
9688 @menu
9689 * Lists diagrammed::
9690 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
9691 * List Exercise::
9692 @end menu
9693
9694 @node Lists diagrammed, Symbols as Chest, List Implementation, List Implementation
9695 @ifnottex
9696 @unnumberedsec Lists diagrammed
9697 @end ifnottex
9698
9699 For example, the list @code{(rose violet buttercup)} has three elements,
9700 @samp{rose}, @samp{violet}, and @samp{buttercup}. In the computer, the
9701 electronic address of @samp{rose} is recorded in a segment of computer
9702 memory along with the address that gives the electronic address of where
9703 the atom @samp{violet} is located; and that address (the one that tells
9704 where @samp{violet} is located) is kept along with an address that tells
9705 where the address for the atom @samp{buttercup} is located.
9706
9707 @need 1200
9708 This sounds more complicated than it is and is easier seen in a diagram:
9709
9710 @c clear print-postscript-figures
9711 @c !!! cons-cell-diagram #1
9712 @ifnottex
9713 @smallexample
9714 @group
9715 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9716 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9717 | | |
9718 | | |
9719 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9720 @end group
9721 @end smallexample
9722 @end ifnottex
9723 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9724 @sp 1
9725 @tex
9726 @center @image{cons-1}
9727 %%%% old method of including an image
9728 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9729 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-1.eps}}
9730 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9731 @end tex
9732 @sp 1
9733 @end ifset
9734 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9735 @iftex
9736 @smallexample
9737 @group
9738 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9739 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9740 | | |
9741 | | |
9742 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9743 @end group
9744 @end smallexample
9745 @end iftex
9746 @end ifclear
9747
9748 @noindent
9749 In the diagram, each box represents a word of computer memory that
9750 holds a Lisp object, usually in the form of a memory address. The boxes,
9751 i.e.@: the addresses, are in pairs. Each arrow points to what the address
9752 is the address of, either an atom or another pair of addresses. The
9753 first box is the electronic address of @samp{rose} and the arrow points
9754 to @samp{rose}; the second box is the address of the next pair of boxes,
9755 the first part of which is the address of @samp{violet} and the second
9756 part of which is the address of the next pair. The very last box
9757 points to the symbol @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9758
9759 @need 1200
9760 When a variable is set to a list with a function such as @code{setq},
9761 it stores the address of the first box in the variable. Thus,
9762 evaluation of the expression
9763
9764 @smallexample
9765 (setq bouquet '(rose violet buttercup))
9766 @end smallexample
9767
9768 @need 1250
9769 @noindent
9770 creates a situation like this:
9771
9772 @c cons-cell-diagram #2
9773 @ifnottex
9774 @smallexample
9775 @group
9776 bouquet
9777 |
9778 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9779 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9780 | | |
9781 | | |
9782 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9783 @end group
9784 @end smallexample
9785 @end ifnottex
9786 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9787 @sp 1
9788 @tex
9789 @center @image{cons-2}
9790 %%%% old method of including an image
9791 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9792 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-2.eps}}
9793 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9794 @end tex
9795 @sp 1
9796 @end ifset
9797 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9798 @iftex
9799 @smallexample
9800 @group
9801 bouquet
9802 |
9803 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9804 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9805 | | |
9806 | | |
9807 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9808 @end group
9809 @end smallexample
9810 @end iftex
9811 @end ifclear
9812
9813 @noindent
9814 In this example, the symbol @code{bouquet} holds the address of the first
9815 pair of boxes.
9816
9817 @need 1200
9818 This same list can be illustrated in a different sort of box notation
9819 like this:
9820
9821 @c cons-cell-diagram #2a
9822 @ifnottex
9823 @smallexample
9824 @group
9825 bouquet
9826 |
9827 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9828 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9829 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9830 | | | | | | | cup | |
9831 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9832 @end group
9833 @end smallexample
9834 @end ifnottex
9835 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9836 @sp 1
9837 @tex
9838 @center @image{cons-2a}
9839 %%%% old method of including an image
9840 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9841 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-2a.eps}}
9842 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9843 @end tex
9844 @sp 1
9845 @end ifset
9846 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9847 @iftex
9848 @smallexample
9849 @group
9850 bouquet
9851 |
9852 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9853 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9854 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9855 | | | | | | | cup | |
9856 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9857 @end group
9858 @end smallexample
9859 @end iftex
9860 @end ifclear
9861
9862 (Symbols consist of more than pairs of addresses, but the structure of
9863 a symbol is made up of addresses. Indeed, the symbol @code{bouquet}
9864 consists of a group of address-boxes, one of which is the address of
9865 the printed word @samp{bouquet}, a second of which is the address of a
9866 function definition attached to the symbol, if any, a third of which
9867 is the address of the first pair of address-boxes for the list
9868 @code{(rose violet buttercup)}, and so on. Here we are showing that
9869 the symbol's third address-box points to the first pair of
9870 address-boxes for the list.)
9871
9872 If a symbol is set to the @sc{cdr} of a list, the list itself is not
9873 changed; the symbol simply has an address further down the list. (In
9874 the jargon, @sc{car} and @sc{cdr} are `non-destructive'.) Thus,
9875 evaluation of the following expression
9876
9877 @smallexample
9878 (setq flowers (cdr bouquet))
9879 @end smallexample
9880
9881 @need 800
9882 @noindent
9883 produces this:
9884
9885 @c cons-cell-diagram #3
9886 @ifnottex
9887 @sp 1
9888 @smallexample
9889 @group
9890 bouquet flowers
9891 | |
9892 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9893 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9894 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9895 | | |
9896 | | |
9897 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9898 @end group
9899 @end smallexample
9900 @sp 1
9901 @end ifnottex
9902 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9903 @sp 1
9904 @tex
9905 @center @image{cons-3}
9906 %%%% old method of including an image
9907 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9908 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-3.eps}}
9909 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9910 @end tex
9911 @sp 1
9912 @end ifset
9913 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9914 @iftex
9915 @sp 1
9916 @smallexample
9917 @group
9918 bouquet flowers
9919 | |
9920 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9921 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9922 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9923 | | |
9924 | | |
9925 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9926 @end group
9927 @end smallexample
9928 @sp 1
9929 @end iftex
9930 @end ifclear
9931
9932 @noindent
9933 The value of @code{flowers} is @code{(violet buttercup)}, which is
9934 to say, the symbol @code{flowers} holds the address of the pair of
9935 address-boxes, the first of which holds the address of @code{violet},
9936 and the second of which holds the address of @code{buttercup}.
9937
9938 A pair of address-boxes is called a @dfn{cons cell} or @dfn{dotted
9939 pair}. @xref{Cons Cell Type, , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9940 Reference Manual}, and @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted Pair
9941 Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
9942 information about cons cells and dotted pairs.
9943
9944 @need 1200
9945 The function @code{cons} adds a new pair of addresses to the front of
9946 a series of addresses like that shown above. For example, evaluating
9947 the expression
9948
9949 @smallexample
9950 (setq bouquet (cons 'lily bouquet))
9951 @end smallexample
9952
9953 @need 1500
9954 @noindent
9955 produces:
9956
9957 @c cons-cell-diagram #4
9958 @ifnottex
9959 @sp 1
9960 @smallexample
9961 @group
9962 bouquet flowers
9963 | |
9964 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9965 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9966 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9967 | | | |
9968 | | | |
9969 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9970 @end group
9971 @end smallexample
9972 @sp 1
9973 @end ifnottex
9974 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9975 @sp 1
9976 @tex
9977 @center @image{cons-4}
9978 %%%% old method of including an image
9979 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9980 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-4.eps}}
9981 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9982 @end tex
9983 @sp 1
9984 @end ifset
9985 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9986 @iftex
9987 @sp 1
9988 @smallexample
9989 @group
9990 bouquet flowers
9991 | |
9992 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9993 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9994 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9995 | | | |
9996 | | | |
9997 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9998 @end group
9999 @end smallexample
10000 @sp 1
10001 @end iftex
10002 @end ifclear
10003
10004 @need 1200
10005 @noindent
10006 However, this does not change the value of the symbol
10007 @code{flowers}, as you can see by evaluating the following,
10008
10009 @smallexample
10010 (eq (cdr (cdr bouquet)) flowers)
10011 @end smallexample
10012
10013 @noindent
10014 which returns @code{t} for true.
10015
10016 Until it is reset, @code{flowers} still has the value
10017 @code{(violet buttercup)}; that is, it has the address of the cons
10018 cell whose first address is of @code{violet}. Also, this does not
10019 alter any of the pre-existing cons cells; they are all still there.
10020
10021 Thus, in Lisp, to get the @sc{cdr} of a list, you just get the address
10022 of the next cons cell in the series; to get the @sc{car} of a list,
10023 you get the address of the first element of the list; to @code{cons} a
10024 new element on a list, you add a new cons cell to the front of the list.
10025 That is all there is to it! The underlying structure of Lisp is
10026 brilliantly simple!
10027
10028 And what does the last address in a series of cons cells refer to? It
10029 is the address of the empty list, of @code{nil}.
10030
10031 In summary, when a Lisp variable is set to a value, it is provided with
10032 the address of the list to which the variable refers.
10033
10034 @node Symbols as Chest, List Exercise, Lists diagrammed, List Implementation
10035 @section Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
10036 @cindex Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
10037 @cindex Chest of Drawers, metaphor for a symbol
10038 @cindex Drawers, Chest of, metaphor for a symbol
10039
10040 In an earlier section, I suggested that you might imagine a symbol as
10041 being a chest of drawers. The function definition is put in one
10042 drawer, the value in another, and so on. What is put in the drawer
10043 holding the value can be changed without affecting the contents of the
10044 drawer holding the function definition, and vice-verse.
10045
10046 Actually, what is put in each drawer is the address of the value or
10047 function definition. It is as if you found an old chest in the attic,
10048 and in one of its drawers you found a map giving you directions to
10049 where the buried treasure lies.
10050
10051 (In addition to its name, symbol definition, and variable value, a
10052 symbol has a `drawer' for a @dfn{property list} which can be used to
10053 record other information. Property lists are not discussed here; see
10054 @ref{Property Lists, , Property Lists, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
10055 Reference Manual}.)
10056
10057 @need 1500
10058 Here is a fanciful representation:
10059
10060 @c chest-of-drawers diagram
10061 @ifnottex
10062 @sp 1
10063 @smallexample
10064 @group
10065 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
10066
10067 __ o0O0o __
10068 / \
10069 ---------------------
10070 | directions to | [map to]
10071 | symbol name | bouquet
10072 | |
10073 +---------------------+
10074 | directions to |
10075 | symbol definition | [none]
10076 | |
10077 +---------------------+
10078 | directions to | [map to]
10079 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
10080 | |
10081 +---------------------+
10082 | directions to |
10083 | property list | [not described here]
10084 | |
10085 +---------------------+
10086 |/ \|
10087 @end group
10088 @end smallexample
10089 @sp 1
10090 @end ifnottex
10091 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10092 @sp 1
10093 @tex
10094 @center @image{drawers}
10095 %%%% old method of including an image
10096 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
10097 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/drawers.eps}}
10098 % \catcode`\@=0 %
10099 @end tex
10100 @sp 1
10101 @end ifset
10102 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10103 @iftex
10104 @sp 1
10105 @smallexample
10106 @group
10107 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
10108
10109 __ o0O0o __
10110 / \
10111 ---------------------
10112 | directions to | [map to]
10113 | symbol name | bouquet
10114 | |
10115 +---------------------+
10116 | directions to |
10117 | symbol definition | [none]
10118 | |
10119 +---------------------+
10120 | directions to | [map to]
10121 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
10122 | |
10123 +---------------------+
10124 | directions to |
10125 | property list | [not described here]
10126 | |
10127 +---------------------+
10128 |/ \|
10129 @end group
10130 @end smallexample
10131 @sp 1
10132 @end iftex
10133 @end ifclear
10134
10135 @node List Exercise, , Symbols as Chest, List Implementation
10136 @section Exercise
10137
10138 Set @code{flowers} to @code{violet} and @code{buttercup}. Cons two
10139 more flowers on to this list and set this new list to
10140 @code{more-flowers}. Set the @sc{car} of @code{flowers} to a fish.
10141 What does the @code{more-flowers} list now contain?
10142
10143 @node Yanking, Loops & Recursion, List Implementation, Top
10144 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10145 @chapter Yanking Text Back
10146 @findex yank
10147 @cindex Text retrieval
10148 @cindex Retrieving text
10149 @cindex Pasting text
10150
10151 Whenever you cut text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in GNU Emacs,
10152 you can bring it back with a `yank' command. The text that is cut out of
10153 the buffer is put in the kill ring and the yank commands insert the
10154 appropriate contents of the kill ring back into a buffer (not necessarily
10155 the original buffer).
10156
10157 A simple @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}) command inserts the first item from
10158 the kill ring into the current buffer. If the @kbd{C-y} command is
10159 followed immediately by @kbd{M-y}, the first element is replaced by
10160 the second element. Successive @kbd{M-y} commands replace the second
10161 element with the third, fourth, or fifth element, and so on. When the
10162 last element in the kill ring is reached, it is replaced by the first
10163 element and the cycle is repeated. (Thus the kill ring is called a
10164 `ring' rather than just a `list'. However, the actual data structure
10165 that holds the text is a list.
10166 @xref{Kill Ring, , Handling the Kill Ring}, for the details of how the
10167 list is handled as a ring.)
10168
10169 @menu
10170 * Kill Ring Overview::
10171 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
10172 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
10173 @end menu
10174
10175 @node Kill Ring Overview, kill-ring-yank-pointer, Yanking, Yanking
10176 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10177 @section Kill Ring Overview
10178 @cindex Kill ring overview
10179
10180 The kill ring is a list of textual strings. This is what it looks like:
10181
10182 @smallexample
10183 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10184 @end smallexample
10185
10186 If this were the contents of my kill ring and I pressed @kbd{C-y}, the
10187 string of characters saying @samp{some text} would be inserted in this
10188 buffer where my cursor is located.
10189
10190 The @code{yank} command is also used for duplicating text by copying it.
10191 The copied text is not cut from the buffer, but a copy of it is put on the
10192 kill ring and is inserted by yanking it back.
10193
10194 Three functions are used for bringing text back from the kill ring:
10195 @code{yank}, which is usually bound to @kbd{C-y}; @code{yank-pop},
10196 which is usually bound to @kbd{M-y}; and @code{rotate-yank-pointer},
10197 which is used by the two other functions.
10198
10199 These functions refer to the kill ring through a variable called the
10200 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. Indeed, the insertion code for both the
10201 @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} functions is:
10202
10203 @smallexample
10204 (insert (car kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10205 @end smallexample
10206
10207 @noindent
10208 (Well, no more. In GNU Emacs 22, the function has been replaced by
10209 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{insert-for-yank-1}
10210 repetitively for each @code{yank-handler} segment. In turn,
10211 @code{insert-for-yank-1} strips text properties from the inserted text
10212 according to @code{yank-excluded-properties}. Otherwise, it is just
10213 like @code{insert}. We will stick with plain @code{insert} since it
10214 is easier to understand.)
10215
10216 To begin to understand how @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} work, it is
10217 first necessary to look at the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
10218
10219 @node kill-ring-yank-pointer, yank nthcdr Exercises, Kill Ring Overview, Yanking
10220 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10221 @section The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} Variable
10222
10223 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a variable, just as @code{kill-ring} is
10224 a variable. It points to something by being bound to the value of what
10225 it points to, like any other Lisp variable.
10226
10227 @need 1000
10228 Thus, if the value of the kill ring is:
10229
10230 @smallexample
10231 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10232 @end smallexample
10233
10234 @need 1250
10235 @noindent
10236 and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points to the second clause, the
10237 value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is:
10238
10239 @smallexample
10240 ("a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10241 @end smallexample
10242
10243 As explained in the previous chapter (@pxref{List Implementation}), the
10244 computer does not keep two different copies of the text being pointed to
10245 by both the @code{kill-ring} and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. The
10246 words ``a different piece of text'' and ``yet more text'' are not
10247 duplicated. Instead, the two Lisp variables point to the same pieces of
10248 text. Here is a diagram:
10249
10250 @c cons-cell-diagram #5
10251 @ifnottex
10252 @smallexample
10253 @group
10254 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10255 | |
10256 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10257 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10258 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10259 | | |
10260 | | |
10261 | | --> "yet more text"
10262 | |
10263 | --> "a different piece of text"
10264 |
10265 --> "some text"
10266 @end group
10267 @end smallexample
10268 @sp 1
10269 @end ifnottex
10270 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10271 @sp 1
10272 @tex
10273 @center @image{cons-5}
10274 %%%% old method of including an image
10275 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
10276 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-5.eps}}
10277 % \catcode`\@=0 %
10278 @end tex
10279 @sp 1
10280 @end ifset
10281 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10282 @iftex
10283 @smallexample
10284 @group
10285 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10286 | |
10287 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10288 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10289 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10290 | | |
10291 | | |
10292 | | --> "yet more text"
10293 | |
10294 | --> "a different piece of text
10295 |
10296 --> "some text"
10297 @end group
10298 @end smallexample
10299 @sp 1
10300 @end iftex
10301 @end ifclear
10302
10303 Both the variable @code{kill-ring} and the variable
10304 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} are pointers. But the kill ring itself is
10305 usually described as if it were actually what it is composed of. The
10306 @code{kill-ring} is spoken of as if it were the list rather than that it
10307 points to the list. Conversely, the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is
10308 spoken of as pointing to a list.
10309
10310 These two ways of talking about the same thing sound confusing at first but
10311 make sense on reflection. The kill ring is generally thought of as the
10312 complete structure of data that holds the information of what has recently
10313 been cut out of the Emacs buffers. The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
10314 on the other hand, serves to indicate---that is, to `point to'---that part
10315 of the kill ring of which the first element (the @sc{car}) will be
10316 inserted.
10317
10318 @ignore
10319 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{kill-new} function calls
10320
10321 @code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)}
10322
10323 (defun rotate-yank-pointer (arg)
10324 "Rotate the yanking point in the kill ring.
10325 With argument, rotate that many kills forward (or backward, if negative)."
10326 (interactive "p")
10327 (current-kill arg))
10328
10329 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
10330 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
10331 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
10332 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
10333 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
10334 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
10335 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
10336 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
10337 interprogram-paste-function
10338 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
10339 (if interprogram-paste
10340 (progn
10341 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
10342 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
10343 ;; selection, with identical text.
10344 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
10345 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
10346 interprogram-paste)
10347 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
10348 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
10349 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10350 (length kill-ring))
10351 kill-ring)))
10352 (or do-not-move
10353 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
10354 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
10355
10356 @end ignore
10357
10358 @need 1500
10359 @node yank nthcdr Exercises, , kill-ring-yank-pointer, Yanking
10360 @section Exercises with @code{yank} and @code{nthcdr}
10361
10362 @itemize @bullet
10363 @item
10364 Using @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}), look at the value of
10365 your kill ring. Add several items to your kill ring; look at its
10366 value again. Using @kbd{M-y} (@code{yank-pop)}, move all the way
10367 around the kill ring. How many items were in your kill ring? Find
10368 the value of @code{kill-ring-max}. Was your kill ring full, or could
10369 you have kept more blocks of text within it?
10370
10371 @item
10372 Using @code{nthcdr} and @code{car}, construct a series of expressions
10373 to return the first, second, third, and fourth elements of a list.
10374 @end itemize
10375
10376 @node Loops & Recursion, Regexp Search, Yanking, Top
10377 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10378 @chapter Loops and Recursion
10379 @cindex Loops and recursion
10380 @cindex Recursion and loops
10381 @cindex Repetition (loops)
10382
10383 Emacs Lisp has two primary ways to cause an expression, or a series of
10384 expressions, to be evaluated repeatedly: one uses a @code{while}
10385 loop, and the other uses @dfn{recursion}.
10386
10387 Repetition can be very valuable. For example, to move forward four
10388 sentences, you need only write a program that will move forward one
10389 sentence and then repeat the process four times. Since a computer does
10390 not get bored or tired, such repetitive action does not have the
10391 deleterious effects that excessive or the wrong kinds of repetition can
10392 have on humans.
10393
10394 People mostly write Emacs Lisp functions using @code{while} loops and
10395 their kin; but you can use recursion, which provides a very powerful
10396 way to think about and then to solve problems@footnote{You can write
10397 recursive functions to be frugal or wasteful of mental or computer
10398 resources; as it happens, methods that people find easy---that are
10399 frugal of `mental resources'---sometimes use considerable computer
10400 resources. Emacs was designed to run on machines that we now consider
10401 limited and its default settings are conservative. You may want to
10402 increase the values of @code{max-specpdl-size} and
10403 @code{max-lisp-eval-depth}. In my @file{.emacs} file, I set them to
10404 15 and 30 times their default value.}.
10405
10406 @menu
10407 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
10408 * dolist dotimes::
10409 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
10410 * Looping exercise::
10411 @end menu
10412
10413 @node while, dolist dotimes, Loops & Recursion, Loops & Recursion
10414 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10415 @section @code{while}
10416 @cindex Loops
10417 @findex while
10418
10419 The @code{while} special form tests whether the value returned by
10420 evaluating its first argument is true or false. This is similar to what
10421 the Lisp interpreter does with an @code{if}; what the interpreter does
10422 next, however, is different.
10423
10424 In a @code{while} expression, if the value returned by evaluating the
10425 first argument is false, the Lisp interpreter skips the rest of the
10426 expression (the @dfn{body} of the expression) and does not evaluate it.
10427 However, if the value is true, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the body
10428 of the expression and then again tests whether the first argument to
10429 @code{while} is true or false. If the value returned by evaluating the
10430 first argument is again true, the Lisp interpreter again evaluates the
10431 body of the expression.
10432
10433 @need 1200
10434 The template for a @code{while} expression looks like this:
10435
10436 @smallexample
10437 @group
10438 (while @var{true-or-false-test}
10439 @var{body}@dots{})
10440 @end group
10441 @end smallexample
10442
10443 @menu
10444 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
10445 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
10446 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
10447 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
10448 * Incrementing Loop Details::
10449 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
10450 @end menu
10451
10452 @node Looping with while, Loop Example, while, while
10453 @ifnottex
10454 @unnumberedsubsec Looping with @code{while}
10455 @end ifnottex
10456
10457 So long as the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} expression
10458 returns a true value when it is evaluated, the body is repeatedly
10459 evaluated. This process is called a loop since the Lisp interpreter
10460 repeats the same thing again and again, like an airplane doing a loop.
10461 When the result of evaluating the true-or-false-test is false, the
10462 Lisp interpreter does not evaluate the rest of the @code{while}
10463 expression and `exits the loop'.
10464
10465 Clearly, if the value returned by evaluating the first argument to
10466 @code{while} is always true, the body following will be evaluated
10467 again and again @dots{} and again @dots{} forever. Conversely, if the
10468 value returned is never true, the expressions in the body will never
10469 be evaluated. The craft of writing a @code{while} loop consists of
10470 choosing a mechanism such that the true-or-false-test returns true
10471 just the number of times that you want the subsequent expressions to
10472 be evaluated, and then have the test return false.
10473
10474 The value returned by evaluating a @code{while} is the value of the
10475 true-or-false-test. An interesting consequence of this is that a
10476 @code{while} loop that evaluates without error will return @code{nil}
10477 or false regardless of whether it has looped 1 or 100 times or none at
10478 all. A @code{while} expression that evaluates successfully never
10479 returns a true value! What this means is that @code{while} is always
10480 evaluated for its side effects, which is to say, the consequences of
10481 evaluating the expressions within the body of the @code{while} loop.
10482 This makes sense. It is not the mere act of looping that is desired,
10483 but the consequences of what happens when the expressions in the loop
10484 are repeatedly evaluated.
10485
10486 @node Loop Example, print-elements-of-list, Looping with while, while
10487 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10488 @subsection A @code{while} Loop and a List
10489
10490 A common way to control a @code{while} loop is to test whether a list
10491 has any elements. If it does, the loop is repeated; but if it does not,
10492 the repetition is ended. Since this is an important technique, we will
10493 create a short example to illustrate it.
10494
10495 A simple way to test whether a list has elements is to evaluate the
10496 list: if it has no elements, it is an empty list and will return the
10497 empty list, @code{()}, which is a synonym for @code{nil} or false. On
10498 the other hand, a list with elements will return those elements when it
10499 is evaluated. Since Emacs Lisp considers as true any value that is not
10500 @code{nil}, a list that returns elements will test true in a
10501 @code{while} loop.
10502
10503 @need 1200
10504 For example, you can set the variable @code{empty-list} to @code{nil} by
10505 evaluating the following @code{setq} expression:
10506
10507 @smallexample
10508 (setq empty-list ())
10509 @end smallexample
10510
10511 @noindent
10512 After evaluating the @code{setq} expression, you can evaluate the
10513 variable @code{empty-list} in the usual way, by placing the cursor after
10514 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}; @code{nil} will appear in your
10515 echo area:
10516
10517 @smallexample
10518 empty-list
10519 @end smallexample
10520
10521 On the other hand, if you set a variable to be a list with elements, the
10522 list will appear when you evaluate the variable, as you can see by
10523 evaluating the following two expressions:
10524
10525 @smallexample
10526 @group
10527 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10528
10529 animals
10530 @end group
10531 @end smallexample
10532
10533 Thus, to create a @code{while} loop that tests whether there are any
10534 items in the list @code{animals}, the first part of the loop will be
10535 written like this:
10536
10537 @smallexample
10538 @group
10539 (while animals
10540 @dots{}
10541 @end group
10542 @end smallexample
10543
10544 @noindent
10545 When the @code{while} tests its first argument, the variable
10546 @code{animals} is evaluated. It returns a list. So long as the list
10547 has elements, the @code{while} considers the results of the test to be
10548 true; but when the list is empty, it considers the results of the test
10549 to be false.
10550
10551 To prevent the @code{while} loop from running forever, some mechanism
10552 needs to be provided to empty the list eventually. An oft-used
10553 technique is to have one of the subsequent forms in the @code{while}
10554 expression set the value of the list to be the @sc{cdr} of the list.
10555 Each time the @code{cdr} function is evaluated, the list will be made
10556 shorter, until eventually only the empty list will be left. At this
10557 point, the test of the @code{while} loop will return false, and the
10558 arguments to the @code{while} will no longer be evaluated.
10559
10560 For example, the list of animals bound to the variable @code{animals}
10561 can be set to be the @sc{cdr} of the original list with the
10562 following expression:
10563
10564 @smallexample
10565 (setq animals (cdr animals))
10566 @end smallexample
10567
10568 @noindent
10569 If you have evaluated the previous expressions and then evaluate this
10570 expression, you will see @code{(giraffe lion tiger)} appear in the echo
10571 area. If you evaluate the expression again, @code{(lion tiger)} will
10572 appear in the echo area. If you evaluate it again and yet again,
10573 @code{(tiger)} appears and then the empty list, shown by @code{nil}.
10574
10575 A template for a @code{while} loop that uses the @code{cdr} function
10576 repeatedly to cause the true-or-false-test eventually to test false
10577 looks like this:
10578
10579 @smallexample
10580 @group
10581 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
10582 @var{body}@dots{}
10583 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
10584 @end group
10585 @end smallexample
10586
10587 This test and use of @code{cdr} can be put together in a function that
10588 goes through a list and prints each element of the list on a line of its
10589 own.
10590
10591 @node print-elements-of-list, Incrementing Loop, Loop Example, while
10592 @subsection An Example: @code{print-elements-of-list}
10593 @findex print-elements-of-list
10594
10595 The @code{print-elements-of-list} function illustrates a @code{while}
10596 loop with a list.
10597
10598 @cindex @file{*scratch*} buffer
10599 The function requires several lines for its output. If you are
10600 reading this in a recent instance of GNU Emacs,
10601 @c GNU Emacs 21, GNU Emacs 22, or a later version,
10602 you can evaluate the following expression inside of Info, as usual.
10603
10604 If you are using an earlier version of Emacs, you need to copy the
10605 necessary expressions to your @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate
10606 them there. This is because the echo area had only one line in the
10607 earlier versions.
10608
10609 You can copy the expressions by marking the beginning of the region
10610 with @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}), moving the cursor to
10611 the end of the region and then copying the region using @kbd{M-w}
10612 (@code{kill-ring-save}, which calls @code{copy-region-as-kill} and
10613 then provides visual feedback). In the @file{*scratch*}
10614 buffer, you can yank the expressions back by typing @kbd{C-y}
10615 (@code{yank}).
10616
10617 After you have copied the expressions to the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
10618 evaluate each expression in turn. Be sure to evaluate the last
10619 expression, @code{(print-elements-of-list animals)}, by typing
10620 @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}, that is, by giving an argument to
10621 @code{eval-last-sexp}. This will cause the result of the evaluation
10622 to be printed in the @file{*scratch*} buffer instead of being printed
10623 in the echo area. (Otherwise you will see something like this in your
10624 echo area: @code{^Jgazelle^J^Jgiraffe^J^Jlion^J^Jtiger^Jnil}, in which
10625 each @samp{^J} stands for a `newline'.)
10626
10627 @need 1500
10628 In a recent instance of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate these expressions
10629 directly in the Info buffer, and the echo area will grow to show the
10630 results.
10631
10632 @smallexample
10633 @group
10634 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10635
10636 (defun print-elements-of-list (list)
10637 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own."
10638 (while list
10639 (print (car list))
10640 (setq list (cdr list))))
10641
10642 (print-elements-of-list animals)
10643 @end group
10644 @end smallexample
10645
10646 @need 1200
10647 @noindent
10648 When you evaluate the three expressions in sequence, you will see
10649 this:
10650
10651 @smallexample
10652 @group
10653 gazelle
10654
10655 giraffe
10656
10657 lion
10658
10659 tiger
10660 nil
10661 @end group
10662 @end smallexample
10663
10664 Each element of the list is printed on a line of its own (that is what
10665 the function @code{print} does) and then the value returned by the
10666 function is printed. Since the last expression in the function is the
10667 @code{while} loop, and since @code{while} loops always return
10668 @code{nil}, a @code{nil} is printed after the last element of the list.
10669
10670 @node Incrementing Loop, Incrementing Loop Details, print-elements-of-list, while
10671 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10672 @subsection A Loop with an Incrementing Counter
10673
10674 A loop is not useful unless it stops when it ought. Besides
10675 controlling a loop with a list, a common way of stopping a loop is to
10676 write the first argument as a test that returns false when the correct
10677 number of repetitions are complete. This means that the loop must
10678 have a counter---an expression that counts how many times the loop
10679 repeats itself.
10680
10681 @node Incrementing Loop Details, Decrementing Loop, Incrementing Loop, while
10682 @ifnottex
10683 @unnumberedsubsec Details of an Incrementing Loop
10684 @end ifnottex
10685
10686 The test for a loop with an incrementing counter can be an expression
10687 such as @code{(< count desired-number)} which returns @code{t} for
10688 true if the value of @code{count} is less than the
10689 @code{desired-number} of repetitions and @code{nil} for false if the
10690 value of @code{count} is equal to or is greater than the
10691 @code{desired-number}. The expression that increments the count can
10692 be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq count (1+ count))}, where
10693 @code{1+} is a built-in function in Emacs Lisp that adds 1 to its
10694 argument. (The expression @w{@code{(1+ count)}} has the same result
10695 as @w{@code{(+ count 1)}}, but is easier for a human to read.)
10696
10697 @need 1250
10698 The template for a @code{while} loop controlled by an incrementing
10699 counter looks like this:
10700
10701 @smallexample
10702 @group
10703 @var{set-count-to-initial-value}
10704 (while (< count desired-number) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10705 @var{body}@dots{}
10706 (setq count (1+ count))) ; @r{incrementer}
10707 @end group
10708 @end smallexample
10709
10710 @noindent
10711 Note that you need to set the initial value of @code{count}; usually it
10712 is set to 1.
10713
10714 @menu
10715 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
10716 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10717 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10718 @end menu
10719
10720 @node Incrementing Example, Inc Example parts, Incrementing Loop Details, Incrementing Loop Details
10721 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with incrementing counter
10722
10723 Suppose you are playing on the beach and decide to make a triangle of
10724 pebbles, putting one pebble in the first row, two in the second row,
10725 three in the third row and so on, like this:
10726
10727 @sp 1
10728 @c pebble diagram
10729 @ifnottex
10730 @smallexample
10731 @group
10732 *
10733 * *
10734 * * *
10735 * * * *
10736 @end group
10737 @end smallexample
10738 @end ifnottex
10739 @iftex
10740 @smallexample
10741 @group
10742 @bullet{}
10743 @bullet{} @bullet{}
10744 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10745 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10746 @end group
10747 @end smallexample
10748 @end iftex
10749 @sp 1
10750
10751 @noindent
10752 (About 2500 years ago, Pythagoras and others developed the beginnings of
10753 number theory by considering questions such as this.)
10754
10755 Suppose you want to know how many pebbles you will need to make a
10756 triangle with 7 rows?
10757
10758 Clearly, what you need to do is add up the numbers from 1 to 7. There
10759 are two ways to do this; start with the smallest number, one, and add up
10760 the list in sequence, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so on; or start with the largest
10761 number and add the list going down: 7, 6, 5, 4 and so on. Because both
10762 mechanisms illustrate common ways of writing @code{while} loops, we will
10763 create two examples, one counting up and the other counting down. In
10764 this first example, we will start with 1 and add 2, 3, 4 and so on.
10765
10766 If you are just adding up a short list of numbers, the easiest way to do
10767 it is to add up all the numbers at once. However, if you do not know
10768 ahead of time how many numbers your list will have, or if you want to be
10769 prepared for a very long list, then you need to design your addition so
10770 that what you do is repeat a simple process many times instead of doing
10771 a more complex process once.
10772
10773 For example, instead of adding up all the pebbles all at once, what you
10774 can do is add the number of pebbles in the first row, 1, to the number
10775 in the second row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to the
10776 third row, 3. Then you can add the number in the fourth row, 4, to the
10777 total of the first three rows; and so on.
10778
10779 The critical characteristic of the process is that each repetitive
10780 action is simple. In this case, at each step we add only two numbers,
10781 the number of pebbles in the row and the total already found. This
10782 process of adding two numbers is repeated again and again until the last
10783 row has been added to the total of all the preceding rows. In a more
10784 complex loop the repetitive action might not be so simple, but it will
10785 be simpler than doing everything all at once.
10786
10787 @node Inc Example parts, Inc Example altogether, Incrementing Example, Incrementing Loop Details
10788 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10789
10790 The preceding analysis gives us the bones of our function definition:
10791 first, we will need a variable that we can call @code{total} that will
10792 be the total number of pebbles. This will be the value returned by
10793 the function.
10794
10795 Second, we know that the function will require an argument: this
10796 argument will be the total number of rows in the triangle. It can be
10797 called @code{number-of-rows}.
10798
10799 Finally, we need a variable to use as a counter. We could call this
10800 variable @code{counter}, but a better name is @code{row-number}. That
10801 is because what the counter does in this function is count rows, and a
10802 program should be written to be as understandable as possible.
10803
10804 When the Lisp interpreter first starts evaluating the expressions in the
10805 function, the value of @code{total} should be set to zero, since we have
10806 not added anything to it. Then the function should add the number of
10807 pebbles in the first row to the total, and then add the number of
10808 pebbles in the second to the total, and then add the number of
10809 pebbles in the third row to the total, and so on, until there are no
10810 more rows left to add.
10811
10812 Both @code{total} and @code{row-number} are used only inside the
10813 function, so they can be declared as local variables with @code{let}
10814 and given initial values. Clearly, the initial value for @code{total}
10815 should be 0. The initial value of @code{row-number} should be 1,
10816 since we start with the first row. This means that the @code{let}
10817 statement will look like this:
10818
10819 @smallexample
10820 @group
10821 (let ((total 0)
10822 (row-number 1))
10823 @var{body}@dots{})
10824 @end group
10825 @end smallexample
10826
10827 After the internal variables are declared and bound to their initial
10828 values, we can begin the @code{while} loop. The expression that serves
10829 as the test should return a value of @code{t} for true so long as the
10830 @code{row-number} is less than or equal to the @code{number-of-rows}.
10831 (If the expression tests true only so long as the row number is less
10832 than the number of rows in the triangle, the last row will never be
10833 added to the total; hence the row number has to be either less than or
10834 equal to the number of rows.)
10835
10836 @need 1500
10837 @findex <= @r{(less than or equal)}
10838 Lisp provides the @code{<=} function that returns true if the value of
10839 its first argument is less than or equal to the value of its second
10840 argument and false otherwise. So the expression that the @code{while}
10841 will evaluate as its test should look like this:
10842
10843 @smallexample
10844 (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10845 @end smallexample
10846
10847 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10848 of pebbles in a row to the total already found. Since the number of
10849 pebbles in the row is equal to the row number, the total can be found by
10850 adding the row number to the total. (Clearly, in a more complex
10851 situation, the number of pebbles in the row might be related to the row
10852 number in a more complicated way; if this were the case, the row number
10853 would be replaced by the appropriate expression.)
10854
10855 @smallexample
10856 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10857 @end smallexample
10858
10859 @noindent
10860 What this does is set the new value of @code{total} to be equal to the
10861 sum of adding the number of pebbles in the row to the previous total.
10862
10863 After setting the value of @code{total}, the conditions need to be
10864 established for the next repetition of the loop, if there is one. This
10865 is done by incrementing the value of the @code{row-number} variable,
10866 which serves as a counter. After the @code{row-number} variable has
10867 been incremented, the true-or-false-test at the beginning of the
10868 @code{while} loop tests whether its value is still less than or equal to
10869 the value of the @code{number-of-rows} and if it is, adds the new value
10870 of the @code{row-number} variable to the @code{total} of the previous
10871 repetition of the loop.
10872
10873 @need 1200
10874 The built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1+} adds 1 to a number, so the
10875 @code{row-number} variable can be incremented with this expression:
10876
10877 @smallexample
10878 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))
10879 @end smallexample
10880
10881 @node Inc Example altogether, , Inc Example parts, Incrementing Loop Details
10882 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10883
10884 We have created the parts for the function definition; now we need to
10885 put them together.
10886
10887 @need 800
10888 First, the contents of the @code{while} expression:
10889
10890 @smallexample
10891 @group
10892 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10893 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10894 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))) ; @r{incrementer}
10895 @end group
10896 @end smallexample
10897
10898 Along with the @code{let} expression varlist, this very nearly
10899 completes the body of the function definition. However, it requires
10900 one final element, the need for which is somewhat subtle.
10901
10902 The final touch is to place the variable @code{total} on a line by
10903 itself after the @code{while} expression. Otherwise, the value returned
10904 by the whole function is the value of the last expression that is
10905 evaluated in the body of the @code{let}, and this is the value
10906 returned by the @code{while}, which is always @code{nil}.
10907
10908 This may not be evident at first sight. It almost looks as if the
10909 incrementing expression is the last expression of the whole function.
10910 But that expression is part of the body of the @code{while}; it is the
10911 last element of the list that starts with the symbol @code{while}.
10912 Moreover, the whole of the @code{while} loop is a list within the body
10913 of the @code{let}.
10914
10915 @need 1250
10916 In outline, the function will look like this:
10917
10918 @smallexample
10919 @group
10920 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
10921 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
10922 (let (@var{varlist})
10923 (while (@var{true-or-false-test})
10924 @var{body-of-while}@dots{} )
10925 @dots{} )) ; @r{Need final expression here.}
10926 @end group
10927 @end smallexample
10928
10929 The result of evaluating the @code{let} is what is going to be returned
10930 by the @code{defun} since the @code{let} is not embedded within any
10931 containing list, except for the @code{defun} as a whole. However, if
10932 the @code{while} is the last element of the @code{let} expression, the
10933 function will always return @code{nil}. This is not what we want!
10934 Instead, what we want is the value of the variable @code{total}. This
10935 is returned by simply placing the symbol as the last element of the list
10936 starting with @code{let}. It gets evaluated after the preceding
10937 elements of the list are evaluated, which means it gets evaluated after
10938 it has been assigned the correct value for the total.
10939
10940 It may be easier to see this by printing the list starting with
10941 @code{let} all on one line. This format makes it evident that the
10942 @var{varlist} and @code{while} expressions are the second and third
10943 elements of the list starting with @code{let}, and the @code{total} is
10944 the last element:
10945
10946 @smallexample
10947 @group
10948 (let (@var{varlist}) (while (@var{true-or-false-test}) @var{body-of-while}@dots{} ) total)
10949 @end group
10950 @end smallexample
10951
10952 @need 1200
10953 Putting everything together, the @code{triangle} function definition
10954 looks like this:
10955
10956 @smallexample
10957 @group
10958 (defun triangle (number-of-rows) ; @r{Version with}
10959 ; @r{ incrementing counter.}
10960 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
10961 The first row has one pebble, the second row two pebbles,
10962 the third row three pebbles, and so on.
10963 The argument is NUMBER-OF-ROWS."
10964 @end group
10965 @group
10966 (let ((total 0)
10967 (row-number 1))
10968 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10969 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10970 (setq row-number (1+ row-number)))
10971 total))
10972 @end group
10973 @end smallexample
10974
10975 @need 1200
10976 After you have installed @code{triangle} by evaluating the function, you
10977 can try it out. Here are two examples:
10978
10979 @smallexample
10980 @group
10981 (triangle 4)
10982
10983 (triangle 7)
10984 @end group
10985 @end smallexample
10986
10987 @noindent
10988 The sum of the first four numbers is 10 and the sum of the first seven
10989 numbers is 28.
10990
10991 @node Decrementing Loop, , Incrementing Loop Details, while
10992 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10993 @subsection Loop with a Decrementing Counter
10994
10995 Another common way to write a @code{while} loop is to write the test
10996 so that it determines whether a counter is greater than zero. So long
10997 as the counter is greater than zero, the loop is repeated. But when
10998 the counter is equal to or less than zero, the loop is stopped. For
10999 this to work, the counter has to start out greater than zero and then
11000 be made smaller and smaller by a form that is evaluated
11001 repeatedly.
11002
11003 The test will be an expression such as @code{(> counter 0)} which
11004 returns @code{t} for true if the value of @code{counter} is greater
11005 than zero, and @code{nil} for false if the value of @code{counter} is
11006 equal to or less than zero. The expression that makes the number
11007 smaller and smaller can be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq
11008 counter (1- counter))}, where @code{1-} is a built-in function in
11009 Emacs Lisp that subtracts 1 from its argument.
11010
11011 @need 1250
11012 The template for a decrementing @code{while} loop looks like this:
11013
11014 @smallexample
11015 @group
11016 (while (> counter 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
11017 @var{body}@dots{}
11018 (setq counter (1- counter))) ; @r{decrementer}
11019 @end group
11020 @end smallexample
11021
11022 @menu
11023 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
11024 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
11025 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
11026 @end menu
11027
11028 @node Decrementing Example, Dec Example parts, Decrementing Loop, Decrementing Loop
11029 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with decrementing counter
11030
11031 To illustrate a loop with a decrementing counter, we will rewrite the
11032 @code{triangle} function so the counter decreases to zero.
11033
11034 This is the reverse of the earlier version of the function. In this
11035 case, to find out how many pebbles are needed to make a triangle with
11036 3 rows, add the number of pebbles in the third row, 3, to the number
11037 in the preceding row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to
11038 the row that precedes them, which is 1.
11039
11040 Likewise, to find the number of pebbles in a triangle with 7 rows, add
11041 the number of pebbles in the seventh row, 7, to the number in the
11042 preceding row, which is 6, and then add the total of those two rows to
11043 the row that precedes them, which is 5, and so on. As in the previous
11044 example, each addition only involves adding two numbers, the total of
11045 the rows already added up and the number of pebbles in the row that is
11046 being added to the total. This process of adding two numbers is
11047 repeated again and again until there are no more pebbles to add.
11048
11049 We know how many pebbles to start with: the number of pebbles in the
11050 last row is equal to the number of rows. If the triangle has seven
11051 rows, the number of pebbles in the last row is 7. Likewise, we know how
11052 many pebbles are in the preceding row: it is one less than the number in
11053 the row.
11054
11055 @node Dec Example parts, Dec Example altogether, Decrementing Example, Decrementing Loop
11056 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
11057
11058 We start with three variables: the total number of rows in the
11059 triangle; the number of pebbles in a row; and the total number of
11060 pebbles, which is what we want to calculate. These variables can be
11061 named @code{number-of-rows}, @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}, and
11062 @code{total}, respectively.
11063
11064 Both @code{total} and @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} are used only
11065 inside the function and are declared with @code{let}. The initial
11066 value of @code{total} should, of course, be zero. However, the
11067 initial value of @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be equal to
11068 the number of rows in the triangle, since the addition will start with
11069 the longest row.
11070
11071 @need 1250
11072 This means that the beginning of the @code{let} expression will look
11073 like this:
11074
11075 @smallexample
11076 @group
11077 (let ((total 0)
11078 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
11079 @var{body}@dots{})
11080 @end group
11081 @end smallexample
11082
11083 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
11084 of pebbles in a row to the total already found, that is, by repeatedly
11085 evaluating the following expression:
11086
11087 @smallexample
11088 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11089 @end smallexample
11090
11091 @noindent
11092 After the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is added to the @code{total},
11093 the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be decremented by one, since
11094 the next time the loop repeats, the preceding row will be
11095 added to the total.
11096
11097 The number of pebbles in a preceding row is one less than the number of
11098 pebbles in a row, so the built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1-} can be
11099 used to compute the number of pebbles in the preceding row. This can be
11100 done with the following expression:
11101
11102 @smallexample
11103 @group
11104 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
11105 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11106 @end group
11107 @end smallexample
11108
11109 Finally, we know that the @code{while} loop should stop making repeated
11110 additions when there are no pebbles in a row. So the test for
11111 the @code{while} loop is simply:
11112
11113 @smallexample
11114 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
11115 @end smallexample
11116
11117 @node Dec Example altogether, , Dec Example parts, Decrementing Loop
11118 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
11119
11120 We can put these expressions together to create a function definition
11121 that works. However, on examination, we find that one of the local
11122 variables is unneeded!
11123
11124 @need 1250
11125 The function definition looks like this:
11126
11127 @smallexample
11128 @group
11129 ;;; @r{First subtractive version.}
11130 (defun triangle (number-of-rows)
11131 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11132 (let ((total 0)
11133 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
11134 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
11135 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11136 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
11137 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row)))
11138 total))
11139 @end group
11140 @end smallexample
11141
11142 As written, this function works.
11143
11144 However, we do not need @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}.
11145
11146 @cindex Argument as local variable
11147 When the @code{triangle} function is evaluated, the symbol
11148 @code{number-of-rows} will be bound to a number, giving it an initial
11149 value. That number can be changed in the body of the function as if
11150 it were a local variable, without any fear that such a change will
11151 effect the value of the variable outside of the function. This is a
11152 very useful characteristic of Lisp; it means that the variable
11153 @code{number-of-rows} can be used anywhere in the function where
11154 @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is used.
11155
11156 @need 800
11157 Here is a second version of the function written a bit more cleanly:
11158
11159 @smallexample
11160 @group
11161 (defun triangle (number) ; @r{Second version.}
11162 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
11163 (let ((total 0))
11164 (while (> number 0)
11165 (setq total (+ total number))
11166 (setq number (1- number)))
11167 total))
11168 @end group
11169 @end smallexample
11170
11171 In brief, a properly written @code{while} loop will consist of three parts:
11172
11173 @enumerate
11174 @item
11175 A test that will return false after the loop has repeated itself the
11176 correct number of times.
11177
11178 @item
11179 An expression the evaluation of which will return the value desired
11180 after being repeatedly evaluated.
11181
11182 @item
11183 An expression to change the value passed to the true-or-false-test so
11184 that the test returns false after the loop has repeated itself the right
11185 number of times.
11186 @end enumerate
11187
11188 @node dolist dotimes, Recursion, while, Loops & Recursion
11189 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11190 @section Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
11191
11192 In addition to @code{while}, both @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
11193 provide for looping. Sometimes these are quicker to write than the
11194 equivalent @code{while} loop. Both are Lisp macros. (@xref{Macros, ,
11195 Macros, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. )
11196
11197 @code{dolist} works like a @code{while} loop that `@sc{cdr}s down a
11198 list': @code{dolist} automatically shortens the list each time it
11199 loops---takes the @sc{cdr} of the list---and binds the @sc{car} of
11200 each shorter version of the list to the first of its arguments.
11201
11202 @code{dotimes} loops a specific number of times: you specify the number.
11203
11204 @menu
11205 * dolist::
11206 * dotimes::
11207 @end menu
11208
11209 @node dolist, dotimes, dolist dotimes, dolist dotimes
11210 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{dolist} Macro
11211 @findex dolist
11212
11213 Suppose, for example, you want to reverse a list, so that
11214 ``first'' ``second'' ``third'' becomes ``third'' ``second'' ``first''.
11215
11216 @need 1250
11217 In practice, you would use the @code{reverse} function, like this:
11218
11219 @smallexample
11220 @group
11221 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11222
11223 (reverse animals)
11224 @end group
11225 @end smallexample
11226
11227 @need 800
11228 @noindent
11229 Here is how you could reverse the list using a @code{while} loop:
11230
11231 @smallexample
11232 @group
11233 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11234
11235 (defun reverse-list-with-while (list)
11236 "Using while, reverse the order of LIST."
11237 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11238 (while list
11239 (setq value (cons (car list) value))
11240 (setq list (cdr list)))
11241 value))
11242
11243 (reverse-list-with-while animals)
11244 @end group
11245 @end smallexample
11246
11247 @need 800
11248 @noindent
11249 And here is how you could use the @code{dolist} macro:
11250
11251 @smallexample
11252 @group
11253 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11254
11255 (defun reverse-list-with-dolist (list)
11256 "Using dolist, reverse the order of LIST."
11257 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11258 (dolist (element list value)
11259 (setq value (cons element value)))))
11260
11261 (reverse-list-with-dolist animals)
11262 @end group
11263 @end smallexample
11264
11265 @need 1250
11266 @noindent
11267 In Info, you can place your cursor after the closing parenthesis of
11268 each expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}; in each case, you should see
11269
11270 @smallexample
11271 (tiger lion giraffe gazelle)
11272 @end smallexample
11273
11274 @noindent
11275 in the echo area.
11276
11277 For this example, the existing @code{reverse} function is obviously best.
11278 The @code{while} loop is just like our first example (@pxref{Loop
11279 Example, , A @code{while} Loop and a List}). The @code{while} first
11280 checks whether the list has elements; if so, it constructs a new list
11281 by adding the first element of the list to the existing list (which in
11282 the first iteration of the loop is @code{nil}). Since the second
11283 element is prepended in front of the first element, and the third
11284 element is prepended in front of the second element, the list is reversed.
11285
11286 In the expression using a @code{while} loop,
11287 the @w{@code{(setq list (cdr list))}}
11288 expression shortens the list, so the @code{while} loop eventually
11289 stops. In addition, it provides the @code{cons} expression with a new
11290 first element by creating a new and shorter list at each repetition of
11291 the loop.
11292
11293 The @code{dolist} expression does very much the same as the
11294 @code{while} expression, except that the @code{dolist} macro does some
11295 of the work you have to do when writing a @code{while} expression.
11296
11297 Like a @code{while} loop, a @code{dolist} loops. What is different is
11298 that it automatically shortens the list each time it loops --- it
11299 `@sc{cdr}s down the list' on its own --- and it automatically binds
11300 the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list to the first of its
11301 arguments.
11302
11303 In the example, the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list is
11304 referred to using the symbol @samp{element}, the list itself is called
11305 @samp{list}, and the value returned is called @samp{value}. The
11306 remainder of the @code{dolist} expression is the body.
11307
11308 The @code{dolist} expression binds the @sc{car} of each shorter
11309 version of the list to @code{element} and then evaluates the body of
11310 the expression; and repeats the loop. The result is returned in
11311 @code{value}.
11312
11313 @node dotimes, , dolist, dolist dotimes
11314 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{dotimes} Macro
11315 @findex dotimes
11316
11317 The @code{dotimes} macro is similar to @code{dolist}, except that it
11318 loops a specific number of times.
11319
11320 The first argument to @code{dotimes} is assigned the numbers 0, 1, 2
11321 and so forth each time around the loop, and the value of the third
11322 argument is returned. You need to provide the value of the second
11323 argument, which is how many times the macro loops.
11324
11325 @need 1250
11326 For example, the following binds the numbers from 0 up to, but not
11327 including, the number 3 to the first argument, @var{number}, and then
11328 constructs a list of the three numbers. (The first number is 0, the
11329 second number is 1, and the third number is 2; this makes a total of
11330 three numbers in all, starting with zero as the first number.)
11331
11332 @smallexample
11333 @group
11334 (let (value) ; otherwise a value is a void variable
11335 (dotimes (number 3 value)
11336 (setq value (cons number value))))
11337
11338 @result{} (2 1 0)
11339 @end group
11340 @end smallexample
11341
11342 @noindent
11343 @code{dotimes} returns @code{value}, so the way to use
11344 @code{dotimes} is to operate on some expression @var{number} number of
11345 times and then return the result, either as a list or an atom.
11346
11347 @need 1250
11348 Here is an example of a @code{defun} that uses @code{dotimes} to add
11349 up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
11350
11351 @smallexample
11352 @group
11353 (defun triangle-using-dotimes (number-of-rows)
11354 "Using dotimes, add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11355 (let ((total 0)) ; otherwise a total is a void variable
11356 (dotimes (number number-of-rows total)
11357 (setq total (+ total (1+ number))))))
11358
11359 (triangle-using-dotimes 4)
11360 @end group
11361 @end smallexample
11362
11363 @node Recursion, Looping exercise, dolist dotimes, Loops & Recursion
11364 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11365 @section Recursion
11366 @cindex Recursion
11367
11368 A recursive function contains code that tells the Lisp interpreter to
11369 call a program that runs exactly like itself, but with slightly
11370 different arguments. The code runs exactly the same because it has
11371 the same name. However, even though the program has the same name, it
11372 is not the same entity. It is different. In the jargon, it is a
11373 different `instance'.
11374
11375 Eventually, if the program is written correctly, the `slightly
11376 different arguments' will become sufficiently different from the first
11377 arguments that the final instance will stop.
11378
11379 @menu
11380 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
11381 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
11382 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
11383 * Recursive triangle function::
11384 * Recursion with cond::
11385 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
11386 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
11387 * No deferment solution::
11388 @end menu
11389
11390 @node Building Robots, Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion, Recursion
11391 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11392 @subsection Building Robots: Extending the Metaphor
11393 @cindex Building robots
11394 @cindex Robots, building
11395
11396 It is sometimes helpful to think of a running program as a robot that
11397 does a job. In doing its job, a recursive function calls on a second
11398 robot to help it. The second robot is identical to the first in every
11399 way, except that the second robot helps the first and has been
11400 passed different arguments than the first.
11401
11402 In a recursive function, the second robot may call a third; and the
11403 third may call a fourth, and so on. Each of these is a different
11404 entity; but all are clones.
11405
11406 Since each robot has slightly different instructions---the arguments
11407 will differ from one robot to the next---the last robot should know
11408 when to stop.
11409
11410 Let's expand on the metaphor in which a computer program is a robot.
11411
11412 A function definition provides the blueprints for a robot. When you
11413 install a function definition, that is, when you evaluate a
11414 @code{defun} special form, you install the necessary equipment to
11415 build robots. It is as if you were in a factory, setting up an
11416 assembly line. Robots with the same name are built according to the
11417 same blueprints. So they have, as it were, the same `model number',
11418 but a different `serial number'.
11419
11420 We often say that a recursive function `calls itself'. What we mean
11421 is that the instructions in a recursive function cause the Lisp
11422 interpreter to run a different function that has the same name and
11423 does the same job as the first, but with different arguments.
11424
11425 It is important that the arguments differ from one instance to the
11426 next; otherwise, the process will never stop.
11427
11428 @node Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion with list, Building Robots, Recursion
11429 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11430 @subsection The Parts of a Recursive Definition
11431 @cindex Parts of a Recursive Definition
11432 @cindex Recursive Definition Parts
11433
11434 A recursive function typically contains a conditional expression which
11435 has three parts:
11436
11437 @enumerate
11438 @item
11439 A true-or-false-test that determines whether the function is called
11440 again, here called the @dfn{do-again-test}.
11441
11442 @item
11443 The name of the function. When this name is called, a new instance of
11444 the function---a new robot, as it were---is created and told what to do.
11445
11446 @item
11447 An expression that returns a different value each time the function is
11448 called, here called the @dfn{next-step-expression}. Consequently, the
11449 argument (or arguments) passed to the new instance of the function
11450 will be different from that passed to the previous instance. This
11451 causes the conditional expression, the @dfn{do-again-test}, to test
11452 false after the correct number of repetitions.
11453 @end enumerate
11454
11455 Recursive functions can be much simpler than any other kind of
11456 function. Indeed, when people first start to use them, they often look
11457 so mysteriously simple as to be incomprehensible. Like riding a
11458 bicycle, reading a recursive function definition takes a certain knack
11459 which is hard at first but then seems simple.
11460
11461 @need 1200
11462 There are several different common recursive patterns. A very simple
11463 pattern looks like this:
11464
11465 @smallexample
11466 @group
11467 (defun @var{name-of-recursive-function} (@var{argument-list})
11468 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
11469 (if @var{do-again-test}
11470 @var{body}@dots{}
11471 (@var{name-of-recursive-function}
11472 @var{next-step-expression})))
11473 @end group
11474 @end smallexample
11475
11476 Each time a recursive function is evaluated, a new instance of it is
11477 created and told what to do. The arguments tell the instance what to do.
11478
11479 An argument is bound to the value of the next-step-expression. Each
11480 instance runs with a different value of the next-step-expression.
11481
11482 The value in the next-step-expression is used in the do-again-test.
11483
11484 The value returned by the next-step-expression is passed to the new
11485 instance of the function, which evaluates it (or some
11486 transmogrification of it) to determine whether to continue or stop.
11487 The next-step-expression is designed so that the do-again-test returns
11488 false when the function should no longer be repeated.
11489
11490 The do-again-test is sometimes called the @dfn{stop condition},
11491 since it stops the repetitions when it tests false.
11492
11493 @node Recursion with list, Recursive triangle function, Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion
11494 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11495 @subsection Recursion with a List
11496
11497 The example of a @code{while} loop that printed the elements of a list
11498 of numbers can be written recursively. Here is the code, including
11499 an expression to set the value of the variable @code{animals} to a list.
11500
11501 If you are using GNU Emacs 20 or before, this example must be copied
11502 to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and each expression must be evaluated
11503 there. Use @kbd{C-u C-x C-e} to evaluate the
11504 @code{(print-elements-recursively animals)} expression so that the
11505 results are printed in the buffer; otherwise the Lisp interpreter will
11506 try to squeeze the results into the one line of the echo area.
11507
11508 Also, place your cursor immediately after the last closing parenthesis
11509 of the @code{print-elements-recursively} function, before the comment.
11510 Otherwise, the Lisp interpreter will try to evaluate the comment.
11511
11512 If you are using a more recent version of Emacs, you can evaluate this
11513 expression directly in Info.
11514
11515 @findex print-elements-recursively
11516 @smallexample
11517 @group
11518 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11519
11520 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11521 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11522 Uses recursion."
11523 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11524 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11525 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11526 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11527
11528 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11529 @end group
11530 @end smallexample
11531
11532 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function first tests whether
11533 there is any content in the list; if there is, the function prints the
11534 first element of the list, the @sc{car} of the list. Then the
11535 function `invokes itself', but gives itself as its argument, not the
11536 whole list, but the second and subsequent elements of the list, the
11537 @sc{cdr} of the list.
11538
11539 Put another way, if the list is not empty, the function invokes
11540 another instance of code that is similar to the initial code, but is a
11541 different thread of execution, with different arguments than the first
11542 instance.
11543
11544 Put in yet another way, if the list is not empty, the first robot
11545 assembles a second robot and tells it what to do; the second robot is
11546 a different individual from the first, but is the same model.
11547
11548 When the second evaluation occurs, the @code{when} expression is
11549 evaluated and if true, prints the first element of the list it
11550 receives as its argument (which is the second element of the original
11551 list). Then the function `calls itself' with the @sc{cdr} of the list
11552 it is invoked with, which (the second time around) is the @sc{cdr} of
11553 the @sc{cdr} of the original list.
11554
11555 Note that although we say that the function `calls itself', what we
11556 mean is that the Lisp interpreter assembles and instructs a new
11557 instance of the program. The new instance is a clone of the first,
11558 but is a separate individual.
11559
11560 Each time the function `invokes itself', it invokes itself on a
11561 shorter version of the original list. It creates a new instance that
11562 works on a shorter list.
11563
11564 Eventually, the function invokes itself on an empty list. It creates
11565 a new instance whose argument is @code{nil}. The conditional expression
11566 tests the value of @code{list}. Since the value of @code{list} is
11567 @code{nil}, the @code{when} expression tests false so the then-part is
11568 not evaluated. The function as a whole then returns @code{nil}.
11569
11570 @need 1200
11571 When you evaluate the expression @code{(print-elements-recursively
11572 animals)} in the @file{*scratch*} buffer, you see this result:
11573
11574 @smallexample
11575 @group
11576 gazelle
11577
11578 giraffe
11579
11580 lion
11581
11582 tiger
11583 nil
11584 @end group
11585 @end smallexample
11586
11587 @need 2000
11588 @node Recursive triangle function, Recursion with cond, Recursion with list, Recursion
11589 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11590 @subsection Recursion in Place of a Counter
11591 @findex triangle-recursively
11592
11593 @need 1200
11594 The @code{triangle} function described in a previous section can also
11595 be written recursively. It looks like this:
11596
11597 @smallexample
11598 @group
11599 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11600 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11601 Uses recursion."
11602 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11603 1 ; @r{then-part}
11604 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11605 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11606 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11607
11608 (triangle-recursively 7)
11609 @end group
11610 @end smallexample
11611
11612 @noindent
11613 You can install this function by evaluating it and then try it by
11614 evaluating @code{(triangle-recursively 7)}. (Remember to put your
11615 cursor immediately after the last parenthesis of the function
11616 definition, before the comment.) The function evaluates to 28.
11617
11618 To understand how this function works, let's consider what happens in the
11619 various cases when the function is passed 1, 2, 3, or 4 as the value of
11620 its argument.
11621
11622 @menu
11623 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
11624 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
11625 @end menu
11626
11627 @node Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2, Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4, Recursive triangle function, Recursive triangle function
11628 @ifnottex
11629 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 1 or 2
11630 @end ifnottex
11631
11632 First, what happens if the value of the argument is 1?
11633
11634 The function has an @code{if} expression after the documentation
11635 string. It tests whether the value of @code{number} is equal to 1; if
11636 so, Emacs evaluates the then-part of the @code{if} expression, which
11637 returns the number 1 as the value of the function. (A triangle with
11638 one row has one pebble in it.)
11639
11640 Suppose, however, that the value of the argument is 2. In this case,
11641 Emacs evaluates the else-part of the @code{if} expression.
11642
11643 @need 1200
11644 The else-part consists of an addition, the recursive call to
11645 @code{triangle-recursively} and a decrementing action; and it looks like
11646 this:
11647
11648 @smallexample
11649 (+ number (triangle-recursively (1- number)))
11650 @end smallexample
11651
11652 When Emacs evaluates this expression, the innermost expression is
11653 evaluated first; then the other parts in sequence. Here are the steps
11654 in detail:
11655
11656 @table @i
11657 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression.
11658
11659 The innermost expression is @code{(1- number)} so Emacs decrements the
11660 value of @code{number} from 2 to 1.
11661
11662 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11663
11664 The Lisp interpreter creates an individual instance of
11665 @code{triangle-recursively}. It does not matter that this function is
11666 contained within itself. Emacs passes the result Step 1 as the
11667 argument used by this instance of the @code{triangle-recursively}
11668 function
11669
11670 In this case, Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with an
11671 argument of 1. This means that this evaluation of
11672 @code{triangle-recursively} returns 1.
11673
11674 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the value of @code{number}.
11675
11676 The variable @code{number} is the second element of the list that
11677 starts with @code{+}; its value is 2.
11678
11679 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{+} expression.
11680
11681 The @code{+} expression receives two arguments, the first
11682 from the evaluation of @code{number} (Step 3) and the second from the
11683 evaluation of @code{triangle-recursively} (Step 2).
11684
11685 The result of the addition is the sum of 2 plus 1, and the number 3 is
11686 returned, which is correct. A triangle with two rows has three
11687 pebbles in it.
11688 @end table
11689
11690 @node Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4, , Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2, Recursive triangle function
11691 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 3 or 4
11692
11693 Suppose that @code{triangle-recursively} is called with an argument of
11694 3.
11695
11696 @table @i
11697 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the do-again-test.
11698
11699 The @code{if} expression is evaluated first. This is the do-again
11700 test and returns false, so the else-part of the @code{if} expression
11701 is evaluated. (Note that in this example, the do-again-test causes
11702 the function to call itself when it tests false, not when it tests
11703 true.)
11704
11705 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression of the else-part.
11706
11707 The innermost expression of the else-part is evaluated, which decrements
11708 3 to 2. This is the next-step-expression.
11709
11710 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11711
11712 The number 2 is passed to the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11713
11714 We already know what happens when Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with
11715 an argument of 2. After going through the sequence of actions described
11716 earlier, it returns a value of 3. So that is what will happen here.
11717
11718 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the addition.
11719
11720 3 will be passed as an argument to the addition and will be added to the
11721 number with which the function was called, which is 3.
11722 @end table
11723
11724 @noindent
11725 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 6.
11726
11727 Now that we know what will happen when @code{triangle-recursively} is
11728 called with an argument of 3, it is evident what will happen if it is
11729 called with an argument of 4:
11730
11731 @quotation
11732 @need 800
11733 In the recursive call, the evaluation of
11734
11735 @smallexample
11736 (triangle-recursively (1- 4))
11737 @end smallexample
11738
11739 @need 800
11740 @noindent
11741 will return the value of evaluating
11742
11743 @smallexample
11744 (triangle-recursively 3)
11745 @end smallexample
11746
11747 @noindent
11748 which is 6 and this value will be added to 4 by the addition in the
11749 third line.
11750 @end quotation
11751
11752 @noindent
11753 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 10.
11754
11755 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is evaluated, it evaluates a
11756 version of itself---a different instance of itself---with a smaller
11757 argument, until the argument is small enough so that it does not
11758 evaluate itself.
11759
11760 Note that this particular design for a recursive function
11761 requires that operations be deferred.
11762
11763 Before @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} can calculate its answer, it
11764 must call @code{(triangle-recursively 6)}; and before
11765 @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} can calculate its answer, it must call
11766 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)}; and so on. That is to say, the
11767 calculation that @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} makes must be
11768 deferred until @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} makes its calculation;
11769 and @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} must defer until
11770 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)} completes; and so on.
11771
11772 If each of these instances of @code{triangle-recursively} are thought
11773 of as different robots, the first robot must wait for the second to
11774 complete its job, which must wait until the third completes, and so
11775 on.
11776
11777 There is a way around this kind of waiting, which we will discuss in
11778 @ref{No Deferment, , Recursion without Deferments}.
11779
11780 @node Recursion with cond, Recursive Patterns, Recursive triangle function, Recursion
11781 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11782 @subsection Recursion Example Using @code{cond}
11783 @findex cond
11784
11785 The version of @code{triangle-recursively} described earlier is written
11786 with the @code{if} special form. It can also be written using another
11787 special form called @code{cond}. The name of the special form
11788 @code{cond} is an abbreviation of the word @samp{conditional}.
11789
11790 Although the @code{cond} special form is not used as often in the
11791 Emacs Lisp sources as @code{if}, it is used often enough to justify
11792 explaining it.
11793
11794 @need 800
11795 The template for a @code{cond} expression looks like this:
11796
11797 @smallexample
11798 @group
11799 (cond
11800 @var{body}@dots{})
11801 @end group
11802 @end smallexample
11803
11804 @noindent
11805 where the @var{body} is a series of lists.
11806
11807 @need 800
11808 Written out more fully, the template looks like this:
11809
11810 @smallexample
11811 @group
11812 (cond
11813 (@var{first-true-or-false-test} @var{first-consequent})
11814 (@var{second-true-or-false-test} @var{second-consequent})
11815 (@var{third-true-or-false-test} @var{third-consequent})
11816 @dots{})
11817 @end group
11818 @end smallexample
11819
11820 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates the @code{cond} expression, it
11821 evaluates the first element (the @sc{car} or true-or-false-test) of
11822 the first expression in a series of expressions within the body of the
11823 @code{cond}.
11824
11825 If the true-or-false-test returns @code{nil} the rest of that
11826 expression, the consequent, is skipped and the true-or-false-test of the
11827 next expression is evaluated. When an expression is found whose
11828 true-or-false-test returns a value that is not @code{nil}, the
11829 consequent of that expression is evaluated. The consequent can be one
11830 or more expressions. If the consequent consists of more than one
11831 expression, the expressions are evaluated in sequence and the value of
11832 the last one is returned. If the expression does not have a consequent,
11833 the value of the true-or-false-test is returned.
11834
11835 If none of the true-or-false-tests test true, the @code{cond} expression
11836 returns @code{nil}.
11837
11838 @need 1250
11839 Written using @code{cond}, the @code{triangle} function looks like this:
11840
11841 @smallexample
11842 @group
11843 (defun triangle-using-cond (number)
11844 (cond ((<= number 0) 0)
11845 ((= number 1) 1)
11846 ((> number 1)
11847 (+ number (triangle-using-cond (1- number))))))
11848 @end group
11849 @end smallexample
11850
11851 @noindent
11852 In this example, the @code{cond} returns 0 if the number is less than or
11853 equal to 0, it returns 1 if the number is 1 and it evaluates @code{(+
11854 number (triangle-using-cond (1- number)))} if the number is greater than
11855 1.
11856
11857 @node Recursive Patterns, No Deferment, Recursion with cond, Recursion
11858 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11859 @subsection Recursive Patterns
11860 @cindex Recursive Patterns
11861
11862 Here are three common recursive patterns. Each involves a list.
11863 Recursion does not need to involve lists, but Lisp is designed for lists
11864 and this provides a sense of its primal capabilities.
11865
11866 @menu
11867 * Every::
11868 * Accumulate::
11869 * Keep::
11870 @end menu
11871
11872 @node Every, Accumulate, Recursive Patterns, Recursive Patterns
11873 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11874 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{every}
11875 @cindex Every, type of recursive pattern
11876 @cindex Recursive pattern: every
11877
11878 In the @code{every} recursive pattern, an action is performed on every
11879 element of a list.
11880
11881 @need 1500
11882 The basic pattern is:
11883
11884 @itemize @bullet
11885 @item
11886 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11887 @item
11888 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list)
11889 @itemize @minus
11890 @item
11891 through a recursive call by the function on the rest (the
11892 @sc{cdr}) of the list,
11893 @item
11894 and, optionally, combine the acted-on element, using @code{cons},
11895 with the results of acting on the rest.
11896 @end itemize
11897 @end itemize
11898
11899 @need 1500
11900 Here is example:
11901
11902 @smallexample
11903 @group
11904 (defun square-each (numbers-list)
11905 "Square each of a NUMBERS LIST, recursively."
11906 (if (not numbers-list) ; do-again-test
11907 nil
11908 (cons
11909 (* (car numbers-list) (car numbers-list))
11910 (square-each (cdr numbers-list))))) ; next-step-expression
11911 @end group
11912
11913 @group
11914 (square-each '(1 2 3))
11915 @result{} (1 4 9)
11916 @end group
11917 @end smallexample
11918
11919 @need 1200
11920 @noindent
11921 If @code{numbers-list} is empty, do nothing. But if it has content,
11922 construct a list combining the square of the first number in the list
11923 with the result of the recursive call.
11924
11925 (The example follows the pattern exactly: @code{nil} is returned if
11926 the numbers' list is empty. In practice, you would write the
11927 conditional so it carries out the action when the numbers' list is not
11928 empty.)
11929
11930 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function (@pxref{Recursion with
11931 list, , Recursion with a List}) is another example of an @code{every}
11932 pattern, except in this case, rather than bring the results together
11933 using @code{cons}, we print each element of output.
11934
11935 @need 1250
11936 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function looks like this:
11937
11938 @smallexample
11939 @group
11940 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11941 @end group
11942
11943 @group
11944 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11945 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11946 Uses recursion."
11947 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11948 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11949 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11950 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11951
11952 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11953 @end group
11954 @end smallexample
11955
11956 @need 1500
11957 The pattern for @code{print-elements-recursively} is:
11958
11959 @itemize @bullet
11960 @item
11961 When the list is empty, do nothing.
11962 @item
11963 But when the list has at least one element,
11964 @itemize @minus
11965 @item
11966 act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11967 @item
11968 and make a recursive call on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11969 @end itemize
11970 @end itemize
11971
11972 @node Accumulate, Keep, Every, Recursive Patterns
11973 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11974 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}
11975 @cindex Accumulate, type of recursive pattern
11976 @cindex Recursive pattern: accumulate
11977
11978 Another recursive pattern is called the @code{accumulate} pattern. In
11979 the @code{accumulate} recursive pattern, an action is performed on
11980 every element of a list and the result of that action is accumulated
11981 with the results of performing the action on the other elements.
11982
11983 This is very like the `every' pattern using @code{cons}, except that
11984 @code{cons} is not used, but some other combiner.
11985
11986 @need 1500
11987 The pattern is:
11988
11989 @itemize @bullet
11990 @item
11991 If a list be empty, return zero or some other constant.
11992 @item
11993 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11994 @itemize @minus
11995 @item
11996 and combine that acted-on element, using @code{+} or
11997 some other combining function, with
11998 @item
11999 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12000 @end itemize
12001 @end itemize
12002
12003 @need 1500
12004 Here is an example:
12005
12006 @smallexample
12007 @group
12008 (defun add-elements (numbers-list)
12009 "Add the elements of NUMBERS-LIST together."
12010 (if (not numbers-list)
12011 0
12012 (+ (car numbers-list) (add-elements (cdr numbers-list)))))
12013 @end group
12014
12015 @group
12016 (add-elements '(1 2 3 4))
12017 @result{} 10
12018 @end group
12019 @end smallexample
12020
12021 @xref{Files List, , Making a List of Files}, for an example of the
12022 accumulate pattern.
12023
12024 @node Keep, , Accumulate, Recursive Patterns
12025 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12026 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{keep}
12027 @cindex Keep, type of recursive pattern
12028 @cindex Recursive pattern: keep
12029
12030 A third recursive pattern is called the @code{keep} pattern.
12031 In the @code{keep} recursive pattern, each element of a list is tested;
12032 the element is acted on and the results are kept only if the element
12033 meets a criterion.
12034
12035 Again, this is very like the `every' pattern, except the element is
12036 skipped unless it meets a criterion.
12037
12038 @need 1500
12039 The pattern has three parts:
12040
12041 @itemize @bullet
12042 @item
12043 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
12044 @item
12045 Else, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) passes
12046 a test
12047 @itemize @minus
12048 @item
12049 act on that element and combine it, using @code{cons} with
12050 @item
12051 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12052 @end itemize
12053 @item
12054 Otherwise, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) fails
12055 the test
12056 @itemize @minus
12057 @item
12058 skip on that element,
12059 @item
12060 and, recursively call the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12061 @end itemize
12062 @end itemize
12063
12064 @need 1500
12065 Here is an example that uses @code{cond}:
12066
12067 @smallexample
12068 @group
12069 (defun keep-three-letter-words (word-list)
12070 "Keep three letter words in WORD-LIST."
12071 (cond
12072 ;; First do-again-test: stop-condition
12073 ((not word-list) nil)
12074
12075 ;; Second do-again-test: when to act
12076 ((eq 3 (length (symbol-name (car word-list))))
12077 ;; combine acted-on element with recursive call on shorter list
12078 (cons (car word-list) (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list))))
12079
12080 ;; Third do-again-test: when to skip element;
12081 ;; recursively call shorter list with next-step expression
12082 (t (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list)))))
12083 @end group
12084
12085 @group
12086 (keep-three-letter-words '(one two three four five six))
12087 @result{} (one two six)
12088 @end group
12089 @end smallexample
12090
12091 It goes without saying that you need not use @code{nil} as the test for
12092 when to stop; and you can, of course, combine these patterns.
12093
12094 @node No Deferment, No deferment solution, Recursive Patterns, Recursion
12095 @subsection Recursion without Deferments
12096 @cindex Deferment in recursion
12097 @cindex Recursion without Deferments
12098
12099 Let's consider again what happens with the @code{triangle-recursively}
12100 function. We will find that the intermediate calculations are
12101 deferred until all can be done.
12102
12103 @need 800
12104 Here is the function definition:
12105
12106 @smallexample
12107 @group
12108 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
12109 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
12110 Uses recursion."
12111 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
12112 1 ; @r{then-part}
12113 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
12114 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
12115 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
12116 @end group
12117 @end smallexample
12118
12119 What happens when we call this function with a argument of 7?
12120
12121 The first instance of the @code{triangle-recursively} function adds
12122 the number 7 to the value returned by a second instance of
12123 @code{triangle-recursively}, an instance that has been passed an
12124 argument of 6. That is to say, the first calculation is:
12125
12126 @smallexample
12127 (+ 7 (triangle-recursively 6))
12128 @end smallexample
12129
12130 @noindent
12131 The first instance of @code{triangle-recursively}---you may want to
12132 think of it as a little robot---cannot complete its job. It must hand
12133 off the calculation for @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} to a second
12134 instance of the program, to a second robot. This second individual is
12135 completely different from the first one; it is, in the jargon, a
12136 `different instantiation'. Or, put another way, it is a different
12137 robot. It is the same model as the first; it calculates triangle
12138 numbers recursively; but it has a different serial number.
12139
12140 And what does @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} return? It returns the
12141 number 6 added to the value returned by evaluating
12142 @code{triangle-recursively} with an argument of 5. Using the robot
12143 metaphor, it asks yet another robot to help it.
12144
12145 @need 800
12146 Now the total is:
12147
12148 @smallexample
12149 (+ 7 6 (triangle-recursively 5))
12150 @end smallexample
12151
12152 @need 800
12153 And what happens next?
12154
12155 @smallexample
12156 (+ 7 6 5 (triangle-recursively 4))
12157 @end smallexample
12158
12159 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is called, except for the last
12160 time, it creates another instance of the program---another robot---and
12161 asks it to make a calculation.
12162
12163 @need 800
12164 Eventually, the full addition is set up and performed:
12165
12166 @smallexample
12167 (+ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
12168 @end smallexample
12169
12170 This design for the function defers the calculation of the first step
12171 until the second can be done, and defers that until the third can be
12172 done, and so on. Each deferment means the computer must remember what
12173 is being waited on. This is not a problem when there are only a few
12174 steps, as in this example. But it can be a problem when there are
12175 more steps.
12176
12177 @node No deferment solution, , No Deferment, Recursion
12178 @subsection No Deferment Solution
12179 @cindex No deferment solution
12180 @cindex Defermentless solution
12181 @cindex Solution without deferment
12182
12183 The solution to the problem of deferred operations is to write in a
12184 manner that does not defer operations@footnote{The phrase @dfn{tail
12185 recursive} is used to describe such a process, one that uses
12186 `constant space'.}. This requires
12187 writing to a different pattern, often one that involves writing two
12188 function definitions, an `initialization' function and a `helper'
12189 function.
12190
12191 The `initialization' function sets up the job; the `helper' function
12192 does the work.
12193
12194 @need 1200
12195 Here are the two function definitions for adding up numbers. They are
12196 so simple, I find them hard to understand.
12197
12198 @smallexample
12199 @group
12200 (defun triangle-initialization (number)
12201 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
12202 This is the `initialization' component of a two function
12203 duo that uses recursion."
12204 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 number))
12205 @end group
12206 @end smallexample
12207
12208 @smallexample
12209 @group
12210 (defun triangle-recursive-helper (sum counter number)
12211 "Return SUM, using COUNTER, through NUMBER inclusive.
12212 This is the `helper' component of a two function duo
12213 that uses recursion."
12214 (if (> counter number)
12215 sum
12216 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum}
12217 (1+ counter) ; @r{counter}
12218 number))) ; @r{number}
12219 @end group
12220 @end smallexample
12221
12222 @need 1250
12223 Install both function definitions by evaluating them, then call
12224 @code{triangle-initialization} with 2 rows:
12225
12226 @smallexample
12227 @group
12228 (triangle-initialization 2)
12229 @result{} 3
12230 @end group
12231 @end smallexample
12232
12233 The `initialization' function calls the first instance of the `helper'
12234 function with three arguments: zero, zero, and a number which is the
12235 number of rows in the triangle.
12236
12237 The first two arguments passed to the `helper' function are
12238 initialization values. These values are changed when
12239 @code{triangle-recursive-helper} invokes new instances.@footnote{The
12240 jargon is mildly confusing: @code{triangle-recursive-helper} uses a
12241 process that is iterative in a procedure that is recursive. The
12242 process is called iterative because the computer need only record the
12243 three values, @code{sum}, @code{counter}, and @code{number}; the
12244 procedure is recursive because the function `calls itself'. On the
12245 other hand, both the process and the procedure used by
12246 @code{triangle-recursively} are called recursive. The word
12247 `recursive' has different meanings in the two contexts.}
12248
12249 Let's see what happens when we have a triangle that has one row. (This
12250 triangle will have one pebble in it!)
12251
12252 @need 1200
12253 @code{triangle-initialization} will call its helper with
12254 the arguments @w{@code{0 0 1}}. That function will run the conditional
12255 test whether @code{(> counter number)}:
12256
12257 @smallexample
12258 (> 0 1)
12259 @end smallexample
12260
12261 @need 1200
12262 @noindent
12263 and find that the result is false, so it will invoke
12264 the else-part of the @code{if} clause:
12265
12266 @smallexample
12267 @group
12268 (triangle-recursive-helper
12269 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12270 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12271 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12272 @end group
12273 @end smallexample
12274
12275 @need 800
12276 @noindent
12277 which will first compute:
12278
12279 @smallexample
12280 @group
12281 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ 0 0) ; @r{sum}
12282 (1+ 0) ; @r{counter}
12283 1) ; @r{number}
12284 @exdent which is:
12285
12286 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 1)
12287 @end group
12288 @end smallexample
12289
12290 Again, @code{(> counter number)} will be false, so again, the Lisp
12291 interpreter will evaluate @code{triangle-recursive-helper}, creating a
12292 new instance with new arguments.
12293
12294 @need 800
12295 This new instance will be;
12296
12297 @smallexample
12298 @group
12299 (triangle-recursive-helper
12300 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12301 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12302 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12303
12304 @exdent which is:
12305
12306 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 1)
12307 @end group
12308 @end smallexample
12309
12310 In this case, the @code{(> counter number)} test will be true! So the
12311 instance will return the value of the sum, which will be 1, as
12312 expected.
12313
12314 Now, let's pass @code{triangle-initialization} an argument
12315 of 2, to find out how many pebbles there are in a triangle with two rows.
12316
12317 That function calls @code{(triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 2)}.
12318
12319 @need 800
12320 In stages, the instances called will be:
12321
12322 @smallexample
12323 @group
12324 @r{sum counter number}
12325 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 2)
12326
12327 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 2)
12328
12329 (triangle-recursive-helper 3 3 2)
12330 @end group
12331 @end smallexample
12332
12333 When the last instance is called, the @code{(> counter number)} test
12334 will be true, so the instance will return the value of @code{sum},
12335 which will be 3.
12336
12337 This kind of pattern helps when you are writing functions that can use
12338 many resources in a computer.
12339
12340 @need 1500
12341 @node Looping exercise, , Recursion, Loops & Recursion
12342 @section Looping Exercise
12343
12344 @itemize @bullet
12345 @item
12346 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} in which each row has a
12347 value which is the square of the row number. Use a @code{while} loop.
12348
12349 @item
12350 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} that multiplies instead of
12351 adds the values.
12352
12353 @item
12354 Rewrite these two functions recursively. Rewrite these functions
12355 using @code{cond}.
12356
12357 @c comma in printed title causes problem in Info cross reference
12358 @item
12359 Write a function for Texinfo mode that creates an index entry at the
12360 beginning of a paragraph for every @samp{@@dfn} within the paragraph.
12361 (In a Texinfo file, @samp{@@dfn} marks a definition. This book is
12362 written in Texinfo.)
12363
12364 Many of the functions you will need are described in two of the
12365 previous chapters, @ref{Cutting & Storing Text, , Cutting and Storing
12366 Text}, and @ref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}. If you use
12367 @code{forward-paragraph} to put the index entry at the beginning of
12368 the paragraph, you will have to use @w{@kbd{C-h f}}
12369 (@code{describe-function}) to find out how to make the command go
12370 backwards.
12371
12372 For more information, see
12373 @ifinfo
12374 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating Definitions, texinfo}.
12375 @end ifinfo
12376 @ifhtml
12377 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating, texinfo, Texinfo Manual}, which goes to
12378 a Texinfo manual in the current directory. Or, if you are on the
12379 Internet, see
12380 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/manual/texinfo/}
12381 @end ifhtml
12382 @iftex
12383 ``Indicating Definitions, Commands, etc.'' in @cite{Texinfo, The GNU
12384 Documentation Format}.
12385 @end iftex
12386 @end itemize
12387
12388 @node Regexp Search, Counting Words, Loops & Recursion, Top
12389 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12390 @chapter Regular Expression Searches
12391 @cindex Searches, illustrating
12392 @cindex Regular expression searches
12393 @cindex Patterns, searching for
12394 @cindex Motion by sentence and paragraph
12395 @cindex Sentences, movement by
12396 @cindex Paragraphs, movement by
12397
12398 Regular expression searches are used extensively in GNU Emacs. The
12399 two functions, @code{forward-sentence} and @code{forward-paragraph},
12400 illustrate these searches well. They use regular expressions to find
12401 where to move point. The phrase `regular expression' is often written
12402 as `regexp'.
12403
12404 Regular expression searches are described in @ref{Regexp Search, ,
12405 Regular Expression Search, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, as well as in
12406 @ref{Regular Expressions, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
12407 Manual}. In writing this chapter, I am presuming that you have at
12408 least a mild acquaintance with them. The major point to remember is
12409 that regular expressions permit you to search for patterns as well as
12410 for literal strings of characters. For example, the code in
12411 @code{forward-sentence} searches for the pattern of possible
12412 characters that could mark the end of a sentence, and moves point to
12413 that spot.
12414
12415 Before looking at the code for the @code{forward-sentence} function, it
12416 is worth considering what the pattern that marks the end of a sentence
12417 must be. The pattern is discussed in the next section; following that
12418 is a description of the regular expression search function,
12419 @code{re-search-forward}. The @code{forward-sentence} function
12420 is described in the section following. Finally, the
12421 @code{forward-paragraph} function is described in the last section of
12422 this chapter. @code{forward-paragraph} is a complex function that
12423 introduces several new features.
12424
12425 @menu
12426 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
12427 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
12428 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
12429 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
12430 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
12431 * Regexp Review::
12432 * re-search Exercises::
12433 @end menu
12434
12435 @node sentence-end, re-search-forward, Regexp Search, Regexp Search
12436 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12437 @section The Regular Expression for @code{sentence-end}
12438 @findex sentence-end
12439
12440 The symbol @code{sentence-end} is bound to the pattern that marks the
12441 end of a sentence. What should this regular expression be?
12442
12443 Clearly, a sentence may be ended by a period, a question mark, or an
12444 exclamation mark. Indeed, in English, only clauses that end with one
12445 of those three characters should be considered the end of a sentence.
12446 This means that the pattern should include the character set:
12447
12448 @smallexample
12449 [.?!]
12450 @end smallexample
12451
12452 However, we do not want @code{forward-sentence} merely to jump to a
12453 period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark, because such a character
12454 might be used in the middle of a sentence. A period, for example, is
12455 used after abbreviations. So other information is needed.
12456
12457 According to convention, you type two spaces after every sentence, but
12458 only one space after a period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark in
12459 the body of a sentence. So a period, a question mark, or an exclamation
12460 mark followed by two spaces is a good indicator of an end of sentence.
12461 However, in a file, the two spaces may instead be a tab or the end of a
12462 line. This means that the regular expression should include these three
12463 items as alternatives.
12464
12465 @need 800
12466 This group of alternatives will look like this:
12467
12468 @smallexample
12469 @group
12470 \\($\\| \\| \\)
12471 ^ ^^
12472 TAB SPC
12473 @end group
12474 @end smallexample
12475
12476 @noindent
12477 Here, @samp{$} indicates the end of the line, and I have pointed out
12478 where the tab and two spaces are inserted in the expression. Both are
12479 inserted by putting the actual characters into the expression.
12480
12481 Two backslashes, @samp{\\}, are required before the parentheses and
12482 vertical bars: the first backslash quotes the following backslash in
12483 Emacs; and the second indicates that the following character, the
12484 parenthesis or the vertical bar, is special.
12485
12486 @need 1000
12487 Also, a sentence may be followed by one or more carriage returns, like
12488 this:
12489
12490 @smallexample
12491 @group
12492 [
12493 ]*
12494 @end group
12495 @end smallexample
12496
12497 @noindent
12498 Like tabs and spaces, a carriage return is inserted into a regular
12499 expression by inserting it literally. The asterisk indicates that the
12500 @key{RET} is repeated zero or more times.
12501
12502 But a sentence end does not consist only of a period, a question mark or
12503 an exclamation mark followed by appropriate space: a closing quotation
12504 mark or a closing brace of some kind may precede the space. Indeed more
12505 than one such mark or brace may precede the space. These require a
12506 expression that looks like this:
12507
12508 @smallexample
12509 []\"')@}]*
12510 @end smallexample
12511
12512 In this expression, the first @samp{]} is the first character in the
12513 expression; the second character is @samp{"}, which is preceded by a
12514 @samp{\} to tell Emacs the @samp{"} is @emph{not} special. The last
12515 three characters are @samp{'}, @samp{)}, and @samp{@}}.
12516
12517 All this suggests what the regular expression pattern for matching the
12518 end of a sentence should be; and, indeed, if we evaluate
12519 @code{sentence-end} we find that it returns the following value:
12520
12521 @smallexample
12522 @group
12523 sentence-end
12524 @result{} "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12525 ]*"
12526 @end group
12527 @end smallexample
12528
12529 @noindent
12530 (Well, not in GNU Emacs 22; that is because of an effort to make the
12531 process simpler and to handle more glyphs and languages. When the
12532 value of @code{sentence-end} is @code{nil}, then use the value defined
12533 by the function @code{sentence-end}. (Here is a use of the difference
12534 between a value and a function in Emacs Lisp.) The function returns a
12535 value constructed from the variables @code{sentence-end-base},
12536 @code{sentence-end-double-space}, @code{sentence-end-without-period},
12537 and @code{sentence-end-without-space}. The critical variable is
12538 @code{sentence-end-base}; its global value is similar to the one
12539 described above but it also contains two additional quotation marks.
12540 These have differing degrees of curliness. The
12541 @code{sentence-end-without-period} variable, when true, tells Emacs
12542 that a sentence may end without a period, such as text in Thai.)
12543
12544 @ignore
12545 @noindent
12546 (Note that here the @key{TAB}, two spaces, and @key{RET} are shown
12547 literally in the pattern.)
12548
12549 This regular expression can be deciphered as follows:
12550
12551 @table @code
12552 @item [.?!]
12553 The first part of the pattern is the three characters, a period, a question
12554 mark and an exclamation mark, within square brackets. The pattern must
12555 begin with one or other of these characters.
12556
12557 @item []\"')@}]*
12558 The second part of the pattern is the group of closing braces and
12559 quotation marks, which can appear zero or more times. These may follow
12560 the period, question mark or exclamation mark. In a regular expression,
12561 the backslash, @samp{\}, followed by the double quotation mark,
12562 @samp{"}, indicates the class of string-quote characters. Usually, the
12563 double quotation mark is the only character in this class. The
12564 asterisk, @samp{*}, indicates that the items in the previous group (the
12565 group surrounded by square brackets, @samp{[]}) may be repeated zero or
12566 more times.
12567
12568 @item \\($\\| \\| \\)
12569 The third part of the pattern is one or other of: either the end of a
12570 line, or two blank spaces, or a tab. The double back-slashes are used
12571 to prevent Emacs from reading the parentheses and vertical bars as part
12572 of the search pattern; the parentheses are used to mark the group and
12573 the vertical bars are used to indicated that the patterns to either side
12574 of them are alternatives. The dollar sign is used to indicate the end
12575 of a line and both the two spaces and the tab are each inserted as is to
12576 indicate what they are.
12577
12578 @item [@key{RET}]*
12579 Finally, the last part of the pattern indicates that the end of the line
12580 or the whitespace following the period, question mark or exclamation
12581 mark may, but need not, be followed by one or more carriage returns. In
12582 the pattern, the carriage return is inserted as an actual carriage
12583 return between square brackets but here it is shown as @key{RET}.
12584 @end table
12585 @end ignore
12586
12587 @node re-search-forward, forward-sentence, sentence-end, Regexp Search
12588 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12589 @section The @code{re-search-forward} Function
12590 @findex re-search-forward
12591
12592 The @code{re-search-forward} function is very like the
12593 @code{search-forward} function. (@xref{search-forward, , The
12594 @code{search-forward} Function}.)
12595
12596 @code{re-search-forward} searches for a regular expression. If the
12597 search is successful, it leaves point immediately after the last
12598 character in the target. If the search is backwards, it leaves point
12599 just before the first character in the target. You may tell
12600 @code{re-search-forward} to return @code{t} for true. (Moving point
12601 is therefore a `side effect'.)
12602
12603 Like @code{search-forward}, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes
12604 four arguments:
12605
12606 @enumerate
12607 @item
12608 The first argument is the regular expression that the function searches
12609 for. The regular expression will be a string between quotations marks.
12610
12611 @item
12612 The optional second argument limits how far the function will search; it is a
12613 bound, which is specified as a position in the buffer.
12614
12615 @item
12616 The optional third argument specifies how the function responds to
12617 failure: @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
12618 signal an error (and print a message) when the search fails; any other
12619 value causes it to return @code{nil} if the search fails and @code{t}
12620 if the search succeeds.
12621
12622 @item
12623 The optional fourth argument is the repeat count. A negative repeat
12624 count causes @code{re-search-forward} to search backwards.
12625 @end enumerate
12626
12627 @need 800
12628 The template for @code{re-search-forward} looks like this:
12629
12630 @smallexample
12631 @group
12632 (re-search-forward "@var{regular-expression}"
12633 @var{limit-of-search}
12634 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
12635 @var{repeat-count})
12636 @end group
12637 @end smallexample
12638
12639 The second, third, and fourth arguments are optional. However, if you
12640 want to pass a value to either or both of the last two arguments, you
12641 must also pass a value to all the preceding arguments. Otherwise, the
12642 Lisp interpreter will mistake which argument you are passing the value
12643 to.
12644
12645 @need 1200
12646 In the @code{forward-sentence} function, the regular expression will be
12647 the value of the variable @code{sentence-end}. In simple form, that is:
12648
12649 @smallexample
12650 @group
12651 "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12652 ]*"
12653 @end group
12654 @end smallexample
12655
12656 @noindent
12657 The limit of the search will be the end of the paragraph (since a
12658 sentence cannot go beyond a paragraph). If the search fails, the
12659 function will return @code{nil}; and the repeat count will be provided
12660 by the argument to the @code{forward-sentence} function.
12661
12662 @node forward-sentence, forward-paragraph, re-search-forward, Regexp Search
12663 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12664 @section @code{forward-sentence}
12665 @findex forward-sentence
12666
12667 The command to move the cursor forward a sentence is a straightforward
12668 illustration of how to use regular expression searches in Emacs Lisp.
12669 Indeed, the function looks longer and more complicated than it is; this
12670 is because the function is designed to go backwards as well as forwards;
12671 and, optionally, over more than one sentence. The function is usually
12672 bound to the key command @kbd{M-e}.
12673
12674 @menu
12675 * Complete forward-sentence::
12676 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
12677 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
12678 @end menu
12679
12680 @node Complete forward-sentence, fwd-sentence while loops, forward-sentence, forward-sentence
12681 @ifnottex
12682 @unnumberedsubsec Complete @code{forward-sentence} function definition
12683 @end ifnottex
12684
12685 @need 1250
12686 Here is the code for @code{forward-sentence}:
12687
12688 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12689 @smallexample
12690 @group
12691 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12692 "Move forward to next `sentence-end'. With argument, repeat.
12693 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to `sentence-beginning'.
12694
12695 The variable `sentence-end' is a regular expression that matches ends of
12696 sentences. Also, every paragraph boundary terminates sentences as well."
12697 @end group
12698 @group
12699 (interactive "p")
12700 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12701 (let ((opoint (point))
12702 (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12703 (while (< arg 0)
12704 (let ((pos (point))
12705 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12706 (if (and (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)
12707 (or (< (match-end 0) pos)
12708 (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)))
12709 (goto-char (match-end 0))
12710 (goto-char par-beg)))
12711 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12712 @end group
12713 @group
12714 (while (> arg 0)
12715 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12716 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12717 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12718 (goto-char par-end)))
12719 (setq arg (1- arg)))
12720 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)))
12721 @end group
12722 @end smallexample
12723
12724 @ignore
12725 GNU Emacs 21
12726 @smallexample
12727 @group
12728 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12729 "Move forward to next sentence-end. With argument, repeat.
12730 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to sentence-beginning.
12731 Sentence ends are identified by the value of sentence-end
12732 treated as a regular expression. Also, every paragraph boundary
12733 terminates sentences as well."
12734 @end group
12735 @group
12736 (interactive "p")
12737 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12738 (while (< arg 0)
12739 (let ((par-beg
12740 (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12741 (if (re-search-backward
12742 (concat sentence-end "[^ \t\n]") par-beg t)
12743 (goto-char (1- (match-end 0)))
12744 (goto-char par-beg)))
12745 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12746 (while (> arg 0)
12747 (let ((par-end
12748 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12749 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12750 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12751 (goto-char par-end)))
12752 (setq arg (1- arg))))
12753 @end group
12754 @end smallexample
12755 @end ignore
12756
12757 The function looks long at first sight and it is best to look at its
12758 skeleton first, and then its muscle. The way to see the skeleton is to
12759 look at the expressions that start in the left-most columns:
12760
12761 @smallexample
12762 @group
12763 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12764 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12765 (interactive "p")
12766 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12767 (let ((opoint (point)) (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12768 (while (< arg 0)
12769 (let ((pos (point))
12770 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12771 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-backwards}
12772 (while (> arg 0)
12773 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12774 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-forwards}
12775 @var{handle-forms-and-equivalent}
12776 @end group
12777 @end smallexample
12778
12779 This looks much simpler! The function definition consists of
12780 documentation, an @code{interactive} expression, an @code{or}
12781 expression, a @code{let} expression, and @code{while} loops.
12782
12783 Let's look at each of these parts in turn.
12784
12785 We note that the documentation is thorough and understandable.
12786
12787 The function has an @code{interactive "p"} declaration. This means
12788 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the
12789 function as its argument. (This will be a number.) If the function
12790 is not passed an argument (it is optional) then the argument
12791 @code{arg} will be bound to 1.
12792
12793 When @code{forward-sentence} is called non-interactively without an
12794 argument, @code{arg} is bound to @code{nil}. The @code{or} expression
12795 handles this. What it does is either leave the value of @code{arg} as
12796 it is, but only if @code{arg} is bound to a value; or it sets the
12797 value of @code{arg} to 1, in the case when @code{arg} is bound to
12798 @code{nil}.
12799
12800 Next is a @code{let}. That specifies the values of two local
12801 variables, @code{point} and @code{sentence-end}. The local value of
12802 point, from before the search, is used in the
12803 @code{constrain-to-field} function which handles forms and
12804 equivalents. The @code{sentence-end} variable is set by the
12805 @code{sentence-end} function.
12806
12807 @node fwd-sentence while loops, fwd-sentence re-search, Complete forward-sentence, forward-sentence
12808 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{while} loops
12809
12810 Two @code{while} loops follow. The first @code{while} has a
12811 true-or-false-test that tests true if the prefix argument for
12812 @code{forward-sentence} is a negative number. This is for going
12813 backwards. The body of this loop is similar to the body of the second
12814 @code{while} clause, but it is not exactly the same. We will skip
12815 this @code{while} loop and concentrate on the second @code{while}
12816 loop.
12817
12818 @need 1500
12819 The second @code{while} loop is for moving point forward. Its skeleton
12820 looks like this:
12821
12822 @smallexample
12823 @group
12824 (while (> arg 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
12825 (let @var{varlist}
12826 (if (@var{true-or-false-test})
12827 @var{then-part}
12828 @var{else-part}
12829 (setq arg (1- arg)))) ; @code{while} @r{loop decrementer}
12830 @end group
12831 @end smallexample
12832
12833 The @code{while} loop is of the decrementing kind.
12834 (@xref{Decrementing Loop, , A Loop with a Decrementing Counter}.) It
12835 has a true-or-false-test that tests true so long as the counter (in
12836 this case, the variable @code{arg}) is greater than zero; and it has a
12837 decrementer that subtracts 1 from the value of the counter every time
12838 the loop repeats.
12839
12840 If no prefix argument is given to @code{forward-sentence}, which is
12841 the most common way the command is used, this @code{while} loop will
12842 run once, since the value of @code{arg} will be 1.
12843
12844 The body of the @code{while} loop consists of a @code{let} expression,
12845 which creates and binds a local variable, and has, as its body, an
12846 @code{if} expression.
12847
12848 @need 1250
12849 The body of the @code{while} loop looks like this:
12850
12851 @smallexample
12852 @group
12853 (let ((par-end
12854 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12855 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12856 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12857 (goto-char par-end)))
12858 @end group
12859 @end smallexample
12860
12861 The @code{let} expression creates and binds the local variable
12862 @code{par-end}. As we shall see, this local variable is designed to
12863 provide a bound or limit to the regular expression search. If the
12864 search fails to find a proper sentence ending in the paragraph, it will
12865 stop on reaching the end of the paragraph.
12866
12867 But first, let us examine how @code{par-end} is bound to the value of
12868 the end of the paragraph. What happens is that the @code{let} sets the
12869 value of @code{par-end} to the value returned when the Lisp interpreter
12870 evaluates the expression
12871
12872 @smallexample
12873 @group
12874 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))
12875 @end group
12876 @end smallexample
12877
12878 @noindent
12879 In this expression, @code{(end-of-paragraph-text)} moves point to the
12880 end of the paragraph, @code{(point)} returns the value of point, and then
12881 @code{save-excursion} restores point to its original position. Thus,
12882 the @code{let} binds @code{par-end} to the value returned by the
12883 @code{save-excursion} expression, which is the position of the end of
12884 the paragraph. (The @code{end-of-paragraph-text} function uses
12885 @code{forward-paragraph}, which we will discuss shortly.)
12886
12887 @need 1200
12888 Emacs next evaluates the body of the @code{let}, which is an @code{if}
12889 expression that looks like this:
12890
12891 @smallexample
12892 @group
12893 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t) ; @r{if-part}
12894 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n") ; @r{then-part}
12895 (goto-char par-end))) ; @r{else-part}
12896 @end group
12897 @end smallexample
12898
12899 The @code{if} tests whether its first argument is true and if so,
12900 evaluates its then-part; otherwise, the Emacs Lisp interpreter
12901 evaluates the else-part. The true-or-false-test of the @code{if}
12902 expression is the regular expression search.
12903
12904 It may seem odd to have what looks like the `real work' of
12905 the @code{forward-sentence} function buried here, but this is a common
12906 way this kind of operation is carried out in Lisp.
12907
12908 @node fwd-sentence re-search, , fwd-sentence while loops, forward-sentence
12909 @unnumberedsubsec The regular expression search
12910
12911 The @code{re-search-forward} function searches for the end of the
12912 sentence, that is, for the pattern defined by the @code{sentence-end}
12913 regular expression. If the pattern is found---if the end of the sentence is
12914 found---then the @code{re-search-forward} function does two things:
12915
12916 @enumerate
12917 @item
12918 The @code{re-search-forward} function carries out a side effect, which
12919 is to move point to the end of the occurrence found.
12920
12921 @item
12922 The @code{re-search-forward} function returns a value of true. This is
12923 the value received by the @code{if}, and means that the search was
12924 successful.
12925 @end enumerate
12926
12927 @noindent
12928 The side effect, the movement of point, is completed before the
12929 @code{if} function is handed the value returned by the successful
12930 conclusion of the search.
12931
12932 When the @code{if} function receives the value of true from a successful
12933 call to @code{re-search-forward}, the @code{if} evaluates the then-part,
12934 which is the expression @code{(skip-chars-backward " \t\n")}. This
12935 expression moves backwards over any blank spaces, tabs or carriage
12936 returns until a printed character is found and then leaves point after
12937 the character. Since point has already been moved to the end of the
12938 pattern that marks the end of the sentence, this action leaves point
12939 right after the closing printed character of the sentence, which is
12940 usually a period.
12941
12942 On the other hand, if the @code{re-search-forward} function fails to
12943 find a pattern marking the end of the sentence, the function returns
12944 false. The false then causes the @code{if} to evaluate its third
12945 argument, which is @code{(goto-char par-end)}: it moves point to the
12946 end of the paragraph.
12947
12948 (And if the text is in a form or equivalent, and point may not move
12949 fully, then the @code{constrain-to-field} function comes into play.)
12950
12951 Regular expression searches are exceptionally useful and the pattern
12952 illustrated by @code{re-search-forward}, in which the search is the
12953 test of an @code{if} expression, is handy. You will see or write code
12954 incorporating this pattern often.
12955
12956 @node forward-paragraph, etags, forward-sentence, Regexp Search
12957 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12958 @section @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
12959 @findex forward-paragraph
12960
12961 @ignore
12962 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12963 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12964 "Move forward to end of paragraph.
12965 With argument ARG, do it ARG times;
12966 a negative argument ARG = -N means move backward N paragraphs.
12967
12968 A line which `paragraph-start' matches either separates paragraphs
12969 \(if `paragraph-separate' matches it also) or is the first line of a paragraph.
12970 A paragraph end is the beginning of a line which is not part of the paragraph
12971 to which the end of the previous line belongs, or the end of the buffer.
12972 Returns the count of paragraphs left to move."
12973 (interactive "p")
12974 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12975 (let* ((opoint (point))
12976 (fill-prefix-regexp
12977 (and fill-prefix (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12978 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12979 (regexp-quote fill-prefix)))
12980 ;; Remove ^ from paragraph-start and paragraph-sep if they are there.
12981 ;; These regexps shouldn't be anchored, because we look for them
12982 ;; starting at the left-margin. This allows paragraph commands to
12983 ;; work normally with indented text.
12984 ;; This hack will not find problem cases like "whatever\\|^something".
12985 (parstart (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-start))
12986 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-start 0)))
12987 (substring paragraph-start 1)
12988 paragraph-start))
12989 (parsep (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-separate))
12990 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-separate 0)))
12991 (substring paragraph-separate 1)
12992 paragraph-separate))
12993 (parsep
12994 (if fill-prefix-regexp
12995 (concat parsep "\\|"
12996 fill-prefix-regexp "[ \t]*$")
12997 parsep))
12998 ;; This is used for searching.
12999 (sp-parstart (concat "^[ \t]*\\(?:" parstart "\\|" parsep "\\)"))
13000 start found-start)
13001 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp)))
13002 (if (and (not (looking-at parsep))
13003 (re-search-backward "^\n" (max (1- (point)) (point-min)) t)
13004 (looking-at parsep))
13005 (setq arg (1+ arg))
13006 (setq start (point))
13007 ;; Move back over paragraph-separating lines.
13008 (forward-char -1) (beginning-of-line)
13009 (while (and (not (bobp))
13010 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13011 (looking-at parsep)))
13012 (forward-line -1))
13013 (if (bobp)
13014 nil
13015 (setq arg (1+ arg))
13016 ;; Go to end of the previous (non-separating) line.
13017 (end-of-line)
13018 ;; Search back for line that starts or separates paragraphs.
13019 (if (if fill-prefix-regexp
13020 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13021 (let (multiple-lines)
13022 (while (and (progn (beginning-of-line) (not (bobp)))
13023 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13024 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13025 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13026 (unless (= (point) start)
13027 (setq multiple-lines t))
13028 (forward-line -1))
13029 (move-to-left-margin)
13030 ;; This deleted code caused a long hanging-indent line
13031 ;; not to be filled together with the following lines.
13032 ;; ;; Don't move back over a line before the paragraph
13033 ;; ;; which doesn't start with fill-prefix
13034 ;; ;; unless that is the only line we've moved over.
13035 ;; (and (not (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13036 ;; multiple-lines
13037 ;; (forward-line 1))
13038 (not (bobp)))
13039 (while (and (re-search-backward sp-parstart nil 1)
13040 (setq found-start t)
13041 ;; Found a candidate, but need to check if it is a
13042 ;; REAL parstart.
13043 (progn (setq start (point))
13044 (move-to-left-margin)
13045 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13046 (not (and (looking-at parstart)
13047 (or (not use-hard-newlines)
13048 (bobp)
13049 (get-text-property
13050 (1- start) 'hard)))))
13051 (setq found-start nil)
13052 (goto-char start))
13053 found-start)
13054 ;; Found one.
13055 (progn
13056 ;; Move forward over paragraph separators.
13057 ;; We know this cannot reach the place we started
13058 ;; because we know we moved back over a non-separator.
13059 (while (and (not (eobp))
13060 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13061 (looking-at parsep)))
13062 (forward-line 1))
13063 ;; If line before paragraph is just margin, back up to there.
13064 (end-of-line 0)
13065 (if (> (current-column) (current-left-margin))
13066 (forward-char 1)
13067 (skip-chars-backward " \t")
13068 (if (not (bolp))
13069 (forward-line 1))))
13070 ;; No starter or separator line => use buffer beg.
13071 (goto-char (point-min))))))
13072
13073 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13074 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13075 (while (and (not (eobp))
13076 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13077 (looking-at parsep))
13078 (forward-line 1))
13079 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13080 ;; ... and one more line.
13081 (forward-line 1)
13082 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13083 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13084 (while (and (not (eobp))
13085 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13086 (not (looking-at parsep))
13087 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13088 (forward-line 1))
13089 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13090 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13091 (goto-char start)
13092 (not (eobp)))
13093 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13094 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13095 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13096 (and use-hard-newlines
13097 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13098 (forward-char 1))
13099 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13100 (goto-char start))))
13101 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)
13102 ;; Return the number of steps that could not be done.
13103 arg))
13104 @end ignore
13105
13106 The @code{forward-paragraph} function moves point forward to the end
13107 of the paragraph. It is usually bound to @kbd{M-@}} and makes use of a
13108 number of functions that are important in themselves, including
13109 @code{let*}, @code{match-beginning}, and @code{looking-at}.
13110
13111 The function definition for @code{forward-paragraph} is considerably
13112 longer than the function definition for @code{forward-sentence}
13113 because it works with a paragraph, each line of which may begin with a
13114 fill prefix.
13115
13116 A fill prefix consists of a string of characters that are repeated at
13117 the beginning of each line. For example, in Lisp code, it is a
13118 convention to start each line of a paragraph-long comment with
13119 @samp{;;; }. In Text mode, four blank spaces make up another common
13120 fill prefix, creating an indented paragraph. (@xref{Fill Prefix, , ,
13121 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for more information about fill
13122 prefixes.)
13123
13124 The existence of a fill prefix means that in addition to being able to
13125 find the end of a paragraph whose lines begin on the left-most
13126 column, the @code{forward-paragraph} function must be able to find the
13127 end of a paragraph when all or many of the lines in the buffer begin
13128 with the fill prefix.
13129
13130 Moreover, it is sometimes practical to ignore a fill prefix that
13131 exists, especially when blank lines separate paragraphs.
13132 This is an added complication.
13133
13134 @menu
13135 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
13136 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
13137 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
13138 @end menu
13139
13140 @node forward-paragraph in brief, fwd-para let, forward-paragraph, forward-paragraph
13141 @ifnottex
13142 @unnumberedsubsec Shortened @code{forward-paragraph} function definition
13143 @end ifnottex
13144
13145 Rather than print all of the @code{forward-paragraph} function, we
13146 will only print parts of it. Read without preparation, the function
13147 can be daunting!
13148
13149 @need 800
13150 In outline, the function looks like this:
13151
13152 @smallexample
13153 @group
13154 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
13155 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13156 (interactive "p")
13157 (or arg (setq arg 1))
13158 (let*
13159 @var{varlist}
13160 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp))) ; @r{backward-moving-code}
13161 @dots{}
13162 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp))) ; @r{forward-moving-code}
13163 @dots{}
13164 @end group
13165 @end smallexample
13166
13167 The first parts of the function are routine: the function's argument
13168 list consists of one optional argument. Documentation follows.
13169
13170 The lower case @samp{p} in the @code{interactive} declaration means
13171 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the function.
13172 This will be a number, and is the repeat count of how many paragraphs
13173 point will move. The @code{or} expression in the next line handles
13174 the common case when no argument is passed to the function, which occurs
13175 if the function is called from other code rather than interactively.
13176 This case was described earlier. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
13177 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Now we reach the end of the
13178 familiar part of this function.
13179
13180 @node fwd-para let, fwd-para while, forward-paragraph in brief, forward-paragraph
13181 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{let*} expression
13182
13183 The next line of the @code{forward-paragraph} function begins a
13184 @code{let*} expression. This is a different than @code{let}. The
13185 symbol is @code{let*} not @code{let}.
13186
13187 The @code{let*} special form is like @code{let} except that Emacs sets
13188 each variable in sequence, one after another, and variables in the
13189 latter part of the varlist can make use of the values to which Emacs
13190 set variables in the earlier part of the varlist.
13191
13192 @ignore
13193 ( refappend save-excursion, , code save-excursion in code append-to-buffer .)
13194 @end ignore
13195
13196 (@ref{append save-excursion, , @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
13197
13198 In the @code{let*} expression in this function, Emacs binds a total of
13199 seven variables: @code{opoint}, @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
13200 @code{parstart}, @code{parsep}, @code{sp-parstart}, @code{start}, and
13201 @code{found-start}.
13202
13203 The variable @code{parsep} appears twice, first, to remove instances
13204 of @samp{^}, and second, to handle fill prefixes.
13205
13206 The variable @code{opoint} is just the value of @code{point}. As you
13207 can guess, it is used in a @code{constrain-to-field} expression, just
13208 as in @code{forward-sentence}.
13209
13210 The variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is set to the value returned by
13211 evaluating the following list:
13212
13213 @smallexample
13214 @group
13215 (and fill-prefix
13216 (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
13217 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
13218 (regexp-quote fill-prefix))
13219 @end group
13220 @end smallexample
13221
13222 @noindent
13223 This is an expression whose first element is the @code{and} special form.
13224
13225 As we learned earlier (@pxref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new}
13226 function}), the @code{and} special form evaluates each of its
13227 arguments until one of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in
13228 which case the @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if
13229 none of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value
13230 resulting from evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such
13231 a value is not @code{nil}, it is considered true in Lisp.) In other
13232 words, an @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its
13233 arguments are true.
13234 @findex and
13235
13236 In this case, the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to a
13237 non-@code{nil} value only if the following four expressions produce a
13238 true (i.e., a non-@code{nil}) value when they are evaluated; otherwise,
13239 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to @code{nil}.
13240
13241 @table @code
13242 @item fill-prefix
13243 When this variable is evaluated, the value of the fill prefix, if any,
13244 is returned. If there is no fill prefix, this variable returns
13245 @code{nil}.
13246
13247 @item (not (equal fill-prefix "")
13248 This expression checks whether an existing fill prefix is an empty
13249 string, that is, a string with no characters in it. An empty string is
13250 not a useful fill prefix.
13251
13252 @item (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
13253 This expression returns @code{nil} if the variable
13254 @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix} has been turned on by being set to a
13255 true value such as @code{t}.
13256
13257 @item (regexp-quote fill-prefix)
13258 This is the last argument to the @code{and} special form. If all the
13259 arguments to the @code{and} are true, the value resulting from
13260 evaluating this expression will be returned by the @code{and} expression
13261 and bound to the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
13262 @end table
13263
13264 @findex regexp-quote
13265 @noindent
13266 The result of evaluating this @code{and} expression successfully is that
13267 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be bound to the value of
13268 @code{fill-prefix} as modified by the @code{regexp-quote} function.
13269 What @code{regexp-quote} does is read a string and return a regular
13270 expression that will exactly match the string and match nothing else.
13271 This means that @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be set to a value that
13272 will exactly match the fill prefix if the fill prefix exists.
13273 Otherwise, the variable will be set to @code{nil}.
13274
13275 The next two local variables in the @code{let*} expression are
13276 designed to remove instances of @samp{^} from @code{parstart} and
13277 @code{parsep}, the local variables which indicate the paragraph start
13278 and the paragraph separator. The next expression sets @code{parsep}
13279 again. That is to handle fill prefixes.
13280
13281 This is the setting that requires the definition call @code{let*}
13282 rather than @code{let}. The true-or-false-test for the @code{if}
13283 depends on whether the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} evaluates to
13284 @code{nil} or some other value.
13285
13286 If @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does not have a value, Emacs evaluates
13287 the else-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to
13288 its local value. (@code{parsep} is a regular expression that matches
13289 what separates paragraphs.)
13290
13291 But if @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does have a value, Emacs evaluates
13292 the then-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to a
13293 regular expression that includes the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} as part
13294 of the pattern.
13295
13296 Specifically, @code{parsep} is set to the original value of the
13297 paragraph separate regular expression concatenated with an alternative
13298 expression that consists of the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} followed by
13299 optional whitespace to the end of the line. The whitespace is defined
13300 by @w{@code{"[ \t]*$"}}.) The @samp{\\|} defines this portion of the
13301 regexp as an alternative to @code{parsep}.
13302
13303 According to a comment in the code, the next local variable,
13304 @code{sp-parstart}, is used for searching, and then the final two,
13305 @code{start} and @code{found-start}, are set to @code{nil}.
13306
13307 Now we get into the body of the @code{let*}. The first part of the body
13308 of the @code{let*} deals with the case when the function is given a
13309 negative argument and is therefore moving backwards. We will skip this
13310 section.
13311
13312 @node fwd-para while, , fwd-para let, forward-paragraph
13313 @unnumberedsubsec The forward motion @code{while} loop
13314
13315 The second part of the body of the @code{let*} deals with forward
13316 motion. It is a @code{while} loop that repeats itself so long as the
13317 value of @code{arg} is greater than zero. In the most common use of
13318 the function, the value of the argument is 1, so the body of the
13319 @code{while} loop is evaluated exactly once, and the cursor moves
13320 forward one paragraph.
13321
13322 @ignore
13323 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13324
13325 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13326 (while (and (not (eobp))
13327 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13328 (looking-at parsep))
13329 (forward-line 1))
13330 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13331 ;; ... and one more line.
13332 (forward-line 1)
13333
13334 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13335 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13336 (while (and (not (eobp))
13337 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13338 (not (looking-at parsep))
13339 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13340 (forward-line 1))
13341
13342 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13343 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13344 (goto-char start)
13345 (not (eobp)))
13346 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13347 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13348 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13349 (and use-hard-newlines
13350 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13351 (forward-char 1))
13352
13353 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13354 (goto-char start))))
13355 @end ignore
13356
13357 This part handles three situations: when point is between paragraphs,
13358 when there is a fill prefix and when there is no fill prefix.
13359
13360 @need 800
13361 The @code{while} loop looks like this:
13362
13363 @smallexample
13364 @group
13365 ;; @r{going forwards and not at the end of the buffer}
13366 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13367
13368 ;; @r{between paragraphs}
13369 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13370 (while (and (not (eobp))
13371 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13372 (looking-at parsep))
13373 (forward-line 1))
13374 ;; @r{This decrements the loop}
13375 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13376 ;; ... and one more line.
13377 (forward-line 1)
13378 @end group
13379
13380 @group
13381 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13382 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13383 ;; we go forward line by line
13384 (while (and (not (eobp))
13385 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13386 (not (looking-at parsep))
13387 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13388 (forward-line 1))
13389 @end group
13390
13391 @group
13392 ;; There is no fill prefix;
13393 ;; we go forward character by character
13394 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13395 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13396 (goto-char start)
13397 (not (eobp)))
13398 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13399 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13400 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13401 (and use-hard-newlines
13402 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13403 (forward-char 1))
13404 @end group
13405
13406 @group
13407 ;; and if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the end,
13408 ;; go to whatever was found in the regular expression search
13409 ;; for sp-parstart
13410 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13411 (goto-char start))))
13412 @end group
13413 @end smallexample
13414
13415 @findex eobp
13416 We can see that this is a decrementing counter @code{while} loop,
13417 using the expression @code{(setq arg (1- arg))} as the decrementer.
13418 That expression is not far from the @code{while}, but is hidden in
13419 another Lisp macro, an @code{unless} macro. Unless we are at the end
13420 of the buffer --- that is what the @code{eobp} function determines; it
13421 is an abbreviation of @samp{End Of Buffer P} --- we decrease the value
13422 of @code{arg} by one.
13423
13424 (If we are at the end of the buffer, we cannot go forward any more and
13425 the next loop of the @code{while} expression will test false since the
13426 test is an @code{and} with @code{(not (eobp))}. The @code{not}
13427 function means exactly as you expect; it is another name for
13428 @code{null}, a function that returns true when its argument is false.)
13429
13430 Interestingly, the loop count is not decremented until we leave the
13431 space between paragraphs, unless we come to the end of buffer or stop
13432 seeing the local value of the paragraph separator.
13433
13434 That second @code{while} also has a @code{(move-to-left-margin)}
13435 expression. The function is self-explanatory. It is inside a
13436 @code{progn} expression and not the last element of its body, so it is
13437 only invoked for its side effect, which is to move point to the left
13438 margin of the current line.
13439
13440 @findex looking-at
13441 The @code{looking-at} function is also self-explanatory; it returns
13442 true if the text after point matches the regular expression given as
13443 its argument.
13444
13445 The rest of the body of the loop looks difficult at first, but makes
13446 sense as you come to understand it.
13447
13448 @need 800
13449 First consider what happens if there is a fill prefix:
13450
13451 @smallexample
13452 @group
13453 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13454 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13455 ;; we go forward line by line
13456 (while (and (not (eobp))
13457 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13458 (not (looking-at parsep))
13459 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13460 (forward-line 1))
13461 @end group
13462 @end smallexample
13463
13464 @noindent
13465 This expression moves point forward line by line so long
13466 as four conditions are true:
13467
13468 @enumerate
13469 @item
13470 Point is not at the end of the buffer.
13471
13472 @item
13473 We can move to the left margin of the text and are
13474 not at the end of the buffer.
13475
13476 @item
13477 The text following point does not separate paragraphs.
13478
13479 @item
13480 The pattern following point is the fill prefix regular expression.
13481 @end enumerate
13482
13483 The last condition may be puzzling, until you remember that point was
13484 moved to the beginning of the line early in the @code{forward-paragraph}
13485 function. This means that if the text has a fill prefix, the
13486 @code{looking-at} function will see it.
13487
13488 @need 1250
13489 Consider what happens when there is no fill prefix.
13490
13491 @smallexample
13492 @group
13493 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13494 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13495 (goto-char start)
13496 (not (eobp)))
13497 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13498 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13499 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13500 (and use-hard-newlines
13501 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13502 (forward-char 1))
13503 @end group
13504 @end smallexample
13505
13506 @noindent
13507 This @code{while} loop has us searching forward for
13508 @code{sp-parstart}, which is the combination of possible whitespace
13509 with a the local value of the start of a paragraph or of a paragraph
13510 separator. (The latter two are within an expression starting
13511 @code{\(?:} so that they are not referenced by the
13512 @code{match-beginning} function.)
13513
13514 @need 800
13515 The two expressions,
13516
13517 @smallexample
13518 @group
13519 (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13520 (goto-char start)
13521 @end group
13522 @end smallexample
13523
13524 @noindent
13525 mean go to the start of the text matched by the regular expression
13526 search.
13527
13528 The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression is new. It returns a number
13529 specifying the location of the start of the text that was matched by
13530 the last search.
13531
13532 The @code{match-beginning} function is used here because of a
13533 characteristic of a forward search: a successful forward search,
13534 regardless of whether it is a plain search or a regular expression
13535 search, moves point to the end of the text that is found. In this
13536 case, a successful search moves point to the end of the pattern for
13537 @code{sp-parstart}.
13538
13539 However, we want to put point at the end of the current paragraph, not
13540 somewhere else. Indeed, since the search possibly includes the
13541 paragraph separator, point may end up at the beginning of the next one
13542 unless we use an expression that includes @code{match-beginning}.
13543
13544 @findex match-beginning
13545 When given an argument of 0, @code{match-beginning} returns the
13546 position that is the start of the text matched by the most recent
13547 search. In this case, the most recent search looks for
13548 @code{sp-parstart}. The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression returns
13549 the beginning position of that pattern, rather than the end position
13550 of that pattern.
13551
13552 (Incidentally, when passed a positive number as an argument, the
13553 @code{match-beginning} function returns the location of point at that
13554 parenthesized expression in the last search unless that parenthesized
13555 expression begins with @code{\(?:}. I don't know why @code{\(?:}
13556 appears here since the argument is 0.)
13557
13558 @need 1250
13559 The last expression when there is no fill prefix is
13560
13561 @smallexample
13562 @group
13563 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13564 (goto-char start))))
13565 @end group
13566 @end smallexample
13567
13568 @noindent
13569 This says that if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the
13570 end, point should move to the beginning of whatever was found by the
13571 regular expression search for @code{sp-parstart}.
13572
13573 The full definition for the @code{forward-paragraph} function not only
13574 includes code for going forwards, but also code for going backwards.
13575
13576 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs and you want to see the
13577 whole function, you can type @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function})
13578 and the name of the function. This gives you the function
13579 documentation and the name of the library containing the function's
13580 source. Place point over the name of the library and press the RET
13581 key; you will be taken directly to the source. (Be sure to install
13582 your sources! Without them, you are like a person who tries to drive
13583 a car with his eyes shut!)
13584
13585 @node etags, Regexp Review, forward-paragraph, Regexp Search
13586 @section Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File
13587 @findex etags
13588 @cindex @file{TAGS} file, create own
13589
13590 Besides @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}), another way to see the
13591 source of a function is to type @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) and the
13592 name of the function when prompted for it. This is a good habit to
13593 get into. The @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) command takes you directly
13594 to the source for a function, variable, or node. The function depends
13595 on tags tables to tell it where to go.
13596
13597 If the @code{find-tag} function first asks you for the name of a
13598 @file{TAGS} table, give it the name of a @file{TAGS} file such as
13599 @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}. (The exact path to your
13600 @file{TAGS} file depends on how your copy of Emacs was installed. I
13601 just told you the location that provides both my C and my Emacs Lisp
13602 sources.)
13603
13604 You can also create your own @file{TAGS} file for directories that
13605 lack one.
13606
13607 You often need to build and install tags tables yourself. They are
13608 not built automatically. A tags table is called a @file{TAGS} file;
13609 the name is in upper case letters.
13610
13611 You can create a @file{TAGS} file by calling the @code{etags} program
13612 that comes as a part of the Emacs distribution. Usually, @code{etags}
13613 is compiled and installed when Emacs is built. (@code{etags} is not
13614 an Emacs Lisp function or a part of Emacs; it is a C program.)
13615
13616 @need 1250
13617 To create a @file{TAGS} file, first switch to the directory in which
13618 you want to create the file. In Emacs you can do this with the
13619 @kbd{M-x cd} command, or by visiting a file in the directory, or by
13620 listing the directory with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the
13621 compile command, with @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute
13622
13623 @smallexample
13624 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
13625 @end smallexample
13626
13627 @noindent
13628 to create a @file{TAGS} file for Emacs Lisp.
13629
13630 For example, if you have a large number of files in your
13631 @file{~/emacs} directory, as I do---I have 137 @file{.el} files in it,
13632 of which I load 12---you can create a @file{TAGS} file for the Emacs
13633 Lisp files in that directory.
13634
13635 @need 1250
13636 The @code{etags} program takes all the usual shell `wildcards'. For
13637 example, if you have two directories for which you want a single
13638 @file{TAGS} file, type @w{@code{etags *.el ../elisp/*.el}}, where
13639 @file{../elisp/} is the second directory:
13640
13641 @smallexample
13642 M-x compile RET etags *.el ../elisp/*.el RET
13643 @end smallexample
13644
13645 @need 1250
13646 Type
13647
13648 @smallexample
13649 M-x compile RET etags --help RET
13650 @end smallexample
13651
13652 @noindent
13653 to see a list of the options accepted by @code{etags} as well as a
13654 list of supported languages.
13655
13656 The @code{etags} program handles more than 20 languages, including
13657 Emacs Lisp, Common Lisp, Scheme, C, C++, Ada, Fortran, HTML, Java,
13658 LaTeX, Pascal, Perl, Postscript, Python, TeX, Texinfo, makefiles, and
13659 most assemblers. The program has no switches for specifying the
13660 language; it recognizes the language in an input file according to its
13661 file name and contents.
13662
13663 @file{etags} is very helpful when you are writing code yourself and
13664 want to refer back to functions you have already written. Just run
13665 @code{etags} again at intervals as you write new functions, so they
13666 become part of the @file{TAGS} file.
13667
13668 If you think an appropriate @file{TAGS} file already exists for what
13669 you want, but do not know where it is, you can use the @code{locate}
13670 program to attempt to find it.
13671
13672 Type @w{@kbd{M-x locate @key{RET} TAGS @key{RET}}} and Emacs will list
13673 for you the full path names of all your @file{TAGS} files. On my
13674 system, this command lists 34 @file{TAGS} files. On the other hand, a
13675 `plain vanilla' system I recently installed did not contain any
13676 @file{TAGS} files.
13677
13678 If the tags table you want has been created, you can use the @code{M-x
13679 visit-tags-table} command to specify it. Otherwise, you will need to
13680 create the tag table yourself and then use @code{M-x
13681 visit-tags-table}.
13682
13683 @subsubheading Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13684 @cindex Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13685 @cindex Tags in the Emacs sources
13686 @findex make tags
13687
13688 The GNU Emacs sources come with a @file{Makefile} that contains a
13689 sophisticated @code{etags} command that creates, collects, and merges
13690 tags tables from all over the Emacs sources and puts the information
13691 into one @file{TAGS} file in the @file{src/} directory. (The
13692 @file{src/} directory is below the top level of your Emacs directory.)
13693
13694 @need 1250
13695 To build this @file{TAGS} file, go to the top level of your Emacs
13696 source directory and run the compile command @code{make tags}:
13697
13698 @smallexample
13699 M-x compile RET make tags RET
13700 @end smallexample
13701
13702 @noindent
13703 (The @code{make tags} command works well with the GNU Emacs sources,
13704 as well as with some other source packages.)
13705
13706 For more information, see @ref{Tags, , Tag Tables, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13707 Manual}.
13708
13709 @node Regexp Review, re-search Exercises, etags, Regexp Search
13710 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
13711 @section Review
13712
13713 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
13714
13715 @table @code
13716 @item while
13717 Repeatedly evaluate the body of the expression so long as the first
13718 element of the body tests true. Then return @code{nil}. (The
13719 expression is evaluated only for its side effects.)
13720
13721 @need 1250
13722 For example:
13723
13724 @smallexample
13725 @group
13726 (let ((foo 2))
13727 (while (> foo 0)
13728 (insert (format "foo is %d.\n" foo))
13729 (setq foo (1- foo))))
13730
13731 @result{} foo is 2.
13732 foo is 1.
13733 nil
13734 @end group
13735 @end smallexample
13736
13737 @noindent
13738 (The @code{insert} function inserts its arguments at point; the
13739 @code{format} function returns a string formatted from its arguments
13740 the way @code{message} formats its arguments; @code{\n} produces a new
13741 line.)
13742
13743 @item re-search-forward
13744 Search for a pattern, and if the pattern is found, move point to rest
13745 just after it.
13746
13747 @noindent
13748 Takes four arguments, like @code{search-forward}:
13749
13750 @enumerate
13751 @item
13752 A regular expression that specifies the pattern to search for.
13753 (Remember to put quotation marks around this argument!)
13754
13755 @item
13756 Optionally, the limit of the search.
13757
13758 @item
13759 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
13760 error message.
13761
13762 @item
13763 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
13764 search goes backwards.
13765 @end enumerate
13766
13767 @item let*
13768 Bind some variables locally to particular values,
13769 and then evaluate the remaining arguments, returning the value of the
13770 last one. While binding the local variables, use the local values of
13771 variables bound earlier, if any.
13772
13773 @need 1250
13774 For example:
13775
13776 @smallexample
13777 @group
13778 (let* ((foo 7)
13779 (bar (* 3 foo)))
13780 (message "`bar' is %d." bar))
13781 @result{} `bar' is 21.
13782 @end group
13783 @end smallexample
13784
13785 @item match-beginning
13786 Return the position of the start of the text found by the last regular
13787 expression search.
13788
13789 @item looking-at
13790 Return @code{t} for true if the text after point matches the argument,
13791 which should be a regular expression.
13792
13793 @item eobp
13794 Return @code{t} for true if point is at the end of the accessible part
13795 of a buffer. The end of the accessible part is the end of the buffer
13796 if the buffer is not narrowed; it is the end of the narrowed part if
13797 the buffer is narrowed.
13798 @end table
13799
13800 @need 1500
13801 @node re-search Exercises, , Regexp Review, Regexp Search
13802 @section Exercises with @code{re-search-forward}
13803
13804 @itemize @bullet
13805 @item
13806 Write a function to search for a regular expression that matches two
13807 or more blank lines in sequence.
13808
13809 @item
13810 Write a function to search for duplicated words, such as `the the'.
13811 @xref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13812 Manual}, for information on how to write a regexp (a regular
13813 expression) to match a string that is composed of two identical
13814 halves. You can devise several regexps; some are better than others.
13815 The function I use is described in an appendix, along with several
13816 regexps. @xref{the-the, , @code{the-the} Duplicated Words Function}.
13817 @end itemize
13818
13819 @node Counting Words, Words in a defun, Regexp Search, Top
13820 @chapter Counting: Repetition and Regexps
13821 @cindex Repetition for word counting
13822 @cindex Regular expressions for word counting
13823
13824 Repetition and regular expression searches are powerful tools that you
13825 often use when you write code in Emacs Lisp. This chapter illustrates
13826 the use of regular expression searches through the construction of
13827 word count commands using @code{while} loops and recursion.
13828
13829 @menu
13830 * Why Count Words::
13831 * count-words-region:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
13832 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
13833 * Counting Exercise::
13834 @end menu
13835
13836 @node Why Count Words, count-words-region, Counting Words, Counting Words
13837 @ifnottex
13838 @unnumberedsec Counting words
13839 @end ifnottex
13840
13841 The standard Emacs distribution contains a function for counting the
13842 number of lines within a region. However, there is no corresponding
13843 function for counting words.
13844
13845 Certain types of writing ask you to count words. Thus, if you write
13846 an essay, you may be limited to 800 words; if you write a novel, you
13847 may discipline yourself to write 1000 words a day. It seems odd to me
13848 that Emacs lacks a word count command. Perhaps people use Emacs
13849 mostly for code or types of documentation that do not require word
13850 counts; or perhaps they restrict themselves to the operating system
13851 word count command, @code{wc}. Alternatively, people may follow
13852 the publishers' convention and compute a word count by dividing the
13853 number of characters in a document by five. In any event, here are
13854 commands to count words.
13855
13856 @node count-words-region, recursive-count-words, Why Count Words, Counting Words
13857 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
13858 @section The @code{count-words-region} Function
13859 @findex count-words-region
13860
13861 A word count command could count words in a line, paragraph, region,
13862 or buffer. What should the command cover? You could design the
13863 command to count the number of words in a complete buffer. However,
13864 the Emacs tradition encourages flexibility---you may want to count
13865 words in just a section, rather than all of a buffer. So it makes
13866 more sense to design the command to count the number of words in a
13867 region. Once you have a @code{count-words-region} command, you can,
13868 if you wish, count words in a whole buffer by marking it with
13869 @w{@kbd{C-x h}} (@code{mark-whole-buffer}).
13870
13871 Clearly, counting words is a repetitive act: starting from the
13872 beginning of the region, you count the first word, then the second
13873 word, then the third word, and so on, until you reach the end of the
13874 region. This means that word counting is ideally suited to recursion
13875 or to a @code{while} loop.
13876
13877 @menu
13878 * Design count-words-region:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
13879 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{count-words-region}.
13880 @end menu
13881
13882 @node Design count-words-region, Whitespace Bug, count-words-region, count-words-region
13883 @ifnottex
13884 @unnumberedsubsec Designing @code{count-words-region}
13885 @end ifnottex
13886
13887 First, we will implement the word count command with a @code{while}
13888 loop, then with recursion. The command will, of course, be
13889 interactive.
13890
13891 @need 800
13892 The template for an interactive function definition is, as always:
13893
13894 @smallexample
13895 @group
13896 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
13897 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13898 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
13899 @var{body}@dots{})
13900 @end group
13901 @end smallexample
13902
13903 What we need to do is fill in the slots.
13904
13905 The name of the function should be self-explanatory and similar to the
13906 existing @code{count-lines-region} name. This makes the name easier
13907 to remember. @code{count-words-region} is a good choice.
13908
13909 The function counts words within a region. This means that the
13910 argument list must contain symbols that are bound to the two
13911 positions, the beginning and end of the region. These two positions
13912 can be called @samp{beginning} and @samp{end} respectively. The first
13913 line of the documentation should be a single sentence, since that is
13914 all that is printed as documentation by a command such as
13915 @code{apropos}. The interactive expression will be of the form
13916 @samp{(interactive "r")}, since that will cause Emacs to pass the
13917 beginning and end of the region to the function's argument list. All
13918 this is routine.
13919
13920 The body of the function needs to be written to do three tasks:
13921 first, to set up conditions under which the @code{while} loop can
13922 count words, second, to run the @code{while} loop, and third, to send
13923 a message to the user.
13924
13925 When a user calls @code{count-words-region}, point may be at the
13926 beginning or the end of the region. However, the counting process
13927 must start at the beginning of the region. This means we will want
13928 to put point there if it is not already there. Executing
13929 @code{(goto-char beginning)} ensures this. Of course, we will want to
13930 return point to its expected position when the function finishes its
13931 work. For this reason, the body must be enclosed in a
13932 @code{save-excursion} expression.
13933
13934 The central part of the body of the function consists of a
13935 @code{while} loop in which one expression jumps point forward word by
13936 word, and another expression counts those jumps. The true-or-false-test
13937 of the @code{while} loop should test true so long as point should jump
13938 forward, and false when point is at the end of the region.
13939
13940 We could use @code{(forward-word 1)} as the expression for moving point
13941 forward word by word, but it is easier to see what Emacs identifies as a
13942 `word' if we use a regular expression search.
13943
13944 A regular expression search that finds the pattern for which it is
13945 searching leaves point after the last character matched. This means
13946 that a succession of successful word searches will move point forward
13947 word by word.
13948
13949 As a practical matter, we want the regular expression search to jump
13950 over whitespace and punctuation between words as well as over the
13951 words themselves. A regexp that refuses to jump over interword
13952 whitespace would never jump more than one word! This means that
13953 the regexp should include the whitespace and punctuation that follows
13954 a word, if any, as well as the word itself. (A word may end a buffer
13955 and not have any following whitespace or punctuation, so that part of
13956 the regexp must be optional.)
13957
13958 Thus, what we want for the regexp is a pattern defining one or more
13959 word constituent characters followed, optionally, by one or more
13960 characters that are not word constituents. The regular expression for
13961 this is:
13962
13963 @smallexample
13964 \w+\W*
13965 @end smallexample
13966
13967 @noindent
13968 The buffer's syntax table determines which characters are and are not
13969 word constituents. (@xref{Syntax, , What Constitutes a Word or
13970 Symbol?}, for more about syntax. Also, see @ref{Syntax, Syntax, The
13971 Syntax Table, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and @ref{Syntax Tables, ,
13972 Syntax Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
13973
13974 @need 800
13975 The search expression looks like this:
13976
13977 @smallexample
13978 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13979 @end smallexample
13980
13981 @noindent
13982 (Note that paired backslashes precede the @samp{w} and @samp{W}. A
13983 single backslash has special meaning to the Emacs Lisp interpreter.
13984 It indicates that the following character is interpreted differently
13985 than usual. For example, the two characters, @samp{\n}, stand for
13986 @samp{newline}, rather than for a backslash followed by @samp{n}. Two
13987 backslashes in a row stand for an ordinary, `unspecial' backslash, so
13988 Emacs Lisp interpreter ends of seeing a single backslash followed by a
13989 letter. So it discovers the letter is special.)
13990
13991 We need a counter to count how many words there are; this variable
13992 must first be set to 0 and then incremented each time Emacs goes
13993 around the @code{while} loop. The incrementing expression is simply:
13994
13995 @smallexample
13996 (setq count (1+ count))
13997 @end smallexample
13998
13999 Finally, we want to tell the user how many words there are in the
14000 region. The @code{message} function is intended for presenting this
14001 kind of information to the user. The message has to be phrased so
14002 that it reads properly regardless of how many words there are in the
14003 region: we don't want to say that ``there are 1 words in the region''.
14004 The conflict between singular and plural is ungrammatical. We can
14005 solve this problem by using a conditional expression that evaluates
14006 different messages depending on the number of words in the region.
14007 There are three possibilities: no words in the region, one word in the
14008 region, and more than one word. This means that the @code{cond}
14009 special form is appropriate.
14010
14011 @need 1500
14012 All this leads to the following function definition:
14013
14014 @smallexample
14015 @group
14016 ;;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
14017 (defun count-words-region (beginning end)
14018 "Print number of words in the region.
14019 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14020 character followed by at least one character that
14021 is not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax
14022 table determines which characters these are."
14023 (interactive "r")
14024 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14025 @end group
14026
14027 @group
14028 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14029 (save-excursion
14030 (goto-char beginning)
14031 (let ((count 0))
14032 @end group
14033
14034 @group
14035 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14036 (while (< (point) end)
14037 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
14038 (setq count (1+ count)))
14039 @end group
14040
14041 @group
14042 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14043 (cond ((zerop count)
14044 (message
14045 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14046 ((= 1 count)
14047 (message
14048 "The region has 1 word."))
14049 (t
14050 (message
14051 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14052 @end group
14053 @end smallexample
14054
14055 @noindent
14056 As written, the function works, but not in all circumstances.
14057
14058 @node Whitespace Bug, , Design count-words-region, count-words-region
14059 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
14060 @subsection The Whitespace Bug in @code{count-words-region}
14061
14062 The @code{count-words-region} command described in the preceding
14063 section has two bugs, or rather, one bug with two manifestations.
14064 First, if you mark a region containing only whitespace in the middle
14065 of some text, the @code{count-words-region} command tells you that the
14066 region contains one word! Second, if you mark a region containing
14067 only whitespace at the end of the buffer or the accessible portion of
14068 a narrowed buffer, the command displays an error message that looks
14069 like this:
14070
14071 @smallexample
14072 Search failed: "\\w+\\W*"
14073 @end smallexample
14074
14075 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can test for these
14076 bugs yourself.
14077
14078 First, evaluate the function in the usual manner to install it.
14079 @ifinfo
14080 Here is a copy of the definition. Place your cursor after the closing
14081 parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e} to install it.
14082
14083 @smallexample
14084 @group
14085 ;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
14086 (defun count-words-region (beginning end)
14087 "Print number of words in the region.
14088 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent character followed
14089 by at least one character that is not a word-constituent. The buffer's
14090 syntax table determines which characters these are."
14091 @end group
14092 @group
14093 (interactive "r")
14094 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14095 @end group
14096
14097 @group
14098 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14099 (save-excursion
14100 (goto-char beginning)
14101 (let ((count 0))
14102 @end group
14103
14104 @group
14105 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14106 (while (< (point) end)
14107 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
14108 (setq count (1+ count)))
14109 @end group
14110
14111 @group
14112 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14113 (cond ((zerop count)
14114 (message "The region does NOT have any words."))
14115 ((= 1 count) (message "The region has 1 word."))
14116 (t (message "The region has %d words." count))))))
14117 @end group
14118 @end smallexample
14119 @end ifinfo
14120
14121 @need 1000
14122 If you wish, you can also install this keybinding by evaluating it:
14123
14124 @smallexample
14125 (global-set-key "\C-c=" 'count-words-region)
14126 @end smallexample
14127
14128 To conduct the first test, set mark and point to the beginning and end
14129 of the following line and then type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x
14130 count-words-region} if you have not bound @kbd{C-c =}):
14131
14132 @smallexample
14133 one two three
14134 @end smallexample
14135
14136 @noindent
14137 Emacs will tell you, correctly, that the region has three words.
14138
14139 Repeat the test, but place mark at the beginning of the line and place
14140 point just @emph{before} the word @samp{one}. Again type the command
14141 @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x count-words-region}). Emacs should tell you
14142 that the region has no words, since it is composed only of the
14143 whitespace at the beginning of the line. But instead Emacs tells you
14144 that the region has one word!
14145
14146 For the third test, copy the sample line to the end of the
14147 @file{*scratch*} buffer and then type several spaces at the end of the
14148 line. Place mark right after the word @samp{three} and point at the
14149 end of line. (The end of the line will be the end of the buffer.)
14150 Type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x count-words-region}) as you did before.
14151 Again, Emacs should tell you that the region has no words, since it is
14152 composed only of the whitespace at the end of the line. Instead,
14153 Emacs displays an error message saying @samp{Search failed}.
14154
14155 The two bugs stem from the same problem.
14156
14157 Consider the first manifestation of the bug, in which the command
14158 tells you that the whitespace at the beginning of the line contains
14159 one word. What happens is this: The @code{M-x count-words-region}
14160 command moves point to the beginning of the region. The @code{while}
14161 tests whether the value of point is smaller than the value of
14162 @code{end}, which it is. Consequently, the regular expression search
14163 looks for and finds the first word. It leaves point after the word.
14164 @code{count} is set to one. The @code{while} loop repeats; but this
14165 time the value of point is larger than the value of @code{end}, the
14166 loop is exited; and the function displays a message saying the number
14167 of words in the region is one. In brief, the regular expression
14168 search looks for and finds the word even though it is outside
14169 the marked region.
14170
14171 In the second manifestation of the bug, the region is whitespace at
14172 the end of the buffer. Emacs says @samp{Search failed}. What happens
14173 is that the true-or-false-test in the @code{while} loop tests true, so
14174 the search expression is executed. But since there are no more words
14175 in the buffer, the search fails.
14176
14177 In both manifestations of the bug, the search extends or attempts to
14178 extend outside of the region.
14179
14180 The solution is to limit the search to the region---this is a fairly
14181 simple action, but as you may have come to expect, it is not quite as
14182 simple as you might think.
14183
14184 As we have seen, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes a search
14185 pattern as its first argument. But in addition to this first,
14186 mandatory argument, it accepts three optional arguments. The optional
14187 second argument bounds the search. The optional third argument, if
14188 @code{t}, causes the function to return @code{nil} rather than signal
14189 an error if the search fails. The optional fourth argument is a
14190 repeat count. (In Emacs, you can see a function's documentation by
14191 typing @kbd{C-h f}, the name of the function, and then @key{RET}.)
14192
14193 In the @code{count-words-region} definition, the value of the end of
14194 the region is held by the variable @code{end} which is passed as an
14195 argument to the function. Thus, we can add @code{end} as an argument
14196 to the regular expression search expression:
14197
14198 @smallexample
14199 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end)
14200 @end smallexample
14201
14202 However, if you make only this change to the @code{count-words-region}
14203 definition and then test the new version of the definition on a
14204 stretch of whitespace, you will receive an error message saying
14205 @samp{Search failed}.
14206
14207 What happens is this: the search is limited to the region, and fails
14208 as you expect because there are no word-constituent characters in the
14209 region. Since it fails, we receive an error message. But we do not
14210 want to receive an error message in this case; we want to receive the
14211 message that "The region does NOT have any words."
14212
14213 The solution to this problem is to provide @code{re-search-forward}
14214 with a third argument of @code{t}, which causes the function to return
14215 @code{nil} rather than signal an error if the search fails.
14216
14217 However, if you make this change and try it, you will see the message
14218 ``Counting words in region ... '' and @dots{} you will keep on seeing
14219 that message @dots{}, until you type @kbd{C-g} (@code{keyboard-quit}).
14220
14221 Here is what happens: the search is limited to the region, as before,
14222 and it fails because there are no word-constituent characters in the
14223 region, as expected. Consequently, the @code{re-search-forward}
14224 expression returns @code{nil}. It does nothing else. In particular,
14225 it does not move point, which it does as a side effect if it finds the
14226 search target. After the @code{re-search-forward} expression returns
14227 @code{nil}, the next expression in the @code{while} loop is evaluated.
14228 This expression increments the count. Then the loop repeats. The
14229 true-or-false-test tests true because the value of point is still less
14230 than the value of end, since the @code{re-search-forward} expression
14231 did not move point. @dots{} and the cycle repeats @dots{}
14232
14233 The @code{count-words-region} definition requires yet another
14234 modification, to cause the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} loop
14235 to test false if the search fails. Put another way, there are two
14236 conditions that must be satisfied in the true-or-false-test before the
14237 word count variable is incremented: point must still be within the
14238 region and the search expression must have found a word to count.
14239
14240 Since both the first condition and the second condition must be true
14241 together, the two expressions, the region test and the search
14242 expression, can be joined with an @code{and} special form and embedded in
14243 the @code{while} loop as the true-or-false-test, like this:
14244
14245 @smallexample
14246 (and (< (point) end) (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14247 @end smallexample
14248
14249 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
14250 @c also trouble with an overfull hbox
14251 @iftex
14252 @noindent
14253 (For information about @code{and}, see
14254 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
14255 @end iftex
14256 @ifinfo
14257 @noindent
14258 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
14259 information about @code{and}.)
14260 @end ifinfo
14261
14262 The @code{re-search-forward} expression returns @code{t} if the search
14263 succeeds and as a side effect moves point. Consequently, as words are
14264 found, point is moved through the region. When the search expression
14265 fails to find another word, or when point reaches the end of the
14266 region, the true-or-false-test tests false, the @code{while} loop
14267 exits, and the @code{count-words-region} function displays one or
14268 other of its messages.
14269
14270 After incorporating these final changes, the @code{count-words-region}
14271 works without bugs (or at least, without bugs that I have found!).
14272 Here is what it looks like:
14273
14274 @smallexample
14275 @group
14276 ;;; @r{Final version:} @code{while}
14277 (defun count-words-region (beginning end)
14278 "Print number of words in the region."
14279 (interactive "r")
14280 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14281 @end group
14282
14283 @group
14284 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14285 (save-excursion
14286 (let ((count 0))
14287 (goto-char beginning)
14288 @end group
14289
14290 @group
14291 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14292 (while (and (< (point) end)
14293 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14294 (setq count (1+ count)))
14295 @end group
14296
14297 @group
14298 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14299 (cond ((zerop count)
14300 (message
14301 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14302 ((= 1 count)
14303 (message
14304 "The region has 1 word."))
14305 (t
14306 (message
14307 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14308 @end group
14309 @end smallexample
14310
14311 @node recursive-count-words, Counting Exercise, count-words-region, Counting Words
14312 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
14313 @section Count Words Recursively
14314 @cindex Count words recursively
14315 @cindex Recursively counting words
14316 @cindex Words, counted recursively
14317
14318 You can write the function for counting words recursively as well as
14319 with a @code{while} loop. Let's see how this is done.
14320
14321 First, we need to recognize that the @code{count-words-region}
14322 function has three jobs: it sets up the appropriate conditions for
14323 counting to occur; it counts the words in the region; and it sends a
14324 message to the user telling how many words there are.
14325
14326 If we write a single recursive function to do everything, we will
14327 receive a message for every recursive call. If the region contains 13
14328 words, we will receive thirteen messages, one right after the other.
14329 We don't want this! Instead, we must write two functions to do the
14330 job, one of which (the recursive function) will be used inside of the
14331 other. One function will set up the conditions and display the
14332 message; the other will return the word count.
14333
14334 Let us start with the function that causes the message to be displayed.
14335 We can continue to call this @code{count-words-region}.
14336
14337 This is the function that the user will call. It will be interactive.
14338 Indeed, it will be similar to our previous versions of this
14339 function, except that it will call @code{recursive-count-words} to
14340 determine how many words are in the region.
14341
14342 @need 1250
14343 We can readily construct a template for this function, based on our
14344 previous versions:
14345
14346 @smallexample
14347 @group
14348 ;; @r{Recursive version; uses regular expression search}
14349 (defun count-words-region (beginning end)
14350 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14351 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
14352 @end group
14353 @group
14354
14355 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14356 (@var{explanatory message})
14357 (@var{set-up functions}@dots{}
14358 @end group
14359 @group
14360
14361 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14362 @var{recursive call}
14363 @end group
14364 @group
14365
14366 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14367 @var{message providing word count}))
14368 @end group
14369 @end smallexample
14370
14371 The definition looks straightforward, except that somehow the count
14372 returned by the recursive call must be passed to the message
14373 displaying the word count. A little thought suggests that this can be
14374 done by making use of a @code{let} expression: we can bind a variable
14375 in the varlist of a @code{let} expression to the number of words in
14376 the region, as returned by the recursive call; and then the
14377 @code{cond} expression, using binding, can display the value to the
14378 user.
14379
14380 Often, one thinks of the binding within a @code{let} expression as
14381 somehow secondary to the `primary' work of a function. But in this
14382 case, what you might consider the `primary' job of the function,
14383 counting words, is done within the @code{let} expression.
14384
14385 @need 1250
14386 Using @code{let}, the function definition looks like this:
14387
14388 @smallexample
14389 @group
14390 (defun count-words-region (beginning end)
14391 "Print number of words in the region."
14392 (interactive "r")
14393 @end group
14394
14395 @group
14396 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14397 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14398 (save-excursion
14399 (goto-char beginning)
14400 @end group
14401
14402 @group
14403 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14404 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14405 @end group
14406
14407 @group
14408 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14409 (cond ((zerop count)
14410 (message
14411 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14412 ((= 1 count)
14413 (message
14414 "The region has 1 word."))
14415 (t
14416 (message
14417 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14418 @end group
14419 @end smallexample
14420
14421 Next, we need to write the recursive counting function.
14422
14423 A recursive function has at least three parts: the `do-again-test', the
14424 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call.
14425
14426 The do-again-test determines whether the function will or will not be
14427 called again. Since we are counting words in a region and can use a
14428 function that moves point forward for every word, the do-again-test
14429 can check whether point is still within the region. The do-again-test
14430 should find the value of point and determine whether point is before,
14431 at, or after the value of the end of the region. We can use the
14432 @code{point} function to locate point. Clearly, we must pass the
14433 value of the end of the region to the recursive counting function as an
14434 argument.
14435
14436 In addition, the do-again-test should also test whether the search finds a
14437 word. If it does not, the function should not call itself again.
14438
14439 The next-step-expression changes a value so that when the recursive
14440 function is supposed to stop calling itself, it stops. More
14441 precisely, the next-step-expression changes a value so that at the
14442 right time, the do-again-test stops the recursive function from
14443 calling itself again. In this case, the next-step-expression can be
14444 the expression that moves point forward, word by word.
14445
14446 The third part of a recursive function is the recursive call.
14447
14448 Somewhere, also, we also need a part that does the `work' of the
14449 function, a part that does the counting. A vital part!
14450
14451 @need 1250
14452 But already, we have an outline of the recursive counting function:
14453
14454 @smallexample
14455 @group
14456 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14457 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14458 @var{do-again-test}
14459 @var{next-step-expression}
14460 @var{recursive call})
14461 @end group
14462 @end smallexample
14463
14464 Now we need to fill in the slots. Let's start with the simplest cases
14465 first: if point is at or beyond the end of the region, there cannot
14466 be any words in the region, so the function should return zero.
14467 Likewise, if the search fails, there are no words to count, so the
14468 function should return zero.
14469
14470 On the other hand, if point is within the region and the search
14471 succeeds, the function should call itself again.
14472
14473 @need 800
14474 Thus, the do-again-test should look like this:
14475
14476 @smallexample
14477 @group
14478 (and (< (point) region-end)
14479 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14480 @end group
14481 @end smallexample
14482
14483 Note that the search expression is part of the do-again-test---the
14484 function returns @code{t} if its search succeeds and @code{nil} if it
14485 fails. (@xref{Whitespace Bug, , The Whitespace Bug in
14486 @code{count-words-region}}, for an explanation of how
14487 @code{re-search-forward} works.)
14488
14489 The do-again-test is the true-or-false test of an @code{if} clause.
14490 Clearly, if the do-again-test succeeds, the then-part of the @code{if}
14491 clause should call the function again; but if it fails, the else-part
14492 should return zero since either point is outside the region or the
14493 search failed because there were no words to find.
14494
14495 But before considering the recursive call, we need to consider the
14496 next-step-expression. What is it? Interestingly, it is the search
14497 part of the do-again-test.
14498
14499 In addition to returning @code{t} or @code{nil} for the
14500 do-again-test, @code{re-search-forward} moves point forward as a side
14501 effect of a successful search. This is the action that changes the
14502 value of point so that the recursive function stops calling itself
14503 when point completes its movement through the region. Consequently,
14504 the @code{re-search-forward} expression is the next-step-expression.
14505
14506 @need 1200
14507 In outline, then, the body of the @code{recursive-count-words}
14508 function looks like this:
14509
14510 @smallexample
14511 @group
14512 (if @var{do-again-test-and-next-step-combined}
14513 ;; @r{then}
14514 @var{recursive-call-returning-count}
14515 ;; @r{else}
14516 @var{return-zero})
14517 @end group
14518 @end smallexample
14519
14520 How to incorporate the mechanism that counts?
14521
14522 If you are not used to writing recursive functions, a question like
14523 this can be troublesome. But it can and should be approached
14524 systematically.
14525
14526 We know that the counting mechanism should be associated in some way
14527 with the recursive call. Indeed, since the next-step-expression moves
14528 point forward by one word, and since a recursive call is made for
14529 each word, the counting mechanism must be an expression that adds one
14530 to the value returned by a call to @code{recursive-count-words}.
14531
14532 @need 800
14533 Consider several cases:
14534
14535 @itemize @bullet
14536 @item
14537 If there are two words in the region, the function should return
14538 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14539 the first word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14540 words in the region, which in this case is one.
14541
14542 @item
14543 If there is one word in the region, the function should return
14544 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14545 that word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14546 words in the region, which in this case is zero.
14547
14548 @item
14549 If there are no words in the region, the function should return zero.
14550 @end itemize
14551
14552 From the sketch we can see that the else-part of the @code{if} returns
14553 zero for the case of no words. This means that the then-part of the
14554 @code{if} must return a value resulting from adding one to the value
14555 returned from a count of the remaining words.
14556
14557 @need 1200
14558 The expression will look like this, where @code{1+} is a function that
14559 adds one to its argument.
14560
14561 @smallexample
14562 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14563 @end smallexample
14564
14565 @need 1200
14566 The whole @code{recursive-count-words} function will then look like
14567 this:
14568
14569 @smallexample
14570 @group
14571 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14572 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14573
14574 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14575 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14576 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14577 @end group
14578
14579 @group
14580 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14581 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14582
14583 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14584 0))
14585 @end group
14586 @end smallexample
14587
14588 @need 1250
14589 Let's examine how this works:
14590
14591 If there are no words in the region, the else part of the @code{if}
14592 expression is evaluated and consequently the function returns zero.
14593
14594 If there is one word in the region, the value of point is less than
14595 the value of @code{region-end} and the search succeeds. In this case,
14596 the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression tests true, and the
14597 then-part of the @code{if} expression is evaluated. The counting
14598 expression is evaluated. This expression returns a value (which will
14599 be the value returned by the whole function) that is the sum of one
14600 added to the value returned by a recursive call.
14601
14602 Meanwhile, the next-step-expression has caused point to jump over the
14603 first (and in this case only) word in the region. This means that
14604 when @code{(recursive-count-words region-end)} is evaluated a second
14605 time, as a result of the recursive call, the value of point will be
14606 equal to or greater than the value of region end. So this time,
14607 @code{recursive-count-words} will return zero. The zero will be added
14608 to one, and the original evaluation of @code{recursive-count-words}
14609 will return one plus zero, which is one, which is the correct amount.
14610
14611 Clearly, if there are two words in the region, the first call to
14612 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14613 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14614 remaining word---that is, it adds one to one, producing two, which is
14615 the correct amount.
14616
14617 Similarly, if there are three words in the region, the first call to
14618 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14619 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14620 remaining two words---and so on and so on.
14621
14622 @need 1250
14623 @noindent
14624 With full documentation the two functions look like this:
14625
14626 @need 1250
14627 @noindent
14628 The recursive function:
14629
14630 @findex recursive-count-words
14631 @smallexample
14632 @group
14633 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14634 "Number of words between point and REGION-END."
14635 @end group
14636
14637 @group
14638 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14639 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14640 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14641 @end group
14642
14643 @group
14644 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14645 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14646
14647 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14648 0))
14649 @end group
14650 @end smallexample
14651
14652 @need 800
14653 @noindent
14654 The wrapper:
14655
14656 @smallexample
14657 @group
14658 ;;; @r{Recursive version}
14659 (defun count-words-region (beginning end)
14660 "Print number of words in the region.
14661 @end group
14662
14663 @group
14664 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14665 character followed by at least one character that is
14666 not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax table
14667 determines which characters these are."
14668 @end group
14669 @group
14670 (interactive "r")
14671 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14672 (save-excursion
14673 (goto-char beginning)
14674 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14675 @end group
14676 @group
14677 (cond ((zerop count)
14678 (message
14679 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14680 @end group
14681 @group
14682 ((= 1 count)
14683 (message "The region has 1 word."))
14684 (t
14685 (message
14686 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14687 @end group
14688 @end smallexample
14689
14690 @node Counting Exercise, , recursive-count-words, Counting Words
14691 @section Exercise: Counting Punctuation
14692
14693 Using a @code{while} loop, write a function to count the number of
14694 punctuation marks in a region---period, comma, semicolon, colon,
14695 exclamation mark, and question mark. Do the same using recursion.
14696
14697 @node Words in a defun, Readying a Graph, Counting Words, Top
14698 @chapter Counting Words in a @code{defun}
14699 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14700 @cindex Word counting in a @code{defun}
14701
14702 Our next project is to count the number of words in a function
14703 definition. Clearly, this can be done using some variant of
14704 @code{count-word-region}. @xref{Counting Words, , Counting Words:
14705 Repetition and Regexps}. If we are just going to count the words in
14706 one definition, it is easy enough to mark the definition with the
14707 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}) command, and then call
14708 @code{count-word-region}.
14709
14710 However, I am more ambitious: I want to count the words and symbols in
14711 every definition in the Emacs sources and then print a graph that
14712 shows how many functions there are of each length: how many contain 40
14713 to 49 words or symbols, how many contain 50 to 59 words or symbols,
14714 and so on. I have often been curious how long a typical function is,
14715 and this will tell.
14716
14717 @menu
14718 * Divide and Conquer::
14719 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
14720 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
14721 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{count-words}.
14722 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
14723 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
14724 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
14725 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
14726 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
14727 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
14728 @end menu
14729
14730 @node Divide and Conquer, Words and Symbols, Words in a defun, Words in a defun
14731 @ifnottex
14732 @unnumberedsec Divide and Conquer
14733 @end ifnottex
14734
14735 Described in one phrase, the histogram project is daunting; but
14736 divided into numerous small steps, each of which we can take one at a
14737 time, the project becomes less fearsome. Let us consider what the
14738 steps must be:
14739
14740 @itemize @bullet
14741 @item
14742 First, write a function to count the words in one definition. This
14743 includes the problem of handling symbols as well as words.
14744
14745 @item
14746 Second, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14747 in a file. This function can use the @code{count-words-in-defun}
14748 function.
14749
14750 @item
14751 Third, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14752 in each of several files. This entails automatically finding the
14753 various files, switching to them, and counting the words in the
14754 definitions within them.
14755
14756 @item
14757 Fourth, write a function to convert the list of numbers that we
14758 created in step three to a form that will be suitable for printing as
14759 a graph.
14760
14761 @item
14762 Fifth, write a function to print the results as a graph.
14763 @end itemize
14764
14765 This is quite a project! But if we take each step slowly, it will not
14766 be difficult.
14767
14768 @node Words and Symbols, Syntax, Divide and Conquer, Words in a defun
14769 @section What to Count?
14770 @cindex Words and symbols in defun
14771
14772 When we first start thinking about how to count the words in a
14773 function definition, the first question is (or ought to be) what are
14774 we going to count? When we speak of `words' with respect to a Lisp
14775 function definition, we are actually speaking, in large part, of
14776 `symbols'. For example, the following @code{multiply-by-seven}
14777 function contains the five symbols @code{defun},
14778 @code{multiply-by-seven}, @code{number}, @code{*}, and @code{7}. In
14779 addition, in the documentation string, it contains the four words
14780 @samp{Multiply}, @samp{NUMBER}, @samp{by}, and @samp{seven}. The
14781 symbol @samp{number} is repeated, so the definition contains a total
14782 of ten words and symbols.
14783
14784 @smallexample
14785 @group
14786 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14787 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14788 (* 7 number))
14789 @end group
14790 @end smallexample
14791
14792 @noindent
14793 However, if we mark the @code{multiply-by-seven} definition with
14794 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}), and then call
14795 @code{count-words-region} on it, we will find that
14796 @code{count-words-region} claims the definition has eleven words, not
14797 ten! Something is wrong!
14798
14799 The problem is twofold: @code{count-words-region} does not count the
14800 @samp{*} as a word, and it counts the single symbol,
14801 @code{multiply-by-seven}, as containing three words. The hyphens are
14802 treated as if they were interword spaces rather than intraword
14803 connectors: @samp{multiply-by-seven} is counted as if it were written
14804 @samp{multiply by seven}.
14805
14806 The cause of this confusion is the regular expression search within
14807 the @code{count-words-region} definition that moves point forward word
14808 by word. In the canonical version of @code{count-words-region}, the
14809 regexp is:
14810
14811 @smallexample
14812 "\\w+\\W*"
14813 @end smallexample
14814
14815 @noindent
14816 This regular expression is a pattern defining one or more word
14817 constituent characters possibly followed by one or more characters
14818 that are not word constituents. What is meant by `word constituent
14819 characters' brings us to the issue of syntax, which is worth a section
14820 of its own.
14821
14822 @node Syntax, count-words-in-defun, Words and Symbols, Words in a defun
14823 @section What Constitutes a Word or Symbol?
14824 @cindex Syntax categories and tables
14825
14826 Emacs treats different characters as belonging to different
14827 @dfn{syntax categories}. For example, the regular expression,
14828 @samp{\\w+}, is a pattern specifying one or more @emph{word
14829 constituent} characters. Word constituent characters are members of
14830 one syntax category. Other syntax categories include the class of
14831 punctuation characters, such as the period and the comma, and the
14832 class of whitespace characters, such as the blank space and the tab
14833 character. (For more information, see @ref{Syntax, Syntax, The Syntax
14834 Table, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and @ref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax
14835 Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
14836
14837 Syntax tables specify which characters belong to which categories.
14838 Usually, a hyphen is not specified as a `word constituent character'.
14839 Instead, it is specified as being in the `class of characters that are
14840 part of symbol names but not words.' This means that the
14841 @code{count-words-region} function treats it in the same way it treats
14842 an interword white space, which is why @code{count-words-region}
14843 counts @samp{multiply-by-seven} as three words.
14844
14845 There are two ways to cause Emacs to count @samp{multiply-by-seven} as
14846 one symbol: modify the syntax table or modify the regular expression.
14847
14848 We could redefine a hyphen as a word constituent character by
14849 modifying the syntax table that Emacs keeps for each mode. This
14850 action would serve our purpose, except that a hyphen is merely the
14851 most common character within symbols that is not typically a word
14852 constituent character; there are others, too.
14853
14854 Alternatively, we can redefine the regular expression used in the
14855 @code{count-words} definition so as to include symbols. This
14856 procedure has the merit of clarity, but the task is a little tricky.
14857
14858 @need 1200
14859 The first part is simple enough: the pattern must match ``at least one
14860 character that is a word or symbol constituent''. Thus:
14861
14862 @smallexample
14863 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+"
14864 @end smallexample
14865
14866 @noindent
14867 The @samp{\\(} is the first part of the grouping construct that
14868 includes the @samp{\\w} and the @samp{\\s_} as alternatives, separated
14869 by the @samp{\\|}. The @samp{\\w} matches any word-constituent
14870 character and the @samp{\\s_} matches any character that is part of a
14871 symbol name but not a word-constituent character. The @samp{+}
14872 following the group indicates that the word or symbol constituent
14873 characters must be matched at least once.
14874
14875 However, the second part of the regexp is more difficult to design.
14876 What we want is to follow the first part with ``optionally one or more
14877 characters that are not constituents of a word or symbol''. At first,
14878 I thought I could define this with the following:
14879
14880 @smallexample
14881 "\\(\\W\\|\\S_\\)*"
14882 @end smallexample
14883
14884 @noindent
14885 The upper case @samp{W} and @samp{S} match characters that are
14886 @emph{not} word or symbol constituents. Unfortunately, this
14887 expression matches any character that is either not a word constituent
14888 or not a symbol constituent. This matches any character!
14889
14890 I then noticed that every word or symbol in my test region was
14891 followed by white space (blank space, tab, or newline). So I tried
14892 placing a pattern to match one or more blank spaces after the pattern
14893 for one or more word or symbol constituents. This failed, too. Words
14894 and symbols are often separated by whitespace, but in actual code
14895 parentheses may follow symbols and punctuation may follow words. So
14896 finally, I designed a pattern in which the word or symbol constituents
14897 are followed optionally by characters that are not white space and
14898 then followed optionally by white space.
14899
14900 @need 800
14901 Here is the full regular expression:
14902
14903 @smallexample
14904 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14905 @end smallexample
14906
14907 @node count-words-in-defun, Several defuns, Syntax, Words in a defun
14908 @section The @code{count-words-in-defun} Function
14909 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14910
14911 We have seen that there are several ways to write a
14912 @code{count-word-region} function. To write a
14913 @code{count-words-in-defun}, we need merely adapt one of these
14914 versions.
14915
14916 The version that uses a @code{while} loop is easy to understand, so I
14917 am going to adapt that. Because @code{count-words-in-defun} will be
14918 part of a more complex program, it need not be interactive and it need
14919 not display a message but just return the count. These considerations
14920 simplify the definition a little.
14921
14922 On the other hand, @code{count-words-in-defun} will be used within a
14923 buffer that contains function definitions. Consequently, it is
14924 reasonable to ask that the function determine whether it is called
14925 when point is within a function definition, and if it is, to return
14926 the count for that definition. This adds complexity to the
14927 definition, but saves us from needing to pass arguments to the
14928 function.
14929
14930 @need 1250
14931 These considerations lead us to prepare the following template:
14932
14933 @smallexample
14934 @group
14935 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14936 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14937 (@var{set up}@dots{}
14938 (@var{while loop}@dots{})
14939 @var{return count})
14940 @end group
14941 @end smallexample
14942
14943 @noindent
14944 As usual, our job is to fill in the slots.
14945
14946 First, the set up.
14947
14948 We are presuming that this function will be called within a buffer
14949 containing function definitions. Point will either be within a
14950 function definition or not. For @code{count-words-in-defun} to work,
14951 point must move to the beginning of the definition, a counter must
14952 start at zero, and the counting loop must stop when point reaches the
14953 end of the definition.
14954
14955 The @code{beginning-of-defun} function searches backwards for an
14956 opening delimiter such as a @samp{(} at the beginning of a line, and
14957 moves point to that position, or else to the limit of the search. In
14958 practice, this means that @code{beginning-of-defun} moves point to the
14959 beginning of an enclosing or preceding function definition, or else to
14960 the beginning of the buffer. We can use @code{beginning-of-defun} to
14961 place point where we wish to start.
14962
14963 The @code{while} loop requires a counter to keep track of the words or
14964 symbols being counted. A @code{let} expression can be used to create
14965 a local variable for this purpose, and bind it to an initial value of zero.
14966
14967 The @code{end-of-defun} function works like @code{beginning-of-defun}
14968 except that it moves point to the end of the definition.
14969 @code{end-of-defun} can be used as part of an expression that
14970 determines the position of the end of the definition.
14971
14972 The set up for @code{count-words-in-defun} takes shape rapidly: first
14973 we move point to the beginning of the definition, then we create a
14974 local variable to hold the count, and finally, we record the position
14975 of the end of the definition so the @code{while} loop will know when to stop
14976 looping.
14977
14978 @need 1250
14979 The code looks like this:
14980
14981 @smallexample
14982 @group
14983 (beginning-of-defun)
14984 (let ((count 0)
14985 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14986 @end group
14987 @end smallexample
14988
14989 @noindent
14990 The code is simple. The only slight complication is likely to concern
14991 @code{end}: it is bound to the position of the end of the definition
14992 by a @code{save-excursion} expression that returns the value of point
14993 after @code{end-of-defun} temporarily moves it to the end of the
14994 definition.
14995
14996 The second part of the @code{count-words-in-defun}, after the set up,
14997 is the @code{while} loop.
14998
14999 The loop must contain an expression that jumps point forward word by
15000 word and symbol by symbol, and another expression that counts the
15001 jumps. The true-or-false-test for the @code{while} loop should test
15002 true so long as point should jump forward, and false when point is at
15003 the end of the definition. We have already redefined the regular
15004 expression for this (@pxref{Syntax}), so the loop is straightforward:
15005
15006 @smallexample
15007 @group
15008 (while (and (< (point) end)
15009 (re-search-forward
15010 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*" end t)
15011 (setq count (1+ count)))
15012 @end group
15013 @end smallexample
15014
15015 The third part of the function definition returns the count of words
15016 and symbols. This part is the last expression within the body of the
15017 @code{let} expression, and can be, very simply, the local variable
15018 @code{count}, which when evaluated returns the count.
15019
15020 @need 1250
15021 Put together, the @code{count-words-in-defun} definition looks like this:
15022
15023 @findex count-words-in-defun
15024 @smallexample
15025 @group
15026 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
15027 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
15028 (beginning-of-defun)
15029 (let ((count 0)
15030 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
15031 @end group
15032 @group
15033 (while
15034 (and (< (point) end)
15035 (re-search-forward
15036 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
15037 end t))
15038 (setq count (1+ count)))
15039 count))
15040 @end group
15041 @end smallexample
15042
15043 How to test this? The function is not interactive, but it is easy to
15044 put a wrapper around the function to make it interactive; we can use
15045 almost the same code as for the recursive version of
15046 @code{count-words-region}:
15047
15048 @smallexample
15049 @group
15050 ;;; @r{Interactive version.}
15051 (defun count-words-defun ()
15052 "Number of words and symbols in a function definition."
15053 (interactive)
15054 (message
15055 "Counting words and symbols in function definition ... ")
15056 @end group
15057 @group
15058 (let ((count (count-words-in-defun)))
15059 (cond
15060 ((zerop count)
15061 (message
15062 "The definition does NOT have any words or symbols."))
15063 @end group
15064 @group
15065 ((= 1 count)
15066 (message
15067 "The definition has 1 word or symbol."))
15068 (t
15069 (message
15070 "The definition has %d words or symbols." count)))))
15071 @end group
15072 @end smallexample
15073
15074 @need 800
15075 @noindent
15076 Let's re-use @kbd{C-c =} as a convenient keybinding:
15077
15078 @smallexample
15079 (global-set-key "\C-c=" 'count-words-defun)
15080 @end smallexample
15081
15082 Now we can try out @code{count-words-defun}: install both
15083 @code{count-words-in-defun} and @code{count-words-defun}, and set the
15084 keybinding, and then place the cursor within the following definition:
15085
15086 @smallexample
15087 @group
15088 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
15089 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
15090 (* 7 number))
15091 @result{} 10
15092 @end group
15093 @end smallexample
15094
15095 @noindent
15096 Success! The definition has 10 words and symbols.
15097
15098 The next problem is to count the numbers of words and symbols in
15099 several definitions within a single file.
15100
15101 @node Several defuns, Find a File, count-words-in-defun, Words in a defun
15102 @section Count Several @code{defuns} Within a File
15103
15104 A file such as @file{simple.el} may have a hundred or more function
15105 definitions within it. Our long term goal is to collect statistics on
15106 many files, but as a first step, our immediate goal is to collect
15107 statistics on one file.
15108
15109 The information will be a series of numbers, each number being the
15110 length of a function definition. We can store the numbers in a list.
15111
15112 We know that we will want to incorporate the information regarding one
15113 file with information about many other files; this means that the
15114 function for counting definition lengths within one file need only
15115 return the list of lengths. It need not and should not display any
15116 messages.
15117
15118 The word count commands contain one expression to jump point forward
15119 word by word and another expression to count the jumps. The function
15120 to return the lengths of definitions can be designed to work the same
15121 way, with one expression to jump point forward definition by
15122 definition and another expression to construct the lengths' list.
15123
15124 This statement of the problem makes it elementary to write the
15125 function definition. Clearly, we will start the count at the
15126 beginning of the file, so the first command will be @code{(goto-char
15127 (point-min))}. Next, we start the @code{while} loop; and the
15128 true-or-false test of the loop can be a regular expression search for
15129 the next function definition---so long as the search succeeds, point
15130 is moved forward and then the body of the loop is evaluated. The body
15131 needs an expression that constructs the lengths' list. @code{cons},
15132 the list construction command, can be used to create the list. That
15133 is almost all there is to it.
15134
15135 @need 800
15136 Here is what this fragment of code looks like:
15137
15138 @smallexample
15139 @group
15140 (goto-char (point-min))
15141 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
15142 (setq lengths-list
15143 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
15144 @end group
15145 @end smallexample
15146
15147 What we have left out is the mechanism for finding the file that
15148 contains the function definitions.
15149
15150 In previous examples, we either used this, the Info file, or we
15151 switched back and forth to some other buffer, such as the
15152 @file{*scratch*} buffer.
15153
15154 Finding a file is a new process that we have not yet discussed.
15155
15156 @node Find a File, lengths-list-file, Several defuns, Words in a defun
15157 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
15158 @section Find a File
15159 @cindex Find a File
15160
15161 To find a file in Emacs, you use the @kbd{C-x C-f} (@code{find-file})
15162 command. This command is almost, but not quite right for the lengths
15163 problem.
15164
15165 @need 1200
15166 Let's look at the source for @code{find-file}:
15167
15168 @smallexample
15169 @group
15170 (defun find-file (filename)
15171 "Edit file FILENAME.
15172 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
15173 creating one if none already exists."
15174 (interactive "FFind file: ")
15175 (switch-to-buffer (find-file-noselect filename)))
15176 @end group
15177 @end smallexample
15178
15179 @noindent
15180 (The most recent version of the @code{find-file} function definition
15181 permits you to specify optional wildcards to visit multiple files; that
15182 makes the definition more complex and we will not discuss it here,
15183 since it is not relevant. You can see its source using either
15184 @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) or @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}).)
15185
15186 @ignore
15187 In Emacs 22
15188 (defun find-file (filename &optional wildcards)
15189 "Edit file FILENAME.
15190 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
15191 creating one if none already exists.
15192 Interactively, the default if you just type RET is the current directory,
15193 but the visited file name is available through the minibuffer history:
15194 type M-n to pull it into the minibuffer.
15195
15196 Interactively, or if WILDCARDS is non-nil in a call from Lisp,
15197 expand wildcards (if any) and visit multiple files. You can
15198 suppress wildcard expansion by setting `find-file-wildcards' to nil.
15199
15200 To visit a file without any kind of conversion and without
15201 automatically choosing a major mode, use \\[find-file-literally]."
15202 (interactive (find-file-read-args "Find file: " nil))
15203 (let ((value (find-file-noselect filename nil nil wildcards)))
15204 (if (listp value)
15205 (mapcar 'switch-to-buffer (nreverse value))
15206 (switch-to-buffer value))))
15207 @end ignore
15208
15209 The definition I am showing possesses short but complete documentation
15210 and an interactive specification that prompts you for a file name when
15211 you use the command interactively. The body of the definition
15212 contains two functions, @code{find-file-noselect} and
15213 @code{switch-to-buffer}.
15214
15215 According to its documentation as shown by @kbd{C-h f} (the
15216 @code{describe-function} command), the @code{find-file-noselect}
15217 function reads the named file into a buffer and returns the buffer.
15218 (Its most recent version includes an optional wildcards argument,
15219 too, as well as another to read a file literally and an other you
15220 suppress warning messages. These optional arguments are irrelevant.)
15221
15222 However, the @code{find-file-noselect} function does not select the
15223 buffer in which it puts the file. Emacs does not switch its attention
15224 (or yours if you are using @code{find-file-noselect}) to the selected
15225 buffer. That is what @code{switch-to-buffer} does: it switches the
15226 buffer to which Emacs attention is directed; and it switches the
15227 buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer. We have discussed
15228 buffer switching elsewhere. (@xref{Switching Buffers}.)
15229
15230 In this histogram project, we do not need to display each file on the
15231 screen as the program determines the length of each definition within
15232 it. Instead of employing @code{switch-to-buffer}, we can work with
15233 @code{set-buffer}, which redirects the attention of the computer
15234 program to a different buffer but does not redisplay it on the screen.
15235 So instead of calling on @code{find-file} to do the job, we must write
15236 our own expression.
15237
15238 The task is easy: use @code{find-file-noselect} and @code{set-buffer}.
15239
15240 @node lengths-list-file, Several files, Find a File, Words in a defun
15241 @section @code{lengths-list-file} in Detail
15242
15243 The core of the @code{lengths-list-file} function is a @code{while}
15244 loop containing a function to move point forward `defun by defun' and
15245 a function to count the number of words and symbols in each defun.
15246 This core must be surrounded by functions that do various other tasks,
15247 including finding the file, and ensuring that point starts out at the
15248 beginning of the file. The function definition looks like this:
15249 @findex lengths-list-file
15250
15251 @smallexample
15252 @group
15253 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
15254 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
15255 The returned list is a list of numbers.
15256 Each number is the number of words or
15257 symbols in one function definition."
15258 @end group
15259 @group
15260 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
15261 (save-excursion
15262 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
15263 (lengths-list))
15264 (set-buffer buffer)
15265 (setq buffer-read-only t)
15266 (widen)
15267 (goto-char (point-min))
15268 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
15269 (setq lengths-list
15270 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
15271 (kill-buffer buffer)
15272 lengths-list)))
15273 @end group
15274 @end smallexample
15275
15276 @noindent
15277 The function is passed one argument, the name of the file on which it
15278 will work. It has four lines of documentation, but no interactive
15279 specification. Since people worry that a computer is broken if they
15280 don't see anything going on, the first line of the body is a
15281 message.
15282
15283 The next line contains a @code{save-excursion} that returns Emacs'
15284 attention to the current buffer when the function completes. This is
15285 useful in case you embed this function in another function that
15286 presumes point is restored to the original buffer.
15287
15288 In the varlist of the @code{let} expression, Emacs finds the file and
15289 binds the local variable @code{buffer} to the buffer containing the
15290 file. At the same time, Emacs creates @code{lengths-list} as a local
15291 variable.
15292
15293 Next, Emacs switches its attention to the buffer.
15294
15295 In the following line, Emacs makes the buffer read-only. Ideally,
15296 this line is not necessary. None of the functions for counting words
15297 and symbols in a function definition should change the buffer.
15298 Besides, the buffer is not going to be saved, even if it were changed.
15299 This line is entirely the consequence of great, perhaps excessive,
15300 caution. The reason for the caution is that this function and those
15301 it calls work on the sources for Emacs and it is inconvenient if they
15302 are inadvertently modified. It goes without saying that I did not
15303 realize a need for this line until an experiment went awry and started
15304 to modify my Emacs source files @dots{}
15305
15306 Next comes a call to widen the buffer if it is narrowed. This
15307 function is usually not needed---Emacs creates a fresh buffer if none
15308 already exists; but if a buffer visiting the file already exists Emacs
15309 returns that one. In this case, the buffer may be narrowed and must
15310 be widened. If we wanted to be fully `user-friendly', we would
15311 arrange to save the restriction and the location of point, but we
15312 won't.
15313
15314 The @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression moves point to the
15315 beginning of the buffer.
15316
15317 Then comes a @code{while} loop in which the `work' of the function is
15318 carried out. In the loop, Emacs determines the length of each
15319 definition and constructs a lengths' list containing the information.
15320
15321 Emacs kills the buffer after working through it. This is to save
15322 space inside of Emacs. My version of GNU Emacs 19 contained over 300
15323 source files of interest; GNU Emacs 22 contains over a thousand source
15324 files. Another function will apply @code{lengths-list-file} to each
15325 of the files.
15326
15327 Finally, the last expression within the @code{let} expression is the
15328 @code{lengths-list} variable; its value is returned as the value of
15329 the whole function.
15330
15331 You can try this function by installing it in the usual fashion. Then
15332 place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
15333 C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}).
15334
15335 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15336 @smallexample
15337 (lengths-list-file
15338 "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el")
15339 @end smallexample
15340
15341 @noindent
15342 (You may need to change the pathname of the file; the one here is for
15343 GNU Emacs version 22.1.1. To change the expression, copy it to
15344 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and edit it.
15345
15346 @need 1200
15347 @noindent
15348 (Also, to see the full length of the list, rather than a truncated
15349 version, you may have to evaluate the following:
15350
15351 @smallexample
15352 (custom-set-variables '(eval-expression-print-length nil))
15353 @end smallexample
15354
15355 @noindent
15356 (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}}.
15357 Then evaluate the @code{lengths-list-file} expression.)
15358
15359 @need 1200
15360 The lengths' list for @file{debug.el} takes less than a second to
15361 produce and looks like this in GNU Emacs 22:
15362
15363 @smallexample
15364 (83 113 105 144 289 22 30 97 48 89 25 52 52 88 28 29 77 49 43 290 232 587)
15365 @end smallexample
15366
15367 @need 1500
15368 (Using my old machine, the version 19 lengths' list for @file{debug.el}
15369 took seven seconds to produce and looked like this:
15370
15371 @smallexample
15372 (75 41 80 62 20 45 44 68 45 12 34 235)
15373 @end smallexample
15374
15375 (The newer version of @file{debug.el} contains more defuns than the
15376 earlier one; and my new machine is much faster than the old one.)
15377
15378 Note that the length of the last definition in the file is first in
15379 the list.
15380
15381 @node Several files, Several files recursively, lengths-list-file, Words in a defun
15382 @section Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
15383
15384 In the previous section, we created a function that returns a list of
15385 the lengths of each definition in a file. Now, we want to define a
15386 function to return a master list of the lengths of the definitions in
15387 a list of files.
15388
15389 Working on each of a list of files is a repetitious act, so we can use
15390 either a @code{while} loop or recursion.
15391
15392 @menu
15393 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
15394 * append:: Attach one list to another.
15395 @end menu
15396
15397 @node lengths-list-many-files, append, Several files, Several files
15398 @ifnottex
15399 @unnumberedsubsec Determine the lengths of @code{defuns}
15400 @end ifnottex
15401
15402 The design using a @code{while} loop is routine. The argument passed
15403 the function is a list of files. As we saw earlier (@pxref{Loop
15404 Example}), you can write a @code{while} loop so that the body of the
15405 loop is evaluated if such a list contains elements, but to exit the
15406 loop if the list is empty. For this design to work, the body of the
15407 loop must contain an expression that shortens the list each time the
15408 body is evaluated, so that eventually the list is empty. The usual
15409 technique is to set the value of the list to the value of the @sc{cdr}
15410 of the list each time the body is evaluated.
15411
15412 @need 800
15413 The template looks like this:
15414
15415 @smallexample
15416 @group
15417 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
15418 @var{body}@dots{}
15419 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
15420 @end group
15421 @end smallexample
15422
15423 Also, we remember that a @code{while} loop returns @code{nil} (the
15424 result of evaluating the true-or-false-test), not the result of any
15425 evaluation within its body. (The evaluations within the body of the
15426 loop are done for their side effects.) However, the expression that
15427 sets the lengths' list is part of the body---and that is the value
15428 that we want returned by the function as a whole. To do this, we
15429 enclose the @code{while} loop within a @code{let} expression, and
15430 arrange that the last element of the @code{let} expression contains
15431 the value of the lengths' list. (@xref{Incrementing Example, , Loop
15432 Example with an Incrementing Counter}.)
15433
15434 @findex lengths-list-many-files
15435 @need 1250
15436 These considerations lead us directly to the function itself:
15437
15438 @smallexample
15439 @group
15440 ;;; @r{Use @code{while} loop.}
15441 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15442 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
15443 @end group
15444 @group
15445 (let (lengths-list)
15446
15447 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
15448 (while list-of-files
15449 (setq lengths-list
15450 (append
15451 lengths-list
15452
15453 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
15454 (lengths-list-file
15455 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
15456 @end group
15457
15458 @group
15459 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
15460 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
15461
15462 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
15463 lengths-list))
15464 @end group
15465 @end smallexample
15466
15467 @code{expand-file-name} is a built-in function that converts a file
15468 name to the absolute, long, path name form. The function employs the
15469 name of the directory in which the function is called.
15470
15471 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15472 @need 1500
15473 Thus, if @code{expand-file-name} is called on @code{debug.el} when
15474 Emacs is visiting the
15475 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/} directory,
15476
15477 @smallexample
15478 debug.el
15479 @end smallexample
15480
15481 @need 800
15482 @noindent
15483 becomes
15484
15485 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15486 @smallexample
15487 /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el
15488 @end smallexample
15489
15490 The only other new element of this function definition is the as yet
15491 unstudied function @code{append}, which merits a short section for
15492 itself.
15493
15494 @node append, , lengths-list-many-files, Several files
15495 @subsection The @code{append} Function
15496
15497 @need 800
15498 The @code{append} function attaches one list to another. Thus,
15499
15500 @smallexample
15501 (append '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15502 @end smallexample
15503
15504 @need 800
15505 @noindent
15506 produces the list
15507
15508 @smallexample
15509 (1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8)
15510 @end smallexample
15511
15512 This is exactly how we want to attach two lengths' lists produced by
15513 @code{lengths-list-file} to each other. The results contrast with
15514 @code{cons},
15515
15516 @smallexample
15517 (cons '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15518 @end smallexample
15519
15520 @need 1250
15521 @noindent
15522 which constructs a new list in which the first argument to @code{cons}
15523 becomes the first element of the new list:
15524
15525 @smallexample
15526 ((1 2 3 4) 5 6 7 8)
15527 @end smallexample
15528
15529 @node Several files recursively, Prepare the data, Several files, Words in a defun
15530 @section Recursively Count Words in Different Files
15531
15532 Besides a @code{while} loop, you can work on each of a list of files
15533 with recursion. A recursive version of @code{lengths-list-many-files}
15534 is short and simple.
15535
15536 The recursive function has the usual parts: the `do-again-test', the
15537 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call. The `do-again-test'
15538 determines whether the function should call itself again, which it
15539 will do if the @code{list-of-files} contains any remaining elements;
15540 the `next-step-expression' resets the @code{list-of-files} to the
15541 @sc{cdr} of itself, so eventually the list will be empty; and the
15542 recursive call calls itself on the shorter list. The complete
15543 function is shorter than this description!
15544 @findex recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15545
15546 @smallexample
15547 @group
15548 (defun recursive-lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15549 "Return list of lengths of each defun in LIST-OF-FILES."
15550 (if list-of-files ; @r{do-again-test}
15551 (append
15552 (lengths-list-file
15553 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))
15554 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15555 (cdr list-of-files)))))
15556 @end group
15557 @end smallexample
15558
15559 @noindent
15560 In a sentence, the function returns the lengths' list for the first of
15561 the @code{list-of-files} appended to the result of calling itself on
15562 the rest of the @code{list-of-files}.
15563
15564 Here is a test of @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}, along with
15565 the results of running @code{lengths-list-file} on each of the files
15566 individually.
15567
15568 Install @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} and
15569 @code{lengths-list-file}, if necessary, and then evaluate the
15570 following expressions. You may need to change the files' pathnames;
15571 those here work when this Info file and the Emacs sources are located
15572 in their customary places. To change the expressions, copy them to
15573 the @file{*scratch*} buffer, edit them, and then evaluate them.
15574
15575 The results are shown after the @samp{@result{}}. (These results are
15576 for files from Emacs version 22.1.1; files from other versions of
15577 Emacs may produce different results.)
15578
15579 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15580 @smallexample
15581 @group
15582 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/")
15583
15584 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/macros.el")
15585 @result{} (283 263 480 90)
15586 @end group
15587
15588 @group
15589 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el")
15590 @result{} (38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324)
15591 @end group
15592
15593 @group
15594 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/makesum.el")
15595 @result{} (85 181)
15596 @end group
15597
15598 @group
15599 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15600 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15601 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15602 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15603 @result{} (283 263 480 90 38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324 85 181)
15604 @end group
15605 @end smallexample
15606
15607 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function produces the
15608 output we want.
15609
15610 The next step is to prepare the data in the list for display in a graph.
15611
15612 @node Prepare the data, , Several files recursively, Words in a defun
15613 @section Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
15614
15615 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a list
15616 of numbers. Each number records the length of a function definition.
15617 What we need to do now is transform this data into a list of numbers
15618 suitable for generating a graph. The new list will tell how many
15619 functions definitions contain less than 10 words and
15620 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
15621 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15622
15623 In brief, we need to go through the lengths' list produced by the
15624 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function and count the number
15625 of defuns within each range of lengths, and produce a list of those
15626 numbers.
15627
15628 @menu
15629 * Data for Display in Detail::
15630 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
15631 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
15632 * Counting function definitions::
15633 @end menu
15634
15635 @node Data for Display in Detail, Sorting, Prepare the data, Prepare the data
15636 @ifnottex
15637 @unnumberedsubsec The Data for Display in Detail
15638 @end ifnottex
15639
15640 Based on what we have done before, we can readily foresee that it
15641 should not be too hard to write a function that `@sc{cdr}s' down the
15642 lengths' list, looks at each element, determines which length range it
15643 is in, and increments a counter for that range.
15644
15645 However, before beginning to write such a function, we should consider
15646 the advantages of sorting the lengths' list first, so the numbers are
15647 ordered from smallest to largest. First, sorting will make it easier
15648 to count the numbers in each range, since two adjacent numbers will
15649 either be in the same length range or in adjacent ranges. Second, by
15650 inspecting a sorted list, we can discover the highest and lowest
15651 number, and thereby determine the largest and smallest length range
15652 that we will need.
15653
15654 @node Sorting, Files List, Data for Display in Detail, Prepare the data
15655 @subsection Sorting Lists
15656 @findex sort
15657
15658 Emacs contains a function to sort lists, called (as you might guess)
15659 @code{sort}. The @code{sort} function takes two arguments, the list
15660 to be sorted, and a predicate that determines whether the first of
15661 two list elements is ``less'' than the second.
15662
15663 As we saw earlier (@pxref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong
15664 Type Object as an Argument}), a predicate is a function that
15665 determines whether some property is true or false. The @code{sort}
15666 function will reorder a list according to whatever property the
15667 predicate uses; this means that @code{sort} can be used to sort
15668 non-numeric lists by non-numeric criteria---it can, for example,
15669 alphabetize a list.
15670
15671 @need 1250
15672 The @code{<} function is used when sorting a numeric list. For example,
15673
15674 @smallexample
15675 (sort '(4 8 21 17 33 7 21 7) '<)
15676 @end smallexample
15677
15678 @need 800
15679 @noindent
15680 produces this:
15681
15682 @smallexample
15683 (4 7 7 8 17 21 21 33)
15684 @end smallexample
15685
15686 @noindent
15687 (Note that in this example, both the arguments are quoted so that the
15688 symbols are not evaluated before being passed to @code{sort} as
15689 arguments.)
15690
15691 Sorting the list returned by the
15692 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function is straightforward;
15693 it uses the @code{<} function:
15694
15695 @ignore
15696 2006 Oct 29
15697 In GNU Emacs 22, eval
15698 (progn
15699 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.0.50/")
15700 (sort
15701 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15702 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15703 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15704 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15705 '<))
15706
15707 @end ignore
15708
15709 @smallexample
15710 @group
15711 (sort
15712 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15713 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15714 "./lisp/mailalias.el"
15715 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15716 '<)
15717 @end group
15718 @end smallexample
15719
15720 @need 800
15721 @noindent
15722 which produces:
15723
15724 @smallexample
15725 (29 32 38 85 90 95 178 180 181 218 263 283 321 324 480)
15726 @end smallexample
15727
15728 @noindent
15729 (Note that in this example, the first argument to @code{sort} is not
15730 quoted, since the expression must be evaluated so as to produce the
15731 list that is passed to @code{sort}.)
15732
15733 @node Files List, Counting function definitions, Sorting, Prepare the data
15734 @subsection Making a List of Files
15735
15736 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function requires a list
15737 of files as its argument. For our test examples, we constructed such
15738 a list by hand; but the Emacs Lisp source directory is too large for
15739 us to do for that. Instead, we will write a function to do the job
15740 for us. In this function, we will use both a @code{while} loop and a
15741 recursive call.
15742
15743 @findex directory-files
15744 We did not have to write a function like this for older versions of
15745 GNU Emacs, since they placed all the @samp{.el} files in one
15746 directory. Instead, we were able to use the @code{directory-files}
15747 function, which lists the names of files that match a specified
15748 pattern within a single directory.
15749
15750 However, recent versions of Emacs place Emacs Lisp files in
15751 sub-directories of the top level @file{lisp} directory. This
15752 re-arrangement eases navigation. For example, all the mail related
15753 files are in a @file{lisp} sub-directory called @file{mail}. But at
15754 the same time, this arrangement forces us to create a file listing
15755 function that descends into the sub-directories.
15756
15757 @findex files-in-below-directory
15758 We can create this function, called @code{files-in-below-directory},
15759 using familiar functions such as @code{car}, @code{nthcdr}, and
15760 @code{substring} in conjunction with an existing function called
15761 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}. This latter function not only
15762 lists all the filenames in a directory, including the names
15763 of sub-directories, but also their attributes.
15764
15765 To restate our goal: to create a function that will enable us
15766 to feed filenames to @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}
15767 as a list that looks like this (but with more elements):
15768
15769 @smallexample
15770 @group
15771 ("./lisp/macros.el"
15772 "./lisp/mail/rmail.el"
15773 "./lisp/makesum.el")
15774 @end group
15775 @end smallexample
15776
15777 The @code{directory-files-and-attributes} function returns a list of
15778 lists. Each of the lists within the main list consists of 13
15779 elements. The first element is a string that contains the name of the
15780 file -- which, in GNU/Linux, may be a `directory file', that is to
15781 say, a file with the special attributes of a directory. The second
15782 element of the list is @code{t} for a directory, a string
15783 for symbolic link (the string is the name linked to), or @code{nil}.
15784
15785 For example, the first @samp{.el} file in the @file{lisp/} directory
15786 is @file{abbrev.el}. Its name is
15787 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/abbrev.el} and it is not a
15788 directory or a symbolic link.
15789
15790 @need 1000
15791 This is how @code{directory-files-and-attributes} lists that file and
15792 its attributes:
15793
15794 @smallexample
15795 @group
15796 ("abbrev.el"
15797 nil
15798 1
15799 1000
15800 100
15801 @end group
15802 @group
15803 (17733 259)
15804 (17491 28834)
15805 (17596 62124)
15806 13157
15807 "-rw-rw-r--"
15808 @end group
15809 @group
15810 nil
15811 2971624
15812 773)
15813 @end group
15814 @end smallexample
15815
15816 @need 1200
15817 On the other hand, @file{mail/} is a directory within the @file{lisp/}
15818 directory. The beginning of its listing looks like this:
15819
15820 @smallexample
15821 @group
15822 ("mail"
15823 t
15824 @dots{}
15825 )
15826 @end group
15827 @end smallexample
15828
15829 (To learn about the different attributes, look at the documentation of
15830 @code{file-attributes}. Bear in mind that the @code{file-attributes}
15831 function does not list the filename, so its first element is
15832 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}'s second element.)
15833
15834 We will want our new function, @code{files-in-below-directory}, to
15835 list the @samp{.el} files in the directory it is told to check, and in
15836 any directories below that directory.
15837
15838 This gives us a hint on how to construct
15839 @code{files-in-below-directory}: within a directory, the function
15840 should add @samp{.el} filenames to a list; and if, within a directory,
15841 the function comes upon a sub-directory, it should go into that
15842 sub-directory and repeat its actions.
15843
15844 However, we should note that every directory contains a name that
15845 refers to itself, called @file{.}, (``dot'') and a name that refers to
15846 its parent directory, called @file{..} (``double dot''). (In
15847 @file{/}, the root directory, @file{..} refers to itself, since
15848 @file{/} has no parent.) Clearly, we do not want our
15849 @code{files-in-below-directory} function to enter those directories,
15850 since they always lead us, directly or indirectly, to the current
15851 directory.
15852
15853 Consequently, our @code{files-in-below-directory} function must do
15854 several tasks:
15855
15856 @itemize @bullet
15857 @item
15858 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that ends in
15859 @samp{.el}; and if so, add its name to a list.
15860
15861 @item
15862 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that is the name of a
15863 directory; and if so,
15864
15865 @itemize @minus
15866 @item
15867 Check to see whether it is looking at @file{.} or @file{..}; and if
15868 so skip it.
15869
15870 @item
15871 Or else, go into that directory and repeat the process.
15872 @end itemize
15873 @end itemize
15874
15875 Let's write a function definition to do these tasks. We will use a
15876 @code{while} loop to move from one filename to another within a
15877 directory, checking what needs to be done; and we will use a recursive
15878 call to repeat the actions on each sub-directory. The recursive
15879 pattern is `accumulate'
15880 (@pxref{Accumulate, , Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}}),
15881 using @code{append} as the combiner.
15882
15883 @ignore
15884 (directory-files "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15885 (shell-command "find /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15886
15887 (directory-files "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15888 (shell-command "find /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15889 @end ignore
15890
15891 @c /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/
15892
15893 @need 800
15894 Here is the function:
15895
15896 @smallexample
15897 @group
15898 (defun files-in-below-directory (directory)
15899 "List the .el files in DIRECTORY and in its sub-directories."
15900 ;; Although the function will be used non-interactively,
15901 ;; it will be easier to test if we make it interactive.
15902 ;; The directory will have a name such as
15903 ;; "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"
15904 (interactive "DDirectory name: ")
15905 @end group
15906 @group
15907 (let (el-files-list
15908 (current-directory-list
15909 (directory-files-and-attributes directory t)))
15910 ;; while we are in the current directory
15911 (while current-directory-list
15912 @end group
15913 @group
15914 (cond
15915 ;; check to see whether filename ends in `.el'
15916 ;; and if so, append its name to a list.
15917 ((equal ".el" (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -3))
15918 (setq el-files-list
15919 (cons (car (car current-directory-list)) el-files-list)))
15920 @end group
15921 @group
15922 ;; check whether filename is that of a directory
15923 ((eq t (car (cdr (car current-directory-list))))
15924 ;; decide whether to skip or recurse
15925 (if
15926 (equal "."
15927 (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -1))
15928 ;; then do nothing since filename is that of
15929 ;; current directory or parent, "." or ".."
15930 ()
15931 @end group
15932 @group
15933 ;; else descend into the directory and repeat the process
15934 (setq el-files-list
15935 (append
15936 (files-in-below-directory
15937 (car (car current-directory-list)))
15938 el-files-list)))))
15939 ;; move to the next filename in the list; this also
15940 ;; shortens the list so the while loop eventually comes to an end
15941 (setq current-directory-list (cdr current-directory-list)))
15942 ;; return the filenames
15943 el-files-list))
15944 @end group
15945 @end smallexample
15946
15947 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/")
15948 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15949
15950 The @code{files-in-below-directory} @code{directory-files} function
15951 takes one argument, the name of a directory.
15952
15953 @need 1250
15954 Thus, on my system,
15955
15956 @c (length (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15957
15958 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15959 @smallexample
15960 @group
15961 (length
15962 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"))
15963 @end group
15964 @end smallexample
15965
15966 @noindent
15967 tells me that in and below my Lisp sources directory are 1031
15968 @samp{.el} files.
15969
15970 @code{files-in-below-directory} returns a list in reverse alphabetical
15971 order. An expression to sort the list in alphabetical order looks
15972 like this:
15973
15974 @smallexample
15975 @group
15976 (sort
15977 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15978 'string-lessp)
15979 @end group
15980 @end smallexample
15981
15982 @ignore
15983 (defun test ()
15984 "Test how long it takes to find lengths of all sorted elisp defuns."
15985 (insert "\n" (current-time-string) "\n")
15986 (sit-for 0)
15987 (sort
15988 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15989 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15990 '<)
15991 (insert (format "%s" (current-time-string))))
15992 @end ignore
15993
15994 @node Counting function definitions, , Files List, Prepare the data
15995 @subsection Counting function definitions
15996
15997 Our immediate goal is to generate a list that tells us how many
15998 function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and symbols, how many
15999 contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how many contain between
16000 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
16001
16002 With a sorted list of numbers, this is easy: count how many elements
16003 of the list are smaller than 10, then, after moving past the numbers
16004 just counted, count how many are smaller than 20, then, after moving
16005 past the numbers just counted, count how many are smaller than 30, and
16006 so on. Each of the numbers, 10, 20, 30, 40, and the like, is one
16007 larger than the top of that range. We can call the list of such
16008 numbers the @code{top-of-ranges} list.
16009
16010 @need 1200
16011 If we wished, we could generate this list automatically, but it is
16012 simpler to write a list manually. Here it is:
16013 @vindex top-of-ranges
16014
16015 @smallexample
16016 @group
16017 (defvar top-of-ranges
16018 '(10 20 30 40 50
16019 60 70 80 90 100
16020 110 120 130 140 150
16021 160 170 180 190 200
16022 210 220 230 240 250
16023 260 270 280 290 300)
16024 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
16025 @end group
16026 @end smallexample
16027
16028 To change the ranges, we edit this list.
16029
16030 Next, we need to write the function that creates the list of the
16031 number of definitions within each range. Clearly, this function must
16032 take the @code{sorted-lengths} and the @code{top-of-ranges} lists
16033 as arguments.
16034
16035 The @code{defuns-per-range} function must do two things again and
16036 again: it must count the number of definitions within a range
16037 specified by the current top-of-range value; and it must shift to the
16038 next higher value in the @code{top-of-ranges} list after counting the
16039 number of definitions in the current range. Since each of these
16040 actions is repetitive, we can use @code{while} loops for the job.
16041 One loop counts the number of definitions in the range defined by the
16042 current top-of-range value, and the other loop selects each of the
16043 top-of-range values in turn.
16044
16045 Several entries of the @code{sorted-lengths} list are counted for each
16046 range; this means that the loop for the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16047 will be inside the loop for the @code{top-of-ranges} list, like a
16048 small gear inside a big gear.
16049
16050 The inner loop counts the number of definitions within the range. It
16051 is a simple counting loop of the type we have seen before.
16052 (@xref{Incrementing Loop, , A loop with an incrementing counter}.)
16053 The true-or-false test of the loop tests whether the value from the
16054 @code{sorted-lengths} list is smaller than the current value of the
16055 top of the range. If it is, the function increments the counter and
16056 tests the next value from the @code{sorted-lengths} list.
16057
16058 @need 1250
16059 The inner loop looks like this:
16060
16061 @smallexample
16062 @group
16063 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
16064 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16065 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16066 @end group
16067 @end smallexample
16068
16069 The outer loop must start with the lowest value of the
16070 @code{top-of-ranges} list, and then be set to each of the succeeding
16071 higher values in turn. This can be done with a loop like this:
16072
16073 @smallexample
16074 @group
16075 (while top-of-ranges
16076 @var{body-of-loop}@dots{}
16077 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
16078 @end group
16079 @end smallexample
16080
16081 @need 1200
16082 Put together, the two loops look like this:
16083
16084 @smallexample
16085 @group
16086 (while top-of-ranges
16087
16088 ;; @r{Count the number of elements within the current range.}
16089 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
16090 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16091 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16092
16093 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
16094 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
16095 @end group
16096 @end smallexample
16097
16098 In addition, in each circuit of the outer loop, Emacs should record
16099 the number of definitions within that range (the value of
16100 @code{number-within-range}) in a list. We can use @code{cons} for
16101 this purpose. (@xref{cons, , @code{cons}}.)
16102
16103 The @code{cons} function works fine, except that the list it
16104 constructs will contain the number of definitions for the highest
16105 range at its beginning and the number of definitions for the lowest
16106 range at its end. This is because @code{cons} attaches new elements
16107 of the list to the beginning of the list, and since the two loops are
16108 working their way through the lengths' list from the lower end first,
16109 the @code{defuns-per-range-list} will end up largest number first.
16110 But we will want to print our graph with smallest values first and the
16111 larger later. The solution is to reverse the order of the
16112 @code{defuns-per-range-list}. We can do this using the
16113 @code{nreverse} function, which reverses the order of a list.
16114 @findex nreverse
16115
16116 @need 800
16117 For example,
16118
16119 @smallexample
16120 (nreverse '(1 2 3 4))
16121 @end smallexample
16122
16123 @need 800
16124 @noindent
16125 produces:
16126
16127 @smallexample
16128 (4 3 2 1)
16129 @end smallexample
16130
16131 Note that the @code{nreverse} function is ``destructive''---that is,
16132 it changes the list to which it is applied; this contrasts with the
16133 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions, which are non-destructive. In
16134 this case, we do not want the original @code{defuns-per-range-list},
16135 so it does not matter that it is destroyed. (The @code{reverse}
16136 function provides a reversed copy of a list, leaving the original list
16137 as is.)
16138 @findex reverse
16139
16140 @need 1250
16141 Put all together, the @code{defuns-per-range} looks like this:
16142
16143 @smallexample
16144 @group
16145 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16146 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
16147 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
16148 (number-within-range 0)
16149 defuns-per-range-list)
16150 @end group
16151
16152 @group
16153 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
16154 (while top-of-ranges
16155 @end group
16156
16157 @group
16158 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
16159 (while (and
16160 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
16161 (car sorted-lengths)
16162 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
16163 @end group
16164
16165 @group
16166 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
16167 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16168 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16169
16170 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
16171 @end group
16172
16173 @group
16174 (setq defuns-per-range-list
16175 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
16176 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
16177 @end group
16178
16179 @group
16180 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
16181 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
16182 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
16183 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
16184 @end group
16185
16186 @group
16187 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
16188 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
16189 (setq defuns-per-range-list
16190 (cons
16191 (length sorted-lengths)
16192 defuns-per-range-list))
16193 @end group
16194
16195 @group
16196 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
16197 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
16198 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
16199 @end group
16200 @end smallexample
16201
16202 @need 1200
16203 @noindent
16204 The function is straightforward except for one subtle feature. The
16205 true-or-false test of the inner loop looks like this:
16206
16207 @smallexample
16208 @group
16209 (and (car sorted-lengths)
16210 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
16211 @end group
16212 @end smallexample
16213
16214 @need 800
16215 @noindent
16216 instead of like this:
16217
16218 @smallexample
16219 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range)
16220 @end smallexample
16221
16222 The purpose of the test is to determine whether the first item in the
16223 @code{sorted-lengths} list is less than the value of the top of the
16224 range.
16225
16226 The simple version of the test works fine unless the
16227 @code{sorted-lengths} list has a @code{nil} value. In that case, the
16228 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression function returns
16229 @code{nil}. The @code{<} function cannot compare a number to
16230 @code{nil}, which is an empty list, so Emacs signals an error and
16231 stops the function from attempting to continue to execute.
16232
16233 The @code{sorted-lengths} list always becomes @code{nil} when the
16234 counter reaches the end of the list. This means that any attempt to
16235 use the @code{defuns-per-range} function with the simple version of
16236 the test will fail.
16237
16238 We solve the problem by using the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
16239 expression in conjunction with the @code{and} expression. The
16240 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression returns a non-@code{nil}
16241 value so long as the list has at least one number within it, but
16242 returns @code{nil} if the list is empty. The @code{and} expression
16243 first evaluates the @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression, and
16244 if it is @code{nil}, returns false @emph{without} evaluating the
16245 @code{<} expression. But if the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
16246 expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, the @code{and} expression
16247 evaluates the @code{<} expression, and returns that value as the value
16248 of the @code{and} expression.
16249
16250 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
16251 This way, we avoid an error.
16252 @iftex
16253 @noindent
16254 (For information about @code{and}, see
16255 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
16256 @end iftex
16257 @ifinfo
16258 @noindent
16259 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
16260 information about @code{and}.)
16261 @end ifinfo
16262
16263 Here is a short test of the @code{defuns-per-range} function. First,
16264 evaluate the expression that binds (a shortened)
16265 @code{top-of-ranges} list to the list of values, then evaluate the
16266 expression for binding the @code{sorted-lengths} list, and then
16267 evaluate the @code{defuns-per-range} function.
16268
16269 @smallexample
16270 @group
16271 ;; @r{(Shorter list than we will use later.)}
16272 (setq top-of-ranges
16273 '(110 120 130 140 150
16274 160 170 180 190 200))
16275
16276 (setq sorted-lengths
16277 '(85 86 110 116 122 129 154 176 179 200 265 300 300))
16278
16279 (defuns-per-range sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16280 @end group
16281 @end smallexample
16282
16283 @need 800
16284 @noindent
16285 The list returned looks like this:
16286
16287 @smallexample
16288 (2 2 2 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 4)
16289 @end smallexample
16290
16291 @noindent
16292 Indeed, there are two elements of the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16293 smaller than 110, two elements between 110 and 119, two elements
16294 between 120 and 129, and so on. There are four elements with a value
16295 of 200 or larger.
16296
16297 @c The next step is to turn this numbers' list into a graph.
16298 @node Readying a Graph, Emacs Initialization, Words in a defun, Top
16299 @chapter Readying a Graph
16300 @cindex Readying a graph
16301 @cindex Graph prototype
16302 @cindex Prototype graph
16303 @cindex Body of graph
16304
16305 Our goal is to construct a graph showing the numbers of function
16306 definitions of various lengths in the Emacs lisp sources.
16307
16308 As a practical matter, if you were creating a graph, you would
16309 probably use a program such as @code{gnuplot} to do the job.
16310 (@code{gnuplot} is nicely integrated into GNU Emacs.) In this case,
16311 however, we create one from scratch, and in the process we will
16312 re-acquaint ourselves with some of what we learned before and learn
16313 more.
16314
16315 In this chapter, we will first write a simple graph printing function.
16316 This first definition will be a @dfn{prototype}, a rapidly written
16317 function that enables us to reconnoiter this unknown graph-making
16318 territory. We will discover dragons, or find that they are myth.
16319 After scouting the terrain, we will feel more confident and enhance
16320 the function to label the axes automatically.
16321
16322 @menu
16323 * Columns of a graph::
16324 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
16325 * recursive-graph-body-print::
16326 * Printed Axes::
16327 * Line Graph Exercise::
16328 @end menu
16329
16330 @node Columns of a graph, graph-body-print, Readying a Graph, Readying a Graph
16331 @ifnottex
16332 @unnumberedsec Printing the Columns of a Graph
16333 @end ifnottex
16334
16335 Since Emacs is designed to be flexible and work with all kinds of
16336 terminals, including character-only terminals, the graph will need to
16337 be made from one of the `typewriter' symbols. An asterisk will do; as
16338 we enhance the graph-printing function, we can make the choice of
16339 symbol a user option.
16340
16341 We can call this function @code{graph-body-print}; it will take a
16342 @code{numbers-list} as its only argument. At this stage, we will not
16343 label the graph, but only print its body.
16344
16345 The @code{graph-body-print} function inserts a vertical column of
16346 asterisks for each element in the @code{numbers-list}. The height of
16347 each line is determined by the value of that element of the
16348 @code{numbers-list}.
16349
16350 Inserting columns is a repetitive act; that means that this function can
16351 be written either with a @code{while} loop or recursively.
16352
16353 Our first challenge is to discover how to print a column of asterisks.
16354 Usually, in Emacs, we print characters onto a screen horizontally,
16355 line by line, by typing. We have two routes we can follow: write our
16356 own column-insertion function or discover whether one exists in Emacs.
16357
16358 To see whether there is one in Emacs, we can use the @kbd{M-x apropos}
16359 command. This command is like the @kbd{C-h a} (@code{command-apropos})
16360 command, except that the latter finds only those functions that are
16361 commands. The @kbd{M-x apropos} command lists all symbols that match
16362 a regular expression, including functions that are not interactive.
16363 @findex apropos
16364
16365 What we want to look for is some command that prints or inserts
16366 columns. Very likely, the name of the function will contain either
16367 the word `print' or the word `insert' or the word `column'.
16368 Therefore, we can simply type @kbd{M-x apropos RET
16369 print\|insert\|column RET} and look at the result. On my system, this
16370 command once too takes quite some time, and then produced a list of 79
16371 functions and variables. Now it does not take much time at all and
16372 produces a list of 211 functions and variables. Scanning down the
16373 list, the only function that looks as if it might do the job is
16374 @code{insert-rectangle}.
16375
16376 @need 1200
16377 Indeed, this is the function we want; its documentation says:
16378
16379 @smallexample
16380 @group
16381 insert-rectangle:
16382 Insert text of RECTANGLE with upper left corner at point.
16383 RECTANGLE's first line is inserted at point,
16384 its second line is inserted at a point vertically under point, etc.
16385 RECTANGLE should be a list of strings.
16386 After this command, the mark is at the upper left corner
16387 and point is at the lower right corner.
16388 @end group
16389 @end smallexample
16390
16391 We can run a quick test, to make sure it does what we expect of it.
16392
16393 Here is the result of placing the cursor after the
16394 @code{insert-rectangle} expression and typing @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
16395 (@code{eval-last-sexp}). The function inserts the strings
16396 @samp{"first"}, @samp{"second"}, and @samp{"third"} at and below
16397 point. Also the function returns @code{nil}.
16398
16399 @smallexample
16400 @group
16401 (insert-rectangle '("first" "second" "third"))first
16402 second
16403 thirdnil
16404 @end group
16405 @end smallexample
16406
16407 @noindent
16408 Of course, we won't be inserting the text of the
16409 @code{insert-rectangle} expression itself into the buffer in which we
16410 are making the graph, but will call the function from our program. We
16411 shall, however, have to make sure that point is in the buffer at the
16412 place where the @code{insert-rectangle} function will insert its
16413 column of strings.
16414
16415 If you are reading this in Info, you can see how this works by
16416 switching to another buffer, such as the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
16417 placing point somewhere in the buffer, typing @kbd{M-:}, typing the
16418 @code{insert-rectangle} expression into the minibuffer at the prompt,
16419 and then typing @key{RET}. This causes Emacs to evaluate the
16420 expression in the minibuffer, but to use as the value of point the
16421 position of point in the @file{*scratch*} buffer. (@kbd{M-:} is the
16422 keybinding for @code{eval-expression}. Also, @code{nil} does not
16423 appear in the @file{*scratch*} buffer since the expression is
16424 evaluated in the minibuffer.)
16425
16426 We find when we do this that point ends up at the end of the last
16427 inserted line---that is to say, this function moves point as a
16428 side-effect. If we were to repeat the command, with point at this
16429 position, the next insertion would be below and to the right of the
16430 previous insertion. We don't want this! If we are going to make a
16431 bar graph, the columns need to be beside each other.
16432
16433 So we discover that each cycle of the column-inserting @code{while}
16434 loop must reposition point to the place we want it, and that place
16435 will be at the top, not the bottom, of the column. Moreover, we
16436 remember that when we print a graph, we do not expect all the columns
16437 to be the same height. This means that the top of each column may be
16438 at a different height from the previous one. We cannot simply
16439 reposition point to the same line each time, but moved over to the
16440 right---or perhaps we can@dots{}
16441
16442 We are planning to make the columns of the bar graph out of asterisks.
16443 The number of asterisks in the column is the number specified by the
16444 current element of the @code{numbers-list}. We need to construct a
16445 list of asterisks of the right length for each call to
16446 @code{insert-rectangle}. If this list consists solely of the requisite
16447 number of asterisks, then we will have position point the right number
16448 of lines above the base for the graph to print correctly. This could
16449 be difficult.
16450
16451 Alternatively, if we can figure out some way to pass
16452 @code{insert-rectangle} a list of the same length each time, then we
16453 can place point on the same line each time, but move it over one
16454 column to the right for each new column. If we do this, however, some
16455 of the entries in the list passed to @code{insert-rectangle} must be
16456 blanks rather than asterisks. For example, if the maximum height of
16457 the graph is 5, but the height of the column is 3, then
16458 @code{insert-rectangle} requires an argument that looks like this:
16459
16460 @smallexample
16461 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16462 @end smallexample
16463
16464 This last proposal is not so difficult, so long as we can determine
16465 the column height. There are two ways for us to specify the column
16466 height: we can arbitrarily state what it will be, which would work
16467 fine for graphs of that height; or we can search through the list of
16468 numbers and use the maximum height of the list as the maximum height
16469 of the graph. If the latter operation were difficult, then the former
16470 procedure would be easiest, but there is a function built into Emacs
16471 that determines the maximum of its arguments. We can use that
16472 function. The function is called @code{max} and it returns the
16473 largest of all its arguments, which must be numbers. Thus, for
16474 example,
16475
16476 @smallexample
16477 (max 3 4 6 5 7 3)
16478 @end smallexample
16479
16480 @noindent
16481 returns 7. (A corresponding function called @code{min} returns the
16482 smallest of all its arguments.)
16483 @findex max
16484 @findex min
16485
16486 However, we cannot simply call @code{max} on the @code{numbers-list};
16487 the @code{max} function expects numbers as its argument, not a list of
16488 numbers. Thus, the following expression,
16489
16490 @smallexample
16491 (max '(3 4 6 5 7 3))
16492 @end smallexample
16493
16494 @need 800
16495 @noindent
16496 produces the following error message;
16497
16498 @smallexample
16499 Wrong type of argument: number-or-marker-p, (3 4 6 5 7 3)
16500 @end smallexample
16501
16502 @findex apply
16503 We need a function that passes a list of arguments to a function.
16504 This function is @code{apply}. This function `applies' its first
16505 argument (a function) to its remaining arguments, the last of which
16506 may be a list.
16507
16508 @need 1250
16509 For example,
16510
16511 @smallexample
16512 (apply 'max 3 4 7 3 '(4 8 5))
16513 @end smallexample
16514
16515 @noindent
16516 returns 8.
16517
16518 (Incidentally, I don't know how you would learn of this function
16519 without a book such as this. It is possible to discover other
16520 functions, like @code{search-forward} or @code{insert-rectangle}, by
16521 guessing at a part of their names and then using @code{apropos}. Even
16522 though its base in metaphor is clear---`apply' its first argument to
16523 the rest---I doubt a novice would come up with that particular word
16524 when using @code{apropos} or other aid. Of course, I could be wrong;
16525 after all, the function was first named by someone who had to invent
16526 it.)
16527
16528 The second and subsequent arguments to @code{apply} are optional, so
16529 we can use @code{apply} to call a function and pass the elements of a
16530 list to it, like this, which also returns 8:
16531
16532 @smallexample
16533 (apply 'max '(4 8 5))
16534 @end smallexample
16535
16536 This latter way is how we will use @code{apply}. The
16537 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a numbers'
16538 list to which we can apply @code{max} (we could also apply @code{max} to
16539 the sorted numbers' list; it does not matter whether the list is
16540 sorted or not.)
16541
16542 @need 800
16543 Hence, the operation for finding the maximum height of the graph is this:
16544
16545 @smallexample
16546 (setq max-graph-height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16547 @end smallexample
16548
16549 Now we can return to the question of how to create a list of strings
16550 for a column of the graph. Told the maximum height of the graph
16551 and the number of asterisks that should appear in the column, the
16552 function should return a list of strings for the
16553 @code{insert-rectangle} command to insert.
16554
16555 Each column is made up of asterisks or blanks. Since the function is
16556 passed the value of the height of the column and the number of
16557 asterisks in the column, the number of blanks can be found by
16558 subtracting the number of asterisks from the height of the column.
16559 Given the number of blanks and the number of asterisks, two
16560 @code{while} loops can be used to construct the list:
16561
16562 @smallexample
16563 @group
16564 ;;; @r{First version.}
16565 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16566 "Return list of strings that is one column of a graph."
16567 (let ((insert-list nil)
16568 (number-of-top-blanks
16569 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16570 @end group
16571
16572 @group
16573 ;; @r{Fill in asterisks.}
16574 (while (> actual-height 0)
16575 (setq insert-list (cons "*" insert-list))
16576 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16577 @end group
16578
16579 @group
16580 ;; @r{Fill in blanks.}
16581 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16582 (setq insert-list (cons " " insert-list))
16583 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16584 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16585 @end group
16586
16587 @group
16588 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16589 insert-list))
16590 @end group
16591 @end smallexample
16592
16593 If you install this function and then evaluate the following
16594 expression you will see that it returns the list as desired:
16595
16596 @smallexample
16597 (column-of-graph 5 3)
16598 @end smallexample
16599
16600 @need 800
16601 @noindent
16602 returns
16603
16604 @smallexample
16605 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16606 @end smallexample
16607
16608 As written, @code{column-of-graph} contains a major flaw: the symbols
16609 used for the blank and for the marked entries in the column are
16610 `hard-coded' as a space and asterisk. This is fine for a prototype,
16611 but you, or another user, may wish to use other symbols. For example,
16612 in testing the graph function, you many want to use a period in place
16613 of the space, to make sure the point is being repositioned properly
16614 each time the @code{insert-rectangle} function is called; or you might
16615 want to substitute a @samp{+} sign or other symbol for the asterisk.
16616 You might even want to make a graph-column that is more than one
16617 display column wide. The program should be more flexible. The way to
16618 do that is to replace the blank and the asterisk with two variables
16619 that we can call @code{graph-blank} and @code{graph-symbol} and define
16620 those variables separately.
16621
16622 Also, the documentation is not well written. These considerations
16623 lead us to the second version of the function:
16624
16625 @smallexample
16626 @group
16627 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
16628 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
16629 @end group
16630
16631 @group
16632 (defvar graph-blank " "
16633 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
16634 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
16635 as graph-symbol.")
16636 @end group
16637 @end smallexample
16638
16639 @noindent
16640 (For an explanation of @code{defvar}, see
16641 @ref{defvar, , Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}}.)
16642
16643 @smallexample
16644 @group
16645 ;;; @r{Second version.}
16646 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16647 "Return MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings; ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
16648
16649 @end group
16650 @group
16651 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
16652 of the list.
16653 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
16654 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
16655 @end group
16656
16657 @group
16658 (let ((insert-list nil)
16659 (number-of-top-blanks
16660 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16661 @end group
16662
16663 @group
16664 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
16665 (while (> actual-height 0)
16666 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
16667 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16668 @end group
16669
16670 @group
16671 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
16672 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16673 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
16674 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16675 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16676
16677 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16678 insert-list))
16679 @end group
16680 @end smallexample
16681
16682 If we wished, we could rewrite @code{column-of-graph} a third time to
16683 provide optionally for a line graph as well as for a bar graph. This
16684 would not be hard to do. One way to think of a line graph is that it
16685 is no more than a bar graph in which the part of each bar that is
16686 below the top is blank. To construct a column for a line graph, the
16687 function first constructs a list of blanks that is one shorter than
16688 the value, then it uses @code{cons} to attach a graph symbol to the
16689 list; then it uses @code{cons} again to attach the `top blanks' to
16690 the list.
16691
16692 It is easy to see how to write such a function, but since we don't
16693 need it, we will not do it. But the job could be done, and if it were
16694 done, it would be done with @code{column-of-graph}. Even more
16695 important, it is worth noting that few changes would have to be made
16696 anywhere else. The enhancement, if we ever wish to make it, is
16697 simple.
16698
16699 Now, finally, we come to our first actual graph printing function.
16700 This prints the body of a graph, not the labels for the vertical and
16701 horizontal axes, so we can call this @code{graph-body-print}.
16702
16703 @node graph-body-print, recursive-graph-body-print, Columns of a graph, Readying a Graph
16704 @section The @code{graph-body-print} Function
16705 @findex graph-body-print
16706
16707 After our preparation in the preceding section, the
16708 @code{graph-body-print} function is straightforward. The function
16709 will print column after column of asterisks and blanks, using the
16710 elements of a numbers' list to specify the number of asterisks in each
16711 column. This is a repetitive act, which means we can use a
16712 decrementing @code{while} loop or recursive function for the job. In
16713 this section, we will write the definition using a @code{while} loop.
16714
16715 The @code{column-of-graph} function requires the height of the graph
16716 as an argument, so we should determine and record that as a local variable.
16717
16718 This leads us to the following template for the @code{while} loop
16719 version of this function:
16720
16721 @smallexample
16722 @group
16723 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16724 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
16725 (let ((height @dots{}
16726 @dots{}))
16727 @end group
16728
16729 @group
16730 (while numbers-list
16731 @var{insert-columns-and-reposition-point}
16732 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))))
16733 @end group
16734 @end smallexample
16735
16736 @noindent
16737 We need to fill in the slots of the template.
16738
16739 Clearly, we can use the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression to
16740 determine the height of the graph.
16741
16742 The @code{while} loop will cycle through the @code{numbers-list} one
16743 element at a time. As it is shortened by the @code{(setq numbers-list
16744 (cdr numbers-list))} expression, the @sc{car} of each instance of the
16745 list is the value of the argument for @code{column-of-graph}.
16746
16747 At each cycle of the @code{while} loop, the @code{insert-rectangle}
16748 function inserts the list returned by @code{column-of-graph}. Since
16749 the @code{insert-rectangle} function moves point to the lower right of
16750 the inserted rectangle, we need to save the location of point at the
16751 time the rectangle is inserted, move back to that position after the
16752 rectangle is inserted, and then move horizontally to the next place
16753 from which @code{insert-rectangle} is called.
16754
16755 If the inserted columns are one character wide, as they will be if
16756 single blanks and asterisks are used, the repositioning command is
16757 simply @code{(forward-char 1)}; however, the width of a column may be
16758 greater than one. This means that the repositioning command should be
16759 written @code{(forward-char symbol-width)}. The @code{symbol-width}
16760 itself is the length of a @code{graph-blank} and can be found using
16761 the expression @code{(length graph-blank)}. The best place to bind
16762 the @code{symbol-width} variable to the value of the width of graph
16763 column is in the varlist of the @code{let} expression.
16764
16765 @need 1250
16766 These considerations lead to the following function definition:
16767
16768 @smallexample
16769 @group
16770 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16771 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16772 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16773
16774 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16775 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16776 from-position)
16777 @end group
16778
16779 @group
16780 (while numbers-list
16781 (setq from-position (point))
16782 (insert-rectangle
16783 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16784 (goto-char from-position)
16785 (forward-char symbol-width)
16786 @end group
16787 @group
16788 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16789 (sit-for 0)
16790 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
16791 @end group
16792 @group
16793 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
16794 (forward-line height)
16795 (insert "\n")
16796 ))
16797 @end group
16798 @end smallexample
16799
16800 @noindent
16801 The one unexpected expression in this function is the
16802 @w{@code{(sit-for 0)}} expression in the @code{while} loop. This
16803 expression makes the graph printing operation more interesting to
16804 watch than it would be otherwise. The expression causes Emacs to
16805 `sit' or do nothing for a zero length of time and then redraw the
16806 screen. Placed here, it causes Emacs to redraw the screen column by
16807 column. Without it, Emacs would not redraw the screen until the
16808 function exits.
16809
16810 We can test @code{graph-body-print} with a short list of numbers.
16811
16812 @enumerate
16813 @item
16814 Install @code{graph-symbol}, @code{graph-blank},
16815 @code{column-of-graph}, which are in
16816 @iftex
16817 @ref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph},
16818 @end iftex
16819 @ifinfo
16820 @ref{Columns of a graph},
16821 @end ifinfo
16822 and @code{graph-body-print}.
16823
16824 @need 800
16825 @item
16826 Copy the following expression:
16827
16828 @smallexample
16829 (graph-body-print '(1 2 3 4 6 4 3 5 7 6 5 2 3))
16830 @end smallexample
16831
16832 @item
16833 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
16834 want the graph to start.
16835
16836 @item
16837 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
16838
16839 @item
16840 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
16841 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
16842
16843 @item
16844 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the @code{graph-body-print} expression.
16845 @end enumerate
16846
16847 @need 800
16848 Emacs will print a graph like this:
16849
16850 @smallexample
16851 @group
16852 *
16853 * **
16854 * ****
16855 *** ****
16856 ********* *
16857 ************
16858 *************
16859 @end group
16860 @end smallexample
16861
16862 @node recursive-graph-body-print, Printed Axes, graph-body-print, Readying a Graph
16863 @section The @code{recursive-graph-body-print} Function
16864 @findex recursive-graph-body-print
16865
16866 The @code{graph-body-print} function may also be written recursively.
16867 The recursive solution is divided into two parts: an outside `wrapper'
16868 that uses a @code{let} expression to determine the values of several
16869 variables that need only be found once, such as the maximum height of
16870 the graph, and an inside function that is called recursively to print
16871 the graph.
16872
16873 @need 1250
16874 The `wrapper' is uncomplicated:
16875
16876 @smallexample
16877 @group
16878 (defun recursive-graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16879 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16880 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16881 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16882 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16883 from-position)
16884 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16885 numbers-list
16886 height
16887 symbol-width)))
16888 @end group
16889 @end smallexample
16890
16891 The recursive function is a little more difficult. It has four parts:
16892 the `do-again-test', the printing code, the recursive call, and the
16893 `next-step-expression'. The `do-again-test' is a @code{when}
16894 expression that determines whether the @code{numbers-list} contains
16895 any remaining elements; if it does, the function prints one column of
16896 the graph using the printing code and calls itself again. The
16897 function calls itself again according to the value produced by the
16898 `next-step-expression' which causes the call to act on a shorter
16899 version of the @code{numbers-list}.
16900
16901 @smallexample
16902 @group
16903 (defun recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16904 (numbers-list height symbol-width)
16905 "Print a bar graph.
16906 Used within recursive-graph-body-print function."
16907 @end group
16908
16909 @group
16910 (when numbers-list
16911 (setq from-position (point))
16912 (insert-rectangle
16913 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16914 @end group
16915 @group
16916 (goto-char from-position)
16917 (forward-char symbol-width)
16918 (sit-for 0) ; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16919 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16920 (cdr numbers-list) height symbol-width)))
16921 @end group
16922 @end smallexample
16923
16924 @need 1250
16925 After installation, this expression can be tested; here is a sample:
16926
16927 @smallexample
16928 (recursive-graph-body-print '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
16929 @end smallexample
16930
16931 @need 800
16932 Here is what @code{recursive-graph-body-print} produces:
16933
16934 @smallexample
16935 @group
16936 *
16937 ** *
16938 **** *
16939 **** ***
16940 * *********
16941 ************
16942 *************
16943 @end group
16944 @end smallexample
16945
16946 Either of these two functions, @code{graph-body-print} or
16947 @code{recursive-graph-body-print}, create the body of a graph.
16948
16949 @node Printed Axes, Line Graph Exercise, recursive-graph-body-print, Readying a Graph
16950 @section Need for Printed Axes
16951
16952 A graph needs printed axes, so you can orient yourself. For a do-once
16953 project, it may be reasonable to draw the axes by hand using Emacs'
16954 Picture mode; but a graph drawing function may be used more than once.
16955
16956 For this reason, I have written enhancements to the basic
16957 @code{print-graph-body} function that automatically print labels for
16958 the horizontal and vertical axes. Since the label printing functions
16959 do not contain much new material, I have placed their description in
16960 an appendix. @xref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labelled Axes}.
16961
16962 @node Line Graph Exercise, , Printed Axes, Readying a Graph
16963 @section Exercise
16964
16965 Write a line graph version of the graph printing functions.
16966
16967 @node Emacs Initialization, Debugging, Readying a Graph, Top
16968 @chapter Your @file{.emacs} File
16969 @cindex @file{.emacs} file
16970 @cindex Customizing your @file{.emacs} file
16971 @cindex Initialization file
16972
16973 ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it'' -- this seemingly
16974 paradoxical statement is the secret of GNU Emacs. The plain, `out of
16975 the box' Emacs is a generic tool. Most people who use it, customize
16976 it to suit themselves.
16977
16978 GNU Emacs is mostly written in Emacs Lisp; this means that by writing
16979 expressions in Emacs Lisp you can change or extend Emacs.
16980
16981 @menu
16982 * Default Configuration::
16983 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
16984 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
16985 * Beginning a .emacs File:: How to write a @code{.emacs file}.
16986 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
16987 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
16988 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
16989 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
16990 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
16991 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
16992 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
16993 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
16994 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
16995 * Miscellaneous::
16996 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
16997 @end menu
16998
16999 @node Default Configuration, Site-wide Init, Emacs Initialization, Emacs Initialization
17000 @ifnottex
17001 @unnumberedsec Emacs' Default Configuration
17002 @end ifnottex
17003
17004 There are those who appreciate Emacs' default configuration. After
17005 all, Emacs starts you in C mode when you edit a C file, starts you in
17006 Fortran mode when you edit a Fortran file, and starts you in
17007 Fundamental mode when you edit an unadorned file. This all makes
17008 sense, if you do not know who is going to use Emacs. Who knows what a
17009 person hopes to do with an unadorned file? Fundamental mode is the
17010 right default for such a file, just as C mode is the right default for
17011 editing C code. (Enough programming languages have syntaxes
17012 that enable them to share or nearly share features, so C mode is
17013 now provided by CC mode, the `C Collection'.)
17014
17015 But when you do know who is going to use Emacs---you,
17016 yourself---then it makes sense to customize Emacs.
17017
17018 For example, I seldom want Fundamental mode when I edit an
17019 otherwise undistinguished file; I want Text mode. This is why I
17020 customize Emacs: so it suits me.
17021
17022 You can customize and extend Emacs by writing or adapting a
17023 @file{~/.emacs} file. This is your personal initialization file; its
17024 contents, written in Emacs Lisp, tell Emacs what to do.@footnote{You
17025 may also add @file{.el} to @file{~/.emacs} and call it a
17026 @file{~/.emacs.el} file. In the past, you were forbidden to type the
17027 extra keystrokes that the name @file{~/.emacs.el} requires, but now
17028 you may. The new format is consistent with the Emacs Lisp file
17029 naming conventions; the old format saves typing.}
17030
17031 A @file{~/.emacs} file contains Emacs Lisp code. You can write this
17032 code yourself; or you can use Emacs' @code{customize} feature to write
17033 the code for you. You can combine your own expressions and
17034 auto-written Customize expressions in your @file{.emacs} file.
17035
17036 (I myself prefer to write my own expressions, except for those,
17037 particularly fonts, that I find easier to manipulate using the
17038 @code{customize} command. I combine the two methods.)
17039
17040 Most of this chapter is about writing expressions yourself. It
17041 describes a simple @file{.emacs} file; for more information, see
17042 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and
17043 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17044 Manual}.
17045
17046 @node Site-wide Init, defcustom, Default Configuration, Emacs Initialization
17047 @section Site-wide Initialization Files
17048
17049 @cindex @file{default.el} init file
17050 @cindex @file{site-init.el} init file
17051 @cindex @file{site-load.el} init file
17052 In addition to your personal initialization file, Emacs automatically
17053 loads various site-wide initialization files, if they exist. These
17054 have the same form as your @file{.emacs} file, but are loaded by
17055 everyone.
17056
17057 Two site-wide initialization files, @file{site-load.el} and
17058 @file{site-init.el}, are loaded into Emacs and then `dumped' if a
17059 `dumped' version of Emacs is created, as is most common. (Dumped
17060 copies of Emacs load more quickly. However, once a file is loaded and
17061 dumped, a change to it does not lead to a change in Emacs unless you
17062 load it yourself or re-dump Emacs. @xref{Building Emacs, , Building
17063 Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, and the
17064 @file{INSTALL} file.)
17065
17066 Three other site-wide initialization files are loaded automatically
17067 each time you start Emacs, if they exist. These are
17068 @file{site-start.el}, which is loaded @emph{before} your @file{.emacs}
17069 file, and @file{default.el}, and the terminal type file, which are both
17070 loaded @emph{after} your @file{.emacs} file.
17071
17072 Settings and definitions in your @file{.emacs} file will overwrite
17073 conflicting settings and definitions in a @file{site-start.el} file,
17074 if it exists; but the settings and definitions in a @file{default.el}
17075 or terminal type file will overwrite those in your @file{.emacs} file.
17076 (You can prevent interference from a terminal type file by setting
17077 @code{term-file-prefix} to @code{nil}. @xref{Simple Extension, , A
17078 Simple Extension}.)
17079
17080 @c Rewritten to avoid overfull hbox.
17081 The @file{INSTALL} file that comes in the distribution contains
17082 descriptions of the @file{site-init.el} and @file{site-load.el} files.
17083
17084 The @file{loadup.el}, @file{startup.el}, and @file{loaddefs.el} files
17085 control loading. These files are in the @file{lisp} directory of the
17086 Emacs distribution and are worth perusing.
17087
17088 The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains a good many suggestions as to
17089 what to put into your own @file{.emacs} file, or into a site-wide
17090 initialization file.
17091
17092 @node defcustom, Beginning a .emacs File, Site-wide Init, Emacs Initialization
17093 @section Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}
17094 @findex defcustom
17095
17096 You can specify variables using @code{defcustom} so that you and
17097 others can then use Emacs' @code{customize} feature to set their
17098 values. (You cannot use @code{customize} to write function
17099 definitions; but you can write @code{defuns} in your @file{.emacs}
17100 file. Indeed, you can write any Lisp expression in your @file{.emacs}
17101 file.)
17102
17103 The @code{customize} feature depends on the @code{defcustom} special
17104 form. Although you can use @code{defvar} or @code{setq} for variables
17105 that users set, the @code{defcustom} special form is designed for the
17106 job.
17107
17108 You can use your knowledge of @code{defvar} for writing the
17109 first three arguments for @code{defcustom}. The first argument to
17110 @code{defcustom} is the name of the variable. The second argument is
17111 the variable's initial value, if any; and this value is set only if
17112 the value has not already been set. The third argument is the
17113 documentation.
17114
17115 The fourth and subsequent arguments to @code{defcustom} specify types
17116 and options; these are not featured in @code{defvar}. (These
17117 arguments are optional.)
17118
17119 Each of these arguments consists of a keyword followed by a value.
17120 Each keyword starts with the colon character @samp{:}.
17121
17122 @need 1250
17123 For example, the customizable user option variable
17124 @code{text-mode-hook} looks like this:
17125
17126 @smallexample
17127 @group
17128 (defcustom text-mode-hook nil
17129 "Normal hook run when entering Text mode and many related modes."
17130 :type 'hook
17131 :options '(turn-on-auto-fill flyspell-mode)
17132 :group 'data)
17133 @end group
17134 @end smallexample
17135
17136 @noindent
17137 The name of the variable is @code{text-mode-hook}; it has no default
17138 value; and its documentation string tells you what it does.
17139
17140 The @code{:type} keyword tells Emacs the kind of data to which
17141 @code{text-mode-hook} should be set and how to display the value in a
17142 Customization buffer.
17143
17144 The @code{:options} keyword specifies a suggested list of values for
17145 the variable. Usually, @code{:options} applies to a hook.
17146 The list is only a suggestion; it is not exclusive; a person who sets
17147 the variable may set it to other values; the list shown following the
17148 @code{:options} keyword is intended to offer convenient choices to a
17149 user.
17150
17151 Finally, the @code{:group} keyword tells the Emacs Customization
17152 command in which group the variable is located. This tells where to
17153 find it.
17154
17155 The @code{defcustom} function recognizes more than a dozen keywords.
17156 For more information, see @ref{Customization, , Writing Customization
17157 Definitions, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
17158
17159 Consider @code{text-mode-hook} as an example.
17160
17161 There are two ways to customize this variable. You can use the
17162 customization command or write the appropriate expressions yourself.
17163
17164 @need 800
17165 Using the customization command, you can type:
17166
17167 @smallexample
17168 M-x customize
17169 @end smallexample
17170
17171 @noindent
17172 and find that the group for editing files of data is called `data'.
17173 Enter that group. Text Mode Hook is the first member. You can click
17174 on its various options, such as @code{turn-on-auto-fill}, to set the
17175 values. After you click on the button to
17176
17177 @smallexample
17178 Save for Future Sessions
17179 @end smallexample
17180
17181 @noindent
17182 Emacs will write an expression into your @file{.emacs} file.
17183 It will look like this:
17184
17185 @smallexample
17186 @group
17187 (custom-set-variables
17188 ;; custom-set-variables was added by Custom.
17189 ;; If you edit it by hand, you could mess it up, so be careful.
17190 ;; Your init file should contain only one such instance.
17191 ;; If there is more than one, they won't work right.
17192 '(text-mode-hook (quote (turn-on-auto-fill text-mode-hook-identify))))
17193 @end group
17194 @end smallexample
17195
17196 @noindent
17197 (The @code{text-mode-hook-identify} function tells
17198 @code{toggle-text-mode-auto-fill} which buffers are in Text mode.
17199 It comes on automatically.)
17200
17201 The @code{custom-set-variables} function works somewhat differently
17202 than a @code{setq}. While I have never learned the differences, I
17203 modify the @code{custom-set-variables} expressions in my @file{.emacs}
17204 file by hand: I make the changes in what appears to me to be a
17205 reasonable manner and have not had any problems. Others prefer to use
17206 the Customization command and let Emacs do the work for them.
17207
17208 Another @code{custom-set-@dots{}} function is @code{custom-set-faces}.
17209 This function sets the various font faces. Over time, I have set a
17210 considerable number of faces. Some of the time, I re-set them using
17211 @code{customize}; other times, I simply edit the
17212 @code{custom-set-faces} expression in my @file{.emacs} file itself.
17213
17214 The second way to customize your @code{text-mode-hook} is to set it
17215 yourself in your @file{.emacs} file using code that has nothing to do
17216 with the @code{custom-set-@dots{}} functions.
17217
17218 @need 800
17219 When you do this, and later use @code{customize}, you will see a
17220 message that says
17221
17222 @smallexample
17223 CHANGED outside Customize; operating on it here may be unreliable.
17224 @end smallexample
17225
17226 @need 800
17227 This message is only a warning. If you click on the button to
17228
17229 @smallexample
17230 Save for Future Sessions
17231 @end smallexample
17232
17233 @noindent
17234 Emacs will write a @code{custom-set-@dots{}} expression near the end
17235 of your @file{.emacs} file that will be evaluated after your
17236 hand-written expression. It will, therefore, overrule your
17237 hand-written expression. No harm will be done. When you do this,
17238 however, be careful to remember which expression is active; if you
17239 forget, you may confuse yourself.
17240
17241 So long as you remember where the values are set, you will have no
17242 trouble. In any event, the values are always set in your
17243 initialization file, which is usually called @file{.emacs}.
17244
17245 I myself use @code{customize} for hardly anything. Mostly, I write
17246 expressions myself.
17247
17248 @findex defsubst
17249 @findex defconst
17250 Incidentally, to be more complete concerning defines: @code{defsubst}
17251 defines an inline function. The syntax is just like that of
17252 @code{defun}. @code{defconst} defines a symbol as a constant. The
17253 intent is that neither programs nor users should ever change a value
17254 set by @code{defconst}. (You can change it; the value set is a
17255 variable; but please do not.)
17256
17257 @node Beginning a .emacs File, Text and Auto-fill, defcustom, Emacs Initialization
17258 @section Beginning a @file{.emacs} File
17259 @cindex @file{.emacs} file, beginning of
17260
17261 When you start Emacs, it loads your @file{.emacs} file unless you tell
17262 it not to by specifying @samp{-q} on the command line. (The
17263 @code{emacs -q} command gives you a plain, out-of-the-box Emacs.)
17264
17265 A @file{.emacs} file contains Lisp expressions. Often, these are no
17266 more than expressions to set values; sometimes they are function
17267 definitions.
17268
17269 @xref{Init File, , The Init File @file{~/.emacs}, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17270 Manual}, for a short description of initialization files.
17271
17272 This chapter goes over some of the same ground, but is a walk among
17273 extracts from a complete, long-used @file{.emacs} file---my own.
17274
17275 The first part of the file consists of comments: reminders to myself.
17276 By now, of course, I remember these things, but when I started, I did
17277 not.
17278
17279 @need 1200
17280 @smallexample
17281 @group
17282 ;;;; Bob's .emacs file
17283 ; Robert J. Chassell
17284 ; 26 September 1985
17285 @end group
17286 @end smallexample
17287
17288 @noindent
17289 Look at that date! I started this file a long time ago. I have been
17290 adding to it ever since.
17291
17292 @smallexample
17293 @group
17294 ; Each section in this file is introduced by a
17295 ; line beginning with four semicolons; and each
17296 ; entry is introduced by a line beginning with
17297 ; three semicolons.
17298 @end group
17299 @end smallexample
17300
17301 @noindent
17302 This describes the usual conventions for comments in Emacs Lisp.
17303 Everything on a line that follows a semicolon is a comment. Two,
17304 three, and four semicolons are used as subsection and section markers.
17305 (@xref{Comments, ,, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for
17306 more about comments.)
17307
17308 @smallexample
17309 @group
17310 ;;;; The Help Key
17311 ; Control-h is the help key;
17312 ; after typing control-h, type a letter to
17313 ; indicate the subject about which you want help.
17314 ; For an explanation of the help facility,
17315 ; type control-h two times in a row.
17316 @end group
17317 @end smallexample
17318
17319 @noindent
17320 Just remember: type @kbd{C-h} two times for help.
17321
17322 @smallexample
17323 @group
17324 ; To find out about any mode, type control-h m
17325 ; while in that mode. For example, to find out
17326 ; about mail mode, enter mail mode and then type
17327 ; control-h m.
17328 @end group
17329 @end smallexample
17330
17331 @noindent
17332 `Mode help', as I call this, is very helpful. Usually, it tells you
17333 all you need to know.
17334
17335 Of course, you don't need to include comments like these in your
17336 @file{.emacs} file. I included them in mine because I kept forgetting
17337 about Mode help or the conventions for comments---but I was able to
17338 remember to look here to remind myself.
17339
17340 @node Text and Auto-fill, Mail Aliases, Beginning a .emacs File, Emacs Initialization
17341 @section Text and Auto Fill Mode
17342
17343 Now we come to the part that `turns on' Text mode and
17344 Auto Fill mode.
17345
17346 @smallexample
17347 @group
17348 ;;; Text mode and Auto Fill mode
17349 ; The next two lines put Emacs into Text mode
17350 ; and Auto Fill mode, and are for writers who
17351 ; want to start writing prose rather than code.
17352 (setq default-major-mode 'text-mode)
17353 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17354 @end group
17355 @end smallexample
17356
17357 Here is the first part of this @file{.emacs} file that does something
17358 besides remind a forgetful human!
17359
17360 The first of the two lines in parentheses tells Emacs to turn on Text
17361 mode when you find a file, @emph{unless} that file should go into some
17362 other mode, such as C mode.
17363
17364 @cindex Per-buffer, local variables list
17365 @cindex Local variables list, per-buffer,
17366 @cindex Automatic mode selection
17367 @cindex Mode selection, automatic
17368 When Emacs reads a file, it looks at the extension to the file name,
17369 if any. (The extension is the part that comes after a @samp{.}.) If
17370 the file ends with a @samp{.c} or @samp{.h} extension then Emacs turns
17371 on C mode. Also, Emacs looks at first nonblank line of the file; if
17372 the line says @w{@samp{-*- C -*-}}, Emacs turns on C mode. Emacs
17373 possesses a list of extensions and specifications that it uses
17374 automatically. In addition, Emacs looks near the last page for a
17375 per-buffer, ``local variables list'', if any.
17376
17377 @ifinfo
17378 @xref{Choosing Modes, , How Major Modes are Chosen, emacs, The GNU
17379 Emacs Manual}.
17380
17381 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17382 Manual}.
17383 @end ifinfo
17384 @iftex
17385 See sections ``How Major Modes are Chosen'' and ``Local Variables in
17386 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17387 @end iftex
17388
17389 Now, back to the @file{.emacs} file.
17390
17391 @need 800
17392 Here is the line again; how does it work?
17393
17394 @cindex Text Mode turned on
17395 @smallexample
17396 (setq major-mode 'text-mode)
17397 @end smallexample
17398
17399 @noindent
17400 This line is a short, but complete Emacs Lisp expression.
17401
17402 We are already familiar with @code{setq}. It sets the following variable,
17403 @code{major-mode}, to the subsequent value, which is @code{text-mode}.
17404 The single quote mark before @code{text-mode} tells Emacs to deal directly
17405 with the @code{text-mode} symbol, not with whatever it might stand for.
17406 @xref{set & setq, , Setting the Value of a Variable},
17407 for a reminder of how @code{setq} works.
17408 The main point is that there is no difference between the procedure you
17409 use to set a value in your @file{.emacs} file and the procedure you use
17410 anywhere else in Emacs.
17411
17412 @need 800
17413 Here is the next line:
17414
17415 @cindex Auto Fill mode turned on
17416 @findex add-hook
17417 @smallexample
17418 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17419 @end smallexample
17420
17421 @noindent
17422 In this line, the @code{add-hook} command adds
17423 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} to the variable.
17424
17425 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} is the name of a program, that, you guessed
17426 it!, turns on Auto Fill mode.
17427
17428 Every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs runs the commands `hooked'
17429 onto Text mode. So every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs also
17430 turns on Auto Fill mode.
17431
17432 In brief, the first line causes Emacs to enter Text mode when you edit a
17433 file, unless the file name extension, a first non-blank line, or local
17434 variables to tell Emacs otherwise.
17435
17436 Text mode among other actions, sets the syntax table to work
17437 conveniently for writers. In Text mode, Emacs considers an apostrophe
17438 as part of a word like a letter; but Emacs does not consider a period
17439 or a space as part of a word. Thus, @kbd{M-f} moves you over
17440 @samp{it's}. On the other hand, in C mode, @kbd{M-f} stops just after
17441 the @samp{t} of @samp{it's}.
17442
17443 The second line causes Emacs to turn on Auto Fill mode when it turns
17444 on Text mode. In Auto Fill mode, Emacs automatically breaks a line
17445 that is too wide and brings the excessively wide part of the line down
17446 to the next line. Emacs breaks lines between words, not within them.
17447
17448 When Auto Fill mode is turned off, lines continue to the right as you
17449 type them. Depending on how you set the value of
17450 @code{truncate-lines}, the words you type either disappear off the
17451 right side of the screen, or else are shown, in a rather ugly and
17452 unreadable manner, as a continuation line on the screen.
17453
17454 @need 1250
17455 In addition, in this part of my @file{.emacs} file, I tell the Emacs
17456 fill commands to insert two spaces after a colon:
17457
17458 @smallexample
17459 (setq colon-double-space t)
17460 @end smallexample
17461
17462 @node Mail Aliases, Indent Tabs Mode, Text and Auto-fill, Emacs Initialization
17463 @section Mail Aliases
17464
17465 Here is a @code{setq} that `turns on' mail aliases, along with more
17466 reminders.
17467
17468 @smallexample
17469 @group
17470 ;;; Mail mode
17471 ; To enter mail mode, type `C-x m'
17472 ; To enter RMAIL (for reading mail),
17473 ; type `M-x rmail'
17474 (setq mail-aliases t)
17475 @end group
17476 @end smallexample
17477
17478 @cindex Mail aliases
17479 @noindent
17480 This @code{setq} command sets the value of the variable
17481 @code{mail-aliases} to @code{t}. Since @code{t} means true, the line
17482 says, in effect, ``Yes, use mail aliases.''
17483
17484 Mail aliases are convenient short names for long email addresses or
17485 for lists of email addresses. The file where you keep your `aliases'
17486 is @file{~/.mailrc}. You write an alias like this:
17487
17488 @smallexample
17489 alias geo george@@foobar.wiz.edu
17490 @end smallexample
17491
17492 @noindent
17493 When you write a message to George, address it to @samp{geo}; the
17494 mailer will automatically expand @samp{geo} to the full address.
17495
17496 @node Indent Tabs Mode, Keybindings, Mail Aliases, Emacs Initialization
17497 @section Indent Tabs Mode
17498 @cindex Tabs, preventing
17499 @findex indent-tabs-mode
17500
17501 By default, Emacs inserts tabs in place of multiple spaces when it
17502 formats a region. (For example, you might indent many lines of text
17503 all at once with the @code{indent-region} command.) Tabs look fine on
17504 a terminal or with ordinary printing, but they produce badly indented
17505 output when you use @TeX{} or Texinfo since @TeX{} ignores tabs.
17506
17507 @need 1250
17508 The following turns off Indent Tabs mode:
17509
17510 @smallexample
17511 @group
17512 ;;; Prevent Extraneous Tabs
17513 (setq-default indent-tabs-mode nil)
17514 @end group
17515 @end smallexample
17516
17517 Note that this line uses @code{setq-default} rather than the
17518 @code{setq} command that we have seen before. The @code{setq-default}
17519 command sets values only in buffers that do not have their own local
17520 values for the variable.
17521
17522 @ifinfo
17523 @xref{Just Spaces, , Tabs vs. Spaces, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17524
17525 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17526 Manual}.
17527 @end ifinfo
17528 @iftex
17529 See sections ``Tabs vs.@: Spaces'' and ``Local Variables in
17530 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17531 @end iftex
17532
17533 @need 1700
17534 @node Keybindings, Keymaps, Indent Tabs Mode, Emacs Initialization
17535 @section Some Keybindings
17536
17537 Now for some personal keybindings:
17538
17539 @smallexample
17540 @group
17541 ;;; Compare windows
17542 (global-set-key "\C-cw" 'compare-windows)
17543 @end group
17544 @end smallexample
17545
17546 @findex compare-windows
17547 @code{compare-windows} is a nifty command that compares the text in
17548 your current window with text in the next window. It makes the
17549 comparison by starting at point in each window, moving over text in
17550 each window as far as they match. I use this command all the time.
17551
17552 This also shows how to set a key globally, for all modes.
17553
17554 @cindex Setting a key globally
17555 @cindex Global set key
17556 @cindex Key setting globally
17557 @findex global-set-key
17558 The command is @code{global-set-key}. It is followed by the
17559 keybinding. In a @file{.emacs} file, the keybinding is written as
17560 shown: @code{\C-c} stands for `control-c', which means `press the
17561 control key and the @key{c} key at the same time'. The @code{w} means
17562 `press the @key{w} key'. The keybinding is surrounded by double
17563 quotation marks. In documentation, you would write this as
17564 @w{@kbd{C-c w}}. (If you were binding a @key{META} key, such as
17565 @kbd{M-c}, rather than a @key{CTRL} key, you would write
17566 @w{@code{\M-c}} in your @file{.emacs} file. @xref{Init Rebinding, ,
17567 Rebinding Keys in Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
17568 details.)
17569
17570 The command invoked by the keys is @code{compare-windows}. Note that
17571 @code{compare-windows} is preceded by a single quote; otherwise, Emacs
17572 would first try to evaluate the symbol to determine its value.
17573
17574 These three things, the double quotation marks, the backslash before
17575 the @samp{C}, and the single quote mark are necessary parts of
17576 keybinding that I tend to forget. Fortunately, I have come to
17577 remember that I should look at my existing @file{.emacs} file, and
17578 adapt what is there.
17579
17580 As for the keybinding itself: @kbd{C-c w}. This combines the prefix
17581 key, @kbd{C-c}, with a single character, in this case, @kbd{w}. This
17582 set of keys, @kbd{C-c} followed by a single character, is strictly
17583 reserved for individuals' own use. (I call these `own' keys, since
17584 these are for my own use.) You should always be able to create such a
17585 keybinding for your own use without stomping on someone else's
17586 keybinding. If you ever write an extension to Emacs, please avoid
17587 taking any of these keys for public use. Create a key like @kbd{C-c
17588 C-w} instead. Otherwise, we will run out of `own' keys.
17589
17590 @need 1250
17591 Here is another keybinding, with a comment:
17592
17593 @smallexample
17594 @group
17595 ;;; Keybinding for `occur'
17596 ; I use occur a lot, so let's bind it to a key:
17597 (global-set-key "\C-co" 'occur)
17598 @end group
17599 @end smallexample
17600
17601 @findex occur
17602 The @code{occur} command shows all the lines in the current buffer
17603 that contain a match for a regular expression. Matching lines are
17604 shown in a buffer called @file{*Occur*}. That buffer serves as a menu
17605 to jump to occurrences.
17606
17607 @findex global-unset-key
17608 @cindex Unbinding key
17609 @cindex Key unbinding
17610 @need 1250
17611 Here is how to unbind a key, so it does not
17612 work:
17613
17614 @smallexample
17615 @group
17616 ;;; Unbind `C-x f'
17617 (global-unset-key "\C-xf")
17618 @end group
17619 @end smallexample
17620
17621 There is a reason for this unbinding: I found I inadvertently typed
17622 @w{@kbd{C-x f}} when I meant to type @kbd{C-x C-f}. Rather than find a
17623 file, as I intended, I accidentally set the width for filled text,
17624 almost always to a width I did not want. Since I hardly ever reset my
17625 default width, I simply unbound the key.
17626
17627 @findex list-buffers, @r{rebound}
17628 @findex buffer-menu, @r{bound to key}
17629 @need 1250
17630 The following rebinds an existing key:
17631
17632 @smallexample
17633 @group
17634 ;;; Rebind `C-x C-b' for `buffer-menu'
17635 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17636 @end group
17637 @end smallexample
17638
17639 By default, @kbd{C-x C-b} runs the
17640 @code{list-buffers} command. This command lists
17641 your buffers in @emph{another} window. Since I
17642 almost always want to do something in that
17643 window, I prefer the @code{buffer-menu}
17644 command, which not only lists the buffers,
17645 but moves point into that window.
17646
17647 @node Keymaps, Loading Files, Keybindings, Emacs Initialization
17648 @section Keymaps
17649 @cindex Keymaps
17650 @cindex Rebinding keys
17651
17652 Emacs uses @dfn{keymaps} to record which keys call which commands.
17653 When you use @code{global-set-key} to set the keybinding for a single
17654 command in all parts of Emacs, you are specifying the keybinding in
17655 @code{current-global-map}.
17656
17657 Specific modes, such as C mode or Text mode, have their own keymaps;
17658 the mode-specific keymaps override the global map that is shared by
17659 all buffers.
17660
17661 The @code{global-set-key} function binds, or rebinds, the global
17662 keymap. For example, the following binds the key @kbd{C-x C-b} to the
17663 function @code{buffer-menu}:
17664
17665 @smallexample
17666 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17667 @end smallexample
17668
17669 Mode-specific keymaps are bound using the @code{define-key} function,
17670 which takes a specific keymap as an argument, as well as the key and
17671 the command. For example, my @file{.emacs} file contains the
17672 following expression to bind the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} command
17673 to @kbd{C-c C-c g}:
17674
17675 @smallexample
17676 @group
17677 (define-key texinfo-mode-map "\C-c\C-cg" 'texinfo-insert-@@group)
17678 @end group
17679 @end smallexample
17680
17681 @noindent
17682 The @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function itself is a little extension
17683 to Texinfo mode that inserts @samp{@@group} into a Texinfo file. I
17684 use this command all the time and prefer to type the three strokes
17685 @kbd{C-c C-c g} rather than the six strokes @kbd{@@ g r o u p}.
17686 (@samp{@@group} and its matching @samp{@@end group} are commands that
17687 keep all enclosed text together on one page; many multi-line examples
17688 in this book are surrounded by @samp{@@group @dots{} @@end group}.)
17689
17690 @need 1250
17691 Here is the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function definition:
17692
17693 @smallexample
17694 @group
17695 (defun texinfo-insert-@@group ()
17696 "Insert the string @@group in a Texinfo buffer."
17697 (interactive)
17698 (beginning-of-line)
17699 (insert "@@group\n"))
17700 @end group
17701 @end smallexample
17702
17703 (Of course, I could have used Abbrev mode to save typing, rather than
17704 write a function to insert a word; but I prefer key strokes consistent
17705 with other Texinfo mode key bindings.)
17706
17707 You will see numerous @code{define-key} expressions in
17708 @file{loaddefs.el} as well as in the various mode libraries, such as
17709 @file{cc-mode.el} and @file{lisp-mode.el}.
17710
17711 @xref{Key Bindings, , Customizing Key Bindings, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17712 Manual}, and @ref{Keymaps, , Keymaps, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17713 Reference Manual}, for more information about keymaps.
17714
17715 @node Loading Files, Autoload, Keymaps, Emacs Initialization
17716 @section Loading Files
17717 @cindex Loading files
17718 @c findex load
17719
17720 Many people in the GNU Emacs community have written extensions to
17721 Emacs. As time goes by, these extensions are often included in new
17722 releases. For example, the Calendar and Diary packages are now part
17723 of the standard GNU Emacs, as is Calc.
17724
17725 You can use a @code{load} command to evaluate a complete file and
17726 thereby install all the functions and variables in the file into Emacs.
17727 For example:
17728
17729 @c (auto-compression-mode t)
17730
17731 @smallexample
17732 (load "~/emacs/slowsplit")
17733 @end smallexample
17734
17735 This evaluates, i.e.@: loads, the @file{slowsplit.el} file or if it
17736 exists, the faster, byte compiled @file{slowsplit.elc} file from the
17737 @file{emacs} sub-directory of your home directory. The file contains
17738 the function @code{split-window-quietly}, which John Robinson wrote in
17739 1989.
17740
17741 The @code{split-window-quietly} function splits a window with the
17742 minimum of redisplay. I installed it in 1989 because it worked well
17743 with the slow 1200 baud terminals I was then using. Nowadays, I only
17744 occasionally come across such a slow connection, but I continue to use
17745 the function because I like the way it leaves the bottom half of a
17746 buffer in the lower of the new windows and the top half in the upper
17747 window.
17748
17749 @need 1250
17750 To replace the key binding for the default
17751 @code{split-window-vertically}, you must also unset that key and bind
17752 the keys to @code{split-window-quietly}, like this:
17753
17754 @smallexample
17755 @group
17756 (global-unset-key "\C-x2")
17757 (global-set-key "\C-x2" 'split-window-quietly)
17758 @end group
17759 @end smallexample
17760
17761 @vindex load-path
17762 If you load many extensions, as I do, then instead of specifying the
17763 exact location of the extension file, as shown above, you can specify
17764 that directory as part of Emacs' @code{load-path}. Then, when Emacs
17765 loads a file, it will search that directory as well as its default
17766 list of directories. (The default list is specified in @file{paths.h}
17767 when Emacs is built.)
17768
17769 @need 1250
17770 The following command adds your @file{~/emacs} directory to the
17771 existing load path:
17772
17773 @smallexample
17774 @group
17775 ;;; Emacs Load Path
17776 (setq load-path (cons "~/emacs" load-path))
17777 @end group
17778 @end smallexample
17779
17780 Incidentally, @code{load-library} is an interactive interface to the
17781 @code{load} function. The complete function looks like this:
17782
17783 @findex load-library
17784 @smallexample
17785 @group
17786 (defun load-library (library)
17787 "Load the library named LIBRARY.
17788 This is an interface to the function `load'."
17789 (interactive
17790 (list (completing-read "Load library: "
17791 (apply-partially 'locate-file-completion-table
17792 load-path
17793 (get-load-suffixes)))))
17794 (load library))
17795 @end group
17796 @end smallexample
17797
17798 The name of the function, @code{load-library}, comes from the use of
17799 `library' as a conventional synonym for `file'. The source for the
17800 @code{load-library} command is in the @file{files.el} library.
17801
17802 Another interactive command that does a slightly different job is
17803 @code{load-file}. @xref{Lisp Libraries, , Libraries of Lisp Code for
17804 Emacs, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for information on the
17805 distinction between @code{load-library} and this command.
17806
17807 @node Autoload, Simple Extension, Loading Files, Emacs Initialization
17808 @section Autoloading
17809 @findex autoload
17810
17811 Instead of installing a function by loading the file that contains it,
17812 or by evaluating the function definition, you can make the function
17813 available but not actually install it until it is first called. This
17814 is called @dfn{autoloading}.
17815
17816 When you execute an autoloaded function, Emacs automatically evaluates
17817 the file that contains the definition, and then calls the function.
17818
17819 Emacs starts quicker with autoloaded functions, since their libraries
17820 are not loaded right away; but you need to wait a moment when you
17821 first use such a function, while its containing file is evaluated.
17822
17823 Rarely used functions are frequently autoloaded. The
17824 @file{loaddefs.el} library contains hundreds of autoloaded functions,
17825 from @code{bookmark-set} to @code{wordstar-mode}. Of course, you may
17826 come to use a `rare' function frequently. When you do, you should
17827 load that function's file with a @code{load} expression in your
17828 @file{.emacs} file.
17829
17830 In my @file{.emacs} file, I load 14 libraries that contain functions
17831 that would otherwise be autoloaded. (Actually, it would have been
17832 better to include these files in my `dumped' Emacs, but I forgot.
17833 @xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17834 Reference Manual}, and the @file{INSTALL} file for more about
17835 dumping.)
17836
17837 You may also want to include autoloaded expressions in your @file{.emacs}
17838 file. @code{autoload} is a built-in function that takes up to five
17839 arguments, the final three of which are optional. The first argument
17840 is the name of the function to be autoloaded; the second is the name
17841 of the file to be loaded. The third argument is documentation for the
17842 function, and the fourth tells whether the function can be called
17843 interactively. The fifth argument tells what type of
17844 object---@code{autoload} can handle a keymap or macro as well as a
17845 function (the default is a function).
17846
17847 @need 800
17848 Here is a typical example:
17849
17850 @smallexample
17851 @group
17852 (autoload 'html-helper-mode
17853 "html-helper-mode" "Edit HTML documents" t)
17854 @end group
17855 @end smallexample
17856
17857 @noindent
17858 (@code{html-helper-mode} is an older alternative to @code{html-mode},
17859 which is a standard part of the distribution.)
17860
17861 @noindent
17862 This expression autoloads the @code{html-helper-mode} function. It
17863 takes it from the @file{html-helper-mode.el} file (or from the byte
17864 compiled version @file{html-helper-mode.elc}, if that exists.) The
17865 file must be located in a directory specified by @code{load-path}.
17866 The documentation says that this is a mode to help you edit documents
17867 written in the HyperText Markup Language. You can call this mode
17868 interactively by typing @kbd{M-x html-helper-mode}. (You need to
17869 duplicate the function's regular documentation in the autoload
17870 expression because the regular function is not yet loaded, so its
17871 documentation is not available.)
17872
17873 @xref{Autoload, , Autoload, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17874 Manual}, for more information.
17875
17876 @node Simple Extension, X11 Colors, Autoload, Emacs Initialization
17877 @section A Simple Extension: @code{line-to-top-of-window}
17878 @findex line-to-top-of-window
17879 @cindex Simple extension in @file{.emacs} file
17880
17881 Here is a simple extension to Emacs that moves the line point is on to
17882 the top of the window. I use this all the time, to make text easier
17883 to read.
17884
17885 You can put the following code into a separate file and then load it
17886 from your @file{.emacs} file, or you can include it within your
17887 @file{.emacs} file.
17888
17889 @need 1250
17890 Here is the definition:
17891
17892 @smallexample
17893 @group
17894 ;;; Line to top of window;
17895 ;;; replace three keystroke sequence C-u 0 C-l
17896 (defun line-to-top-of-window ()
17897 "Move the line point is on to top of window."
17898 (interactive)
17899 (recenter 0))
17900 @end group
17901 @end smallexample
17902
17903 @need 1250
17904 Now for the keybinding.
17905
17906 Nowadays, function keys as well as mouse button events and
17907 non-@sc{ascii} characters are written within square brackets, without
17908 quotation marks. (In Emacs version 18 and before, you had to write
17909 different function key bindings for each different make of terminal.)
17910
17911 I bind @code{line-to-top-of-window} to my @key{F6} function key like
17912 this:
17913
17914 @smallexample
17915 (global-set-key [f6] 'line-to-top-of-window)
17916 @end smallexample
17917
17918 For more information, see @ref{Init Rebinding, , Rebinding Keys in
17919 Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17920
17921 @cindex Conditional 'twixt two versions of Emacs
17922 @cindex Version of Emacs, choosing
17923 @cindex Emacs version, choosing
17924 If you run two versions of GNU Emacs, such as versions 22 and 23, and
17925 use one @file{.emacs} file, you can select which code to evaluate with
17926 the following conditional:
17927
17928 @smallexample
17929 @group
17930 (cond
17931 ((= 22 emacs-major-version)
17932 ;; evaluate version 22 code
17933 ( @dots{} ))
17934 ((= 23 emacs-major-version)
17935 ;; evaluate version 23 code
17936 ( @dots{} )))
17937 @end group
17938 @end smallexample
17939
17940 For example, in contrast to version 20, more recent versions blink
17941 their cursors by default. I hate such blinking, as well as other
17942 features, so I placed the following in my @file{.emacs}
17943 file@footnote{When I start instances of Emacs that do not load my
17944 @file{.emacs} file or any site file, I also turn off blinking:
17945
17946 @smallexample
17947 emacs -q --no-site-file -eval '(blink-cursor-mode nil)'
17948
17949 @exdent Or nowadays, using an even more sophisticated set of options,
17950
17951 emacs -Q - D
17952 @end smallexample
17953 }:
17954
17955 @smallexample
17956 @group
17957 (when (>= emacs-major-version 21)
17958 (blink-cursor-mode 0)
17959 ;; Insert newline when you press `C-n' (next-line)
17960 ;; at the end of the buffer
17961 (setq next-line-add-newlines t)
17962 @end group
17963 @group
17964 ;; Turn on image viewing
17965 (auto-image-file-mode t)
17966 @end group
17967 @group
17968 ;; Turn on menu bar (this bar has text)
17969 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17970 (menu-bar-mode 1)
17971 @end group
17972 @group
17973 ;; Turn off tool bar (this bar has icons)
17974 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17975 (tool-bar-mode nil)
17976 @end group
17977 @group
17978 ;; Turn off tooltip mode for tool bar
17979 ;; (This mode causes icon explanations to pop up)
17980 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17981 (tooltip-mode nil)
17982 ;; If tooltips turned on, make tips appear promptly
17983 (setq tooltip-delay 0.1) ; default is 0.7 second
17984 )
17985 @end group
17986 @end smallexample
17987
17988 @node X11 Colors, Miscellaneous, Simple Extension, Emacs Initialization
17989 @section X11 Colors
17990
17991 You can specify colors when you use Emacs with the MIT X Windowing
17992 system.
17993
17994 I dislike the default colors and specify my own.
17995
17996 @need 1250
17997 Here are the expressions in my @file{.emacs}
17998 file that set values:
17999
18000 @smallexample
18001 @group
18002 ;; Set cursor color
18003 (set-cursor-color "white")
18004
18005 ;; Set mouse color
18006 (set-mouse-color "white")
18007
18008 ;; Set foreground and background
18009 (set-foreground-color "white")
18010 (set-background-color "darkblue")
18011 @end group
18012
18013 @group
18014 ;;; Set highlighting colors for isearch and drag
18015 (set-face-foreground 'highlight "white")
18016 (set-face-background 'highlight "blue")
18017 @end group
18018
18019 @group
18020 (set-face-foreground 'region "cyan")
18021 (set-face-background 'region "blue")
18022 @end group
18023
18024 @group
18025 (set-face-foreground 'secondary-selection "skyblue")
18026 (set-face-background 'secondary-selection "darkblue")
18027 @end group
18028
18029 @group
18030 ;; Set calendar highlighting colors
18031 (setq calendar-load-hook
18032 '(lambda ()
18033 (set-face-foreground 'diary-face "skyblue")
18034 (set-face-background 'holiday-face "slate blue")
18035 (set-face-foreground 'holiday-face "white")))
18036 @end group
18037 @end smallexample
18038
18039 The various shades of blue soothe my eye and prevent me from seeing
18040 the screen flicker.
18041
18042 Alternatively, I could have set my specifications in various X
18043 initialization files. For example, I could set the foreground,
18044 background, cursor, and pointer (i.e., mouse) colors in my
18045 @file{~/.Xresources} file like this:
18046
18047 @smallexample
18048 @group
18049 Emacs*foreground: white
18050 Emacs*background: darkblue
18051 Emacs*cursorColor: white
18052 Emacs*pointerColor: white
18053 @end group
18054 @end smallexample
18055
18056 In any event, since it is not part of Emacs, I set the root color of
18057 my X window in my @file{~/.xinitrc} file, like this@footnote{I also
18058 run more modern window managers, such as Enlightenment, Gnome, or KDE;
18059 in those cases, I often specify an image rather than a plain color.}:
18060
18061 @smallexample
18062 xsetroot -solid Navy -fg white &
18063 @end smallexample
18064
18065 @need 1700
18066 @node Miscellaneous, Mode Line, X11 Colors, Emacs Initialization
18067 @section Miscellaneous Settings for a @file{.emacs} File
18068
18069 @need 1250
18070 Here are a few miscellaneous settings:
18071 @sp 1
18072
18073 @itemize @minus
18074 @item
18075 Set the shape and color of the mouse cursor:
18076
18077 @smallexample
18078 @group
18079 ; Cursor shapes are defined in
18080 ; `/usr/include/X11/cursorfont.h';
18081 ; for example, the `target' cursor is number 128;
18082 ; the `top_left_arrow' cursor is number 132.
18083 @end group
18084
18085 @group
18086 (let ((mpointer (x-get-resource "*mpointer"
18087 "*emacs*mpointer")))
18088 ;; If you have not set your mouse pointer
18089 ;; then set it, otherwise leave as is:
18090 (if (eq mpointer nil)
18091 (setq mpointer "132")) ; top_left_arrow
18092 @end group
18093 @group
18094 (setq x-pointer-shape (string-to-int mpointer))
18095 (set-mouse-color "white"))
18096 @end group
18097 @end smallexample
18098
18099 @item
18100 Or you can set the values of a variety of features in an alist, like
18101 this:
18102
18103 @smallexample
18104 @group
18105 (setq-default
18106 default-frame-alist
18107 '((cursor-color . "white")
18108 (mouse-color . "white")
18109 (foreground-color . "white")
18110 (background-color . "DodgerBlue4")
18111 ;; (cursor-type . bar)
18112 (cursor-type . box)
18113 @end group
18114 @group
18115 (tool-bar-lines . 0)
18116 (menu-bar-lines . 1)
18117 (width . 80)
18118 (height . 58)
18119 (font .
18120 "-Misc-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--20-200-75-75-C-100-ISO8859-1")
18121 ))
18122 @end group
18123 @end smallexample
18124
18125 @item
18126 Convert @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h} into @key{DEL} and @key{DEL}
18127 into @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h}.@*
18128 (Some older keyboards needed this, although I have not seen the
18129 problem recently.)
18130
18131 @smallexample
18132 @group
18133 ;; Translate `C-h' to <DEL>.
18134 ; (keyboard-translate ?\C-h ?\C-?)
18135
18136 ;; Translate <DEL> to `C-h'.
18137 (keyboard-translate ?\C-? ?\C-h)
18138 @end group
18139 @end smallexample
18140
18141 @item Turn off a blinking cursor!
18142
18143 @smallexample
18144 @group
18145 (if (fboundp 'blink-cursor-mode)
18146 (blink-cursor-mode -1))
18147 @end group
18148 @end smallexample
18149
18150 @noindent
18151 or start GNU Emacs with the command @code{emacs -nbc}.
18152
18153 @need 1250
18154 @item When using `grep'@*
18155 @samp{-i}@w{ } Ignore case distinctions@*
18156 @samp{-n}@w{ } Prefix each line of output with line number@*
18157 @samp{-H}@w{ } Print the filename for each match.@*
18158 @samp{-e}@w{ } Protect patterns beginning with a hyphen character, @samp{-}
18159
18160 @smallexample
18161 (setq grep-command "grep -i -nH -e ")
18162 @end smallexample
18163
18164 @ignore
18165 @c Evidently, no longer needed in GNU Emacs 22
18166
18167 item Automatically uncompress compressed files when visiting them
18168
18169 smallexample
18170 (load "uncompress")
18171 end smallexample
18172
18173 @end ignore
18174
18175 @item Find an existing buffer, even if it has a different name@*
18176 This avoids problems with symbolic links.
18177
18178 @smallexample
18179 (setq find-file-existing-other-name t)
18180 @end smallexample
18181
18182 @item Set your language environment and default input method
18183
18184 @smallexample
18185 @group
18186 (set-language-environment "latin-1")
18187 ;; Remember you can enable or disable multilingual text input
18188 ;; with the @code{toggle-input-method'} (@kbd{C-\}) command
18189 (setq default-input-method "latin-1-prefix")
18190 @end group
18191 @end smallexample
18192
18193 If you want to write with Chinese `GB' characters, set this instead:
18194
18195 @smallexample
18196 @group
18197 (set-language-environment "Chinese-GB")
18198 (setq default-input-method "chinese-tonepy")
18199 @end group
18200 @end smallexample
18201 @end itemize
18202
18203 @subsubheading Fixing Unpleasant Key Bindings
18204 @cindex Key bindings, fixing
18205 @cindex Bindings, key, fixing unpleasant
18206
18207 Some systems bind keys unpleasantly. Sometimes, for example, the
18208 @key{CTRL} key appears in an awkward spot rather than at the far left
18209 of the home row.
18210
18211 Usually, when people fix these sorts of keybindings, they do not
18212 change their @file{~/.emacs} file. Instead, they bind the proper keys
18213 on their consoles with the @code{loadkeys} or @code{install-keymap}
18214 commands in their boot script and then include @code{xmodmap} commands
18215 in their @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file for X Windows.
18216
18217 @need 1250
18218 @noindent
18219 For a boot script:
18220
18221 @smallexample
18222 @group
18223 loadkeys /usr/share/keymaps/i386/qwerty/emacs2.kmap.gz
18224 @exdent or
18225 install-keymap emacs2
18226 @end group
18227 @end smallexample
18228
18229 @need 1250
18230 @noindent
18231 For a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file when the @key{Caps
18232 Lock} key is at the far left of the home row:
18233
18234 @smallexample
18235 @group
18236 # Bind the key labeled `Caps Lock' to `Control'
18237 # (Such a broken user interface suggests that keyboard manufacturers
18238 # think that computers are typewriters from 1885.)
18239
18240 xmodmap -e "clear Lock"
18241 xmodmap -e "add Control = Caps_Lock"
18242 @end group
18243 @end smallexample
18244
18245 @need 1250
18246 @noindent
18247 In a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file, to convert an @key{ALT}
18248 key to a @key{META} key:
18249
18250 @smallexample
18251 @group
18252 # Some ill designed keyboards have a key labeled ALT and no Meta
18253 xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_L = Meta_L Alt_L"
18254 @end group
18255 @end smallexample
18256
18257 @need 1700
18258 @node Mode Line, , Miscellaneous, Emacs Initialization
18259 @section A Modified Mode Line
18260 @vindex default-mode-line-format
18261 @cindex Mode line format
18262
18263 Finally, a feature I really like: a modified mode line.
18264
18265 When I work over a network, I forget which machine I am using. Also,
18266 I tend to I lose track of where I am, and which line point is on.
18267
18268 So I reset my mode line to look like this:
18269
18270 @smallexample
18271 -:-- foo.texi rattlesnake:/home/bob/ Line 1 (Texinfo Fill) Top
18272 @end smallexample
18273
18274 I am visiting a file called @file{foo.texi}, on my machine
18275 @file{rattlesnake} in my @file{/home/bob} buffer. I am on line 1, in
18276 Texinfo mode, and am at the top of the buffer.
18277
18278 @need 1200
18279 My @file{.emacs} file has a section that looks like this:
18280
18281 @smallexample
18282 @group
18283 ;; Set a Mode Line that tells me which machine, which directory,
18284 ;; and which line I am on, plus the other customary information.
18285 (setq default-mode-line-format
18286 (quote
18287 (#("-" 0 1
18288 (help-echo
18289 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18290 mode-line-mule-info
18291 mode-line-modified
18292 mode-line-frame-identification
18293 " "
18294 @end group
18295 @group
18296 mode-line-buffer-identification
18297 " "
18298 (:eval (substring
18299 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18300 ":"
18301 default-directory
18302 #(" " 0 1
18303 (help-echo
18304 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18305 (line-number-mode " Line %l ")
18306 global-mode-string
18307 @end group
18308 @group
18309 #(" %[(" 0 6
18310 (help-echo
18311 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18312 (:eval (mode-line-mode-name))
18313 mode-line-process
18314 minor-mode-alist
18315 #("%n" 0 2 (help-echo "mouse-2: widen" local-map (keymap ...)))
18316 ")%] "
18317 (-3 . "%P")
18318 ;; "-%-"
18319 )))
18320 @end group
18321 @end smallexample
18322
18323 @noindent
18324 Here, I redefine the default mode line. Most of the parts are from
18325 the original; but I make a few changes. I set the @emph{default} mode
18326 line format so as to permit various modes, such as Info, to override
18327 it.
18328
18329 Many elements in the list are self-explanatory:
18330 @code{mode-line-modified} is a variable that tells whether the buffer
18331 has been modified, @code{mode-name} tells the name of the mode, and so
18332 on. However, the format looks complicated because of two features we
18333 have not discussed.
18334
18335 @cindex Properties, in mode line example
18336 The first string in the mode line is a dash or hyphen, @samp{-}. In
18337 the old days, it would have been specified simply as @code{"-"}. But
18338 nowadays, Emacs can add properties to a string, such as highlighting
18339 or, as in this case, a help feature. If you place your mouse cursor
18340 over the hyphen, some help information appears (By default, you must
18341 wait seven-tenths of a second before the information appears. You can
18342 change that timing by changing the value of @code{tooltip-delay}.)
18343
18344 @need 1000
18345 The new string format has a special syntax:
18346
18347 @smallexample
18348 #("-" 0 1 (help-echo "mouse-1: select window, ..."))
18349 @end smallexample
18350
18351 @noindent
18352 The @code{#(} begins a list. The first element of the list is the
18353 string itself, just one @samp{-}. The second and third
18354 elements specify the range over which the fourth element applies. A
18355 range starts @emph{after} a character, so a zero means the range
18356 starts just before the first character; a 1 means that the range ends
18357 just after the first character. The third element is the property for
18358 the range. It consists of a property list, a
18359 property name, in this case, @samp{help-echo}, followed by a value, in this
18360 case, a string. The second, third, and fourth elements of this new
18361 string format can be repeated.
18362
18363 @xref{Text Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18364 Reference Manual}, and see @ref{Mode Line Format, , Mode Line Format,
18365 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more information.
18366
18367 @code{mode-line-buffer-identification}
18368 displays the current buffer name. It is a list
18369 beginning @code{(#("%12b" 0 4 @dots{}}.
18370 The @code{#(} begins the list.
18371
18372 The @samp{"%12b"} displays the current buffer name, using the
18373 @code{buffer-name} function with which we are familiar; the `12'
18374 specifies the maximum number of characters that will be displayed.
18375 When a name has fewer characters, whitespace is added to fill out to
18376 this number. (Buffer names can and often should be longer than 12
18377 characters; this length works well in a typical 80 column wide
18378 window.)
18379
18380 @code{:eval} says to evaluate the following form and use the result as
18381 a string to display. In this case, the expression displays the first
18382 component of the full system name. The end of the first component is
18383 a @samp{.} (`period'), so I use the @code{string-match} function to
18384 tell me the length of the first component. The substring from the
18385 zeroth character to that length is the name of the machine.
18386
18387 @need 1250
18388 This is the expression:
18389
18390 @smallexample
18391 @group
18392 (:eval (substring
18393 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18394 @end group
18395 @end smallexample
18396
18397 @samp{%[} and @samp{%]} cause a pair of square brackets
18398 to appear for each recursive editing level. @samp{%n} says `Narrow'
18399 when narrowing is in effect. @samp{%P} tells you the percentage of
18400 the buffer that is above the bottom of the window, or `Top', `Bottom',
18401 or `All'. (A lower case @samp{p} tell you the percentage above the
18402 @emph{top} of the window.) @samp{%-} inserts enough dashes to fill
18403 out the line.
18404
18405 Remember, ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it'' --- your own
18406 Emacs can have different colors, different commands, and different
18407 keys than a default Emacs.
18408
18409 On the other hand, if you want to bring up a plain `out of the box'
18410 Emacs, with no customization, type:
18411
18412 @smallexample
18413 emacs -q
18414 @end smallexample
18415
18416 @noindent
18417 This will start an Emacs that does @emph{not} load your
18418 @file{~/.emacs} initialization file. A plain, default Emacs. Nothing
18419 more.
18420
18421 @node Debugging, Conclusion, Emacs Initialization, Top
18422 @chapter Debugging
18423 @cindex debugging
18424
18425 GNU Emacs has two debuggers, @code{debug} and @code{edebug}. The
18426 first is built into the internals of Emacs and is always with you;
18427 the second requires that you instrument a function before you can use it.
18428
18429 Both debuggers are described extensively in @ref{Debugging, ,
18430 Debugging Lisp Programs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18431 In this chapter, I will walk through a short example of each.
18432
18433 @menu
18434 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
18435 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
18436 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
18437 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
18438 * Debugging Exercises::
18439 @end menu
18440
18441 @node debug, debug-on-entry, Debugging, Debugging
18442 @section @code{debug}
18443 @findex debug
18444
18445 Suppose you have written a function definition that is intended to
18446 return the sum of the numbers 1 through a given number. (This is the
18447 @code{triangle} function discussed earlier. @xref{Decrementing
18448 Example, , Example with Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18449 @c xref{Decrementing Loop,, Loop with a Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18450
18451 However, your function definition has a bug. You have mistyped
18452 @samp{1=} for @samp{1-}. Here is the broken definition:
18453
18454 @findex triangle-bugged
18455 @smallexample
18456 @group
18457 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18458 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18459 (let ((total 0))
18460 (while (> number 0)
18461 (setq total (+ total number))
18462 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18463 total))
18464 @end group
18465 @end smallexample
18466
18467 If you are reading this in Info, you can evaluate this definition in
18468 the normal fashion. You will see @code{triangle-bugged} appear in the
18469 echo area.
18470
18471 @need 1250
18472 Now evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged} function with an
18473 argument of 4:
18474
18475 @smallexample
18476 (triangle-bugged 4)
18477 @end smallexample
18478
18479 @noindent
18480 In a recent GNU Emacs, you will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*}
18481 buffer that says:
18482
18483 @noindent
18484 @smallexample
18485 @group
18486 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18487 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18488 (1= number)
18489 (setq number (1= number))
18490 (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18491 (setq number (1= number)))
18492 (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18493 (setq number ...)) total)
18494 triangle-bugged(4)
18495 @end group
18496 @group
18497 eval((triangle-bugged 4))
18498 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18499 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18500 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18501 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18502 @end group
18503 @end smallexample
18504
18505 @noindent
18506 (I have reformatted this example slightly; the debugger does not fold
18507 long lines. As usual, you can quit the debugger by typing @kbd{q} in
18508 the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
18509
18510 In practice, for a bug as simple as this, the `Lisp error' line will
18511 tell you what you need to know to correct the definition. The
18512 function @code{1=} is `void'.
18513
18514 @ignore
18515 @need 800
18516 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will see:
18517
18518 @smallexample
18519 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18520 @end smallexample
18521
18522 @noindent
18523 which has the same meaning as the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer line in
18524 version 21.
18525 @end ignore
18526
18527 However, suppose you are not quite certain what is going on?
18528 You can read the complete backtrace.
18529
18530 In this case, you need to run a recent GNU Emacs, which automatically
18531 starts the debugger that puts you in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer; or
18532 else, you need to start the debugger manually as described below.
18533
18534 Read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells you
18535 what Emacs did that led to the error. Emacs made an interactive call
18536 to @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}), which led to the evaluation
18537 of the @code{triangle-bugged} expression. Each line above tells you
18538 what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
18539
18540 @need 1250
18541 The third line from the top of the buffer is
18542
18543 @smallexample
18544 (setq number (1= number))
18545 @end smallexample
18546
18547 @noindent
18548 Emacs tried to evaluate this expression; in order to do so, it tried
18549 to evaluate the inner expression shown on the second line from the
18550 top:
18551
18552 @smallexample
18553 (1= number)
18554 @end smallexample
18555
18556 @need 1250
18557 @noindent
18558 This is where the error occurred; as the top line says:
18559
18560 @smallexample
18561 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18562 @end smallexample
18563
18564 @noindent
18565 You can correct the mistake, re-evaluate the function definition, and
18566 then run your test again.
18567
18568 @node debug-on-entry, debug-on-quit, debug, Debugging
18569 @section @code{debug-on-entry}
18570 @findex debug-on-entry
18571
18572 A recent GNU Emacs starts the debugger automatically when your
18573 function has an error.
18574
18575 @ignore
18576 GNU Emacs version 20 and before did not; it simply
18577 presented you with an error message. You had to start the debugger
18578 manually.
18579 @end ignore
18580
18581 Incidentally, you can start the debugger manually for all versions of
18582 Emacs; the advantage is that the debugger runs even if you do not have
18583 a bug in your code. Sometimes your code will be free of bugs!
18584
18585 You can enter the debugger when you call the function by calling
18586 @code{debug-on-entry}.
18587
18588 @need 1250
18589 @noindent
18590 Type:
18591
18592 @smallexample
18593 M-x debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18594 @end smallexample
18595
18596 @need 1250
18597 @noindent
18598 Now, evaluate the following:
18599
18600 @smallexample
18601 (triangle-bugged 5)
18602 @end smallexample
18603
18604 @noindent
18605 All versions of Emacs will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer and tell
18606 you that it is beginning to evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged}
18607 function:
18608
18609 @smallexample
18610 @group
18611 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18612 Debugger entered--entering a function:
18613 * triangle-bugged(5)
18614 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18615 @end group
18616 @group
18617 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18618 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18619 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18620 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18621 @end group
18622 @end smallexample
18623
18624 In the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, type @kbd{d}. Emacs will evaluate
18625 the first expression in @code{triangle-bugged}; the buffer will look
18626 like this:
18627
18628 @smallexample
18629 @group
18630 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18631 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18632 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18633 (setq number ...)) total)
18634 * triangle-bugged(5)
18635 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18636 @end group
18637 @group
18638 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18639 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18640 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18641 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18642 @end group
18643 @end smallexample
18644
18645 @noindent
18646 Now, type @kbd{d} again, eight times, slowly. Each time you type
18647 @kbd{d}, Emacs will evaluate another expression in the function
18648 definition.
18649
18650 @need 1750
18651 Eventually, the buffer will look like this:
18652
18653 @smallexample
18654 @group
18655 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18656 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18657 * (setq number (1= number))
18658 * (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18659 (setq number (1= number)))
18660 @group
18661 @end group
18662 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18663 (setq number ...)) total)
18664 * triangle-bugged(5)
18665 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18666 @group
18667 @end group
18668 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18669 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18670 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18671 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18672 @end group
18673 @end smallexample
18674
18675 @need 1500
18676 @noindent
18677 Finally, after you type @kbd{d} two more times, Emacs will reach the
18678 error, and the top two lines of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer will look
18679 like this:
18680
18681 @smallexample
18682 @group
18683 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18684 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18685 * (1= number)
18686 @dots{}
18687 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18688 @end group
18689 @end smallexample
18690
18691 By typing @kbd{d}, you were able to step through the function.
18692
18693 You can quit a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer by typing @kbd{q} in it; this
18694 quits the trace, but does not cancel @code{debug-on-entry}.
18695
18696 @findex cancel-debug-on-entry
18697 To cancel the effect of @code{debug-on-entry}, call
18698 @code{cancel-debug-on-entry} and the name of the function, like this:
18699
18700 @smallexample
18701 M-x cancel-debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18702 @end smallexample
18703
18704 @noindent
18705 (If you are reading this in Info, cancel @code{debug-on-entry} now.)
18706
18707 @node debug-on-quit, edebug, debug-on-entry, Debugging
18708 @section @code{debug-on-quit} and @code{(debug)}
18709
18710 In addition to setting @code{debug-on-error} or calling @code{debug-on-entry},
18711 there are two other ways to start @code{debug}.
18712
18713 @findex debug-on-quit
18714 You can start @code{debug} whenever you type @kbd{C-g}
18715 (@code{keyboard-quit}) by setting the variable @code{debug-on-quit} to
18716 @code{t}. This is useful for debugging infinite loops.
18717
18718 @need 1500
18719 @cindex @code{(debug)} in code
18720 Or, you can insert a line that says @code{(debug)} into your code
18721 where you want the debugger to start, like this:
18722
18723 @smallexample
18724 @group
18725 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18726 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18727 (let ((total 0))
18728 (while (> number 0)
18729 (setq total (+ total number))
18730 (debug) ; @r{Start debugger.}
18731 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18732 total))
18733 @end group
18734 @end smallexample
18735
18736 The @code{debug} function is described in detail in @ref{Debugger, ,
18737 The Lisp Debugger, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18738
18739 @node edebug, Debugging Exercises, debug-on-quit, Debugging
18740 @section The @code{edebug} Source Level Debugger
18741 @cindex Source level debugger
18742 @findex edebug
18743
18744 Edebug is a source level debugger. Edebug normally displays the
18745 source of the code you are debugging, with an arrow at the left that
18746 shows which line you are currently executing.
18747
18748 You can walk through the execution of a function, line by line, or run
18749 quickly until reaching a @dfn{breakpoint} where execution stops.
18750
18751 Edebug is described in @ref{edebug, , Edebug, elisp, The GNU Emacs
18752 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18753
18754 @need 1250
18755 Here is a bugged function definition for @code{triangle-recursively}.
18756 @xref{Recursive triangle function, , Recursion in place of a counter},
18757 for a review of it.
18758
18759 @smallexample
18760 @group
18761 (defun triangle-recursively-bugged (number)
18762 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
18763 Uses recursion."
18764 (if (= number 1)
18765 1
18766 (+ number
18767 (triangle-recursively-bugged
18768 (1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18769 @end group
18770 @end smallexample
18771
18772 @noindent
18773 Normally, you would install this definition by positioning your cursor
18774 after the function's closing parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}
18775 (@code{eval-last-sexp}) or else by positioning your cursor within the
18776 definition and typing @kbd{C-M-x} (@code{eval-defun}). (By default,
18777 the @code{eval-defun} command works only in Emacs Lisp mode or in Lisp
18778 Interaction mode.)
18779
18780 @need 1500
18781 However, to prepare this function definition for Edebug, you must
18782 first @dfn{instrument} the code using a different command. You can do
18783 this by positioning your cursor within or just after the definition
18784 and typing
18785
18786 @smallexample
18787 M-x edebug-defun RET
18788 @end smallexample
18789
18790 @noindent
18791 This will cause Emacs to load Edebug automatically if it is not
18792 already loaded, and properly instrument the function.
18793
18794 After instrumenting the function, place your cursor after the
18795 following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}):
18796
18797 @smallexample
18798 (triangle-recursively-bugged 3)
18799 @end smallexample
18800
18801 @noindent
18802 You will be jumped back to the source for
18803 @code{triangle-recursively-bugged} and the cursor positioned at the
18804 beginning of the @code{if} line of the function. Also, you will see
18805 an arrowhead at the left hand side of that line. The arrowhead marks
18806 the line where the function is executing. (In the following examples,
18807 we show the arrowhead with @samp{=>}; in a windowing system, you may
18808 see the arrowhead as a solid triangle in the window `fringe'.)
18809
18810 @smallexample
18811 =>@point{}(if (= number 1)
18812 @end smallexample
18813
18814 @noindent
18815 @iftex
18816 In the example, the location of point is displayed with a star,
18817 @samp{@point{}} (in Info, it is displayed as @samp{-!-}).
18818 @end iftex
18819 @ifnottex
18820 In the example, the location of point is displayed as @samp{@point{}}
18821 (in a printed book, it is displayed with a five pointed star).
18822 @end ifnottex
18823
18824 If you now press @key{SPC}, point will move to the next expression to
18825 be executed; the line will look like this:
18826
18827 @smallexample
18828 =>(if @point{}(= number 1)
18829 @end smallexample
18830
18831 @noindent
18832 As you continue to press @key{SPC}, point will move from expression to
18833 expression. At the same time, whenever an expression returns a value,
18834 that value will be displayed in the echo area. For example, after you
18835 move point past @code{number}, you will see the following:
18836
18837 @smallexample
18838 Result: 3 (#o3, #x3, ?\C-c)
18839 @end smallexample
18840
18841 @noindent
18842 This means the value of @code{number} is 3, which is octal three,
18843 hexadecimal three, and @sc{ascii} `control-c' (the third letter of the
18844 alphabet, in case you need to know this information).
18845
18846 You can continue moving through the code until you reach the line with
18847 the error. Before evaluation, that line looks like this:
18848
18849 @smallexample
18850 => @point{}(1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18851 @end smallexample
18852
18853 @need 1250
18854 @noindent
18855 When you press @key{SPC} once again, you will produce an error message
18856 that says:
18857
18858 @smallexample
18859 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18860 @end smallexample
18861
18862 @noindent
18863 This is the bug.
18864
18865 Press @kbd{q} to quit Edebug.
18866
18867 To remove instrumentation from a function definition, simply
18868 re-evaluate it with a command that does not instrument it.
18869 For example, you could place your cursor after the definition's
18870 closing parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
18871
18872 Edebug does a great deal more than walk with you through a function.
18873 You can set it so it races through on its own, stopping only at an
18874 error or at specified stopping points; you can cause it to display the
18875 changing values of various expressions; you can find out how many
18876 times a function is called, and more.
18877
18878 Edebug is described in @ref{edebug, , Edebug, elisp, The GNU Emacs
18879 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18880
18881 @need 1500
18882 @node Debugging Exercises, , edebug, Debugging
18883 @section Debugging Exercises
18884
18885 @itemize @bullet
18886 @item
18887 Install the @code{count-words-region} function and then cause it to
18888 enter the built-in debugger when you call it. Run the command on a
18889 region containing two words. You will need to press @kbd{d} a
18890 remarkable number of times. On your system, is a `hook' called after
18891 the command finishes? (For information on hooks, see @ref{Command
18892 Overview, , Command Loop Overview, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
18893 Manual}.)
18894
18895 @item
18896 Copy @code{count-words-region} into the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
18897 instrument the function for Edebug, and walk through its execution.
18898 The function does not need to have a bug, although you can introduce
18899 one if you wish. If the function lacks a bug, the walk-through
18900 completes without problems.
18901
18902 @item
18903 While running Edebug, type @kbd{?} to see a list of all the Edebug commands.
18904 (The @code{global-edebug-prefix} is usually @kbd{C-x X}, i.e.@:
18905 @kbd{@key{CTRL}-x} followed by an upper case @kbd{X}; use this prefix
18906 for commands made outside of the Edebug debugging buffer.)
18907
18908 @item
18909 In the Edebug debugging buffer, use the @kbd{p}
18910 (@code{edebug-bounce-point}) command to see where in the region the
18911 @code{count-words-region} is working.
18912
18913 @item
18914 Move point to some spot further down the function and then type the
18915 @kbd{h} (@code{edebug-goto-here}) command to jump to that location.
18916
18917 @item
18918 Use the @kbd{t} (@code{edebug-trace-mode}) command to cause Edebug to
18919 walk through the function on its own; use an upper case @kbd{T} for
18920 @code{edebug-Trace-fast-mode}.
18921
18922 @item
18923 Set a breakpoint, then run Edebug in Trace mode until it reaches the
18924 stopping point.
18925 @end itemize
18926
18927 @node Conclusion, the-the, Debugging, Top
18928 @chapter Conclusion
18929
18930 We have now reached the end of this Introduction. You have now
18931 learned enough about programming in Emacs Lisp to set values, to write
18932 simple @file{.emacs} files for yourself and your friends, and write
18933 simple customizations and extensions to Emacs.
18934
18935 This is a place to stop. Or, if you wish, you can now go onward, and
18936 teach yourself.
18937
18938 You have learned some of the basic nuts and bolts of programming. But
18939 only some. There are a great many more brackets and hinges that are
18940 easy to use that we have not touched.
18941
18942 A path you can follow right now lies among the sources to GNU Emacs
18943 and in
18944 @ifnotinfo
18945 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18946 @end ifnotinfo
18947 @ifinfo
18948 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
18949 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18950 @end ifinfo
18951
18952 The Emacs Lisp sources are an adventure. When you read the sources and
18953 come across a function or expression that is unfamiliar, you need to
18954 figure out or find out what it does.
18955
18956 Go to the Reference Manual. It is a thorough, complete, and fairly
18957 easy-to-read description of Emacs Lisp. It is written not only for
18958 experts, but for people who know what you know. (The @cite{Reference
18959 Manual} comes with the standard GNU Emacs distribution. Like this
18960 introduction, it comes as a Texinfo source file, so you can read it
18961 on-line and as a typeset, printed book.)
18962
18963 Go to the other on-line help that is part of GNU Emacs: the on-line
18964 documentation for all functions and variables, and @code{find-tags},
18965 the program that takes you to sources.
18966
18967 Here is an example of how I explore the sources. Because of its name,
18968 @file{simple.el} is the file I looked at first, a long time ago. As
18969 it happens some of the functions in @file{simple.el} are complicated,
18970 or at least look complicated at first sight. The @code{open-line}
18971 function, for example, looks complicated.
18972
18973 You may want to walk through this function slowly, as we did with the
18974 @code{forward-sentence} function. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
18975 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Or you may want to skip that
18976 function and look at another, such as @code{split-line}. You don't
18977 need to read all the functions. According to
18978 @code{count-words-in-defun}, the @code{split-line} function contains
18979 102 words and symbols.
18980
18981 Even though it is short, @code{split-line} contains expressions
18982 we have not studied: @code{skip-chars-forward}, @code{indent-to},
18983 @code{current-column} and @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18984
18985 Consider the @code{skip-chars-forward} function. (It is part of the
18986 function definition for @code{back-to-indentation}, which is shown in
18987 @ref{Review, , Review}.)
18988
18989 In GNU Emacs, you can find out more about @code{skip-chars-forward} by
18990 typing @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and the name of the
18991 function. This gives you the function documentation.
18992
18993 You may be able to guess what is done by a well named function such as
18994 @code{indent-to}; or you can look it up, too. Incidentally, the
18995 @code{describe-function} function itself is in @file{help.el}; it is
18996 one of those long, but decipherable functions. You can look up
18997 @code{describe-function} using the @kbd{C-h f} command!
18998
18999 In this instance, since the code is Lisp, the @file{*Help*} buffer
19000 contains the name of the library containing the function's source.
19001 You can put point over the name of the library and press the RET key,
19002 which in this situation is bound to @code{help-follow}, and be taken
19003 directly to the source, in the same way as @kbd{M-.}
19004 (@code{find-tag}).
19005
19006 The definition for @code{describe-function} illustrates how to
19007 customize the @code{interactive} expression without using the standard
19008 character codes; and it shows how to create a temporary buffer.
19009
19010 (The @code{indent-to} function is written in C rather than Emacs Lisp;
19011 it is a `built-in' function. @code{help-follow} takes you to its
19012 source as does @code{find-tag}, when properly set up.)
19013
19014 You can look at a function's source using @code{find-tag}, which is
19015 bound to @kbd{M-.} Finally, you can find out what the Reference
19016 Manual has to say by visiting the manual in Info, and typing @kbd{i}
19017 (@code{Info-index}) and the name of the function, or by looking up the
19018 function in the index to a printed copy of the manual.
19019
19020 Similarly, you can find out what is meant by
19021 @code{insert-and-inherit}.
19022
19023 Other interesting source files include @file{paragraphs.el},
19024 @file{loaddefs.el}, and @file{loadup.el}. The @file{paragraphs.el}
19025 file includes short, easily understood functions as well as longer
19026 ones. The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains the many standard
19027 autoloads and many keymaps. I have never looked at it all; only at
19028 parts. @file{loadup.el} is the file that loads the standard parts of
19029 Emacs; it tells you a great deal about how Emacs is built.
19030 (@xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
19031 Reference Manual}, for more about building.)
19032
19033 As I said, you have learned some nuts and bolts; however, and very
19034 importantly, we have hardly touched major aspects of programming; I
19035 have said nothing about how to sort information, except to use the
19036 predefined @code{sort} function; I have said nothing about how to store
19037 information, except to use variables and lists; I have said nothing
19038 about how to write programs that write programs. These are topics for
19039 another, and different kind of book, a different kind of learning.
19040
19041 What you have done is learn enough for much practical work with GNU
19042 Emacs. What you have done is get started. This is the end of a
19043 beginning.
19044
19045 @c ================ Appendix ================
19046
19047 @node the-the, Kill Ring, Conclusion, Top
19048 @appendix The @code{the-the} Function
19049 @findex the-the
19050 @cindex Duplicated words function
19051 @cindex Words, duplicated
19052
19053 Sometimes when you you write text, you duplicate words---as with ``you
19054 you'' near the beginning of this sentence. I find that most
19055 frequently, I duplicate ``the''; hence, I call the function for
19056 detecting duplicated words, @code{the-the}.
19057
19058 @need 1250
19059 As a first step, you could use the following regular expression to
19060 search for duplicates:
19061
19062 @smallexample
19063 \\(\\w+[ \t\n]+\\)\\1
19064 @end smallexample
19065
19066 @noindent
19067 This regexp matches one or more word-constituent characters followed
19068 by one or more spaces, tabs, or newlines. However, it does not detect
19069 duplicated words on different lines, since the ending of the first
19070 word, the end of the line, is different from the ending of the second
19071 word, a space. (For more information about regular expressions, see
19072 @ref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, as well as
19073 @ref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
19074 Manual}, and @ref{Regular Expressions, , Regular Expressions, elisp,
19075 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
19076
19077 You might try searching just for duplicated word-constituent
19078 characters but that does not work since the pattern detects doubles
19079 such as the two occurrences of `th' in `with the'.
19080
19081 Another possible regexp searches for word-constituent characters
19082 followed by non-word-constituent characters, reduplicated. Here,
19083 @w{@samp{\\w+}} matches one or more word-constituent characters and
19084 @w{@samp{\\W*}} matches zero or more non-word-constituent characters.
19085
19086 @smallexample
19087 \\(\\(\\w+\\)\\W*\\)\\1
19088 @end smallexample
19089
19090 @noindent
19091 Again, not useful.
19092
19093 Here is the pattern that I use. It is not perfect, but good enough.
19094 @w{@samp{\\b}} matches the empty string, provided it is at the beginning
19095 or end of a word; @w{@samp{[^@@ \n\t]+}} matches one or more occurrences of
19096 any characters that are @emph{not} an @@-sign, space, newline, or tab.
19097
19098 @smallexample
19099 \\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b
19100 @end smallexample
19101
19102 One can write more complicated expressions, but I found that this
19103 expression is good enough, so I use it.
19104
19105 Here is the @code{the-the} function, as I include it in my
19106 @file{.emacs} file, along with a handy global key binding:
19107
19108 @smallexample
19109 @group
19110 (defun the-the ()
19111 "Search forward for for a duplicated word."
19112 (interactive)
19113 (message "Searching for for duplicated words ...")
19114 (push-mark)
19115 @end group
19116 @group
19117 ;; This regexp is not perfect
19118 ;; but is fairly good over all:
19119 (if (re-search-forward
19120 "\\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b" nil 'move)
19121 (message "Found duplicated word.")
19122 (message "End of buffer")))
19123 @end group
19124
19125 @group
19126 ;; Bind `the-the' to C-c \
19127 (global-set-key "\C-c\\" 'the-the)
19128 @end group
19129 @end smallexample
19130
19131 @sp 1
19132 Here is test text:
19133
19134 @smallexample
19135 @group
19136 one two two three four five
19137 five six seven
19138 @end group
19139 @end smallexample
19140
19141 You can substitute the other regular expressions shown above in the
19142 function definition and try each of them on this list.
19143
19144 @node Kill Ring, Full Graph, the-the, Top
19145 @appendix Handling the Kill Ring
19146 @cindex Kill ring handling
19147 @cindex Handling the kill ring
19148 @cindex Ring, making a list like a
19149
19150 The kill ring is a list that is transformed into a ring by the
19151 workings of the @code{current-kill} function. The @code{yank} and
19152 @code{yank-pop} commands use the @code{current-kill} function.
19153
19154 This appendix describes the @code{current-kill} function as well as
19155 both the @code{yank} and the @code{yank-pop} commands, but first,
19156 consider the workings of the kill ring.
19157
19158 @menu
19159 * What the Kill Ring Does::
19160 * current-kill::
19161 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
19162 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
19163 * ring file::
19164 @end menu
19165
19166 @node What the Kill Ring Does, current-kill, Kill Ring, Kill Ring
19167 @ifnottex
19168 @unnumberedsec What the Kill Ring Does
19169 @end ifnottex
19170
19171 @need 1250
19172 The kill ring has a default maximum length of sixty items; this number
19173 is too large for an explanation. Instead, set it to four. Please
19174 evaluate the following:
19175
19176 @smallexample
19177 @group
19178 (setq old-kill-ring-max kill-ring-max)
19179 (setq kill-ring-max 4)
19180 @end group
19181 @end smallexample
19182
19183 @noindent
19184 Then, please copy each line of the following indented example into the
19185 kill ring. You may kill each line with @kbd{C-k} or mark it and copy
19186 it with @kbd{M-w}.
19187
19188 @noindent
19189 (In a read-only buffer, such as the @file{*info*} buffer, the kill
19190 command, @kbd{C-k} (@code{kill-line}), will not remove the text,
19191 merely copy it to the kill ring. However, your machine may beep at
19192 you. Alternatively, for silence, you may copy the region of each line
19193 with the @kbd{M-w} (@code{kill-ring-save}) command. You must mark
19194 each line for this command to succeed, but it does not matter at which
19195 end you put point or mark.)
19196
19197 @need 1250
19198 @noindent
19199 Please invoke the calls in order, so that five elements attempt to
19200 fill the kill ring:
19201
19202 @smallexample
19203 @group
19204 first some text
19205 second piece of text
19206 third line
19207 fourth line of text
19208 fifth bit of text
19209 @end group
19210 @end smallexample
19211
19212 @need 1250
19213 @noindent
19214 Then find the value of @code{kill-ring} by evaluating
19215
19216 @smallexample
19217 kill-ring
19218 @end smallexample
19219
19220 @need 800
19221 @noindent
19222 It is:
19223
19224 @smallexample
19225 @group
19226 ("fifth bit of text" "fourth line of text"
19227 "third line" "second piece of text")
19228 @end group
19229 @end smallexample
19230
19231 @noindent
19232 The first element, @samp{first some text}, was dropped.
19233
19234 @need 1250
19235 To return to the old value for the length of the kill ring, evaluate:
19236
19237 @smallexample
19238 (setq kill-ring-max old-kill-ring-max)
19239 @end smallexample
19240
19241 @node current-kill, yank, What the Kill Ring Does, Kill Ring
19242 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19243 @appendixsec The @code{current-kill} Function
19244 @findex current-kill
19245
19246 The @code{current-kill} function changes the element in the kill ring
19247 to which @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points. (Also, the
19248 @code{kill-new} function sets @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to point
19249 to the latest element of the kill ring. The @code{kill-new}
19250 function is used directly or indirectly by @code{kill-append},
19251 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line},
19252 and @code{kill-region}.)
19253
19254 @menu
19255 * Code for current-kill::
19256 * Understanding current-kill::
19257 @end menu
19258
19259 @node Code for current-kill, Understanding current-kill, current-kill, current-kill
19260 @ifnottex
19261 @unnumberedsubsec The code for @code{current-kill}
19262 @end ifnottex
19263
19264
19265 @need 1500
19266 The @code{current-kill} function is used by @code{yank} and by
19267 @code{yank-pop}. Here is the code for @code{current-kill}:
19268
19269 @smallexample
19270 @group
19271 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19272 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
19273 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
19274 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
19275 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
19276 @end group
19277 @group
19278 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
19279 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
19280 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
19281 interprogram-paste-function
19282 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
19283 @end group
19284 @group
19285 (if interprogram-paste
19286 (progn
19287 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
19288 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
19289 ;; selection, with identical text.
19290 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
19291 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
19292 interprogram-paste)
19293 @end group
19294 @group
19295 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19296 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19297 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19298 (length kill-ring))
19299 kill-ring)))
19300 (or do-not-move
19301 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19302 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
19303 @end group
19304 @end smallexample
19305
19306 Remember also that the @code{kill-new} function sets
19307 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to the latest element of the kill
19308 ring, which means that all the functions that call it set the value
19309 indirectly: @code{kill-append}, @code{copy-region-as-kill},
19310 @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line}, and @code{kill-region}.
19311
19312 @need 1500
19313 Here is the line in @code{kill-new}, which is explained in
19314 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.
19315
19316 @smallexample
19317 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
19318 @end smallexample
19319
19320 @node Understanding current-kill, , Code for current-kill, current-kill
19321 @ifnottex
19322 @unnumberedsubsec @code{current-kill} in Outline
19323 @end ifnottex
19324
19325 The @code{current-kill} function looks complex, but as usual, it can
19326 be understood by taking it apart piece by piece. First look at it in
19327 skeletal form:
19328
19329 @smallexample
19330 @group
19331 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19332 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill."
19333 (let @var{varlist}
19334 @var{body}@dots{})
19335 @end group
19336 @end smallexample
19337
19338 This function takes two arguments, one of which is optional. It has a
19339 documentation string. It is @emph{not} interactive.
19340
19341 @menu
19342 * Body of current-kill::
19343 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
19344 * Determining the Element::
19345 @end menu
19346
19347 @node Body of current-kill, Digression concerning error, Understanding current-kill, Understanding current-kill
19348 @ifnottex
19349 @unnumberedsubsubsec The Body of @code{current-kill}
19350 @end ifnottex
19351
19352 The body of the function definition is a @code{let} expression, which
19353 itself has a body as well as a @var{varlist}.
19354
19355 The @code{let} expression declares a variable that will be only usable
19356 within the bounds of this function. This variable is called
19357 @code{interprogram-paste} and is for copying to another program. It
19358 is not for copying within this instance of GNU Emacs. Most window
19359 systems provide a facility for interprogram pasting. Sadly, that
19360 facility usually provides only for the last element. Most windowing
19361 systems have not adopted a ring of many possibilities, even though
19362 Emacs has provided it for decades.
19363
19364 The @code{if} expression has two parts, one if there exists
19365 @code{interprogram-paste} and one if not.
19366
19367 @need 2000
19368 Let us consider the `if not' or else-part of the @code{current-kill}
19369 function. (The then-part uses the @code{kill-new} function, which
19370 we have already described. @xref{kill-new function, , The
19371 @code{kill-new} function}.)
19372
19373 @smallexample
19374 @group
19375 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19376 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19377 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19378 (length kill-ring))
19379 kill-ring)))
19380 (or do-not-move
19381 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19382 (car ARGth-kill-element))
19383 @end group
19384 @end smallexample
19385
19386 @noindent
19387 The code first checks whether the kill ring has content; otherwise it
19388 signals an error.
19389
19390 @need 1000
19391 Note that the @code{or} expression is very similar to testing length
19392 with an @code{if}:
19393
19394 @findex zerop
19395 @findex error
19396 @smallexample
19397 @group
19398 (if (zerop (length kill-ring)) ; @r{if-part}
19399 (error "Kill ring is empty")) ; @r{then-part}
19400 ;; No else-part
19401 @end group
19402 @end smallexample
19403
19404 @noindent
19405 If there is not anything in the kill ring, its length must be zero and
19406 an error message sent to the user: @samp{Kill ring is empty}. The
19407 @code{current-kill} function uses an @code{or} expression which is
19408 simpler. But an @code{if} expression reminds us what goes on.
19409
19410 This @code{if} expression uses the function @code{zerop} which returns
19411 true if the value it is testing is zero. When @code{zerop} tests
19412 true, the then-part of the @code{if} is evaluated. The then-part is a
19413 list starting with the function @code{error}, which is a function that
19414 is similar to the @code{message} function
19415 (@pxref{message, , The @code{message} Function}) in that
19416 it prints a one-line message in the echo area. However, in addition
19417 to printing a message, @code{error} also stops evaluation of the
19418 function within which it is embedded. This means that the rest of the
19419 function will not be evaluated if the length of the kill ring is zero.
19420
19421 Then the @code{current-kill} function selects the element to return.
19422 The selection depends on the number of places that @code{current-kill}
19423 rotates and on where @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19424
19425 Next, either the optional @code{do-not-move} argument is true or the
19426 current value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is set to point to the
19427 list. Finally, another expression returns the first element of the
19428 list even if the @code{do-not-move} argument is true.
19429
19430 @node Digression concerning error, Determining the Element, Body of current-kill, Understanding current-kill
19431 @ifnottex
19432 @unnumberedsubsubsec Digression about the word `error'
19433 @end ifnottex
19434
19435 In my opinion, it is slightly misleading, at least to humans, to use
19436 the term `error' as the name of the @code{error} function. A better
19437 term would be `cancel'. Strictly speaking, of course, you cannot
19438 point to, much less rotate a pointer to a list that has no length, so
19439 from the point of view of the computer, the word `error' is correct.
19440 But a human expects to attempt this sort of thing, if only to find out
19441 whether the kill ring is full or empty. This is an act of
19442 exploration.
19443
19444 From the human point of view, the act of exploration and discovery is
19445 not necessarily an error, and therefore should not be labelled as one,
19446 even in the bowels of a computer. As it is, the code in Emacs implies
19447 that a human who is acting virtuously, by exploring his or her
19448 environment, is making an error. This is bad. Even though the computer
19449 takes the same steps as it does when there is an `error', a term such as
19450 `cancel' would have a clearer connotation.
19451
19452 @node Determining the Element, , Digression concerning error, Understanding current-kill
19453 @ifnottex
19454 @unnumberedsubsubsec Determining the Element
19455 @end ifnottex
19456
19457 Among other actions, the else-part of the @code{if} expression sets
19458 the value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to
19459 @code{ARGth-kill-element} when the kill ring has something in it and
19460 the value of @code{do-not-move} is @code{nil}.
19461
19462 @need 800
19463 The code looks like this:
19464
19465 @smallexample
19466 @group
19467 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19468 (length kill-ring))
19469 kill-ring)))
19470 @end group
19471 @end smallexample
19472
19473 This needs some examination. Unless it is not supposed to move the
19474 pointer, the @code{current-kill} function changes where
19475 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19476 That is what the
19477 @w{@code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))}}
19478 expression does. Also, clearly, @code{ARGth-kill-element} is being
19479 set to be equal to some @sc{cdr} of the kill ring, using the
19480 @code{nthcdr} function that is described in an earlier section.
19481 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.) How does it do this?
19482
19483 As we have seen before (@pxref{nthcdr}), the @code{nthcdr} function
19484 works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a list---it takes the
19485 @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} @dots{}
19486
19487 @need 800
19488 The two following expressions produce the same result:
19489
19490 @smallexample
19491 @group
19492 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (cdr kill-ring))
19493
19494 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (nthcdr 1 kill-ring))
19495 @end group
19496 @end smallexample
19497
19498 However, the @code{nthcdr} expression is more complicated. It uses
19499 the @code{mod} function to determine which @sc{cdr} to select.
19500
19501 (You will remember to look at inner functions first; indeed, we will
19502 have to go inside the @code{mod}.)
19503
19504 The @code{mod} function returns the value of its first argument modulo
19505 the second; that is to say, it returns the remainder after dividing
19506 the first argument by the second. The value returned has the same
19507 sign as the second argument.
19508
19509 @need 800
19510 Thus,
19511
19512 @smallexample
19513 @group
19514 (mod 12 4)
19515 @result{} 0 ;; @r{because there is no remainder}
19516 (mod 13 4)
19517 @result{} 1
19518 @end group
19519 @end smallexample
19520
19521 @need 1250
19522 In this case, the first argument is often smaller than the second.
19523 That is fine.
19524
19525 @smallexample
19526 @group
19527 (mod 0 4)
19528 @result{} 0
19529 (mod 1 4)
19530 @result{} 1
19531 @end group
19532 @end smallexample
19533
19534 We can guess what the @code{-} function does. It is like @code{+} but
19535 subtracts instead of adds; the @code{-} function subtracts its second
19536 argument from its first. Also, we already know what the @code{length}
19537 function does (@pxref{length}). It returns the length of a list.
19538
19539 And @code{n} is the name of the required argument to the
19540 @code{current-kill} function.
19541
19542 @need 1250
19543 So when the first argument to @code{nthcdr} is zero, the @code{nthcdr}
19544 expression returns the whole list, as you can see by evaluating the
19545 following:
19546
19547 @smallexample
19548 @group
19549 ;; kill-ring-yank-pointer @r{and} kill-ring @r{have a length of four}
19550 ;; @r{and} (mod (- 0 4) 4) @result{} 0
19551 (nthcdr (mod (- 0 4) 4)
19552 '("fourth line of text"
19553 "third line"
19554 "second piece of text"
19555 "first some text"))
19556 @end group
19557 @end smallexample
19558
19559 @need 1250
19560 When the first argument to the @code{current-kill} function is one,
19561 the @code{nthcdr} expression returns the list without its first
19562 element.
19563
19564 @smallexample
19565 @group
19566 (nthcdr (mod (- 1 4) 4)
19567 '("fourth line of text"
19568 "third line"
19569 "second piece of text"
19570 "first some text"))
19571 @end group
19572 @end smallexample
19573
19574 @cindex @samp{global variable} defined
19575 @cindex @samp{variable, global}, defined
19576 Incidentally, both @code{kill-ring} and @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
19577 are @dfn{global variables}. That means that any expression in Emacs
19578 Lisp can access them. They are not like the local variables set by
19579 @code{let} or like the symbols in an argument list.
19580 Local variables can only be accessed
19581 within the @code{let} that defines them or the function that specifies
19582 them in an argument list (and within expressions called by them).
19583
19584 @ignore
19585 @c texi2dvi fails when the name of the section is within ifnottex ...
19586 (@xref{Prevent confusion, , @code{let} Prevents Confusion}, and
19587 @ref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
19588 @end ignore
19589
19590 @node yank, yank-pop, current-kill, Kill Ring
19591 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19592 @appendixsec @code{yank}
19593 @findex yank
19594
19595 After learning about @code{current-kill}, the code for the
19596 @code{yank} function is almost easy.
19597
19598 The @code{yank} function does not use the
19599 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable directly. It calls
19600 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{current-kill} which sets the
19601 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
19602
19603 @need 1250
19604 The code looks like this:
19605
19606 @c in GNU Emacs 22
19607 @smallexample
19608 @group
19609 (defun yank (&optional arg)
19610 "Reinsert (\"paste\") the last stretch of killed text.
19611 More precisely, reinsert the stretch of killed text most recently
19612 killed OR yanked. Put point at end, and set mark at beginning.
19613 With just \\[universal-argument] as argument, same but put point at
19614 beginning (and mark at end). With argument N, reinsert the Nth most
19615 recently killed stretch of killed text.
19616
19617 When this command inserts killed text into the buffer, it honors
19618 `yank-excluded-properties' and `yank-handler' as described in the
19619 doc string for `insert-for-yank-1', which see.
19620
19621 See also the command \\[yank-pop]."
19622 @end group
19623 @group
19624 (interactive "*P")
19625 (setq yank-window-start (window-start))
19626 ;; If we don't get all the way thru, make last-command indicate that
19627 ;; for the following command.
19628 (setq this-command t)
19629 (push-mark (point))
19630 @end group
19631 @group
19632 (insert-for-yank (current-kill (cond
19633 ((listp arg) 0)
19634 ((eq arg '-) -2)
19635 (t (1- arg)))))
19636 (if (consp arg)
19637 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19638 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19639 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19640 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19641 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19642 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer)))))
19643 @end group
19644 @group
19645 ;; If we do get all the way thru, make this-command indicate that.
19646 (if (eq this-command t)
19647 (setq this-command 'yank))
19648 nil)
19649 @end group
19650 @end smallexample
19651
19652 The key expression is @code{insert-for-yank}, which inserts the string
19653 returned by @code{current-kill}, but removes some text properties from
19654 it.
19655
19656 However, before getting to that expression, the function sets the value
19657 of @code{yank-window-start} to the position returned by the
19658 @code{(window-start)} expression, the position at which the display
19659 currently starts. The @code{yank} function also sets
19660 @code{this-command} and pushes the mark.
19661
19662 After it yanks the appropriate element, if the optional argument is a
19663 @sc{cons} rather than a number or nothing, it puts point at beginning
19664 of the yanked text and mark at its end.
19665
19666 (The @code{prog1} function is like @code{progn} but returns the value
19667 of its first argument rather than the value of its last argument. Its
19668 first argument is forced to return the buffer's mark as an integer.
19669 You can see the documentation for these functions by placing point
19670 over them in this buffer and then typing @kbd{C-h f}
19671 (@code{describe-function}) followed by a @kbd{RET}; the default is the
19672 function.)
19673
19674 The last part of the function tells what to do when it succeeds.
19675
19676 @node yank-pop, ring file, yank, Kill Ring
19677 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19678 @appendixsec @code{yank-pop}
19679 @findex yank-pop
19680
19681 After understanding @code{yank} and @code{current-kill}, you know how
19682 to approach the @code{yank-pop} function. Leaving out the
19683 documentation to save space, it looks like this:
19684
19685 @c GNU Emacs 22
19686 @smallexample
19687 @group
19688 (defun yank-pop (&optional arg)
19689 "@dots{}"
19690 (interactive "*p")
19691 (if (not (eq last-command 'yank))
19692 (error "Previous command was not a yank"))
19693 @end group
19694 @group
19695 (setq this-command 'yank)
19696 (unless arg (setq arg 1))
19697 (let ((inhibit-read-only t)
19698 (before (< (point) (mark t))))
19699 @end group
19700 @group
19701 (if before
19702 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (point) (mark t))
19703 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (mark t) (point)))
19704 (setq yank-undo-function nil)
19705 @end group
19706 @group
19707 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer))
19708 (insert-for-yank (current-kill arg))
19709 ;; Set the window start back where it was in the yank command,
19710 ;; if possible.
19711 (set-window-start (selected-window) yank-window-start t)
19712 @end group
19713 @group
19714 (if before
19715 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19716 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19717 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19718 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19719 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19720 (set-marker (mark-marker)
19721 (point)
19722 (current-buffer))))))
19723 nil)
19724 @end group
19725 @end smallexample
19726
19727 The function is interactive with a small @samp{p} so the prefix
19728 argument is processed and passed to the function. The command can
19729 only be used after a previous yank; otherwise an error message is
19730 sent. This check uses the variable @code{last-command} which is set
19731 by @code{yank} and is discussed elsewhere.
19732 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
19733
19734 The @code{let} clause sets the variable @code{before} to true or false
19735 depending whether point is before or after mark and then the region
19736 between point and mark is deleted. This is the region that was just
19737 inserted by the previous yank and it is this text that will be
19738 replaced.
19739
19740 @code{funcall} calls its first argument as a function, passing
19741 remaining arguments to it. The first argument is whatever the
19742 @code{or} expression returns. The two remaining arguments are the
19743 positions of point and mark set by the preceding @code{yank} command.
19744
19745 There is more, but that is the hardest part.
19746
19747 @node ring file, , yank-pop, Kill Ring
19748 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19749 @appendixsec The @file{ring.el} File
19750 @cindex @file{ring.el} file
19751
19752 Interestingly, GNU Emacs posses a file called @file{ring.el} that
19753 provides many of the features we just discussed. But functions such
19754 as @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} do not use this library, possibly
19755 because they were written earlier.
19756
19757 @node Full Graph, Free Software and Free Manuals, Kill Ring, Top
19758 @appendix A Graph with Labelled Axes
19759
19760 Printed axes help you understand a graph. They convey scale. In an
19761 earlier chapter (@pxref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}), we
19762 wrote the code to print the body of a graph. Here we write the code
19763 for printing and labelling vertical and horizontal axes, along with the
19764 body itself.
19765
19766 @menu
19767 * Labelled Example::
19768 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
19769 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
19770 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
19771 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
19772 @end menu
19773
19774 @node Labelled Example, print-graph Varlist, Full Graph, Full Graph
19775 @ifnottex
19776 @unnumberedsec Labelled Example Graph
19777 @end ifnottex
19778
19779 Since insertions fill a buffer to the right and below point, the new
19780 graph printing function should first print the Y or vertical axis,
19781 then the body of the graph, and finally the X or horizontal axis.
19782 This sequence lays out for us the contents of the function:
19783
19784 @enumerate
19785 @item
19786 Set up code.
19787
19788 @item
19789 Print Y axis.
19790
19791 @item
19792 Print body of graph.
19793
19794 @item
19795 Print X axis.
19796 @end enumerate
19797
19798 @need 800
19799 Here is an example of how a finished graph should look:
19800
19801 @smallexample
19802 @group
19803 10 -
19804 *
19805 * *
19806 * **
19807 * ***
19808 5 - * *******
19809 * *** *******
19810 *************
19811 ***************
19812 1 - ****************
19813 | | | |
19814 1 5 10 15
19815 @end group
19816 @end smallexample
19817
19818 @noindent
19819 In this graph, both the vertical and the horizontal axes are labelled
19820 with numbers. However, in some graphs, the horizontal axis is time
19821 and would be better labelled with months, like this:
19822
19823 @smallexample
19824 @group
19825 5 - *
19826 * ** *
19827 *******
19828 ********** **
19829 1 - **************
19830 | ^ |
19831 Jan June Jan
19832 @end group
19833 @end smallexample
19834
19835 Indeed, with a little thought, we can easily come up with a variety of
19836 vertical and horizontal labelling schemes. Our task could become
19837 complicated. But complications breed confusion. Rather than permit
19838 this, it is better choose a simple labelling scheme for our first
19839 effort, and to modify or replace it later.
19840
19841 @need 1200
19842 These considerations suggest the following outline for the
19843 @code{print-graph} function:
19844
19845 @smallexample
19846 @group
19847 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
19848 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
19849 (let ((height @dots{}
19850 @dots{}))
19851 @end group
19852 @group
19853 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
19854 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
19855 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
19856 @end group
19857 @end smallexample
19858
19859 We can work on each part of the @code{print-graph} function definition
19860 in turn.
19861
19862 @node print-graph Varlist, print-Y-axis, Labelled Example, Full Graph
19863 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19864 @appendixsec The @code{print-graph} Varlist
19865 @cindex @code{print-graph} varlist
19866
19867 In writing the @code{print-graph} function, the first task is to write
19868 the varlist in the @code{let} expression. (We will leave aside for the
19869 moment any thoughts about making the function interactive or about the
19870 contents of its documentation string.)
19871
19872 The varlist should set several values. Clearly, the top of the label
19873 for the vertical axis must be at least the height of the graph, which
19874 means that we must obtain this information here. Note that the
19875 @code{print-graph-body} function also requires this information. There
19876 is no reason to calculate the height of the graph in two different
19877 places, so we should change @code{print-graph-body} from the way we
19878 defined it earlier to take advantage of the calculation.
19879
19880 Similarly, both the function for printing the X axis labels and the
19881 @code{print-graph-body} function need to learn the value of the width of
19882 each symbol. We can perform the calculation here and change the
19883 definition for @code{print-graph-body} from the way we defined it in the
19884 previous chapter.
19885
19886 The length of the label for the horizontal axis must be at least as long
19887 as the graph. However, this information is used only in the function
19888 that prints the horizontal axis, so it does not need to be calculated here.
19889
19890 These thoughts lead us directly to the following form for the varlist
19891 in the @code{let} for @code{print-graph}:
19892
19893 @smallexample
19894 @group
19895 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list)) ; @r{First version.}
19896 (symbol-width (length graph-blank)))
19897 @end group
19898 @end smallexample
19899
19900 @noindent
19901 As we shall see, this expression is not quite right.
19902
19903 @need 2000
19904 @node print-Y-axis, print-X-axis, print-graph Varlist, Full Graph
19905 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19906 @appendixsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
19907 @cindex Axis, print vertical
19908 @cindex Y axis printing
19909 @cindex Vertical axis printing
19910 @cindex Print vertical axis
19911
19912 The job of the @code{print-Y-axis} function is to print a label for
19913 the vertical axis that looks like this:
19914
19915 @smallexample
19916 @group
19917 10 -
19918
19919
19920
19921
19922 5 -
19923
19924
19925
19926 1 -
19927 @end group
19928 @end smallexample
19929
19930 @noindent
19931 The function should be passed the height of the graph, and then should
19932 construct and insert the appropriate numbers and marks.
19933
19934 @menu
19935 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
19936 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
19937 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
19938 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
19939 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
19940 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
19941 @end menu
19942
19943 @node print-Y-axis in Detail, Height of label, print-Y-axis, print-Y-axis
19944 @ifnottex
19945 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function in Detail
19946 @end ifnottex
19947
19948 It is easy enough to see in the figure what the Y axis label should
19949 look like; but to say in words, and then to write a function
19950 definition to do the job is another matter. It is not quite true to
19951 say that we want a number and a tic every five lines: there are only
19952 three lines between the @samp{1} and the @samp{5} (lines 2, 3, and 4),
19953 but four lines between the @samp{5} and the @samp{10} (lines 6, 7, 8,
19954 and 9). It is better to say that we want a number and a tic mark on
19955 the base line (number 1) and then that we want a number and a tic on
19956 the fifth line from the bottom and on every line that is a multiple of
19957 five.
19958
19959 @node Height of label, Compute a Remainder, print-Y-axis in Detail, print-Y-axis
19960 @ifnottex
19961 @unnumberedsubsec What height should the label be?
19962 @end ifnottex
19963
19964 The next issue is what height the label should be? Suppose the maximum
19965 height of tallest column of the graph is seven. Should the highest
19966 label on the Y axis be @samp{5 -}, and should the graph stick up above
19967 the label? Or should the highest label be @samp{7 -}, and mark the peak
19968 of the graph? Or should the highest label be @code{10 -}, which is a
19969 multiple of five, and be higher than the topmost value of the graph?
19970
19971 The latter form is preferred. Most graphs are drawn within rectangles
19972 whose sides are an integral number of steps long---5, 10, 15, and so
19973 on for a step distance of five. But as soon as we decide to use a
19974 step height for the vertical axis, we discover that the simple
19975 expression in the varlist for computing the height is wrong. The
19976 expression is @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)}. This returns the
19977 precise height, not the maximum height plus whatever is necessary to
19978 round up to the nearest multiple of five. A more complex expression
19979 is required.
19980
19981 As usual in cases like this, a complex problem becomes simpler if it is
19982 divided into several smaller problems.
19983
19984 First, consider the case when the highest value of the graph is an
19985 integral multiple of five---when it is 5, 10, 15, or some higher
19986 multiple of five. We can use this value as the Y axis height.
19987
19988 A fairly simply way to determine whether a number is a multiple of
19989 five is to divide it by five and see if the division results in a
19990 remainder. If there is no remainder, the number is a multiple of
19991 five. Thus, seven divided by five has a remainder of two, and seven
19992 is not an integral multiple of five. Put in slightly different
19993 language, more reminiscent of the classroom, five goes into seven
19994 once, with a remainder of two. However, five goes into ten twice,
19995 with no remainder: ten is an integral multiple of five.
19996
19997 @node Compute a Remainder, Y Axis Element, Height of label, print-Y-axis
19998 @appendixsubsec Side Trip: Compute a Remainder
19999
20000 @findex % @r{(remainder function)}
20001 @cindex Remainder function, @code{%}
20002 In Lisp, the function for computing a remainder is @code{%}. The
20003 function returns the remainder of its first argument divided by its
20004 second argument. As it happens, @code{%} is a function in Emacs Lisp
20005 that you cannot discover using @code{apropos}: you find nothing if you
20006 type @kbd{M-x apropos @key{RET} remainder @key{RET}}. The only way to
20007 learn of the existence of @code{%} is to read about it in a book such
20008 as this or in the Emacs Lisp sources.
20009
20010 You can try the @code{%} function by evaluating the following two
20011 expressions:
20012
20013 @smallexample
20014 @group
20015 (% 7 5)
20016
20017 (% 10 5)
20018 @end group
20019 @end smallexample
20020
20021 @noindent
20022 The first expression returns 2 and the second expression returns 0.
20023
20024 To test whether the returned value is zero or some other number, we
20025 can use the @code{zerop} function. This function returns @code{t} if
20026 its argument, which must be a number, is zero.
20027
20028 @smallexample
20029 @group
20030 (zerop (% 7 5))
20031 @result{} nil
20032
20033 (zerop (% 10 5))
20034 @result{} t
20035 @end group
20036 @end smallexample
20037
20038 Thus, the following expression will return @code{t} if the height
20039 of the graph is evenly divisible by five:
20040
20041 @smallexample
20042 (zerop (% height 5))
20043 @end smallexample
20044
20045 @noindent
20046 (The value of @code{height}, of course, can be found from @code{(apply
20047 'max numbers-list)}.)
20048
20049 On the other hand, if the value of @code{height} is not a multiple of
20050 five, we want to reset the value to the next higher multiple of five.
20051 This is straightforward arithmetic using functions with which we are
20052 already familiar. First, we divide the value of @code{height} by five
20053 to determine how many times five goes into the number. Thus, five
20054 goes into twelve twice. If we add one to this quotient and multiply by
20055 five, we will obtain the value of the next multiple of five that is
20056 larger than the height. Five goes into twelve twice. Add one to two,
20057 and multiply by five; the result is fifteen, which is the next multiple
20058 of five that is higher than twelve. The Lisp expression for this is:
20059
20060 @smallexample
20061 (* (1+ (/ height 5)) 5)
20062 @end smallexample
20063
20064 @noindent
20065 For example, if you evaluate the following, the result is 15:
20066
20067 @smallexample
20068 (* (1+ (/ 12 5)) 5)
20069 @end smallexample
20070
20071 All through this discussion, we have been using `five' as the value
20072 for spacing labels on the Y axis; but we may want to use some other
20073 value. For generality, we should replace `five' with a variable to
20074 which we can assign a value. The best name I can think of for this
20075 variable is @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
20076
20077 @need 1250
20078 Using this term, and an @code{if} expression, we produce the
20079 following:
20080
20081 @smallexample
20082 @group
20083 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20084 height
20085 ;; @r{else}
20086 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20087 Y-axis-label-spacing))
20088 @end group
20089 @end smallexample
20090
20091 @noindent
20092 This expression returns the value of @code{height} itself if the height
20093 is an even multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing} or
20094 else it computes and returns a value of @code{height} that is equal to
20095 the next higher multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
20096
20097 We can now include this expression in the @code{let} expression of the
20098 @code{print-graph} function (after first setting the value of
20099 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}):
20100 @vindex Y-axis-label-spacing
20101
20102 @smallexample
20103 @group
20104 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
20105 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
20106 @end group
20107
20108 @group
20109 @dots{}
20110 (let* ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20111 (height-of-top-line
20112 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20113 height
20114 @end group
20115 @group
20116 ;; @r{else}
20117 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20118 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20119 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))))
20120 @dots{}
20121 @end group
20122 @end smallexample
20123
20124 @noindent
20125 (Note use of the @code{let*} function: the initial value of height is
20126 computed once by the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression and
20127 then the resulting value of @code{height} is used to compute its
20128 final value. @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}, for
20129 more about @code{let*}.)
20130
20131 @node Y Axis Element, Y-axis-column, Compute a Remainder, print-Y-axis
20132 @appendixsubsec Construct a Y Axis Element
20133
20134 When we print the vertical axis, we want to insert strings such as
20135 @w{@samp{5 -}} and @w{@samp{10 - }} every five lines.
20136 Moreover, we want the numbers and dashes to line up, so shorter
20137 numbers must be padded with leading spaces. If some of the strings
20138 use two digit numbers, the strings with single digit numbers must
20139 include a leading blank space before the number.
20140
20141 @findex number-to-string
20142 To figure out the length of the number, the @code{length} function is
20143 used. But the @code{length} function works only with a string, not with
20144 a number. So the number has to be converted from being a number to
20145 being a string. This is done with the @code{number-to-string} function.
20146 For example,
20147
20148 @smallexample
20149 @group
20150 (length (number-to-string 35))
20151 @result{} 2
20152
20153 (length (number-to-string 100))
20154 @result{} 3
20155 @end group
20156 @end smallexample
20157
20158 @noindent
20159 (@code{number-to-string} is also called @code{int-to-string}; you will
20160 see this alternative name in various sources.)
20161
20162 In addition, in each label, each number is followed by a string such
20163 as @w{@samp{ - }}, which we will call the @code{Y-axis-tic} marker.
20164 This variable is defined with @code{defvar}:
20165
20166 @vindex Y-axis-tic
20167 @smallexample
20168 @group
20169 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
20170 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
20171 @end group
20172 @end smallexample
20173
20174 The length of the Y label is the sum of the length of the Y axis tic
20175 mark and the length of the number of the top of the graph.
20176
20177 @smallexample
20178 (length (concat (number-to-string height) Y-axis-tic)))
20179 @end smallexample
20180
20181 This value will be calculated by the @code{print-graph} function in
20182 its varlist as @code{full-Y-label-width} and passed on. (Note that we
20183 did not think to include this in the varlist when we first proposed it.)
20184
20185 To make a complete vertical axis label, a tic mark is concatenated
20186 with a number; and the two together may be preceded by one or more
20187 spaces depending on how long the number is. The label consists of
20188 three parts: the (optional) leading spaces, the number, and the tic
20189 mark. The function is passed the value of the number for the specific
20190 row, and the value of the width of the top line, which is calculated
20191 (just once) by @code{print-graph}.
20192
20193 @smallexample
20194 @group
20195 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
20196 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
20197 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
20198 and is padded as needed so all line up with
20199 the element for the largest number."
20200 @end group
20201 @group
20202 (let* ((leading-spaces
20203 (- full-Y-label-width
20204 (length
20205 (concat (number-to-string number)
20206 Y-axis-tic)))))
20207 @end group
20208 @group
20209 (concat
20210 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20211 (number-to-string number)
20212 Y-axis-tic)))
20213 @end group
20214 @end smallexample
20215
20216 The @code{Y-axis-element} function concatenates together the leading
20217 spaces, if any; the number, as a string; and the tic mark.
20218
20219 To figure out how many leading spaces the label will need, the
20220 function subtracts the actual length of the label---the length of the
20221 number plus the length of the tic mark---from the desired label width.
20222
20223 @findex make-string
20224 Blank spaces are inserted using the @code{make-string} function. This
20225 function takes two arguments: the first tells it how long the string
20226 will be and the second is a symbol for the character to insert, in a
20227 special format. The format is a question mark followed by a blank
20228 space, like this, @samp{? }. @xref{Character Type, , Character Type,
20229 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a description of the
20230 syntax for characters. (Of course, you might want to replace the
20231 blank space by some other character @dots{} You know what to do.)
20232
20233 The @code{number-to-string} function is used in the concatenation
20234 expression, to convert the number to a string that is concatenated
20235 with the leading spaces and the tic mark.
20236
20237 @node Y-axis-column, print-Y-axis Penultimate, Y Axis Element, print-Y-axis
20238 @appendixsubsec Create a Y Axis Column
20239
20240 The preceding functions provide all the tools needed to construct a
20241 function that generates a list of numbered and blank strings to insert
20242 as the label for the vertical axis:
20243
20244 @findex Y-axis-column
20245 @smallexample
20246 @group
20247 (defun Y-axis-column (height width-of-label)
20248 "Construct list of Y axis labels and blank strings.
20249 For HEIGHT of line above base and WIDTH-OF-LABEL."
20250 (let (Y-axis)
20251 @group
20252 @end group
20253 (while (> height 1)
20254 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20255 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20256 (setq Y-axis
20257 (cons
20258 (Y-axis-element height width-of-label)
20259 Y-axis))
20260 @group
20261 @end group
20262 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20263 (setq Y-axis
20264 (cons
20265 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20266 Y-axis)))
20267 (setq height (1- height)))
20268 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20269 (setq Y-axis
20270 (cons (Y-axis-element 1 width-of-label) Y-axis))
20271 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20272 @end group
20273 @end smallexample
20274
20275 In this function, we start with the value of @code{height} and
20276 repetitively subtract one from its value. After each subtraction, we
20277 test to see whether the value is an integral multiple of the
20278 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}. If it is, we construct a numbered label
20279 using the @code{Y-axis-element} function; if not, we construct a
20280 blank label using the @code{make-string} function. The base line
20281 consists of the number one followed by a tic mark.
20282
20283 @need 2000
20284 @node print-Y-axis Penultimate, , Y-axis-column, print-Y-axis
20285 @appendixsubsec The Not Quite Final Version of @code{print-Y-axis}
20286
20287 The list constructed by the @code{Y-axis-column} function is passed to
20288 the @code{print-Y-axis} function, which inserts the list as a column.
20289
20290 @findex print-Y-axis
20291 @smallexample
20292 @group
20293 (defun print-Y-axis (height full-Y-label-width)
20294 "Insert Y axis using HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
20295 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
20296 Full width is the width of the highest label element."
20297 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
20298 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
20299 @end group
20300 @group
20301 (let ((start (point)))
20302 (insert-rectangle
20303 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width))
20304 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
20305 (goto-char start)
20306 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
20307 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
20308 @end group
20309 @end smallexample
20310
20311 The @code{print-Y-axis} uses the @code{insert-rectangle} function to
20312 insert the Y axis labels created by the @code{Y-axis-column} function.
20313 In addition, it places point at the correct position for printing the body of
20314 the graph.
20315
20316 You can test @code{print-Y-axis}:
20317
20318 @enumerate
20319 @item
20320 Install
20321
20322 @smallexample
20323 @group
20324 Y-axis-label-spacing
20325 Y-axis-tic
20326 Y-axis-element
20327 Y-axis-column
20328 print-Y-axis
20329 @end group
20330 @end smallexample
20331
20332 @item
20333 Copy the following expression:
20334
20335 @smallexample
20336 (print-Y-axis 12 5)
20337 @end smallexample
20338
20339 @item
20340 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20341 want the axis labels to start.
20342
20343 @item
20344 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20345
20346 @item
20347 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
20348 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20349
20350 @item
20351 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20352 @end enumerate
20353
20354 Emacs will print labels vertically, the top one being @w{@samp{10 -@w{
20355 }}}. (The @code{print-graph} function will pass the value of
20356 @code{height-of-top-line}, which in this case will end up as 15,
20357 thereby getting rid of what might appear as a bug.)
20358
20359 @need 2000
20360 @node print-X-axis, Print Whole Graph, print-Y-axis, Full Graph
20361 @appendixsec The @code{print-X-axis} Function
20362 @cindex Axis, print horizontal
20363 @cindex X axis printing
20364 @cindex Print horizontal axis
20365 @cindex Horizontal axis printing
20366
20367 X axis labels are much like Y axis labels, except that the ticks are on a
20368 line above the numbers. Labels should look like this:
20369
20370 @smallexample
20371 @group
20372 | | | |
20373 1 5 10 15
20374 @end group
20375 @end smallexample
20376
20377 The first tic is under the first column of the graph and is preceded by
20378 several blank spaces. These spaces provide room in rows above for the Y
20379 axis labels. The second, third, fourth, and subsequent ticks are all
20380 spaced equally, according to the value of @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20381
20382 The second row of the X axis consists of numbers, preceded by several
20383 blank spaces and also separated according to the value of the variable
20384 @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20385
20386 The value of the variable @code{X-axis-label-spacing} should itself be
20387 measured in units of @code{symbol-width}, since you may want to change
20388 the width of the symbols that you are using to print the body of the
20389 graph without changing the ways the graph is labelled.
20390
20391 @menu
20392 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
20393 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
20394 @end menu
20395
20396 @node Similarities differences, X Axis Tic Marks, print-X-axis, print-X-axis
20397 @ifnottex
20398 @unnumberedsubsec Similarities and differences
20399 @end ifnottex
20400
20401 The @code{print-X-axis} function is constructed in more or less the
20402 same fashion as the @code{print-Y-axis} function except that it has
20403 two lines: the line of tic marks and the numbers. We will write a
20404 separate function to print each line and then combine them within the
20405 @code{print-X-axis} function.
20406
20407 This is a three step process:
20408
20409 @enumerate
20410 @item
20411 Write a function to print the X axis tic marks, @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}.
20412
20413 @item
20414 Write a function to print the X numbers, @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20415
20416 @item
20417 Write a function to print both lines, the @code{print-X-axis} function,
20418 using @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20419 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20420 @end enumerate
20421
20422 @node X Axis Tic Marks, , Similarities differences, print-X-axis
20423 @appendixsubsec X Axis Tic Marks
20424
20425 The first function should print the X axis tic marks. We must specify
20426 the tic marks themselves and their spacing:
20427
20428 @smallexample
20429 @group
20430 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
20431 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
20432 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
20433 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
20434 @end group
20435 @end smallexample
20436
20437 @noindent
20438 (Note that the value of @code{graph-blank} is set by another
20439 @code{defvar}. The @code{boundp} predicate checks whether it has
20440 already been set; @code{boundp} returns @code{nil} if it has not. If
20441 @code{graph-blank} were unbound and we did not use this conditional
20442 construction, in a recent GNU Emacs, we would enter the debugger and
20443 see an error message saying @samp{@w{Debugger entered--Lisp error:}
20444 @w{(void-variable graph-blank)}}.)
20445
20446 @need 1200
20447 Here is the @code{defvar} for @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}:
20448
20449 @smallexample
20450 @group
20451 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
20452 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
20453 @end group
20454 @end smallexample
20455
20456 @need 1250
20457 The goal is to make a line that looks like this:
20458
20459 @smallexample
20460 | | | |
20461 @end smallexample
20462
20463 The first tic is indented so that it is under the first column, which is
20464 indented to provide space for the Y axis labels.
20465
20466 A tic element consists of the blank spaces that stretch from one tic to
20467 the next plus a tic symbol. The number of blanks is determined by the
20468 width of the tic symbol and the @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20469
20470 @need 1250
20471 The code looks like this:
20472
20473 @smallexample
20474 @group
20475 ;;; X-axis-tic-element
20476 @dots{}
20477 (concat
20478 (make-string
20479 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20480 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20481 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20482 ? )
20483 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20484 X-axis-tic-symbol)
20485 @dots{}
20486 @end group
20487 @end smallexample
20488
20489 Next, we determine how many blanks are needed to indent the first tic
20490 mark to the first column of the graph. This uses the value of
20491 @code{full-Y-label-width} passed it by the @code{print-graph} function.
20492
20493 @need 1250
20494 The code to make @code{X-axis-leading-spaces}
20495 looks like this:
20496
20497 @smallexample
20498 @group
20499 ;; X-axis-leading-spaces
20500 @dots{}
20501 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? )
20502 @dots{}
20503 @end group
20504 @end smallexample
20505
20506 We also need to determine the length of the horizontal axis, which is
20507 the length of the numbers list, and the number of ticks in the horizontal
20508 axis:
20509
20510 @smallexample
20511 @group
20512 ;; X-length
20513 @dots{}
20514 (length numbers-list)
20515 @end group
20516
20517 @group
20518 ;; tic-width
20519 @dots{}
20520 (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20521 @end group
20522
20523 @group
20524 ;; number-of-X-ticks
20525 (if (zerop (% (X-length tic-width)))
20526 (/ (X-length tic-width))
20527 (1+ (/ (X-length tic-width))))
20528 @end group
20529 @end smallexample
20530
20531 @need 1250
20532 All this leads us directly to the function for printing the X axis tic line:
20533
20534 @findex print-X-axis-tic-line
20535 @smallexample
20536 @group
20537 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
20538 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
20539 "Print ticks for X axis."
20540 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20541 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
20542 @end group
20543 @group
20544 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
20545 (insert (concat
20546 (make-string
20547 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20548 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
20549 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
20550 ? )
20551 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20552 @end group
20553 @group
20554 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
20555 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20556 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
20557 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
20558 @end group
20559 @end smallexample
20560
20561 The line of numbers is equally straightforward:
20562
20563 @need 1250
20564 First, we create a numbered element with blank spaces before each number:
20565
20566 @findex X-axis-element
20567 @smallexample
20568 @group
20569 (defun X-axis-element (number)
20570 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
20571 (let ((leading-spaces
20572 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20573 (length (number-to-string number)))))
20574 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20575 (number-to-string number))))
20576 @end group
20577 @end smallexample
20578
20579 Next, we create the function to print the numbered line, starting with
20580 the number ``1'' under the first column:
20581
20582 @findex print-X-axis-numbered-line
20583 @smallexample
20584 @group
20585 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
20586 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces)
20587 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
20588 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing))
20589 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20590 (insert "1")
20591 @end group
20592 @group
20593 (insert (concat
20594 (make-string
20595 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
20596 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing) 2)
20597 ? )
20598 (number-to-string number)))
20599 @end group
20600 @group
20601 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
20602 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20603 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20604 (insert (X-axis-element number))
20605 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20606 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
20607 @end group
20608 @end smallexample
20609
20610 Finally, we need to write the @code{print-X-axis} that uses
20611 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20612 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20613
20614 The function must determine the local values of the variables used by both
20615 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and
20616 then it must call them. Also, it must print the carriage return that
20617 separates the two lines.
20618
20619 The function consists of a varlist that specifies five local variables,
20620 and calls to each of the two line printing functions:
20621
20622 @findex print-X-axis
20623 @smallexample
20624 @group
20625 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list)
20626 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST."
20627 (let* ((leading-spaces
20628 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
20629 @end group
20630 @group
20631 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
20632 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
20633 (X-length (length numbers-list))
20634 @end group
20635 @group
20636 (X-tic
20637 (concat
20638 (make-string
20639 @end group
20640 @group
20641 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20642 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20643 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20644 ? )
20645 @end group
20646 @group
20647 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20648 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20649 @end group
20650 @group
20651 (tic-number
20652 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
20653 (/ X-length tic-width)
20654 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
20655 @end group
20656 @group
20657 (print-X-axis-tic-line tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
20658 (insert "\n")
20659 (print-X-axis-numbered-line tic-number leading-spaces)))
20660 @end group
20661 @end smallexample
20662
20663 @need 1250
20664 You can test @code{print-X-axis}:
20665
20666 @enumerate
20667 @item
20668 Install @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}, @code{X-axis-label-spacing},
20669 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}, as well as @code{X-axis-element},
20670 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and @code{print-X-axis}.
20671
20672 @item
20673 Copy the following expression:
20674
20675 @smallexample
20676 @group
20677 (progn
20678 (let ((full-Y-label-width 5)
20679 (symbol-width 1))
20680 (print-X-axis
20681 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16))))
20682 @end group
20683 @end smallexample
20684
20685 @item
20686 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20687 want the axis labels to start.
20688
20689 @item
20690 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20691
20692 @item
20693 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20694 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20695
20696 @item
20697 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20698 @end enumerate
20699
20700 @need 1250
20701 Emacs will print the horizontal axis like this:
20702 @sp 1
20703
20704 @smallexample
20705 @group
20706 | | | | |
20707 1 5 10 15 20
20708 @end group
20709 @end smallexample
20710
20711 @node Print Whole Graph, , print-X-axis, Full Graph
20712 @appendixsec Printing the Whole Graph
20713 @cindex Printing the whole graph
20714 @cindex Whole graph printing
20715 @cindex Graph, printing all
20716
20717 Now we are nearly ready to print the whole graph.
20718
20719 The function to print the graph with the proper labels follows the
20720 outline we created earlier (@pxref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labelled
20721 Axes}), but with additions.
20722
20723 @need 1250
20724 Here is the outline:
20725
20726 @smallexample
20727 @group
20728 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
20729 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
20730 (let ((height @dots{}
20731 @dots{}))
20732 @end group
20733 @group
20734 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
20735 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
20736 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
20737 @end group
20738 @end smallexample
20739
20740 @menu
20741 * The final version:: A few changes.
20742 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
20743 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
20744 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
20745 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
20746 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
20747 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
20748 @end menu
20749
20750 @node The final version, Test print-graph, Print Whole Graph, Print Whole Graph
20751 @ifnottex
20752 @unnumberedsubsec Changes for the Final Version
20753 @end ifnottex
20754
20755 The final version is different from what we planned in two ways:
20756 first, it contains additional values calculated once in the varlist;
20757 second, it carries an option to specify the labels' increment per row.
20758 This latter feature turns out to be essential; otherwise, a graph may
20759 have more rows than fit on a display or on a sheet of paper.
20760
20761 @need 1500
20762 This new feature requires a change to the @code{Y-axis-column}
20763 function, to add @code{vertical-step} to it. The function looks like
20764 this:
20765
20766 @findex Y-axis-column @r{Final version.}
20767 @smallexample
20768 @group
20769 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20770 (defun Y-axis-column
20771 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
20772 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
20773 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20774 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
20775 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
20776 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
20777 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
20778 that each line is five units of the graph."
20779 @end group
20780 @group
20781 (let (Y-axis
20782 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
20783 (while (> height 1)
20784 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20785 @end group
20786 @group
20787 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20788 (setq Y-axis
20789 (cons
20790 (Y-axis-element
20791 (* height number-per-line)
20792 width-of-label)
20793 Y-axis))
20794 @end group
20795 @group
20796 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20797 (setq Y-axis
20798 (cons
20799 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20800 Y-axis)))
20801 (setq height (1- height)))
20802 @end group
20803 @group
20804 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20805 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
20806 (or vertical-step 1)
20807 width-of-label)
20808 Y-axis))
20809 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20810 @end group
20811 @end smallexample
20812
20813 The values for the maximum height of graph and the width of a symbol
20814 are computed by @code{print-graph} in its @code{let} expression; so
20815 @code{graph-body-print} must be changed to accept them.
20816
20817 @findex graph-body-print @r{Final version.}
20818 @smallexample
20819 @group
20820 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20821 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
20822 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20823 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20824 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20825 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
20826 @end group
20827 @group
20828 (let (from-position)
20829 (while numbers-list
20830 (setq from-position (point))
20831 (insert-rectangle
20832 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
20833 (goto-char from-position)
20834 (forward-char symbol-width)
20835 @end group
20836 @group
20837 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
20838 (sit-for 0)
20839 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
20840 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
20841 (forward-line height)
20842 (insert "\n")))
20843 @end group
20844 @end smallexample
20845
20846 @need 1250
20847 Finally, the code for the @code{print-graph} function:
20848
20849 @findex print-graph @r{Final version.}
20850 @smallexample
20851 @group
20852 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20853 (defun print-graph
20854 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step)
20855 "Print labelled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20856 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20857 @end group
20858
20859 @group
20860 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
20861 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
20862 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
20863 each row is five units."
20864 @end group
20865 @group
20866 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
20867 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
20868 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
20869 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20870 @end group
20871 @group
20872 (height-of-top-line
20873 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20874 height
20875 ;; @r{else}
20876 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20877 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20878 @end group
20879 @group
20880 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
20881 (full-Y-label-width
20882 (length
20883 @end group
20884 @group
20885 (concat
20886 (number-to-string
20887 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
20888 Y-axis-tic))))
20889 @end group
20890
20891 @group
20892 (print-Y-axis
20893 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
20894 @end group
20895 @group
20896 (graph-body-print
20897 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
20898 (print-X-axis numbers-list)))
20899 @end group
20900 @end smallexample
20901
20902 @node Test print-graph, Graphing words in defuns, The final version, Print Whole Graph
20903 @appendixsubsec Testing @code{print-graph}
20904
20905 @need 1250
20906 We can test the @code{print-graph} function with a short list of numbers:
20907
20908 @enumerate
20909 @item
20910 Install the final versions of @code{Y-axis-column},
20911 @code{graph-body-print}, and @code{print-graph} (in addition to the
20912 rest of the code.)
20913
20914 @item
20915 Copy the following expression:
20916
20917 @smallexample
20918 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
20919 @end smallexample
20920
20921 @item
20922 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20923 want the axis labels to start.
20924
20925 @item
20926 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20927
20928 @item
20929 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20930 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20931
20932 @item
20933 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20934 @end enumerate
20935
20936 @need 1250
20937 Emacs will print a graph that looks like this:
20938
20939 @smallexample
20940 @group
20941 10 -
20942
20943
20944 *
20945 ** *
20946 5 - **** *
20947 **** ***
20948 * *********
20949 ************
20950 1 - *************
20951
20952 | | | |
20953 1 5 10 15
20954 @end group
20955 @end smallexample
20956
20957 @need 1200
20958 On the other hand, if you pass @code{print-graph} a
20959 @code{vertical-step} value of 2, by evaluating this expression:
20960
20961 @smallexample
20962 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1) 2)
20963 @end smallexample
20964
20965 @need 1250
20966 @noindent
20967 The graph looks like this:
20968
20969 @smallexample
20970 @group
20971 20 -
20972
20973
20974 *
20975 ** *
20976 10 - **** *
20977 **** ***
20978 * *********
20979 ************
20980 2 - *************
20981
20982 | | | |
20983 1 5 10 15
20984 @end group
20985 @end smallexample
20986
20987 @noindent
20988 (A question: is the `2' on the bottom of the vertical axis a bug or a
20989 feature? If you think it is a bug, and should be a `1' instead, (or
20990 even a `0'), you can modify the sources.)
20991
20992 @node Graphing words in defuns, lambda, Test print-graph, Print Whole Graph
20993 @appendixsubsec Graphing Numbers of Words and Symbols
20994
20995 Now for the graph for which all this code was written: a graph that
20996 shows how many function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and
20997 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
20998 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
20999
21000 This is a multi-step process. First make sure you have loaded all the
21001 requisite code.
21002
21003 @need 1500
21004 It is a good idea to reset the value of @code{top-of-ranges} in case
21005 you have set it to some different value. You can evaluate the
21006 following:
21007
21008 @smallexample
21009 @group
21010 (setq top-of-ranges
21011 '(10 20 30 40 50
21012 60 70 80 90 100
21013 110 120 130 140 150
21014 160 170 180 190 200
21015 210 220 230 240 250
21016 260 270 280 290 300)
21017 @end group
21018 @end smallexample
21019
21020 @noindent
21021 Next create a list of the number of words and symbols in each range.
21022
21023 @need 1500
21024 @noindent
21025 Evaluate the following:
21026
21027 @smallexample
21028 @group
21029 (setq list-for-graph
21030 (defuns-per-range
21031 (sort
21032 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
21033 (directory-files "/usr/local/emacs/lisp"
21034 t ".+el$"))
21035 '<)
21036 top-of-ranges))
21037 @end group
21038 @end smallexample
21039
21040 @noindent
21041 On my old machine, this took about an hour. It looked though 303 Lisp
21042 files in my copy of Emacs version 19.23. After all that computing,
21043 the @code{list-for-graph} had this value:
21044
21045 @smallexample
21046 @group
21047 (537 1027 955 785 594 483 349 292 224 199 166 120 116 99
21048 90 80 67 48 52 45 41 33 28 26 25 20 12 28 11 13 220)
21049 @end group
21050 @end smallexample
21051
21052 @noindent
21053 This means that my copy of Emacs had 537 function definitions with
21054 fewer than 10 words or symbols in them, 1,027 function definitions
21055 with 10 to 19 words or symbols in them, 955 function definitions with
21056 20 to 29 words or symbols in them, and so on.
21057
21058 Clearly, just by looking at this list we can see that most function
21059 definitions contain ten to thirty words and symbols.
21060
21061 Now for printing. We do @emph{not} want to print a graph that is
21062 1,030 lines high @dots{} Instead, we should print a graph that is
21063 fewer than twenty-five lines high. A graph that height can be
21064 displayed on almost any monitor, and easily printed on a sheet of paper.
21065
21066 This means that each value in @code{list-for-graph} must be reduced to
21067 one-fiftieth its present value.
21068
21069 Here is a short function to do just that, using two functions we have
21070 not yet seen, @code{mapcar} and @code{lambda}.
21071
21072 @smallexample
21073 @group
21074 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21075 "Return list, each number one-fiftieth of previous."
21076 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21077 @end group
21078 @end smallexample
21079
21080 @node lambda, mapcar, Graphing words in defuns, Print Whole Graph
21081 @appendixsubsec A @code{lambda} Expression: Useful Anonymity
21082 @cindex Anonymous function
21083 @findex lambda
21084
21085 @code{lambda} is the symbol for an anonymous function, a function
21086 without a name. Every time you use an anonymous function, you need to
21087 include its whole body.
21088
21089 @need 1250
21090 @noindent
21091 Thus,
21092
21093 @smallexample
21094 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
21095 @end smallexample
21096
21097 @noindent
21098 is a function definition that says `return the value resulting from
21099 dividing whatever is passed to me as @code{arg} by 50'.
21100
21101 @need 1200
21102 Earlier, for example, we had a function @code{multiply-by-seven}; it
21103 multiplied its argument by 7. This function is similar, except it
21104 divides its argument by 50; and, it has no name. The anonymous
21105 equivalent of @code{multiply-by-seven} is:
21106
21107 @smallexample
21108 (lambda (number) (* 7 number))
21109 @end smallexample
21110
21111 @noindent
21112 (@xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
21113
21114 @need 1250
21115 @noindent
21116 If we want to multiply 3 by 7, we can write:
21117
21118 @c !!! Clear print-postscript-figures if the computer formatting this
21119 @c document is too small and cannot handle all the diagrams and figures.
21120 @c clear print-postscript-figures
21121 @c set print-postscript-figures
21122 @c lambda example diagram #1
21123 @ifnottex
21124 @smallexample
21125 @group
21126 (multiply-by-seven 3)
21127 \_______________/ ^
21128 | |
21129 function argument
21130 @end group
21131 @end smallexample
21132 @end ifnottex
21133 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21134 @sp 1
21135 @tex
21136 @center @image{lambda-1}
21137 %%%% old method of including an image
21138 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21139 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-1.eps}}
21140 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21141 @end tex
21142 @sp 1
21143 @end ifset
21144 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21145 @iftex
21146 @smallexample
21147 @group
21148 (multiply-by-seven 3)
21149 \_______________/ ^
21150 | |
21151 function argument
21152 @end group
21153 @end smallexample
21154 @end iftex
21155 @end ifclear
21156
21157 @noindent
21158 This expression returns 21.
21159
21160 @need 1250
21161 @noindent
21162 Similarly, we can write:
21163
21164 @c lambda example diagram #2
21165 @ifnottex
21166 @smallexample
21167 @group
21168 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
21169 \____________________________/ ^
21170 | |
21171 anonymous function argument
21172 @end group
21173 @end smallexample
21174 @end ifnottex
21175 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21176 @sp 1
21177 @tex
21178 @center @image{lambda-2}
21179 %%%% old method of including an image
21180 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21181 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-2.eps}}
21182 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21183 @end tex
21184 @sp 1
21185 @end ifset
21186 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21187 @iftex
21188 @smallexample
21189 @group
21190 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
21191 \____________________________/ ^
21192 | |
21193 anonymous function argument
21194 @end group
21195 @end smallexample
21196 @end iftex
21197 @end ifclear
21198
21199 @need 1250
21200 @noindent
21201 If we want to divide 100 by 50, we can write:
21202
21203 @c lambda example diagram #3
21204 @ifnottex
21205 @smallexample
21206 @group
21207 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
21208 \______________________/ \_/
21209 | |
21210 anonymous function argument
21211 @end group
21212 @end smallexample
21213 @end ifnottex
21214 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21215 @sp 1
21216 @tex
21217 @center @image{lambda-3}
21218 %%%% old method of including an image
21219 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21220 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-3.eps}}
21221 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21222 @end tex
21223 @sp 1
21224 @end ifset
21225 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21226 @iftex
21227 @smallexample
21228 @group
21229 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
21230 \______________________/ \_/
21231 | |
21232 anonymous function argument
21233 @end group
21234 @end smallexample
21235 @end iftex
21236 @end ifclear
21237
21238 @noindent
21239 This expression returns 2. The 100 is passed to the function, which
21240 divides that number by 50.
21241
21242 @xref{Lambda Expressions, , Lambda Expressions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21243 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{lambda}. Lisp and lambda
21244 expressions derive from the Lambda Calculus.
21245
21246 @node mapcar, Another Bug, lambda, Print Whole Graph
21247 @appendixsubsec The @code{mapcar} Function
21248 @findex mapcar
21249
21250 @code{mapcar} is a function that calls its first argument with each
21251 element of its second argument, in turn. The second argument must be
21252 a sequence.
21253
21254 The @samp{map} part of the name comes from the mathematical phrase,
21255 `mapping over a domain', meaning to apply a function to each of the
21256 elements in a domain. The mathematical phrase is based on the
21257 metaphor of a surveyor walking, one step at a time, over an area he is
21258 mapping. And @samp{car}, of course, comes from the Lisp notion of the
21259 first of a list.
21260
21261 @need 1250
21262 @noindent
21263 For example,
21264
21265 @smallexample
21266 @group
21267 (mapcar '1+ '(2 4 6))
21268 @result{} (3 5 7)
21269 @end group
21270 @end smallexample
21271
21272 @noindent
21273 The function @code{1+} which adds one to its argument, is executed on
21274 @emph{each} element of the list, and a new list is returned.
21275
21276 Contrast this with @code{apply}, which applies its first argument to
21277 all the remaining.
21278 (@xref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}, for a explanation of
21279 @code{apply}.)
21280
21281 @need 1250
21282 In the definition of @code{one-fiftieth}, the first argument is the
21283 anonymous function:
21284
21285 @smallexample
21286 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
21287 @end smallexample
21288
21289 @noindent
21290 and the second argument is @code{full-range}, which will be bound to
21291 @code{list-for-graph}.
21292
21293 @need 1250
21294 The whole expression looks like this:
21295
21296 @smallexample
21297 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21298 @end smallexample
21299
21300 @xref{Mapping Functions, , Mapping Functions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21301 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{mapcar}.
21302
21303 Using the @code{one-fiftieth} function, we can generate a list in
21304 which each element is one-fiftieth the size of the corresponding
21305 element in @code{list-for-graph}.
21306
21307 @smallexample
21308 @group
21309 (setq fiftieth-list-for-graph
21310 (one-fiftieth list-for-graph))
21311 @end group
21312 @end smallexample
21313
21314 @need 1250
21315 The resulting list looks like this:
21316
21317 @smallexample
21318 @group
21319 (10 20 19 15 11 9 6 5 4 3 3 2 2
21320 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4)
21321 @end group
21322 @end smallexample
21323
21324 @noindent
21325 This, we are almost ready to print! (We also notice the loss of
21326 information: many of the higher ranges are 0, meaning that fewer than
21327 50 defuns had that many words or symbols---but not necessarily meaning
21328 that none had that many words or symbols.)
21329
21330 @node Another Bug, Final printed graph, mapcar, Print Whole Graph
21331 @appendixsubsec Another Bug @dots{} Most Insidious
21332 @cindex Bug, most insidious type
21333 @cindex Insidious type of bug
21334
21335 I said `almost ready to print'! Of course, there is a bug in the
21336 @code{print-graph} function @dots{} It has a @code{vertical-step}
21337 option, but not a @code{horizontal-step} option. The
21338 @code{top-of-range} scale goes from 10 to 300 by tens. But the
21339 @code{print-graph} function will print only by ones.
21340
21341 This is a classic example of what some consider the most insidious
21342 type of bug, the bug of omission. This is not the kind of bug you can
21343 find by studying the code, for it is not in the code; it is an omitted
21344 feature. Your best actions are to try your program early and often;
21345 and try to arrange, as much as you can, to write code that is easy to
21346 understand and easy to change. Try to be aware, whenever you can,
21347 that whatever you have written, @emph{will} be rewritten, if not soon,
21348 eventually. A hard maxim to follow.
21349
21350 It is the @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line} function that needs the
21351 work; and then the @code{print-X-axis} and the @code{print-graph}
21352 functions need to be adapted. Not much needs to be done; there is one
21353 nicety: the numbers ought to line up under the tic marks. This takes
21354 a little thought.
21355
21356 @need 1250
21357 Here is the corrected @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}:
21358
21359 @smallexample
21360 @group
21361 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21362 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21363 &optional horizontal-step)
21364 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21365 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21366 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21367 @end group
21368 @group
21369 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21370 ;; @r{Delete extra leading spaces.}
21371 (delete-char
21372 (- (1-
21373 (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21374 (insert (concat
21375 (make-string
21376 @end group
21377 @group
21378 ;; @r{Insert white space.}
21379 (- (* symbol-width
21380 X-axis-label-spacing)
21381 (1-
21382 (length
21383 (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21384 2)
21385 ? )
21386 (number-to-string
21387 (* number horizontal-step))))
21388 @end group
21389 @group
21390 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21391 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21392 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21393 (insert (X-axis-element
21394 (* number horizontal-step)))
21395 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21396 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21397 @end group
21398 @end smallexample
21399
21400 @need 1500
21401 If you are reading this in Info, you can see the new versions of
21402 @code{print-X-axis} @code{print-graph} and evaluate them. If you are
21403 reading this in a printed book, you can see the changed lines here
21404 (the full text is too much to print).
21405
21406 @iftex
21407 @smallexample
21408 @group
21409 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21410 @dots{}
21411 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21412 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step))
21413 @end group
21414 @end smallexample
21415
21416 @smallexample
21417 @group
21418 (defun print-graph
21419 (numbers-list
21420 &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21421 @dots{}
21422 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step))
21423 @end group
21424 @end smallexample
21425 @end iftex
21426
21427 @ifnottex
21428 @smallexample
21429 @group
21430 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21431 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21432 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21433 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21434 each column."
21435 @end group
21436 @group
21437 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21438 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21439 (let* ((leading-spaces
21440 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21441 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21442 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21443 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21444 @end group
21445 @group
21446 (X-tic
21447 (concat
21448 (make-string
21449 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21450 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21451 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21452 ? )
21453 @end group
21454 @group
21455 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21456 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21457 (tic-number
21458 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21459 (/ X-length tic-width)
21460 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21461 @end group
21462
21463 @group
21464 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21465 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21466 (insert "\n")
21467 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21468 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21469 @end group
21470 @end smallexample
21471
21472 @smallexample
21473 @group
21474 (defun print-graph
21475 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21476 "Print labelled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21477 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21478 @end group
21479
21480 @group
21481 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21482 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21483 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21484 each row is five units.
21485 @end group
21486
21487 @group
21488 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21489 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21490 each column."
21491 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21492 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21493 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21494 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21495 @end group
21496 @group
21497 (height-of-top-line
21498 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21499 height
21500 ;; @r{else}
21501 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21502 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21503 @end group
21504 @group
21505 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21506 (full-Y-label-width
21507 (length
21508 (concat
21509 (number-to-string
21510 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21511 Y-axis-tic))))
21512 @end group
21513 @group
21514 (print-Y-axis
21515 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21516 (graph-body-print
21517 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21518 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21519 @end group
21520 @end smallexample
21521 @end ifnottex
21522
21523 @c qqq
21524 @ignore
21525 Graphing Definitions Re-listed
21526
21527 @need 1250
21528 Here are all the graphing definitions in their final form:
21529
21530 @smallexample
21531 @group
21532 (defvar top-of-ranges
21533 '(10 20 30 40 50
21534 60 70 80 90 100
21535 110 120 130 140 150
21536 160 170 180 190 200
21537 210 220 230 240 250)
21538 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
21539 @end group
21540
21541 @group
21542 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
21543 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
21544 @end group
21545
21546 @group
21547 (defvar graph-blank " "
21548 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
21549 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
21550 as graph-symbol.")
21551 @end group
21552
21553 @group
21554 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
21555 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
21556 @end group
21557
21558 @group
21559 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
21560 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
21561 @end group
21562
21563 @group
21564 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
21565 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
21566 @end group
21567
21568 @group
21569 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
21570 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
21571 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
21572 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
21573 @end group
21574 @end smallexample
21575
21576 @smallexample
21577 @group
21578 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
21579 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
21580 (beginning-of-defun)
21581 (let ((count 0)
21582 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
21583 @end group
21584
21585 @group
21586 (while
21587 (and (< (point) end)
21588 (re-search-forward
21589 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
21590 end t))
21591 (setq count (1+ count)))
21592 count))
21593 @end group
21594 @end smallexample
21595
21596 @smallexample
21597 @group
21598 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
21599 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
21600 The returned list is a list of numbers.
21601 Each number is the number of words or
21602 symbols in one function definition."
21603 @end group
21604
21605 @group
21606 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
21607 (save-excursion
21608 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
21609 (lengths-list))
21610 (set-buffer buffer)
21611 (setq buffer-read-only t)
21612 (widen)
21613 (goto-char (point-min))
21614 @end group
21615
21616 @group
21617 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
21618 (setq lengths-list
21619 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
21620 (kill-buffer buffer)
21621 lengths-list)))
21622 @end group
21623 @end smallexample
21624
21625 @smallexample
21626 @group
21627 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
21628 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
21629 (let (lengths-list)
21630 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
21631 (while list-of-files
21632 (setq lengths-list
21633 (append
21634 lengths-list
21635 @end group
21636 @group
21637 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
21638 (lengths-list-file
21639 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
21640 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
21641 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
21642 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
21643 lengths-list))
21644 @end group
21645 @end smallexample
21646
21647 @smallexample
21648 @group
21649 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
21650 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
21651 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
21652 (number-within-range 0)
21653 defuns-per-range-list)
21654 @end group
21655
21656 @group
21657 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
21658 (while top-of-ranges
21659
21660 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
21661 (while (and
21662 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
21663 (car sorted-lengths)
21664 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
21665
21666 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
21667 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
21668 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
21669 @end group
21670
21671 @group
21672 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
21673
21674 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21675 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
21676 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
21677
21678 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
21679 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
21680 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
21681 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
21682 @end group
21683
21684 @group
21685 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
21686 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
21687 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21688 (cons
21689 (length sorted-lengths)
21690 defuns-per-range-list))
21691
21692 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
21693 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
21694 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
21695 @end group
21696 @end smallexample
21697
21698 @smallexample
21699 @group
21700 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
21701 "Return list of MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings;
21702 ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
21703 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
21704 of the list.
21705 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
21706 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
21707 @end group
21708
21709 @group
21710 (let ((insert-list nil)
21711 (number-of-top-blanks
21712 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
21713
21714 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
21715 (while (> actual-height 0)
21716 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
21717 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
21718 @end group
21719
21720 @group
21721 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
21722 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
21723 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
21724 (setq number-of-top-blanks
21725 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
21726
21727 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
21728 insert-list))
21729 @end group
21730 @end smallexample
21731
21732 @smallexample
21733 @group
21734 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
21735 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
21736 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
21737 and is padded as needed so all line up with
21738 the element for the largest number."
21739 @end group
21740 @group
21741 (let* ((leading-spaces
21742 (- full-Y-label-width
21743 (length
21744 (concat (number-to-string number)
21745 Y-axis-tic)))))
21746 @end group
21747 @group
21748 (concat
21749 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21750 (number-to-string number)
21751 Y-axis-tic)))
21752 @end group
21753 @end smallexample
21754
21755 @smallexample
21756 @group
21757 (defun print-Y-axis
21758 (height full-Y-label-width &optional vertical-step)
21759 "Insert Y axis by HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
21760 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
21761 Full width is the width of the highest label element.
21762 Optionally, print according to VERTICAL-STEP."
21763 @end group
21764 @group
21765 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
21766 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21767 (let ((start (point)))
21768 (insert-rectangle
21769 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width vertical-step))
21770 @end group
21771 @group
21772 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
21773 (goto-char start)
21774 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
21775 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
21776 @end group
21777 @end smallexample
21778
21779 @smallexample
21780 @group
21781 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
21782 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
21783 "Print ticks for X axis."
21784 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21785 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
21786 @end group
21787 @group
21788 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
21789 (insert (concat
21790 (make-string
21791 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21792 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
21793 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
21794 ? )
21795 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21796 @end group
21797 @group
21798 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
21799 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21800 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
21801 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
21802 @end group
21803 @end smallexample
21804
21805 @smallexample
21806 @group
21807 (defun X-axis-element (number)
21808 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
21809 (let ((leading-spaces
21810 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21811 (length (number-to-string number)))))
21812 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21813 (number-to-string number))))
21814 @end group
21815 @end smallexample
21816
21817 @smallexample
21818 @group
21819 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
21820 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21821 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21822 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21823 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
21824 @end group
21825 @group
21826 (let (from-position)
21827 (while numbers-list
21828 (setq from-position (point))
21829 (insert-rectangle
21830 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
21831 (goto-char from-position)
21832 (forward-char symbol-width)
21833 @end group
21834 @group
21835 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
21836 (sit-for 0)
21837 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
21838 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
21839 (forward-line height)
21840 (insert "\n")))
21841 @end group
21842 @end smallexample
21843
21844 @smallexample
21845 @group
21846 (defun Y-axis-column
21847 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
21848 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
21849 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21850 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
21851 @end group
21852 @group
21853 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
21854 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
21855 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
21856 that each line is five units of the graph."
21857 (let (Y-axis
21858 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
21859 @end group
21860 @group
21861 (while (> height 1)
21862 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21863 ;; @r{Insert label.}
21864 (setq Y-axis
21865 (cons
21866 (Y-axis-element
21867 (* height number-per-line)
21868 width-of-label)
21869 Y-axis))
21870 @end group
21871 @group
21872 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
21873 (setq Y-axis
21874 (cons
21875 (make-string width-of-label ? )
21876 Y-axis)))
21877 (setq height (1- height)))
21878 @end group
21879 @group
21880 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
21881 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
21882 (or vertical-step 1)
21883 width-of-label)
21884 Y-axis))
21885 (nreverse Y-axis)))
21886 @end group
21887 @end smallexample
21888
21889 @smallexample
21890 @group
21891 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21892 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21893 &optional horizontal-step)
21894 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21895 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21896 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21897 @end group
21898 @group
21899 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21900 ;; line up number
21901 (delete-char (- (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21902 (insert (concat
21903 (make-string
21904 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
21905 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21906 (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21907 2)
21908 ? )
21909 (number-to-string (* number horizontal-step))))
21910 @end group
21911 @group
21912 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21913 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21914 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21915 (insert (X-axis-element (* number horizontal-step)))
21916 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21917 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21918 @end group
21919 @end smallexample
21920
21921 @smallexample
21922 @group
21923 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21924 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21925 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21926 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21927 each column."
21928 @end group
21929 @group
21930 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21931 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21932 (let* ((leading-spaces
21933 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21934 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21935 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21936 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21937 @end group
21938 @group
21939 (X-tic
21940 (concat
21941 (make-string
21942 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21943 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21944 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21945 ? )
21946 @end group
21947 @group
21948 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21949 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21950 (tic-number
21951 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21952 (/ X-length tic-width)
21953 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21954 @end group
21955
21956 @group
21957 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21958 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21959 (insert "\n")
21960 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21961 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21962 @end group
21963 @end smallexample
21964
21965 @smallexample
21966 @group
21967 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21968 "Return list, each number of which is 1/50th previous."
21969 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21970 @end group
21971 @end smallexample
21972
21973 @smallexample
21974 @group
21975 (defun print-graph
21976 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21977 "Print labelled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21978 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21979 @end group
21980
21981 @group
21982 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21983 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21984 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21985 each row is five units.
21986 @end group
21987
21988 @group
21989 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21990 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21991 each column."
21992 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21993 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21994 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21995 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21996 @end group
21997 @group
21998 (height-of-top-line
21999 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
22000 height
22001 ;; @r{else}
22002 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
22003 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
22004 @end group
22005 @group
22006 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
22007 (full-Y-label-width
22008 (length
22009 (concat
22010 (number-to-string
22011 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
22012 Y-axis-tic))))
22013 @end group
22014 @group
22015
22016 (print-Y-axis
22017 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
22018 (graph-body-print
22019 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
22020 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
22021 @end group
22022 @end smallexample
22023 @c qqq
22024 @end ignore
22025
22026 @page
22027 @node Final printed graph, , Another Bug, Print Whole Graph
22028 @appendixsubsec The Printed Graph
22029
22030 When made and installed, you can call the @code{print-graph} command
22031 like this:
22032 @sp 1
22033
22034 @smallexample
22035 @group
22036 (print-graph fiftieth-list-for-graph 50 10)
22037 @end group
22038 @end smallexample
22039 @sp 1
22040
22041 @noindent
22042 Here is the graph:
22043 @sp 2
22044
22045 @smallexample
22046 @group
22047 1000 - *
22048 **
22049 **
22050 **
22051 **
22052 750 - ***
22053 ***
22054 ***
22055 ***
22056 ****
22057 500 - *****
22058 ******
22059 ******
22060 ******
22061 *******
22062 250 - ********
22063 ********* *
22064 *********** *
22065 ************* *
22066 50 - ***************** * *
22067 | | | | | | | |
22068 10 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
22069 @end group
22070 @end smallexample
22071
22072 @sp 2
22073
22074 @noindent
22075 The largest group of functions contain 10 -- 19 words and symbols each.
22076
22077 @node Free Software and Free Manuals, GNU Free Documentation License, Full Graph, Top
22078 @appendix Free Software and Free Manuals
22079
22080 @strong{by Richard M. Stallman}
22081 @sp 1
22082
22083 The biggest deficiency in free operating systems is not in the
22084 software---it is the lack of good free manuals that we can include in
22085 these systems. Many of our most important programs do not come with
22086 full manuals. Documentation is an essential part of any software
22087 package; when an important free software package does not come with a
22088 free manual, that is a major gap. We have many such gaps today.
22089
22090 Once upon a time, many years ago, I thought I would learn Perl. I got
22091 a copy of a free manual, but I found it hard to read. When I asked
22092 Perl users about alternatives, they told me that there were better
22093 introductory manuals---but those were not free.
22094
22095 Why was this? The authors of the good manuals had written them for
22096 O'Reilly Associates, which published them with restrictive terms---no
22097 copying, no modification, source files not available---which exclude
22098 them from the free software community.
22099
22100 That wasn't the first time this sort of thing has happened, and (to
22101 our community's great loss) it was far from the last. Proprietary
22102 manual publishers have enticed a great many authors to restrict their
22103 manuals since then. Many times I have heard a GNU user eagerly tell me
22104 about a manual that he is writing, with which he expects to help the
22105 GNU project---and then had my hopes dashed, as he proceeded to explain
22106 that he had signed a contract with a publisher that would restrict it
22107 so that we cannot use it.
22108
22109 Given that writing good English is a rare skill among programmers, we
22110 can ill afford to lose manuals this way.
22111
22112 Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not
22113 price. The problem with these manuals was not that O'Reilly Associates
22114 charged a price for printed copies---that in itself is fine. The Free
22115 Software Foundation @uref{http://shop.fsf.org, sells printed copies} of
22116 free @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/doc.html, GNU manuals}, too.
22117 But GNU manuals are available in source code form, while these manuals
22118 are available only on paper. GNU manuals come with permission to copy
22119 and modify; the Perl manuals do not. These restrictions are the
22120 problems.
22121
22122 The criterion for a free manual is pretty much the same as for free
22123 software: it is a matter of giving all users certain
22124 freedoms. Redistribution (including commercial redistribution) must be
22125 permitted, so that the manual can accompany every copy of the program,
22126 on-line or on paper. Permission for modification is crucial too.
22127
22128 As a general rule, I don't believe that it is essential for people to
22129 have permission to modify all sorts of articles and books. The issues
22130 for writings are not necessarily the same as those for software. For
22131 example, I don't think you or I are obliged to give permission to
22132 modify articles like this one, which describe our actions and our
22133 views.
22134
22135 But there is a particular reason why the freedom to modify is crucial
22136 for documentation for free software. When people exercise their right
22137 to modify the software, and add or change its features, if they are
22138 conscientious they will change the manual too---so they can provide
22139 accurate and usable documentation with the modified program. A manual
22140 which forbids programmers to be conscientious and finish the job, or
22141 more precisely requires them to write a new manual from scratch if
22142 they change the program, does not fill our community's needs.
22143
22144 While a blanket prohibition on modification is unacceptable, some
22145 kinds of limits on the method of modification pose no problem. For
22146 example, requirements to preserve the original author's copyright
22147 notice, the distribution terms, or the list of authors, are ok. It is
22148 also no problem to require modified versions to include notice that
22149 they were modified, even to have entire sections that may not be
22150 deleted or changed, as long as these sections deal with nontechnical
22151 topics. (Some GNU manuals have them.)
22152
22153 These kinds of restrictions are not a problem because, as a practical
22154 matter, they don't stop the conscientious programmer from adapting the
22155 manual to fit the modified program. In other words, they don't block
22156 the free software community from making full use of the manual.
22157
22158 However, it must be possible to modify all the technical content of
22159 the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual media,
22160 through all the usual channels; otherwise, the restrictions do block
22161 the community, the manual is not free, and so we need another manual.
22162
22163 Unfortunately, it is often hard to find someone to write another
22164 manual when a proprietary manual exists. The obstacle is that many
22165 users think that a proprietary manual is good enough---so they don't
22166 see the need to write a free manual. They do not see that the free
22167 operating system has a gap that needs filling.
22168
22169 Why do users think that proprietary manuals are good enough? Some have
22170 not considered the issue. I hope this article will do something to
22171 change that.
22172
22173 Other users consider proprietary manuals acceptable for the same
22174 reason so many people consider proprietary software acceptable: they
22175 judge in purely practical terms, not using freedom as a
22176 criterion. These people are entitled to their opinions, but since
22177 those opinions spring from values which do not include freedom, they
22178 are no guide for those of us who do value freedom.
22179
22180 Please spread the word about this issue. We continue to lose manuals
22181 to proprietary publishing. If we spread the word that proprietary
22182 manuals are not sufficient, perhaps the next person who wants to help
22183 GNU by writing documentation will realize, before it is too late, that
22184 he must above all make it free.
22185
22186 We can also encourage commercial publishers to sell free, copylefted
22187 manuals instead of proprietary ones. One way you can help this is to
22188 check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it, and prefer
22189 copylefted manuals to non-copylefted ones.
22190
22191 @sp 2
22192 @noindent
22193 Note: The Free Software Foundation maintains a page on its Web site
22194 that lists free books available from other publishers:@*
22195 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/other-free-books.html}
22196
22197 @node GNU Free Documentation License, Index, Free Software and Free Manuals, Top
22198 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
22199
22200 @cindex FDL, GNU Free Documentation License
22201 @include doclicense.texi
22202
22203 @node Index, About the Author, GNU Free Documentation License, Top
22204 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
22205 @unnumbered Index
22206
22207 @ignore
22208 MENU ENTRY: NODE NAME.
22209 @end ignore
22210
22211 @printindex cp
22212
22213 @iftex
22214 @c Place biographical information on right-hand (verso) page
22215
22216 @tex
22217 \par\vfill\supereject
22218 \ifodd\pageno
22219 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
22220 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
22221 %\page\hbox{}\page
22222 \else
22223 % \par\vfill\supereject
22224 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
22225 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
22226 %\page\hbox{}%\page
22227 %\page\hbox{}%\page
22228 \fi
22229 @end tex
22230
22231 @c page
22232 @w{ }
22233
22234 @c ================ Biographical information ================
22235
22236 @w{ }
22237 @sp 8
22238 @center About the Author
22239 @sp 1
22240 @end iftex
22241
22242 @ifnottex
22243 @node About the Author, , Index, Top
22244 @unnumbered About the Author
22245 @end ifnottex
22246
22247 @quotation
22248 Robert J. Chassell has worked with GNU Emacs since 1985. He writes
22249 and edits, teaches Emacs and Emacs Lisp, and speaks throughout the
22250 world on software freedom. Chassell was a founding Director and
22251 Treasurer of the Free Software Foundation, Inc. He is co-author of
22252 the @cite{Texinfo} manual, and has edited more than a dozen other
22253 books. He graduated from Cambridge University, in England. He has an
22254 abiding interest in social and economic history and flies his own
22255 airplane.
22256 @end quotation
22257
22258 @c @page
22259 @c @w{ }
22260 @c
22261 @c @c Prevent page number on blank verso, so eject it first.
22262 @c @tex
22263 @c \par\vfill\supereject
22264 @c @end tex
22265
22266 @c @iftex
22267 @c @headings off
22268 @c @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thistitle
22269 @c @oddheading @| @| @thispage
22270 @c @end iftex
22271
22272 @bye
22273
22274 @ignore
22275 arch-tag: da1a2154-531f-43a8-8e33-fc7faad10acf
22276 @end ignore